Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Plans (23)
RECEIVED NOV 5 2015 CITY OF T,GARD Burnham & Ash Aths Tigard, Oregon Project Manual Construction Set ' P 2C tom---4�C City of Tigard Approved Plans 04 November 2015 By.11 Dateii11.1/ - • e\-5f4 12 O A H SERA Project Number: 1503004 OFFICE COPY SERA SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. 338 NW 5TH AVE PORTLAND,OREGON 97209 P.503.445.7372 F.503.445.7395 SERAPDX.COM PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 01 07 SEAL PAGES • Architect of Record A. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. 1. Address: 338 NW 5th Ave 2. City: Portland, OR 3. Tel: 503-445-7372 B. Project Manager: David Stephenson 2. Email: davids@serapdx.com - 368101% ORTLAPro,o OF Refer to Table of Contents for Section Ownership • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 01 07 SEAL PAGES • Structural Engineer: A. Catena Consulting Engineers 1. Address: 1111 SE Flanders, Suite 206 2. City: Portland, OR 3. Tel: 503-467-4798 B. Project Manager: Jason Thompson, PE, SE 2. Email:jason@catenaengineers.com e st$C TU ff .010) PROpFssq? mac GI NEF9 Os I 41 m. noo EXPIRES:06/30/2016 • 110 Refer to Table of Contents for Section Ownership Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 01 07 SEAL PAGES • Civil Engineer: A. Harper Houf Peterson Righellis, Inc. 1. Address: 205 SE Spokane St, Suite 200 2. City: Portland, OR 3. Tel: 503-221-1131 B. Project Manager: Ben Austin, PE 2. Email: bena@hhpr.com CEO PRO,ctc ;N� 'j, 70,863 r OREGON' /04 1• 11 .Z0C ‘s'�_ MIN A. EXPIRES 12/31./ I 5 1 • 111 Refer to Table of Contents for Section Ownership Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 01 07 SEAL PAGES • Landscape Architect: A. Lango Hansen Landscape Architects 1. Address: 1100 NW Glisan St#3B 2. City: Portland, OR 3. Tel: 503-295-2437 B. Project Manager: Kurt Lango, ASLA, LEED AP 2. Email: kurt@Iangohansen.com g�G *d • f. • E Ag • • Refer to Table of Contents for Section Ownership Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM&ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 01 10 OF CONTENTS STABLE DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT O UREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 07 SEALS PAGES FORM 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 31 00 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ARCHITECTURAL BULLETIN FORM 01 26 13 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION RFI FORM FORM 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SERA ELECTRONIC MEDIA RELEASE FORM 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 16 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 20 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 43 39 COORDINATED MOCKUP 01 45 19 VAPOR EMISSION AND PH TESTING 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS • 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SUBSTITUTION AFTER BIDDING REQUEST FORM FORM 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SERA/CATENA 03 35 16 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 03 54 00 CAST UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER DIVISION 05 METALS 05 05 16 SHOP-APPLIED METAL COATING 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SERA/CATENA 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 52 00 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEMS DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY SERA/CATENA 06 15 00 WOOD DECKING SERA/CATENA 06 16 00 SHEATHING SERA/CATENA 06 17 13 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER • 06 17 23 PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER 06 17 33 PRE-FABRICATED WOOD I-JOISTS SERA/CATENA SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 06 17 53 SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES SERA/CATENA • 06 18 00 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION SERA/CATENA 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 73 00 COMPOSITE WOOD DECKING 06 82 05 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 18 14 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS 07 46 46 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 12 14 PREFINISHED METAL DOOR FRAMES • 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 17 23 PREHUNG WOOD DOORS 08 30 00 ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SYSTEM 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 36 16 SINGLE PANEL SLIDING BARN DOORS 08 41 26 ALL GLASS SLIDING DOORS 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE SCHEDULE 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 83 00 MIRRORS 08 91 00 LOUVERS DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 30 00 TILING 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 54 27 LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 68 00 CARPETING 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 09 96 00 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS • DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 SIGNAGE 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 31 00 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 51 43 CHAIN LINK STORAGE LOCKERS 10 55 23 MAIL BOXES 10 56 23 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING 10 56 39 BICYCLE RACKS 10 80 13 PET GROOMING SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 11 13 BICYCLE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT 11 12 00 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11 24 16 FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 82 27 WASTE COMPACTORS DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 22 16 DRAPERY, TRACK, AND ACCESSORIES 12 24 13 ROLLER SHADES 12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS • 12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS LANGO HANSEN 12 93 13 EXTERIOR BICYCLE RACKS DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 20 10 PASSENGER ELEVATORS 14 91 00 FACILITY CHUTES DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION (DELEGATED DESIGN) — NOT INCLUDED DIVISION 22 PLUMBING (DELEGATED DESIGN)—NOT INCLUDED DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (DELEGATED DESIGN) — NOT INCLUDED DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL (DELEGATED DESIGN) DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS (DELEGATED DESIGN) —NOT INCLUDED • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (DELEGATED DESIGN)—NOT • INCLUDED DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING HHPR 31 20 00 EARTHWORK HHPR 31 25 00 EROSION CONTROL HHPR DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING HHPR 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING HHPR 32 14 13 CONCRETE UNIT PAVING LANGO HANSEN 32 14 16 PEDESTAL PAVERS 32 17 13 PARKING BUMPERS 32 17 23 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS HHPR 32 31 29 WOOD FENCES 32 73 00 CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING LANGO HANSEN 32 84 00 IRRIGATION LANGO HANSEN 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION LANGO HANSEN 32 93 00 TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUNDCOVER LANs()HANSEN DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 11 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING HHPR 33 31 00 SITE SANITARY SEWERS HHPR • 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING HHPR 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE HHPR APPENDICES APPENDIX A REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES— APRIL 15, 2015 GEODESIGN APPENDIX B SITE SURVEY APPENDIX C LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 00 31 00 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Certain information relating to existing surface and subsurface conditions and structures is available to bidders but will not be part of the Contract Documents, as follows: B. Geotechnical Report: Entitled Report of Geotechnical Services; Tigard Development, dated March 6, 2015. 1. Copy is bound in at the end of this Section. 2. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the design of foundations, prepared primarily for the use of Architect. 3. The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract, unless specifically referenced in the Contract Documents. 4. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made,with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Price accruing to Owner. C. Natural Resource Assessment Report: Prepared By: Pacific Habitat Services, Inc.; dated April 17, 2015. D. Preliminary Stormwater Report: Compiled By: Harper, Hoff, Peterson, and Reghellis, Inc.; dated April 24, 2015. E. ALTA Survey: Prepared By: AKS Engineering and Forestry, LLC.; dated March 5, 2015. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) ® END OF SECTION 4111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Summary of the Work. B. Owner's occupancy. C. Contractor's use of site and general limitations. D. Definitions used throughout the Specification and Drawings. E. Specification formats and conventions. 1.02 PROJECT A. Project Name: Burnham &Ash Apartments. B. Owner's Name: Permium Property-Tigard LLC. C. The Project consists of the construction of 165-unit mixed use and multi-family apartment development planned on a 3.61 acre parcel. The subject properties are identified on tax map 2S102AD, tax lots 02800, 02900, 03000. For the purposes of orientation, project north is perpendicular to SW Burnham Street. The project is bordered to the north by SW Burnham Street and adjacent properties, to the west by SW Ash Avenue and Fanno Creek trail access, to the south by Fanno Creek Park, and to the east by adjacent property. The consolidated properties will be bisected with a new street, in accordance with City of Tigard's 2035 Transportation System Plan. For the purposes of this and subsequent narratives, the new street is temporarily named Ash Court(Ash Ct.). The existing properties consist of a dog park and a utility yard with surface parking and material storage areas, and 5 utility building structures. The sites and structures will be demolished by the City of Tigard in preparation for the proposed development. • 1. The proposed project consists of two buildings, surface parking, and landscape improvements. Building 1 is a 4-story, slab-on-grade, wood framed multi-family apartment building, with a blend of studios, 1-bedroom, 2-bedroom, and 3-bedroom apartments for a total of 138 units. In addition to residential units, the building will contain an array of indoor and outdoor amenity spaces including an outdoor courtyard with seating and fire table, generous entry lobby, ground floor commons, fitness, dog wash, mail room, resident storage, indoor bike storage room, leasing office, and (2)4th floor rooftop patios. The building will also include a permanent leasing office for both buildings. The building's cladding will be a blend of brick veneer and lap siding at elevations fronting ROWs. Other elevations will be a blend of fiber cement trim, lap, and panel siding. To the east of, and adjacent to Building 1 will be a new surface parking lot and covered parking garages. Including the covered parking at Building 2, the total on-site parking for residents is 166. 2. Building 2 is a 4-story, slab-on-grade, wood framed mixed use apartment building. The ground floor is covered parking for residents, building lobby, mail room, indoor bike storage room, building services, and approximately 2,000 sf of warm shell retail space. Floors 2, 3, and 4 are exclusively residential units containing a blend of studios, 1-bedroom, 2-bedroom, and 3-bedroom apartments for a total of 26 units. The building's cladding will be predominantly brick and storefront with fiber cement accents at elevations fronting ROWs. Other elevations will be a blend of fiber cement trim, lap, and panel siding. 1.03 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. AIA A102 and A201. 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. • C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES • A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. No Smoking Policy: Smoking is prohibited in Project Site. C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. 1.06 DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General requirements for Delegated Design components are specified in Section 01 33 16. B. Specific design requirements are specified in Sections of Division 02 through 50. C. Delegated design may sometimes also be referred to as"Bidder-Design" Both terms may be used interchangeably and have the same meaning. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 1. Basic Contract Definitions: Contact Documents, Work, Project, Drawings, Specifications, Project Manual, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, Architect, Contract Time, Day, Substantial Completion, Contract Sum (or GMP), Change Order. 2. Basic contract definitions that are not defined in the General Conditions shall have the same meaning as defined in AIA Document A201 — 1997. B. "AHJ": Authority Having Jurisdiction as defined in AIA Document A201. C. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, • and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. D. "Delegated Design": Professional design service or certification specifically required of the Contractor in the Specifications. Such work is subject to provisions of AIA Document A201 § 3.12.10. The terms"Delegated Design,"and "Design-Build," mean the same thing and are used interchangeably. E. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved,""required,"and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." F. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,""scheduled," and"specified" have the same meaning as"indicated." G. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. H. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, connection to building systems, and similar operations. I. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations, complete and ready for the intended use. J. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. K. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown in Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY • L. "Work": Project material "furnished" and "installed"complete and ready for the intended use. 1.08 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the CSI/CSC's MasterFormat 50-Division numbering system. B. Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications and Drawings. C. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms,words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. 3. The words"shall," "shall be," or"shall comply with,"depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED • END OF SECTION 41, SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES iPART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Contract modification procedures. C. Additional architectural service for extraordinary contract administration. D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural Bulletin (AB ): Architect's form issued by Architect indicating "Architect's Supplemental Instruction"or"Proposal Request"or"Construction Change Directive"or as a signature cover to Contractor initiated proposal. 1. AB Form is enclosed at end of Section. B. Architect's Supplemental Instruction (ASI ): Minor change in Work directed by Architect. C. Proposal Request( PR ): A formal request from Architect to Contractor for change in Contract Sum and Time required to perform a proposed change in Work. Proposal Request is not a directive to perform the proposed change. D. "Construction Change Directive" and "Change Order" have meanings defined in AIA Document A201. E. Additional Contract Administration Services: Architectural service to enforce Contract Documents resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with requirements or Contractor's request for accelerated procedures. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES III A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit draft to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703-Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization. F. Include separately from each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. G. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. H. See 1.4 Applications for Progress Payments for additional requirements. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Owner/Contractor Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Present required information in typewritten form. E. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. • F. Changes in the work shall be initiated using the SERA Architectural Bulletin (AB) Form. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES G. Additional contract administration services is an additional architectural service and will be • billed to the Owner who will then back-charge the Contractor. H. Execute certification by notarized signature of authorized officer. I. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. J. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. K. Submit electronic copies for each Application for Payment. L. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 30 00. 2. Current construction photographs specified in Section 01 30 00. 3. Project Record Documents as specified in Section 01 78 00,for review by Owner which will be returned to the Contractor. a. Alternative: Review Record Documents with Architect prior to submitting Application. 4. Preliminary Closeout Documents when specified in Section 01 78 00. M. Materials stored off site and included in the schedule of values for monthly payment application are to be stored in a bonded and secure facility. Copies of bill of sale for materials and certificate of insurance for material with Owner named as an insured are to be included with the payment application along with any additional requirements set forth by lender. N. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES • A. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor. B. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on Architectural Bulletin Form. C. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue an AB, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. D. Proposal Request: Architect may issue an AB which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 21 days per Owner/Contractor agreement. E. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work,with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation . Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00. Contractor proposal will be processed in one of the following methods: 1. Architect may reject Contractor proposal or may return it for modification. 2. Architect may attach Contractor proposal to SERA AB, complete the AB appropriately, and distribute it for signatures. 3. Architect may accept Contractor's form that has place for signatures, sign it and distribute to Owner for signature. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES • F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. 1. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount shall be based on the fixed unit prices. G. Substantiation and Computation of Costs: Provide complete itemized cost information with substantiating backup for each item for evaluation as follows: 1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit on products and labor only. Overhead and profit is limited as follows: a. As indicated in the Agreement 4. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 6. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. I. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 EXTRAORDINARY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION SERVICE A. Owner-Architect Agreement identifies certain additional services for which Architect may receive additional compensation. Some of these services may result out of actions or non-actions by Contractor; these include, but are not limited to: 1. Design services for modification resulting from substitution proposed by Contractor. • 2. Review of submittals after the first re-submittal. 3. Review or response to unnecessary or frivolous RFI. 4. Second notification and review of non-compliant work. 5. Design services to correct or incorporate non-compliant work. 6. Design or engineering specified as Contractor's responsibility; for example, for design-build component or for performance-specified work. 7. Performing administrative work specified as Contractor's responsibility when Contractor refuses to perform after notification. 8. Performing administrative work specified as Contractor's responsibility when requested to expedite the Work. 9. Providing extra construction administration services after the specified date of Substantial Completion or the specified date of Final Completion when delay is not caused by Owner. 10. Re-inspection for Substantial Completion or Final Completion. B. Architect will issue Notice for Extraordinary Contract Administration Services to Owner and a copy to Contractor. Thereafter, with notice per the conditions of the Owner/Architect agreement,Architect will record time and expense for each occurrence, or in the case of recurring occurrences, each type of occurrence. 1. Architect will invoice Owner monthly for additional services. 2. Architect's fee schedule for additional services is included in Owner-Architect Agreement, and is available to Contractor upon request. 1.07 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: . 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 70 00. 2. Affidavit that payrolls and bills have been satisfied. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 3. Consent of Surety to make Final Payment. • 4. Certificate evidencing that Builder's Risk linsurance required after Substantial Completion will remain in force, and a written statement that Contractor knows of no reason that insurance will not be renewed for the required period until Final Payment. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set • ARCHITECTURE Architectural Bulletin SERA URBAN DESIGN+PLANNING INTERIOR DESIGN Project Name Project Number Bulletin No. Owner Date Issued Owner Contract No.(if any) Contractor Subject The following instruction is hereby issued: ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION (complete PART A only) The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates the Contractors acknowledgement that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. PROPOSAL REQUEST (complete PART A only) Please submit an itemized quotation for changes to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time incidental to the proposed modifications of the Contract Documents described below. DO NOT PROCEED WITH WORK UNTIL RECEIVING FURTHER WRITTEN INSTRUCTION This is not a change order,a construction change directive or a direction to proceed with the work described herein. • CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE (complete PARTS A&B) You are hereby directed to make the following change(s)in this Contract. Track the costs of changes to the Contract as described in proposed adjustments(Part B)below. PART A: DESCRIPTION OF WORK X.1 (DISPOSITION) (Description—describe work scope in this space—text to be Title Case and not bold. Column to left, i.e. "disposition"to denote type of change using on the following works (or iterations), "ADD", "DELETE", "CLARIFY", or "CHANGE". Disposition text to be ALL CAPS and bold.) ATTACHMENTS Issued by: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc PART B: PROPOSED ADJUSTMENTS 1. The proposed basis of adjustment to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price is: Unit Price of$ per Lump Sum (increase) (decrease)of$ As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.3 of AIA Document A201 1997 Edition As follows: 2. The Contract Time is proposed to: Remain unchanged Be adjusted with an (increase) (decrease)of days • 338 NW 5TH AVENUE PORTLAND OR 97209 T 503.445.7372 F 503.445.7395 SERAPDX.COM PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 26 13 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes procedure for coordinating and submitting Request for Interpretation. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor to Architect seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.03 RFI PROCEDURE A. Review Contract Documents and Project Site in a thorough and timely manner so Architect will have sufficient time to respond to RFI prior to execution of subject construction. B. Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. C. When possible, request interpretation at next Progress Meeting. Record Architect's response in meeting minutes. 1. When response is not given during meeting, submit RFI in approved format. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. RFI Form: Electronic form furnished by Architect, numbered and signed by Contractor. 1. Number each page of attachments with RFI number in lower right corner. 2. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 3. Alternative RFI Form: Subject to Architect's approval, Contractor software-generated form modified to match Architect's form. Numbering and attachments as specified in this Section. B. RFI Content: Include detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name and number. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. Add revision numbers as decimal and digit. 6. RFI subject title, less than five words 7. Initiator of question 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state anticipated impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. 14. Single discipline per RFI: Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical or Electrical • 15. Space for reply on same page, if possible. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 26 13 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION C. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. • Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B or approved form. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Instrument of Change, Construction Change Directive, or Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.05 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow 7 days for Architect's response for each RFI; and additional 7 days for consultant review. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.will be considered as received the following working day. 1. Failure to allow specified response time will not be cause for an extension of Contract Time or additional cost. 2. Architect's goal will be to return RFI as quickly as possible. However, quick response is not guaranteed. 3. The following RFIs are defined as frivolous and will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for information derived from activities assigned to Contractor in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for approval of adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. h. Questions relating to construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures or safety precautions. (These are Contractor's responsibility exclusively.) i. Questions relating to construction schedule, coordination between trades, or division of work among subcontractors. (These are also Contractor's responsibility exclusively.) 4. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 5. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Contract Modification Procedures. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. b. Do not proceed with this work until Change Order is executed. B. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 5 days if Contractor disagrees with response. C. Frivolous RFI:Architect may claim compensation for cost of Architect's time and materials as a result of unnecessary or frivolous RFIs. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall strive to keep the number of RFIs to a minimum. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 26 13 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION • 1. Prior to submitting RFI, carefully study Contract Documents to assure that requested information is not already available. RFIs that request information available in the Contract Documents will be considered frivolous. B. RFI is not a substitute for Shop Drawing. When multiple RFIs are submitted for related work, Architect may require a Shop Drawing. C. RFI shall be submitted via the document control program established by the Architect. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION [THIS SPACE IS • [Project Name] INTENDED FOR [Project#] CONTRACTOR LOGO RFI# Subcontractor RFI# AND CONTACT RFI Title INFO] Issued on Requested return date Requested by Description (with proposed solution as applicable): 40, The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgment that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Detail/Drawing# Specification Section(s) Attachments [Client] [Client Contract#1 Critical to Schedule: ❑Yes 0 No Response: • Architect Review Date Consultant Review Date PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project coordination. B. Communication with Architect. C. Coordination Drawings. D. Pre-construction meeting. E. Progress meetings. F. Pre-installation meetings. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Specified in Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Pre-Construction Meeting Submittals: Bonds, insurance, schedule of values, project personnel directory, subcontractor and supplier list, and other lists; specified in other Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting mobile construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. • C. Minutes of meetings required in this Section. 1.04 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations specified in different Sections to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate portions of work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. In the event of an inconsistency in the Drawings or between the Drawings and the Specifications, unless otherwise ordered in writing by the Architect, the Contractor shall provide the greater quantity and/or better quality of work. 1.05 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION A. Communication to Architect: High speed internet based digital, except Submittals specified in Section 01 33 00. 1. Telephone communication is acceptable for initial or simple issues. 2. Follow up telephone communication in writing. B. Construction Office Equipment: 1. High speed Internet connection equipment and service. a. Email Attachment Capacity: Not less than 10 megabytes. 2. Computer with internet connection and project management software: a. MicroSoft Office 2010 or newer with Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Bluebeam Revu 11.6, c. Adobe Reader, current edition. d. Project scheduling software. 3. Scanner, not less than 150 dpi. 4. Copy machine not less than 400 dpi with capability for 11 x17 and color. 5. Telephone with conference call capability • 6. Digital camera, 3.5 megapixel minimum. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 30 00 C. Correspondence: ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS • 1. correspondence by FAX is not acceptable unless specifically approved. 2. Any information that is disseminated shall retain the original scale and aspect from the original as published by Architect. 1.06 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule and conduct the required Preconstruction Meeting with the Authority having Jurisdiction. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Owner's project manager, Architect, Contractor and third party testing agency. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of complete list of Subcontractors,with contact information, list of products, schedule of values, submittal schedule, and construction progress schedule with any critical path work sequencing and long lead time materials. 5. Designation of key personnel representing parties in Contract, Owner and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, RFIs, requests for applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Construction site access: pick-up, delivery, and parking; temporary facilities and controls, security, safety, and restrictions. 8. Scheduling activities of Testing Agent. 9. Progress cleaning. • 10. Anticipated building service or system interuptions, and impact to building operations/occupants. D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within four(4)days after meeting to participants,with one original copy to Architect, Owner and those affected by decisions made. 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly intervals. B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, or Owner's representative,Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status, RFIs and status, and proposal requests/change orders and status. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of construction progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS • D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within four(4)days after meeting to participants, with one (1)original copy to Architect, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre-installation meeting at Project site prior to commencing work of specific section. B. Work undertaken or completed without convening a pre-installation meeting shall be subject to removal, inspection, testing, observation, etc at the Architect's discretion without additional compensation to Contractor in time or money. Work required as a result of removal, inspection, testing, observation, etc., even though determined to be satisfactory, shall be provided without additional compensation to the contractor in time or money. C. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section including the Architect, Owner, Design Engineer, manufacturer(representative and technical support)and key personnel of the installation team. D. Notify Architect seven (7)days in advance of meeting date. E. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. F. Record minutes and distribute copies within four(4)days after meeting to participants, with one original copy to Architect, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set ARCHITECTURE • Electronic Media Agreement SERA URBAN DESIGN+PLANNING INTERIOR DESIGN THIS AGREEMENT is entered into effective [insert date]by and between [insert party's company name] ("Recipient") and SERA Design and Architure, Inc. ("SERA") with respect to the [insert project name] ("Project") located at[insert location]. The Recipient has requested that SERA provide to the Recipient certain drawings, specifications or other documents for the Project in electronic form("Electronic Form Documents"). SERA agrees to do so,subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. The Recipient recognizes that the Electronic Form Documents may be revised by others without the knowledge or consent of SERA and,when plotted, may result in variances or corrupt other files of the user. The Recipient agrees not to use the Electronic Form Documents for any purpose or project other than the Project. The Recipient acknowledges that the Electronic Form Documents are the property of SERA or its consultants and are subject to the copyrights and other reserved rights of those parties. The Electronic Form Documents may be write-protected by SERA such that no data can be manipulated by the Recipient or third parties. SERA may provide to the Recipient only a working copy of Electronic Form Documents which have all indices of SERA, its consultants, and their respective ownership, professional names, and involvement in the Project removed from the electronic display. Any use of or changes to the Electronic Form Documents shall be at the sole risk of the user, and without • liability, risk or legal exposure to SERA or its consultants. The Recipient and any other person or entity using the Electronic Form Documents agrees to release and, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify, hold harmless and defend SERA, its consultants, and their respective partners, shareholders, agents and employees from and against any and all claims, demands, losses, expenses, damages, penalties and liabilities of any kind, including without limitation attorneys'and expert witnesses'fees, arising out of or relating in any way to any such use of or changes to the Electronic Form Documents. Under no circumstances shall SERA's transfer of the Electronic Form Documents to the Recipient be deemed a sale by SERA or its consultants. SERA and its consultants make no warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the Electronic Form Documents, including but not limited to warranties of merchantability or of fitness for any particular purpose. The Recipient agrees,as a condition of providing the Electronic Form Documents to any contractor, design professional or other person or entity, to require such third party to agree in writing to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. By electronically accessing the Electronic Form Documents, the Recipient accepts and is bound to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. RECIPIENT: SERA: Company: SERA Design and Architecture,Inc. Signature: Signature: Printed Name: Printed Name: Title: Title: Principal • Date: Date: 338 NW 5TH AVENUE PORTLAND OR 97209 T 503.445.7372 F 503.445.7395 SERAPDX.COM 1 PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE IPPART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preliminary schedule. B. Construction progress schedule, with network analysis diagrams and reports. C. Short interval schedule. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AGC (CPSM)-Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors of America. B. M-H (CPM)- CPM in Construction Management- Project Management with CPM, O'Brien, McGraw-Hill Book Company. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit Preliminary Schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. 1. Also within 10 days after date of Agreement, as a part of the Preliminary Schedule submittal, provide separate preliminary schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed Baseline Schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. 2. Include narrative report that identifies critical, near-critical and major activities in sufficient detail that explains their significance. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit Baseline Schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. F. Short Interval Schedule: Submit copies to attendees at each Progress Meeting. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduler: Contractor's personnel or specialist Consultant specializing in CPM scheduling with 5 years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity comparable to this Project, and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering a detailed graphic printout within 48 hours of request. 1.05 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. B. Diagram Sheet Size (overall schedule): Maximum 22 x 17 inches or width required. C. Diagram Format: Color. Printed copy and Adobe pdf. D. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 3.02 BASELINE SCHEDULE A. Baseline(Construction Progress) Schedule is a continuation of the Preliminary Schedule that • shows the entire, complete construction activity.Actual progress of the Work will be measured against the Baseline Schedule. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE B. Revisions to the accepted Baseline Schedule are subject to review and approval. • 3.03 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 1. Include Pre-Installation Meetings. B. Identify each item by specification section number. C. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of the entire schedule. D. Include conferences and meetings in schedule. E. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. F. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, owner-furnished products, Products identified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. 1. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for more requirements. G. Indicate delivery dates for owner-furnished products. H. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. 3.04 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days. 3.05 UPDATING SCHEDULE • A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision,with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect including the effects of changes on schedules of separate contractors. 3.06 RECOVERY SCHEDULE A. Prepare and submit Recovery Schedule and Narrative Report that demonstrates how lost time will be recovered when one of the following occurs: 1. Project falls behind schedule more than 14 days. 2. Project falls behind schedule more than 10%of remaining duration to Substantial Completion. B. Submit Recovery Schedule within 7 days of falling behind schedule. C. Recovery Schedule is subject to review and approval. 3.07 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers,Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE • B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. 3.08 SHORT INTERVAL SCHEDULE A. Description: Three week schedule of current and near-future construction activity. 1. Duration: 3 weeks 2. Time Increment: Day 3. Bar chart with separate bar for each trade that is active at Site, sequentially organized, beginning with continuing activities. 4. Indicate crew size for each activity. 5. If activity differs from Baseline Schedule, compare Baseline to proposed activity as adjacent bars. B. Format: Single letter size or ledger size sheet. Bond paper copy and Adobe .pdf. 1. Hand drafted or computer generated schedule at Contractor's option. C. Update schedule weekly. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal control report and submittal procedure. B. Proposed products list. C. Product data. D. Sustainable building data. E. Shop drawings. F. Samples. G. Design data. H. Test reports. I. Certificates. J. Manufacturer's instructions. K. Manufacturer's field reports. L. Construction photographs. 1.02 SUBMITTAL CONTROL REPORT A. Prepare and maintain a separate material delivery log to monitor submittals required by the contract documents. Show: 1. Work item number corresponding to the specification section and construction schedule. 2. Contractor, subcontractor, responsible for each work item. 3. Narrative description of the work item. • 4. Number of days required for preparation of the submittal. 5. Date submittal due. 6. Number of days allowed for approval. 7. Date approval due. 8. Number of days required to fabricate and deliver item to the Contractor. 9. Date of delivery. 10. Date item required to be installed, corresponding to the construction schedule. B. Distribution: 1. Distribution copies of reviewed schedule to: Architect, Owner's Representative. 2. Instruct recipients to report any inability to comply and provide detailed explanation with suggested remedies. 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Organize and submit complete information into separate submittals for each Specification Section listed in Table of Contents, electronically in editable PDF format, except as follows: 1. One(1)consolidated Division submittal for Sections in the following Divisions: a. Division 21, 22, and 23. b. Division 26, 27 and 28. c. Division 31, 32, and 33, except One(1) separate consolidated submittal for Landscaping is acceptable. 2. Doors, door frames and door hardware: One(1)consolidated submittal. 3. Exterior curtainwall, storefront and entrance systems: One (1)consolidated submittal. 4. Exceptions must be approved by Architect. B. Number submittals sequentially, followed by specification Section number. 1. Revisions: Add "R-1"to submittal number; example"034-08 51 13 R-1". • C. Transmittal or Cover Sheet: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. Incomplete transmittal form will be returned. • D. Contractor's Review: Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required,field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 1. Review submittals prior to submission and provide stamp of approval signed or initialed by Contractor. a. Contractor's review indicates that Contractor has thoroughly reviewed the submittal and certifies that it is complete, correct, in compliance with the Contract Documents, and suitable for the Project. b. Review represents that field measurements and field conditions have been considered and that the work submitted will perform as intended. c. Review of Shop Drawing represents that required coordination with other work has been performed and is indicated in Shop Drawing. 2. Architect will not review submittals that do not include Contractor's signed review stamp, do not include required field conditions, or are not accurate. 3. Include written description and graphic demarcation of deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. 4. All work done prior to approval of submittals shall be at the Contractor's risk. E. Clearly indicate all options, colors, accessories, data, etc, provided for this Project. F. Identify variations from Contract Documents. Identify product limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. G. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect review stamps. H. Schedule submittals to expedite Project. Send electronic submittals to Architect at SERA 1111 Architects. Coordinate submission of related items. 1. Send one copy to Owner I. For each submittal, allow 14 days from time Architect recieves electronic submittal. 1. Allow additional 7 days for any one of the following submittals: a. Major building components or consolidated submittals. b. Review by Architect's consultant. c. Review by Commissioning Agent. d. Review by Owner. J. When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. Provide product data whether specified or not specified in Section. 2. If information that must be specially prepared for submittal because standard data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 3. Each submittal must show which product(s) and options are applicable to this Project. B. Include the following information, as applicable: 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Manufacturer's product specifications. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Standard color charts. 5. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. • 6. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES • 7. Printed performance curves. 8. Operational range diagrams. 9. Mill reports. 10. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. 11. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 12. Testing by recognized testing agency. 13. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 14. Notation of coordination requirements. C. Mark submittals to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project. D. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. Submit one electronic copy in editable PDF format. F. Architect will return a reviewed electronic copy in PDF format. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on standard printed data or reproductions of the Contract Documents, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is permitted. 1. Provide Shop Drawings for work indicated in Sections and when needed to execute the Work. B. Electronic copy of Architect's CADD drawings (floor plans, site plan and ceiling plans, only)will not be provided. C. Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: 1. Dimensions. 2. Three dimensional axonometric views of flashings, pans and sheet metal details. 3. Identification of products. 4. Fabrication and installation drawings. 5. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. 6. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. 7. manufacturing instructions. 8. Templates and patterns. 9. Schedules. 10. Design calculations. 11. Compliance with specified standards. 12. Notation of coordination requirements. 13. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 14. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 15. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 16. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. D. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. Submit electronically using document control program established by Architect. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES B. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in • one submittal package. C. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 1. Generic description of Sample. 2. Product name and name of manufacturer. 3. Sample source. 4. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. D. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 1. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. 2. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. E. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit 2 manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. F. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 1. Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be • returned. 2. Submit a single Sample where assembly details,workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 3. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations_. G. Finishes, products and/or materials noted as custom, hand worked, etc shall be submitted to Architect for review and approval prior to fabrication/installation. Allow for minor revisions to sample in terms of finish,fabrication, installation and/or sequencing. H. Field Samples: Large size samples and assembled samples that shall be submitted at the Project Site are specified in individual Sections. 1.07 DESIGN DATA A. Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. B. Submit for Architect's information. 1. Architect's review is limited to assessing conformance with design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C. Refer to Section 01 33 16- Delegated Design Procedures. 1.08 TEST REPORTS A. Submit for Architect's knowledge. B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES • 1.09 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.10 QUALIFICATION DATA A. When specified in individual specification sections or requested by Architect, submit qualifications for manufacturer, installer, or subcontractor. B. Data may include previous experience, list of previous similar projects, references, proof of training, and approval by manufacturer or warrantor. 1.11 SAMPLE WARRANTY A. When warranty is specified in a Section, submit sample of specified warranty with initial product submittal. B. Final warranty submittal is specified in Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.13 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 16 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Summary of Delegated Design Work. B. Submitting Deferred (permit) Submittals for Delegated Design items when engineering is done as part of the Delegated Design. C. Delegated Design submittals. 1.02 SUMMARY A. For certain components of the Work of the Contract, the Contractor is required to provide professional engineering design and obtain necessary approval of regulatory agencies. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, calculations, submittals, and permits-as required-for these components. The Contractor is responsible to submit all Delegated Design documents required for approval by regulatory agencies as a Deferred Submittal to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). B. Coordinate and assume full responsibility for design, engineering (when required by the AHJ or when specifically required by the Owner), submittals, fabrication, transportation, and installation of the work. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Delegated Design: Professional design service or certification specifically required of the Contractor in the Specifications. Delegated Design does not include professional services that the Contractor needs to fulfill their responsibilities under the Contract including but not limited to construction means, methods, and sequencing the Work. 1. Delegated design may be referred to as Bidder Design. B. Deferred Submittal: Those portions of the design that are not submitted at the time of building permit application which are being submitted separately to the AHJ. Refer to OSSC 107.3.4.2 for additional requirements. C. AHJ: Authorities Having Jurisdiction, defined in Section 01 10 00 and AIA Document A201. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Regulations. B. Provide complete, operational systems that perform their intended use. C. Engineer Delegated Design portions for gravity, lateral and seismic loads. 1. Load criteria is indicated in Structural Drawings. If not indicated, request criteria. 2. Indicate reactions to structure. 3. Provide services of a qualified professional engineer licensed in the Project jurisdiction. D. Calculate and complete energy forms required by AHJ. 1. Details of all conditions are not shown; final resolution of details shall be the responsibility of the Contractor such that the completed installation is durable and complies with the design and performance requirements. 2. Deviations from assembly details indicated shall not alter the apperanace of the completed work as determined by the Architect. E. Execute the design intent as indicated in Project Drawings and Specifications. F. Obtain Permits and inspections and pay fees required by AHJ. G. In case of any conflict between referenced codes and standards and/or the Drawings and Specifications, the code or standard having the more stringent requirements shall govern. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 16 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 1.05 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES • A. The Owner will not pay for progress delays, additional Work, additional products, restocking, or re-working required by Contractor's failure to coordinate Delegated Design and Deferred Submittal work with other Project work. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Design: Submit to Architect drawings and product data that describe Contractor's design prior to performing engineering calculations and Shop Drawings. 1. Architect will evaluate proposed design and comment on conformance with intent of Contract Documents. 2. Preliminary review is for aesthetic and general function concerns and will not constitute approval of engineering. 3. Purpose of this submittal is to avoid engineering and detailing an unacceptable proposal. B. Permit Review: Submit Delegated Design documents to AHJ for review and approval. 1. When AHJ requires review by Architect or Architect's consultant, allow 10 days for Architect's review. Submit documents to Architect and pick-up documents when review is complete. Make corrections noted by Architect. 2. Obtain permits prior to executing work component. 3. Comply with AHJ requirements. 4. Execute corrections to Delegated Design work required by AHJ at no cost to Owner and prior to Substantial Completion. a. Notify Architect of changes required by AHJ as soon as they are known. 5. Include design criteria, design assumptions, structural calculations, fabrication and construction details, required clearances, and interface requirements. a. Delegated Design drawings are in addition to Shop Drawings. 6. Affix Design Professional's seal for State License on Submittals. C. Product Data, Shop Drawings and Samples: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 for each product of Delegated Design portion of work. Product submittals are in addition to submittals for permit and design data. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Documentation: Comply with the following: 1. Uniform Drawing System, NCS/UDS published by National Institute of Building Sciences. 2. Minimum text size: 1/8 inch 3. Legible when microfilmed 4. Other requirements of AHJ B. Design requirements specific to Delegated Design portions are indicated in Drawings and in Sections that specify the component. C. Engineer's Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. D. Pre-Submittal Meeting: Contractor shall meet with Architect, Consultant, and Delegated Designer to discuss requirements of work-portion, submittals, scheduling and sequencing. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Schedule design process and submittals required for Delegated Design portions to fit within Construction Schedule. B. Allow adequate time for AHJ review. Contact AHJ for time estimate and coordination of schedule. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 16 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES C. If Architect's approval of Shop Drawings is required prior to application for permit, schedule and sequence Shop Drawing review prior to review of permit submittal.Allow time specified in Section 01 33 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS—NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF DELEGATED DESIGN COMPONENTS A. Refer to Structural notes for additional requirements. SECTIO ITEM DELEGATED DEFERR NOTES N DESIGN ED SUBMIT TAL 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE YES NO MIX DESIGN AND FORMING CONCRETE 03 38 00 POST-TENSIONED YES NO SHOP DRAWINGS AND CONCRETE ELONGATION CALCULATIONS 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 33 16 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 0 END OF SECTION r • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. C. Mock-up. D. Control of installation. E. Tolerances. F. Testing and inspection services. G. Manufacturers'field services. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mock-Up: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mock-ups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and,where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, • or operation; they are not Samples. 1. Approved mock-ups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Laboratory Mock-up: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as"carpentry"does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a • minimum of 10 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having 411 jurisdiction. 1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. When copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 2. When copies of standards are needed for any reason, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. 1. ADAAG or ADAAmericans with Disabilities Act 2. CFRCode of Federal Regulations 3. DODDepartment of Defense Military Specifications and Standards 4. FSFederal Specification 5. MILSPECMilitary Specification and Standards • 6. UFASUniform Federal Accessibility Standards E. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's"Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books'"National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." 1.05 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS • 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 14. Distribution: Contractor, Architect, Engineer of Record, Authority Having Jurisdition, Owner(verify), and Construction Manager(when appropriate). B. Deficiencies Report:Attach a separate list of deficiencies identified in previous reports that have not been corrected and successfully retested. 1. Submit a final report certifying the status of all deficiencies, signed and stamped. Submit report directly to Authority having jurisdiction (when required)and copy to others. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 1.07 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not • included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of applicable reference code(s)enforced by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Obtain copies of standards and where required by product specification sections. E. Maintain copies of standards and codes at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. F. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. G. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection. 1. Owner's testing agent will perform "special inspections" required by Regulations. B. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other testing and inspection specified as Contractor's responsibility or required by Contractor for quality control. C. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. D. Testing by Owner: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1. First test paid for by owner and provided by a qualified and certified third party testing • agency. Subsequent testing due to failure, paid for by sub-contractor responsible for failure source. If test fails, retest the same location plus one additional location. For each of the failed tests after the first failed test, retest the same location plus two additional tests. 2. Locations of water penetration tests at mock-up and building to be determined the week prior by Architect. Contractor to verify locations with Architect. 3. Coordinate with architect for regular intervals and timing of testing. 4. Storefront testing see Section 08 43 13. 5. Vinyl Window testing see Section 08 53 13. 6. Air Testing per ASTM E783 by an AAMA accredited testing agency: see individual opening sections. E. Water: 1. No water allowed on inside surfaces when measured in accordance with ASTM E331. 2. Test two vinyl windows and one storefront, selected randomly. 3. Mock-up: test both punched window with PTHP. Note openings to be tested in place. 4. See individual opening sections for testing requirements. F. Air 1. Chamber test storefront and punched window with PTHP, using same chamber system and removing tape to test window to wall interface, and then window unit only. 2. 2 units tested in place prior to cladding installation, post sub-framing installation. 3. Storefront and punched window openings to have 1 of the units produced for this project tested at manufacturing facility prior to shipping. Test results are due prior to shipping to Architect G. Adhesion • 1. Adhesion tests are required for each and every sealant and adhered product in Division 7 and 8 on each and every substrate included in detailing and/or project. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 1. Design anchorage and attachments to resist seismic forces when required by Regulations. 3.02 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 43 39 Coordinated Mock-up for additional requirements. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS • B. Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mock-up for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mock-up in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mock-up will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mock-up before starting work,fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of mock-up. 5. Maintain mock-up during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. C. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. D. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. E. Accepted mock-up shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. F. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect. 1. Deconstruct and recycle mock-up that is not incorporated in Work. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. • B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to • manufacturers'facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. • b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. 1111 1. Observer subject to approval of Architect. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. 3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION 110 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 42 20 DEFINITIONS & REFERENCES STANDARDS • PART IGENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in Conditions of Contract. B. "Indicated": Refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules in Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in Contract Documents. Terms such as"shown,""noted,""scheduled,"and "specified"are used to help user locate reference. Location is not limited. C. "Directed": Terms such as"directed,""requested," "authorized,""selected, "as approved," "required,"and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested by Architect, and similar phrases. D. "Approved": When used in conjunction with Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in Conditions of Contract. E. "Regulations": Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within construction industry that control performance of Work. F. "Furnish": Means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": describes operations at Project site including actual unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. • I. "Installer': Is Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. 1. Installers are required to be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform. 2. Term "experienced"when used with term "installed' means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. J. "Project site" is space available to Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of Project. K. "Testing Agencies": Are independent entities engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on 50 division format and CSI/CSC's"Master Format 2011" numbering system. B. Specification Content: 1. Abbreviated Language: a. Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words as singular, where applicable as context indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in Specifications. a. Requirements expressed in imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be • fulfilled indirectly by Contractor, or by others when so noted. Words "shall,""shall SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 42 20 DEFINITIONS & REFERENCES STANDARDS be,"or"shall comply with,"depending on context, are implied where a colon (:) is • used within a sentence or phrase. 1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into Contract Documents to extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of Contract Documents by reference. Comply with standards in effect as of date of Contract Documents. B. Conflicting Requirements: Comply with most stringent requirement when compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards establish different or conflicting requirements. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for decision before proceeding. C. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its trade, and is responsible for maintaining copies of standards needed to perform Work. Make copies of applicable standards available upon request. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Reference to a technical society, institution, associations, or governmental authority is made in accordance with their acronym as shown in following table: 1. AA; Aluminum Association a. Tel. 202-862-5100 b. 900 19th St. NW Suite 300 4110 c. Washington, DC 20006 2. AAMA; American Architectural Manufacturers Association a. Tel. 847-303-5664 b. 1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 104 c. Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268 3. AAN; American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. a. [See ANLA] 4. AASHTO; American Association of State Highway &Transportation Officials a. Tel. 202-624-5800 b. 444 North Capitol St., NW Suite 249 c. Washington, DC 20001 5. ACI; American Concrete Institute a. Tel. 248-848-3700 b. P.O. Box 9094 c. Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094 6. ADAAG; Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, Public Law 101-336 a. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 7. AFGA; American Forest and Paper Association 8. Tel. 800-878-8878 a. (Formerly: National Forest Products Association) b. 1111 19th St., NW, Suite 800 c. Washington DC 20036 9. AHA; American Hardboard Association a. Tel. 847-934-8800 b. 121 0 W. Northwest Hwy c. Palatine, IL 60067-1897 • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 42 20 DEFINITIONS & REFERENCES STANDARDS 10. AISC; American Institute of Steel Construction a. Tel. 800-644-2400 b. One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100 c. Chicago, IL 60601-2001 11. AISI; American Iron and Steel Institute a. Tel. 202-452-7100 b. 1101 17th Street N.W. c. Washington, DC 20036-4700 12. AITC;American Institute of Timber Construction a. Tel. 303-792-9559 b. 7012 S. Revere Pkwy, Suite 140 c. Englewood, CO 80112 13. ALSC;American Lumber Standards Committee a. Tel. 301-972-1700 b. P.O. Box 210 c. Germantown, MD 20875 14. AN LA;American Nursery and Landscape Association a. (Formerly:American Association of Nurserymen) b. Tel. 202-789-2900 c. 1250 Eye St., NW, Suite 500 d. Washington DC 20005 15. ANSI; American National Standards Institute a. Tel. 202-642-4900 b. 11 West 42nd Street., 13th Floor • c. New York, NY 10036-8002 16. APA; The Engineered Wood Association a. (Formerly: American Plywood Association) b. Tel. 206-565-6600 c. P.O. Box 11700 d. Tacoma, Washington 98411-0700 17. APA; Architectural Precast Association a. Tel. 941-454-6989 b. P.O. Box 08669 c. Fort Myers, FL 32908-0669 18. ASH RAE; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. a. Tel. 800-527-4723 b. 1791 Tullie Circle, NE c. Atlanta, GA 30329-2305 19. ASTM;American Society for Testing and Materials a. Tel. 610-832-9500 b. 100 Barr Harbor Dr. c. West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 20. AWI; Architectural Woodwork Institute a. Tel. 703-733-0600 b. 1952 Isaac Newton Sq. c. Reston, VA 20190 21. AWPA; American Wood Preservers'Association a. Tel. 817-326-6300 b. 3246 Fall Creek Hwy, Suite 1900 c. Granbury, TX 76049-7979 • 22. AWS; American Welding Society a. Tel. 800-443-9353 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 42 20 DEFINITIONS & REFERENCES STANDARDS b. 550 NW LeJeune Rd. c. Miami, FL 33126 23. BHMA; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association a. Tel. 212-661-4261 b. 355 Lexington Ave., 17 th Floor c. New York, NY 100 1 7-6603 24. BIA; Brick Institute of America a. Tel. 703-620-0010 b. 11490 Commerce Park Dr. c. Reston,VA 22091-1525 25. CRSI; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute a. Tel. 847-517-1200 b. 933 N. Plum Grove Rd. c. Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 26. CS; Commercial Standard of National Bureau of Standards a. (U.S. Department. of Commerce) b. Tel. 202-512-1800 c. U.S. Government Printing Office d. Washington, D.C. 20402 27. CTI; Ceramic Tile Institute of America a. Tel. 310-574-7800 b. 12061 West Jefferson Blvd. c. Culver City, CA 90230-6219 28. DHI; Door and Hardware Institute a. (Formerly: National Builders Hardware Association) • b. Tel. 703-222-2010 c. 14170 Newbrook Dr. d. Chantilly, VA 20151-2223 29. EIMA; EIFS Industry Members Association a. Tel. 800-294-3462 b. 402 N. Fourth St., Suite 102 c. Yakima, WA 98901-2470 30. FGMA; Flat Glass Marketing Association a. (See GANA) 31. FM; Factory Mutual System a. Tel. 781-762-4300 b. 1151 Boston-Providence Tnpk. c. Norwood, MA 02062-9102 32. FS; Federal Specification Unit a. (Available from General Service Administration) b. Tel. 202-619-8925 c. 470 East L'Enfant Plaza, SW, Suite 8100 d. Washington, DC 20407 33. GA; Gypsum Association a. Tel. 202-289-5440 b. 810 First St., NE, Suite 510 c. Washington, D.C. 20002 34. GANA; Glass Association of North America a. (Formerly: Flat Glass Marketing Association) b. Tel. 913-266-7013 c. 3310 SW Harrison St. d. Topeka, KS 66611-2279 110 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 42 20 DEFINITIONS & REFERENCES STANDARDS • 35. HPVA; Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association a. Tel. 703-435-2900 b. 1825 Michael Farraday Dr. c. P.O. Box 2789 d. Reston,VA 22195-0789 36. MIA; Masonry Institute of America a. Tel. 213-388-0472 b. 2550 Beverly Blvd. c. Los Angeles, CA 90057, 37. NAAMM; National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers a. Tel. 312-456-5590 b. 8 South Michigan Ave., Suite 1000 c. Chicago, IL 60603 38. NFPA; National Fire Protection Association a. Tel. 800-344-3555 b. One Bafterymarch Park c. P.O. Box 91 01 d. Quincy, MA 02269-9101 39. NFPA; National Forest Products Association 40. NHLA; National Hardwood Lumber Association a. Tel. 901-377-1818 b. P.O. Box 34518 c. Memphis, TN 38184-0518 41. NRCA; National Roofing Contractors Association • a. Tel. 800-323-9545 b. O'Hare International Center c. 10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600 d. Rosemont, IL 60018-5607 42. NWCB; Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau a. Tel. 800-524-4215 b. 1032-A N.E. 65th St. c. Seattle, Washington 98119 43. NWWDA; National Wood Window and Door Association a. (Formerly: National Woodwork Manufacturers Association) b. Tel. 800-223-2301 c. 1400 E. Touchy Ave., G-54 d. Des Plaines, IL 60018 44. PCA; Portland Cement Association a. Tel. 847-966-6200 b. 5420 Old Orchard Rd. c. Skokie, IL 60077-1083 45. PCI; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute a. Tel. 312-786-0300 b. 175 W. Jackson Blvd. c. Chicago, IL 60604 46. PDCA; Painting and Decorating Contractors of America, Oregon Council a. Tel. 503-236-7964 b. 3420 SW Macadam c. Portland, Oregon 97219 47. PS; Product Standard of National Bureau of Standards • a. (U.S. Department. of Commerce) b. Tel. 202-512-1800 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 42 20 DEFINITIONS & REFERENCES STANDARDS c. U.S. Government Printing Office • d. Washington, DC 20402 48. SDI; Steel Deck Institute a. Tel. 847-462-1930 b. P.O. Box 25 c. Fox River Grove, IL 60021 49. SDI; Steel Door Institute a. Tel. 216-889-0010 b. 30200 Detroit Rd. c. Cleveland, OH 44145-1967 50. SIGMA; Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association a. Tel. 312-644-6610 b. 401 N. Michigan Ave. c. Chicago, IL 60611-4267 51. SIL; Steel Joist Institute a. Tel. 803-626-1995 b. 3127 10th Ave., North Ext. c. Myrtle Beach, SC 29577-6760 52. SMACNA; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. a. Tel. 703-803-2980 b. 4201 Lafayette Center Dr. c. P.O. Box 112130 d. Chantilly, VA. 20151-1209 53. SSPC; Steel Structures Painting Council a. Tel. 412-281-2331 • b. 40 24th St., 6th Floor c. Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4643 54. TCA; Tile Council of America a. Tel. 864-646-8453 b. 100 Clemson Research Blvd. c. Anderson, SC 29625 55. UL; Underwritees Laboratory, Incorporated a. Tel. 800-704-4050 b. 333 Pfingsten Road c. Northbrook, IL 60062 56. WCLIB; West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau a. Tel. 503-639-0651 b. P.O. Box 23145 c. Portland, OR 97281-3145 57. WH; Warnock Hersey a. 8431 Murphy Drive b. Middleton, Wisconsin 53562 58. WMMP; Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association a. Tel. 800-550-7889 b. 507 First St. c. Woodland, CA 95695 59. WWPA;Western Wood Products Association a. Tel. 503-224-3930 b. Yeon Building c. 522 SW 5th Ave. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 42 20 DEFINITIONS & REFERENCES STANDARDS • d. Portland, OR 97204-2122 END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 43 39 COORDINATED MOCKUPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. C. Free standing Mock-ups. D. Control of installation. E. Tolerances. F. Testing and inspection services. G. Building envelope testing. H. Manufacturers'field services. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Laboratory Test Methods: 1. ASTM E 283-9, Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. 2. ASTM E 330, Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 3. ASTM E 331-93, Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. ASTM E 547-96, Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. B. Field Test Methods: 110 1. ASTM E 783-02, Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors. 2. ASTM E 1105-00- Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. 3. ASTM E 1186-03-Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems. 4. AAMA 501.2-03- Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage. 5. Material Standards: a. ASTM C 1048-04- Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. b. ASTM E 774- Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Units. c. AAMA 2605-98-Superior Performing Organic Coating on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Defective materials and workmanship include, but are not limited to, evidence of: 1. Penetration of water into or through mockup. 2. Air infiltration exceeding specified limits. 3. Delamination of wall insulated glass units. 4. Cracking, crazing, flaking of coatings or opacifiers on glass. 5. Discoloration or fading, excessive non-uniformity, pitting, cracking, peeling, crazing, or corrosion of surfaces. 6. Glass breakage. • 7. Secondary glass damage due to failing building skin components. 8. Warping, racking, or movement out of plane of metal or metal composite wall panels. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 43 39 COORDINATED MOCKUPS 9. Shearing, popping , or movement of fasteners, concealed or exposed. 10. Warping, racking, or movement out of plane of window frames. 11. Operable window units that bind, stick, or do not operate smoothly. 12. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealants. 13. Crazing on surface of sealants. 14. Sealant hardening beyond Shore A durometer 50 or softening below 20. 15. Chipping or spalling of concrete. 1.04 MOCK-UP SUMMARY A. Free standing mock-ups is required to be constructed apart and separated from the project itself. Mock-up shall represent the products on the project and procedures used for installing all finishes, materials, and equipment listed. B. Provide enclosures (as needed)to protect mock-ups from exposure to the elements. C. Location: On or off site at location agreed to by Owner and Contractor. D. Mock-up may not remain as part of the work. Remove all mock-ups and clear area when directed or at project completion. E. Mock-up is to be constructed out of sequence with the project itself. Track building of the mock-up on the construction schedule and follow procedures for submittals for approval of all items being mocked-up prior to building the mock-up. 1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Purpose: 1. Building mockup is to demonstrate that materials and systems forming exterior shell of Project meet or exceed performance requirements specified in the individual specification sections and to meet code requirements for the location of the project. • B. Materials and systems that fail to contribute to formation of a water-tight and air-tight exterior shell, or that show excessive stress,weathering, discoloration, or weakness, shall be re-evaluated for use in the Project. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation two weeks prior to construction of building mockup. 2. Provide the following: a. Site location drawing, showing Building Mockup on site, access roads, north arrow, and drawing scale. b. Floor Plan: 1/2 inch scale. c. Wall Elevations: 1/4 inch scale. d. Wall Sections: 3/4 inch scale. e. Half size details of conditions for every member,joint, anchorage, weld size, glazing system, wall panel system, and provisions for expansion and contraction and sealant application. f. Isometric details to completely describe items being proposed by subcontractor involved, or as requested by Architect. g. Coordination details for related and adjoining Work. Insert templates, and erection diagrams to completely describe and construct Building Mockup. h. Glazing Sections: 1) Show dimensions, including but not limited to, section thicknesses,frame lap over glass, and edge clearance. 2) Show tolerances for dimensions including but not limited to field dimensions, mill and shop dimensions, and glass dimensions. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 43 39 COORDINATED MOCKUPS • i. Wall Panel Sections: 1) Show dimensions, including but not limited to, section thicknesses, and edge clearance. 2) Show tolerances for dimensions including but not limited to field dimensions, mill and shop dimensions, and panel dimensions. j. Enclosures and Accommodations for Test Equipment: 1) Comply with ASTM E 1105. 2) Show calculations ensuring enclosures are designed to withstand pressures and test conditions of testing. C. Structural calculations sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer responsible for their preparation and registered in the State in which the project is located. 1. Show ultimate factor of safety. 2. Prepare calculations in accordance with more stringent of current design rules of Aluminum Association, AISC, AISI, ACI, or these Project Specifications. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with technical specification section for each material included in Building Mockup, and for administration and coordination requirements specified. B. Duplicate conditions and methods proposed for final construction. C. Make a video recording of assembly methods used for construction of building mockup. Comply with submittal procedures in Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with Building Mockup construction when ambient temperature and substrate conditions are outside limits permitted by the specified products systems specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOCK-UP: EXTERIOR A. Mock-up shall be constructed to represent and identify aesthetic standards, expectations for workmanship, sequence of installation, coordination with surrounding work, and to ensure that manufacturer's processes for the individual portions of the work listed below conform to the overall project goals. Mock-ups so indicated will also be used to test that products and installation conform to the performance requirements listed in each Section. 1. Mock-up is to be approximately 15 feet long and one story high to represent an exterior corner, interior corner, all window and storefront wall conditions, private roof deck assembly, and all typical exterior wall conditions. A drawing showing exact scope for the mock-up will be issued by the Architect referencing details and conditions documented in the drawings. 2. Mock-up is to be reviewed for the following: B. 04 20 01; MASONRY VENEER 1. Masonry; Aesthetics, installation techniques, and coordination with other trades. C. 05 52 00; ALUMINUM RAILING 1. Parapet top-mounted style only. D. 06 10 00; ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Framing; Installation techniques and coordination. E. 06 16 63; MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM SHEATHING 1. Sheathing; Installation techniques and coordination. F. 07 14 00; FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 4111) 1. Waterproofing; Installation techniques and coordination. 2. Waterproofing system to be tested. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set • PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 43 39 COORDINATED MOCKUPS G. 07 18 14; PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING • H. 07 19 00; WATER REPELLENTS 1. Water Repellents; Installation techniques, aesthetics, and coordination. I. 07 25 09; SELF-ADHERED MEMBRANE 1. Self-adhered Membrane; Installation techniques and coordination. 2. Waterproofing system to be tested. J. 07 46 46; FIBER CEMENT SIDING 1. Wail Panels; Installation techniques, aesthetics, and coordination. 2. Flashing and Trim associated with other systems within the mock-up; K. 07 62 00; SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1. Flashing and Trim associated with other systems within the mock-up; Installation techniques and coordination. L. 07 90 05; JOINT SEALERS 1. Joint Sealers and Accessories; installation techniques and coordination. M. 08 53 13; VINYL WINDOWS 1. Windows; installation techniques, aesthetics, and coordination with surrounding construction. 2. Include glazing on mock-up. 3. Windows to be tested. N. 23 81 00; PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMP (PTHP) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. See Section 01 40 00 for additional requirements. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide the following to facilitate testing: 1. Building Mockup Test Chamber: Construct of steel studs and plywood or drywall (interior grade acceptable). a. Stud spacing and fastening to be constructed as typical exterior walls. b. Sheathing installed exterior side of chamber. c. Access hatch (approximately 2 x 3 feet)to allow chamber entrance and exit, and to be operable and sealed for air leakage. d. Fire caulk or fire tape board joints to adjacent concrete slabs and columns and/or exterior walls. 1) Chamber to be sealed to exterior beyond edge of test section. e. Install selected windows: 1) Install system complete with interior and exterior seals including tie-ins to adjacent systems. f. Water supply requirement to test chamber location: 1) 21 gallons per minute at 15 psi. 2) Connecting larger hose (greater than 1-1/2 inch)and splitting to two(2) 3/4 inch hoses at test may also be sufficient. 3) Length of hose exceeding 250 feet: Plastic piping to be used to minimize pressure loss due to higher friction of rubber hose. g. Electricity: One dedicated 20 amp circuit. 3.03 TESTING A. Owner to engage qualified independent Testing Agency to perform testing of Building Mockup. B. Water Penetration: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 43 39 COORDINATED MOCKUPS 1. Test installed systems at locations and to extent indicated by Architect. 2. Perform minimum of one (1)water test by method specified in ASTM E 1105. 3. Testing to evaluate watertightness of intersections of systems as well as each individual system. a. Testing windows for water infiltration to be conducted with window manufacturers representative present b. Areas to include but not limited to: 1) Fixed and operable windows. 2) Cladding systems. 3) Penetrations. c. Durations: Four(4)cycles of five(5) minutes each with one (1) minute of neutral pressure between cycles. C. Notify Architect and Owner, in writing, minimum of 14 days prior to conducting field testing. 3.04 REPAIR AND RETESTING A. Repair or remove Work that does not meet specified requirements, or that is damaged by testing. 1. Where repair does not produce system(s)that meet specified performance requirements, replace system(s) components with new components and re-test. 2. Obtain Architect's acceptance of corrective Work prior to executing it. B. Cost of corrective Work and re-testing necessary to arrive at performance requirements are Contractor's responsibility. 1. Re-testing includes testing fees, Architect's fees, and Consultant's fees. a. Re-testing costs due to re-design by Architect will be paid by Owner. • END OF SECTION i SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 45 19 VAPOR EMISSION AND PH TESTING 111/ PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Measuring moisture vapor emission of new concrete floors and gypsum underlayment. 1. Calcium Chloride (CaCl2) Test. 2. In-situ Relative Humidity Test. B. Measuring acidity/alkalinity (pH)of new concrete floors and gypsum underlayment. 1.02 REFERENCES • A. ASTM F 710-Standard practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Recieve Resilient Flooring. B. ASTM F 1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. C. ASTM F 2170-Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide suitable concrete floor substrate for application of finish floor systems that will meet finish floor manufacturer's installation requirements. B. Moisture vapor emission testing: 1. Moisture dome testing(calcium chloride test): a. Moisture vapor test results to achieve three pounds per 1,000 square feet of concrete floor surface per 24 hours, or as allowed by flooring (or adhesive) manufacturer, when tested in conformance with ASTM F 1859. 2. In-situ relative humidity test: a. In-situ relative humidity test results to achieve relative humidity reading of no greater • than 75 percent or as allowed by flooring (or adhesive) manufacturer, when tested in conformance with ASTM F 2170. C. Concrete slab surface pH testing: 1. Acidity/Alkalinity testing with probe or pH testing paper to achieve a pH no less than 7 and no greater than 9 or as allowed by flooring (or adhesive) manufacturer when tested in conformance with ASTM F 710. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for all testing materials proposed for Work of this Section. B. Letter of Verification of Environmental Conditions as below. C. Test Reports: Submit moisture vapor emission and alkalinity test reports in accordance with requirements of Section 01 30 00. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Prior to testing for moisture vapor emissions rate, space shall be enclosed, fully weather-tight, wet work shall be complete and normally dry, work above ceilings finished. The test site shall be at the same temperature and humidity expected during normal use. B. Building Temperature: Minimum 65 degrees F. Maximum 85 degrees F. C. Interior Relative Humidity: Minimum 40 percent. Maximum 60 percent. D. Maintain specified environmental conditions not less than 72 hours prior to conducting tests and throughout duration of the tests. 1.06 QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing shall be conducted not less than 120 days after date of last pour of concrete slab to be tested. B. Quantity of Tests Required: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 45 19 VAPOR EMISSION AND PH TESTING 1. Not less than 3 test are required for the first 1,000 square feet plus one test per each additional 1,000 square feet or fraction thereof. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING A. Moisture Dome Testing: Conform to requirements of ASTM F 1869. 1. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride (CaCl2) Test Kits: Kits shall contain a plastic spherical dome with a factory installed silicone gasket,weight ring, airtight foil bag of calcium chloride (approximately 30 grams), and a plastic dish with snap-top lid and label. a. This test requires use of a gram-weight scale with a gradation of 1/10th (0.1) gram. 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. Vaprecision Testing Systems,www.vaportest.com. b. Other manufacturers: Comply with Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. In-situ Relative Humidity Testing is required to be performed by an independent testing laboratory using relative humidity moisture meter kits and sensors conforming to requirements of ASTM F 2170. 2.02 CONCRETE SLAB SURFACE PH TESTING A. pH Tester with a surface probe. B. pH Test Kits: Kits shall contain pH paper, pH pencil and pH color chart for comparison. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Prior to testing, verify that environmental conditions have been met. 2. Heating ventilating and air conditioning system is operating or temporary heat, cooling and • ventilating system is operating. 3. Lay Out Test Area: Measure the space to be tested. Layout the test sites in a rectangular, quasi rectangular or a cross-diagonal grid. Come in 5 feet from any exterior wall and place test kits at even intervals. Complete the grid. Record the location of each test site on a Record Drawing. B. Moisture Dome Testing: 1. Surface Preparation: a. For each test area, expose a surface area of 20 inches square. b. Grind or sand the concrete surface. Test area shall be clean and free of all foreign substances; including curing compounds, sealers, paint, oil, resins, parting compounds, floor leveling compounds, dirt, etc. 2. After surface preparation is complete and prior to testing, allow space to remain undisturbed for 24 hours. C. In-situ Relative Humidity Test: 1. Drill 5/8 inch diameter test site holes to a depth equal to 40 percent of the slab's thickness for slabs on grade and 20 percent for elevated slabs. 2. Clean debris from hole then insert plastic sleeve and cap sleeve. 3. Allow probe sensor at each test site 72 hours equilibration time prior to reading relative humidity levels. 3.02 TESTING A. Using a vacuum, remove any dust or dirt from concrete surface where moisture dome test kit is to be placed or in the case of an insitu relative humidity test clean debris from hole then insert plastic sleeve and cap sleeve.. Do not use solvents or water to clean the concrete. B. Moisture Dome Testing: Perform in accordance with requirements of ASTM F 1869. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 45 19 VAPOR EMISSION AND PH TESTING • 1. Install moisture vapor emission test kits according to manufacturer's published instructions. 2. Test results are sensitive to testing procedures. Take care to follow manufacturer's instructions. 3. Allow test kits to remain in place undisturbed for 60 to 72 hours. C. In-situ Relative Humidity Test: Perform testing in accordance with requirements of ASTM F 2170. 1. After equilibration, take a probe into the sleeve and obtain relative humidity level readings from the bottom of the hole. 2. Testing density is required to equal 3 tests in the first 1,000 square feet, with one additional test per each additional 1,000 square feet of concrete slab surface. 3. Once satisfactory relative humidity testing results are achieved, patch testing site holes prior to application of finish flooring. D. Alkalinity Testing Using pH Tester: 1. Conduct test adjacent each location of test for moisture vapor emission. 2. With the concrete already clean, pour approximately 2 tablespoons of distilled water onto surface of concrete. 3. Allow distilled water to stand for approximately 3 minutes. While waiting, lightly stir water to help it absorb any of the salts. 4. Place tip of surface probe into the distilled water solution to obtain results. E. Alkalinity Testing Using pH Paper: 1. Conduct test adjacent each location of test for moisture vapor emission. 2. With the concrete already clean, pour approximately 2 tablespoons of distilled water onto surface of concrete. • 3. Allow distilled water to stand for approximately 3 minutes. While waiting, lightly stir water to help it absorb any of the salts. 4. After the allotted time, place a pH paper into the distilled water solution and then compare the color changes in the paper with the pH chart to obtain results. F. Record data and results and submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 41) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Project identification sign. H. Field offices. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting,water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction and testing purposes. B. Temporary heat shall be provided as soon as condition of the building warrants. After such time no salamanders or open fires will be permitted. C. Contractor shall maintain safe conditions for use of temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating systems including, but not limited to: 1. Operate equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide fresh air ventilation required by equipment manufacturer. 3. Keep temperature of fuel containers stabilized. 4. Secure fuel containers from overheating. • 5. Operate equipment away from combustible materials. 6. Provide adequate fire extinguishers in conjunction with Article 1.16 of this Section. D. New permanent facilities may be used. E. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: 1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with necessary software and laser printer. 2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line. 3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster. 4. Email: Account/address reserved for project use. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.06 FENCING 4111 A. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.08 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from Owner-occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: 1.09 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. • D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. 1.11 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings. B. Erect on site at location indicated. C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. 1.12 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight,with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings,with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures. 1.13 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment,facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes the following: 1. Temporary fencing, barricades, and guards to protect trees and plants indicated to remain, as necessary and required to prevent damage above and below grade. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Drip Line: Outer perimeter of branches of any tree or plant. B. Ground Cover: Includes, but is not limited to, shrubs and grass C. DBH: Diameter at breast height, a tree trunk diameter measured in inches 4.5-feet above the ground. D. Root Protection Zone: Is defined as a circle 1-foot in radius for each 1-inch in diameter of a tree trunk at DBH. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures". 1. Proposal for tree and plant protection, describing methods of protection and stabilization. 2. Drawings and supporting documentation as directed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor's Condition Inspection: Include written report and digital photographs recording the • condition of the site prior to commencing construction. B. The Contractor shall retain a Consulting Arborist registered with the American Society of Consulting Arborists at the Contractor's expense. Contractor shall comply with arborist's recommendations for tree protection and continued tree health when work occurs within the root zones of trees scheduled to remain. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Performance Requirements: Prevent damage to trees and plants including soil, roots, bark, trunks, limbs, branches, and foliage due to construction activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Soil contamination, erosion and compaction. 2. Excessive wetting, ponding of stormwater, and construction run-off. 3. Alteration of grade and stockpiling of soil, debris, and materials. 4. Unauthorized cutting, breaking, skinning, and bruising of trees and plants B. Project Conditions: Install protection during initial mobilization at the site and maintain until Substantial Completion. 1. Driving and Parking: Not permitted within drip line of trees, plants and sensitive natural areas or lawn without Owner's Representative's written permission. 2. Storage of Material and Debris: Not permitted within drip line of trees and plants. 3. Where Owner's Representative permits construction traffic, parking or materials storage on prepared lawn and planting areas, provide planks, plywood and similar protection; prevent rutting and compaction of soil. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 2 -PRODUCTS 111 Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING TREES AND PLANTS A. Tree Protection Areas: The Contractor shall exercise the utmost care to protect existing trees and plants designated to remain. For each tree to be preserved, the Contractor shall install protective fencing around each tree at the edge of the root protection zone, or as indicated on the Drawings. Fencing shall be chainlink, 6-foot high panels, secured with 7-foot steel posts mounted in concrete block where indicated on pavement, and secured to ground with 8-foot metal posts where fencing is indicated in landscape areas. B. Water trees and plants as necessary to maintain existing condition throughout Contract period until Substantial Completion. C. Review conditions with Consulting Arborist and Owner's Representative prior to pruning or cutting roots, branches and foliage, and proceed as directed. Perform pruning and cutting with sharp instruments intended for the purpose; do not break nor chop. D. Tree topping is not allowed. If a tree smaller than 8-inches in DBH is topped, it must be replaced in kind. If a tree 8-inches or larger in DBH is topped, the Contractor's Certified Arborist shall develop and carry out a 5-year pruning schedule. E. Excavating and Trenching within Driplines: Permitted where indicated and at other specifically approved locations. Provide additional protection as recommended by the Consulting Arborist at no additional cost to the Owner. Tunnel under or around roots by hand digging or boring. Do not cut main lateral roots and tap roots over 1-inch in diameter, cut smaller roots which interfere with installation of new work. • F. Do not allow exposed roots to be scarred nor to dry out; provide temporary earth cover, or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in moist condition and temporarily support and protect from damage. G. Maintain existing grades within dripline of trees and plants unless otherwise indicated or approved by Owner's Representative. H. Prevent entry into protected areas except as authorized in writing by the Owner's landscape maintenance personnel. I. Shrubs and small trees shall be fenced from the construction site. J. All construction debris shall be removed from shrub beds and landscape areas. 3.02 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. All damage to turf, shrubs, and trees will be the Contractor's responsibility to repair or replace under the direction of the Owner's Representative, with like plant material and size or pay restitution if replacement plans are unavailable. Make repairs promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration. B. Replace trees and plants damaged by construction operations where the Owner's Representative determines restoration to normal growth pattern is not possible. Plant and maintain as directed. 1. Trees up to 13-inch caliper: Same size as damaged tree; species selected by Owner's Representative. 2. Trees over 13-inch caliper: Compensate Owner as determined by an acceptable Consulting Arborist registered with the American Society of Consulting Arborists. 3. Plants: Same size, quality, and quantity as damaged; species selected by Owner's Representative. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION • C. Where compaction of soil due to construction activity, including compaction of soil due to elevated water content, exceeds the critically limiting bulk density for the soil type in question, the Contractor shall provide measures as directed to reduce soil bulk density to acceptable levels to support normal plant growth. END OF SECTION • S SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL el PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection reports. Comply with all requirements set forth in 1200-CN permit drawings (denoted as EC in drawing set). B. Also comply with all more stringent requirements of State of Oregon Erosion and Sedimentation Control Manual. C. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection reports. D. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained. 1. Owner will withhold payment to Contractor equivalent to all fines resulting from non-compliance with applicable regulations. E. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. IIIF. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. 2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years. G. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. H. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. 3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. I. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to • Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited sediment after each storm. J. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. K. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. L. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all measures and requirements set forth in the EC plans and governed by 1200-CN Erosion Control Permit. B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: 1. Submit not less than 30 days prior to anticipated start of clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover. 2. Include: a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage. b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures. c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures. • d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities. e. Other information required by law. f. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is also included. 3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner. C. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Refer to 1200-CN Erosion Control drawings for specifc materials to use. When specified, the following requirements should be followed. B. Mulch: Use one of the following: 1. Erosion control matting or netting. C. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons. D. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum. 2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension. E. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section,with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot. 411 2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 11111 F. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible;fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4355 after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 lb-f, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 6. Tear Strength: 55 lb-f, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted. G. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Hardwood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. H. Gravel: See Section 32 11 23 for aggregate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. • 3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive measures are not required. B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface. 1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2. Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin. C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences. 1. Provide linear sediment barriers: a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles. 2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier: a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet.. b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet. c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet. d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet. e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet. D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures: 1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet. 2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement. • E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; • F. Temporary Splash Pads: provide at downspout outlets and storm water outlets. G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures: 1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges. 2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark,wood chips, or shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay. H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months. I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface: 1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches. 2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints. 3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone. B. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. • 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at least 18 inches, with extra post. 7. Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following: a. Four nails per post with 3/4 inch diameter flat or button head, 1 inch long, and 14 gage, 0.083 inch shank diameter. b. Five staples per post with at least 17 gage, 0.0453 inch wire, 3/4 inch crown width and 1/2 inch long legs. 8. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet. C. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly,with one bale at each end of row turned uphill. 2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground. 3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground. 4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches into the ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together. 5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly. 6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted. D. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL • 3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft. 4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft. 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing runoff or erosion. 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. D. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales. 3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or • other causes. E. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. F. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction. B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy. C. Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction. 1.02 PROJECT GOALS A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Absorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. • C. IAQ: Indoor Air Quality. D. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. E. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA(OCC) as a guide. 1. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building. 2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust. 4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas. 5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control. 6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of ventilation, use of permanent HVAC systems, types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters. 7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures. C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors, moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times. D. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report. E. Air Contaminant Test Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. 2. Locations and scheduling of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail. • 4. Test instruments and apparatus. 5. Sampling methods. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS F. Air Contaminant Test Reports: Show: 1. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 2. Test values for each air sample; average the values of each set of 3. 3. HVAC operating conditions. 4. Certification of test equipment calibration. 5. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified. B. Air Contaminant Test Method: US EPA Environmental Section 01445-Testing for Indoor Air Quality, Baseline IAQ and Materials,www.epa.gov/rtp/new-bldg/environmental/s-01445.htm. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC content. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. 411 B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building, shut down HVAC systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems. D. HVAC equipment and ductwork may NOT be used for ventilation during construction: 1. Provide temporary ventilation equivalent to 1.5 air changes per hour, minimum. 2. Exhaust directly to outside. 3. Seal HVAC air inlets and outlets immediately after duct installation. E. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. F. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. G. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. H. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA(OCC)for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. 3.02 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS • B. Perform building flush-out before occupancy. C. Do not start flush-out until: 1. All construction is complete including interior finishes; at Substantial Completion. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning is not necessary. 4. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. D. Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside air until a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied. 1. Obtain Owner's concurrence that construction is complete enough before beginning flush-out. 2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and interior relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. 3. If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of the specified contaminants is conducted during flush-out, start flush-out over. 4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, supply a minimum of 25 percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy, and: a. Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy. b. Continue ventilation during all occupied periods. c. Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot or design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. E. Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing. • 3.03 AIR CONTAMINANT TESTING A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. B. Perform air contaminant testing before occupancy. C. Do not start air contaminant testing until: 1. All construction is complete, including interior finishes. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. D. Air Contaminant Concentration Determination and Limits: Conform to US EPA Environmental Section 01445-Testing for Indoor Air Quality, Baseling IAQ and Materials, www.epa.govirtp/new-bldg/environmental/s-01445.htm. E. Analyze air samples and submit report. F. Air Contaminant Concentration Limits: 1. Formaldehyde: Not more than 27 parts per billion. 2. PM10 Particulates: Not more than 50 micrograms per cubic meter. 3. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOCs): Not more than 500 micrograms per cubic meter. 4. Chemicals Listed in CAL(CDPH SM) Table 4-1, except Formaldehyde: Allowable concentrations listed in Table 4-1. 5. Carbon Monoxide: Not more than 9 parts per million and not more than 2 parts per million higher than outdoor air. G. Air Contaminant Concentration Test Methods: 1. Formaldehyde: ASTM D5197, EPA 625 Method TO-11A, or EPA 600 Method IP-6. • 2. Particulates: EPA 600 Method IP-10. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 3. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): EPA 625 Method TO-1, TO-15, or TO-17; or 111 EPA 600 Method IP-1. 4. Chemicals Listed in CAL (CDPH SM)Table 4-1, except Formaldehyde: ASTM D5197, or EPA 625 Method TO-1, TO-15, or TO-17. 5. Carbon Monoxide: EPA 600 Method IP-3, plus measure outdoor air, measure in ppm; report both indoor and outdoor measurements. 6. 4-Phenylcyclohexene(4-PCH): Not more than 6.5 micrograms per cubic meter. 7. Regulated Pollutants: Measure in relation to outside air; not more than contained in outside air. H. If air samples show concentrations higher than those specified, ventilate with 100 percent outside air and retest at no cost to Owner, or conduct full building flush-out specified above. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re-use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term"product" includes the terms"material," "equipment," "system,"and terms of similar intent. B. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. C. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or reused from other projects are not considered new products. D. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, • function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. E. Substitutions: Contractor proposed changes in products, materials, equipment, or methods of construction different from those required by the Contract Documents. F. VOC: Volatile organic compound, carbon compounds that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions and vaporize at normal room temperature. Measure as grams per liter, less water. G. Bidding/Negotiating Period: The period within the project schedule where the Contractor receives bids or pricing from subcontracts or prepares their own bid to establish a contract value with the Owner. H. Award of Contract: The formal acceptance of the terms of the negotiation by the Contractor. I. Notice to Proceed: A document that establishes the date work is authorized to commence. It may also include the number of calendar days or date of substantial completion. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal procedure for Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, and Certificates is specified in Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedure. B. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Request for Substitution: Submit approved form with supporting information to CM/GC. Comply with "Substitution Procedures"Article in this Section. 1. Requests During Bidding/Negotiating period: CSI Form 1.5C or current CSI Northwest Region Form. 2. Requests after Bidding/Negotiating period: CSI Form 13.1A. III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 3. Submit original request forms in quantity required distribution. Original must be signed by • person authorized to certify the substitution request form. Architect may request proof of authorization. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.05 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular • requirements for submitting special warranties. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. C. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment salvaged and refurbished as specified. 1. Protect, repair and prepare for installation items indicated as"reinstall"or"salvage for reinstallation'. 2. Replace items that are damaged beyond repair during demolition or construction. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 61 16. 2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 61 16. 3. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured within 500 miles of the project. 4. Are made with rapidly renewable material. • 5. Contain more recycled material. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS • 6. Use sustainably harvested wood over non-sustainably harvested wood. 7. Do not contain urea formaldehyde. 8. Contain fewer VOCs. 9. Are Green Label Plus carpet, cushion or adhesive. 10. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 11. Result in less construction waste. 12. Have a published GreenScreen Chemical Hazard Analysis. D. Urea-Formaldehyde Prohibition: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide composite wood and agrifiber products having no added urea-formaldehyde resins. Laminating adhesives used to fabricate both on-site and shop-applied composite wood and agrifiber assemblies shall not contain urea formaldehyde resin. a. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product content. 2. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere. E. Adhesives and Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168, and Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36. 1. Specific Product Categories: VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. Indoor Carpet Adhesive: 50. b. Carpet Pad Adhesive: 50. c. Wood Flooring Adhesive:100. d. Rubber Flooring Adhesive:60. e. Subfloor Adhesive:50. f. Ceramic Tile Adhesive:65. g. VCT and Asphalt Adhesive:50. h. Gypsum Board Adhesive:50. i. Resilient Base Adhesive:50. j. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: 70. k. Structural Glazing Adhesive:100. 2. Specialty Applications: VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. PVC Welding:510. b. CPVC Welding:490. c. ABS Welding:325. d. Plastic Cement Welding:250. e. Adhesive Primer for Plastic:550. f. Contact Adhesive:80. g. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive:250. h. Structural Wood Member Adhesive:140 i. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Operations: 850. j. Top and Trim Adhesive:250. 3. Substrate Specific Applications:VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. Metal to Metal:30. b. Plastic Foams:50. c. Porous Material (except wood)50. d. Wood30. e. Fiberglass80. 4. Sealants: VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. Architectural250. b. Roof300. • c. Roadway250. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS d. Single Ply Roof Membrane450. • e. Other250. 5. Primers for Sealants:VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. Architectural Non Porous250. b. Architectural Porous775. c. Other750. 6. Aerosol Adhesives: Percent VOC by weight shall not exceed: a. General Purpose Mist Spray:65%. b. General Purpose Web Spray:55%. c. Special Purpose (all types):70%. F. Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)content than required by Green Seal Standards GS-11 and GC-03, SCAQMB Rule 1113, in grams/Liter as follows: • 1. VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed the following for each product: a. Non-flat opaque products:150. b. Flat opaque products: 50. c. Anti-corrosive paint:250. d. Floor coating:100. e. Clear varnish: 350. f. Sanding sealer: 275. g. sealer:250. h. Other sealers:200. i. Stains:250. j. Lacquer:Not allowed. 2. Comply with other requirements of GS-11 (component limitations, scrubbability, hiding • power, washability). G. Carpet, Carpet Tile, Carpet Cushion and Adhesives: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus Testing Program Limits, Emission Factor Limit in mg/sq.. m. x hour as follows: 1. Total Carpet or Carpet Tile VOC: 0.50 a. 4-Phenylcyclohexene: 0.05 b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 c. Styrene: 0.40 d. Green Label Plus testing for Acetaldehyde, Benzene, Caprolactam, 2-Ethylhexanoic Acid, Formaldehyde, 1-Methyl-2-Pyrrolidinone, Naphthalene, Nonanal, Octanal, 4- Phenylcyclohexene, Styrene, Toluene, and Vinyl Acetate. 2. Total Adhesive VOC: 10.00 a. Formaldehyde: 0.05 b. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 3. Total Cushion VOC: 1.00 a. 4-Phenylcyclohexene: 0.05 b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 c. BHT(butylated hydroxytoluene):0.30 H. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced. I. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. J. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS r2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. D. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. E. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions"Article for proposal of product. F. Visual Selection Specification: Selection of products for color, pattern, density, or texture will be by Architect from Manufacturer's full range, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase"standard range of colors, patterns, textures"or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 2. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase"full range of colors, patterns, • textures"or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Substitutions may be considered during construction when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 1. Note any departures from the Contract Documents or changes in previously reviewed submittals which were not commented upon in the initial review of information. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product, or that it provides value to the project through a reduced level of performance that is deemed acceptable by the Owner. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. • 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with • re-approval by authorities. 6. Will reimburse the Architect for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing and additional Construction Administration services as a result of the proposed substitution. E. Conditions for Substitution after Bidding/Negotiating Period: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results including warranty, maintenance service or source replacement of parts. 4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule or the work of other trades. 5. Requested substitution will not require changing specifications or affect the Owner's activities. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. The Contractor agrees to reschedule activities around the required redesign time needed • without changing Substantial Completion date and reimburse Architect for changes to the building design, including design, detailing and additional Construction Administration services as a result of the proposed substitution. F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or product data submittals,without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. 1. Submit proposed substitution 14 days prior to submittal. G. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit electronically for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 3. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 4. Requests during Procurement(Bidding): Specified in Procurement Documents. 5. Requests after Bidding/Negotiating Period : Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS • D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in a manner to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets,where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other • contaminants. H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. I. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. J. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. K. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. L. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. M. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set 441911 Advancement of Construction Technology • SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding/Negotiating Stage) Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: A/E Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: History: o New product o 1-4 years old o 5-10 years old o More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: • o Point-by-point comparative data attached—REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Architect: Address: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work:o No o Yes;explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: o No o Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. Supporting Data Attached: o Drawings o Product Data o Samples o Tests o Reports o • ©Copyright 2004,Construction Specifications Institute, Page 1 of 2 June 2004 99 Canal Center Plaza,Suite 300,Alexandria,VA 22314 CSI Form 13.1A SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding/Negotiating Stage-Continued) • The Undersigned certifies: •Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. •Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. •Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable,is available. •Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. •Cost data as stated above is complete.Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. •Proposed substitution does not affect functional clearances. •Coordination,installation,and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: • A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION o Substitution approved—Make submittals in accordance with Specifications Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. o Substitution approved as noted—Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. o Substitution rejected—Use specified materials. o Substitution Request received too late—Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: o Contractor o Subcontractor o Supplier o Manufacturer ❑A/E o • ©Copyright 2004,Construction Specifications Institute, Page 2 of 2 June 2004 99 Canal Center Plaza,Suite 300,Alexandria,VA 22314 CSI Form 13.1A PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Cutting and patching. C. Laying out the work. D. Cleaning and protection. E. Starting of systems and equipment. F. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. G. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures. H. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Cutting and Patching: If not shown in Documents, submitt an RFI in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. C. Substantial Completion Documents: Statement that Project is substantially complete and list of • incomplete items (Punch List). 1. 1 copy. 2. Other items listed under Substantial Completion in Part 3. D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate to be kept on file in Contractor's office. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. B. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. C. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property, as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). D. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations, as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). E. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. F. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, • water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS • A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product.Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION • A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS • B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute • patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate • surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. 1. Do not overcut at corners of masonry, concrete, metals and similar rigid materials. G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated element. J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. K. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. • L. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. 3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS • G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up'under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration • and instruction of owner personnel. E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.11 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and will not damage the Work. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; • dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 3.12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES • A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. D. Substantial Completion: Submit written statement that Contract Documents have been reviewed,work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. a. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. b. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls,floors, equipment, and building systems. c. Include the following information at the top of each page: Project name; Date; Name of Architect; Name of Contractor; Page number. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties,workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar • releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction digital photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. E. Certificate of Substantial Completion: On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Re-inspection is Extraordinary Contract Administration Service, Section 01 20 00. • 3. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirement for Final Completion. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS • F. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architects and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. G. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. H. Notify Architect when work is ready for Final Completion. 1. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 3. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 5. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. I. Final Completion: On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will certify a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of work that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. J. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1. Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. II/ 2. Re-inspection is Extraordinary Contract Administration Service, Section 01 20 00. 3.13 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or a two year warranty shall be provided for the envelope systems as required under Oregon State Law. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following should not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration whenever possible or as required by law: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring. 5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps; see Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing for use options. 6. Concrete: May be crushed and used as riprap, aggregate, sub-base material, or fill. 7. Bricks: May be used on project if whole, or crushed and used as landscape cover, sub-base material, or fill. 8. Asphalt paving: May be recycled into paving for project. 9. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 10. Glass. • 11. Gypsum drywall and plaster. 12. Plastic buckets. 13. Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet tile, and carpet remnants, both new and removed: DuPont (http://flooring.dupont.com)and Interface (www.interfaceinc.com)conduct reclamation programs. 14. Asphalt roofing shingles. 15. Paint. 16. Plastic sheeting. 17. Rigid foam insulation. 18. Windows, doors, and door hardware. 19. Plumbing fixtures. 20. Mechanical and electrical equipment. 21. Fluorescent lamps (light bulbs). 22. Acoustical ceiling tile and panels. E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. F. The following sources may be useful in developing the Waste Management Plan: 1. Metro's Construction Industry Recycling Toolkit, www.metro-region.org/toolkit. 2. State DEQ Commercial Waste Reduction Clearinghouse, at www.deq.state.or.us/wmc/cwrc. G. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. • 5. Incineration, either on-or off-site. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL H. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory 4.0 9 rY q requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. D. Material Recovery Facility: Waste sorting facility where commingled materials are accepted and recovered for recycling or salvage. E. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. F. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. G. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. I. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. • J. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. K. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. L. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. M. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. N. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. O. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. P. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. Q. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Develop Waste Management Plan within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of Bid, or prior to any trash or waste removal,whichever occurs sooner; submit projection of all trash and waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling. C. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s)where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 2. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, • salvage, or recycling. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL • 3. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. 4. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 5. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect. C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, • salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. As a minimum, provide: a. Separate area for storage of materials to be reused on-site, such as wood cut-offs for blocking. b. Separate dumpsters for each category of recyclable. c. Recycling bins at worker lunch area. 2. Label containers and areas with durable, weather-resistant signs. Use clear simple language. Use multiple languages spoken at Project Site. 3. Provide containers as required. 4. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 5. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. E. Alternative to Site Separation: Material Recovery Facility that provides specified documentation is acceptable in lieu of source-separated recycling facilities. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. • END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manual at partial completion. C. Warranties (and Bonds) Manual. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. Items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: • 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA-GENERAL A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. • D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES • A. For Each Product,Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer,winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative • maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLING OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. 1. Multiple Volumes: Divide 0& M information logically following CSI MasterFormat when more than one binder is necessary. 2. Subtitle binders by Volume Number and CSI sub group title or CSI division title as appropriate. D. Cover: Identify each binder with printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify Subtitle appropriate for subject matter of contents, Month and Year of Substantial Completion. E. Table of Contents: Project name on each page; list products and systems included in Volume, • indexed by CSI Section number. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • F. Information Page: Project name; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; date of substantial completion. G. Index of Products: Table that can be sorted by word processor or spreadsheet; printed and digital formats; include product information under the following column headings: 1. Product Name 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. O&M Volume Number 5. Section Number H. Arrange content by systems under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product or system, with Specification Section number and product name. 1. Product Summary: On divider page or a separate first page indicate Specification Section number and title, product or system name, manufacturer, model, major components, supplier and installer information. J. Text: Manufacturer's printed or typewritten information on 20 pound paper. K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. L. Elevator Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit an additional copy of information for elevator in a separate manual,formatted similar to primary manual. This Manual will be kept in Elevator Machine Room. 1. When Project includes more than one Elevator Machine Room, provide separate manuals 11110with information for elevators served by that machine room. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS MANUAL A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined. 1. Always provide, at a minimum, the responsible Subcontractor's, supplier's and manufacturer's standard product warranty unless noted otherwise in the individual specification sections. 2. All listed manufacturers and all listed installers through the act of submitting a bid are confirming obligatory responsibility for providing an equal quantity and equal quality warranty to the design basis warranties listed, unless individual specification sections note otherwise. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS,with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. 1. Do not include "And Bonds"when Project does not include bonds. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which • specified, and the name of product or work item. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. • Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION r • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Concrete toppings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Include substantiating substantial test data to show compliance with ACI 318 Chapter 5. • C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. The steel reinforcement detailer shall generate all shop drawing bending and installation details from the structural and architectural drawings and specifications. The use of reproductions or photocopies of the contract drawings shall not be permitted. 1. Provide details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. 2. Shop drawing re-submittals shall clearly identify all revisions to previous submittals. a. Heavy ink clouded outlines (revision clouds)shall be drawn around revised areas of individual sheets. b. Architect/Engineer will not review information outside of revision clouds on resubmitted drawings. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. E. Samples: For vapor retarder. F. Welding certificates: If welding of reinforcing is used. G. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. 1. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. • H. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Admixtures. • 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives. 9. Vapor barriers. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM 94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural "Concrete", Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." • E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes. c. Ready mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold-and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Redesign or Departures from Requirements of the Contract Documents Initiated by Contractor: 1. Obtain written acceptance from the Architect and Architect's consultants. 2. Bear costs for Contractor-initiated or construction error due to changes in type,form, system, or details of construction from those indicated by the contract documents. 3. Costs of review of such changes by Architect and Architect's consultants will be deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. • 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. • 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, internally disconnecting or removable ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm)to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: Refer to General Structural Notes. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: All reinforcing steel to be welded or bent in field: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice" of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.05 CONCRETE MATERIALS • A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray. • a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm). D. Water: ASTM C 94/C94-M and potable. 2.06 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixure: ASTM C 494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.07 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. • 1. Available Products: a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace &Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16. e. Meadows,W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-105. h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A. 2.08 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Available Products: a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals- Building Systems; Confilm. c. Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm d. ChemMasters; Spray-Film e. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Aquafilm. f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. g. Euclid Chemical Company(the); Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. k. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm. • I. Meadows,W.R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • m. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. n. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm. o. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. p. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; Pro-Film. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m)when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 1. Available Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound#2 DR WB. b. BASF Construction Chemicals- Building Systems; Kure 200. c. Chem Masters; Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB. g. Euclid Chemical Company(The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE WB 30C. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. IPi. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR. I. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin. n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear. o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB. q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. 2.09 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class, suitable for application temperature and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-)thick galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)and that can be feathered at edges to match • adjacent floor elevations. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement • as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm)or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa)at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm)or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 and in accordance with the following: 1. Compressive Strength: Refer to General Structural Notes. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Refer to General Structural Notes. • 3. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having the air content specified in the General Structural Notes. 4. Slabs on Grade to Receive Special Finish Work of Section 03 35 00: Use of fly ash or slab in this mix is not acceptable. Control potential shrinkage of concrete mix as necessary to effectively mitigate cracks, deformation and other undesirable characteristics due to loss of excess water of hydration, but in no case shall shrinkage exceed 0.035 percent. Provide evidence of prior successful use with slabs having Special Finish similar to that required for this Work. a. Slump limit: 5 inches+/- 1 inch. b. Water/Cement Ratio: W/C = 0.45. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 20 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum,with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 20 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 30 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 20 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica Fume: 50 percent portland cement minimum,with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 20 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of • cement. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing (plasticizer)or high-range water-reducing (superplasticizer) admixture in concrete, as required,for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)]for smooth-formed finished surfaces. a. Provide smooth-formed finish at columns to remain exposed. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm)for rough-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood rustications, keyways, reglets, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Install keyways, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. • K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE L. Coat contact surfaces of forms, rustications and chamfer strips with form-release agent, • according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete at exterior walls, where flashing is shown. 3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams,walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that do not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)for 24 hours after placing concrete if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. Do not reuse boards used in board-formed surfaces without prior inspection and approval by the Architect. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and Iaitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces. 3.04 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.05 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.06 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at • locations indicated or as approved by Architect. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 9 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Use a bonding agent or roughen interface to '1/4" (6mm) amplitude at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-(3.2mm-)wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. • 3.07 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix. C. Adjust mix as required to maintain specified air content at the point of discharge. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. • 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 10 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. • 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C)at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.08 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. • 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete or where otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces,strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.09 FINISHING SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of Y4 inch (6mm) in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to be • covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, or built-up or membrane roofing. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 11 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with any thin film-finish coating system. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed: a. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom where indicated. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. F. Exterior Flatwork Finish:Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete flatwork; sidewalks, platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to • complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces of slabs receiving Special Finish work of 03 35 00 and to other slabs if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1 by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. • c. Absorptive cover,water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 12 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover CCccrete surfacwe-reco for curing concrete, placed in widest practicableoveron width,with es sidesith and moisturends lappedtaining at leasver t 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of a floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. b. Do not cure slabs receiving Special Finish work of 03 35 20 with curing compound. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. • a. Do not cure slabs receiving Special Finish work of 03 35 00 with curing and sealing compound. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm)sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets,fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Structural Notes. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 13 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm)wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm)to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with • adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: As indicated in the Statement of Special Inspections and Testing sheets of the Drawings. C. Concrete Tests: As indicated in the Statement of Special Inspections and Testing sheets of the Drawings. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 35 16 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bonded abrasive polishing of exposed new concrete floors to a Class B aggregate exposure and a Gloss Level of 3: 1. Existing and new cast-in place concrete floor and stair tread finish removal including up to edge terminations and up to and around penetrations. This is to also include expansion joint infills. 2. Joint and crack filler. 3. Grinding and polishing hardened concrete floors, stair treads, and expansion joint infills. 4. Application of penetrating concrete sealer-hardener. 5. Oil repellant sealer. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: Terminology established by the Concrete Polishing Association of America. B. Aggregate Exposure: Grinding a concrete floor surface with bonded abrasives to achieve a specified class of exposed aggregate, classified as A, B, C and D with varying levels of exposed aggregate. C. Finished Gloss: Processing a concrete floor surface to achieve a specified level of finished gloss prior to application of any protective treatment; Flat(ground), satin (honed), semi polished, and highly polished are measured in reflective clarity (DOI), and reflective sheen (specular gloss). Finished Gloss is classified as levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 with varying degrees of reflective clarity, and sheen.; 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. Performance Criteria for final finish: 1. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779- Up to 20-26% increase in abrasion resistance.- 2. Impact Strength: ASTM C805 Up to 21% increase impact strength. 3. Ultra violet Light and water Spray:ASTM G23-81 - No adverse effect to ultra violet and water spray. 4. Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase in light reflectivity. 5. Coefficient of friction: 0.6 per ANSI 101.3. 6. Minimum flatness and level of F(F) of 35 and F(L)of 35 per ASTM E 1155. 7. Gloss at 60 degrees from vertical of 70 to 85 units per ASTM D 523. 8. Slip resistance of diamond polished concrete: Provide minimum 0.8 static coefficient to qualify as a slip resistant surface per Voices of Safety International VOSI V41.21 test method. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Certification of Mix Design Review: Submit finish floor system manufacturer representative's review and acceptance of the mix design submitted per section 03 30 00-Cast in Place Concrete for concrete flatwork to receive bonded abrasive polish finish. D. Product data: 1. Certification of Mix Design Review: Floor finish system manufacturer's review of the mix design submitted per Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete and all salient information on placement, and cure of concrete flatwork to receive special finish work of this Section. 2. Submit manufacturer's technical data specifications and test data giving descriptive data, curing time, and application requirements. 3. Finished Floor Slip Resistance: Provide performance data for representative area of finished concrete flatwork demonstrating compliance with slip resistance requirements indicated above in 1.03 A., 8. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 35 16 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 4. Submit manufacturer's special concrete finish describing each product to be provided, • giving manufacturer's name and product name for the specified material proposed to be provided under this section. 5. Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet. E. Maintenance Data: Complete information on procedures, equipment and materials necessary for routine maintenance of finished floors and periodic renovation of finish appearance. F. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming compliance with specified performance criteria. G. Installer's Certification. H. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures and instructions for each special concrete finish;which when approved by the Architect,will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation. I. Pre-installation meeting minutes. J. Manufacturer's technical representative to submit to Architect and Owner's representative field reports for each site visit. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: Provide concrete finishing components and materials from single manufacturer or as approved through the substitution request process. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. Applicator must have availability of proper equipment to perform work within scope of this project on a timely basis. 2. Installer to provide manufacturer trained personnel, experienced, and skilled in application • of materials and system finish specified in adequate numbers and maintain supervision over personnel. C. Manufacturer's Certification: Letter of certification from concrete finish manufacturer stating that installer is certified applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with proper procedures and installation requirements required by the manufacturer. D. Field Quality Control: 1. Notify Architect and Owner's representative a minimum of 7 days prior to any Work. 2. Technical representative of materials manufacturer to observe Work in progress and at a minimum these other times: a. Pre-installation meeting. b. Installation of mock-up. c. Observation of completed installation. 3. Document site visits in writing with copy to Architect. 1.06 MOCK-UPS: A. Provide mock-ups of each type finish in a selected area, to demonstrate typical joints, surface finished gloss, color variation (if any), aggregate exposure and standard of workmanship. 1. Size: 100 square feet for each type. 2. Location: As selected by Architect. 3. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this work. 4. Maintain and protect mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work. 5. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished work if undisturbed at time of substantial completion. 6. Notify Architect or Owner Representative seven days in advance of dates and times when • mock-ups will be constructed. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 35 16 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 411 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Conduct conference at Project Site two weeks before starting Work of this section. B. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related Work. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original containers,with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand name and directions for storage. B. Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed containers. Maintain record of container numbers. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of concrete floors prior to and after finishing: 1. No satisfactory chemical or cleaning procedure is available to remove petroleum stains from the concrete surface. Prevention is therefore essential. 2. All hydraulic powered equipment must be diapered to avoid staining of the concrete. 3. No trade shall park vehicles on the inside slab. If necessary to complete their scope of work, drop cloths shall be placed under vehicles at all times. 4. No pipe cutting machine shall be used on the inside floor slab. 5. Steel will not be placed on interior slab to avoid rust staining. 6. Acids and acidic detergents shall not come into contact with slab. 7. All trades shall be informed that the slab must be protected at all times. B. Environmental limitations: 1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture • content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting topping performance. 2. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 28 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application of hardener/sealer can begin. 3. Application of hardener/sealer shall take place 10 days prior to installation of equipment and substantial completion, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application. C. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Protect floor access panels from damage in new and existing exposed concrete floors. Intent is to have access panels flush to adjacent polished concrete floors. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Ten year non-dusting warranty covering application and use of chemicals, diamond tooling and polishing equipment for installation of polished concrete floor. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Basis: Husqvarna, Hiperfloor. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hardener-Sealer-Densifier Requirements: 1. Densifier: Nano-sized particles of reactive, amorphous colloidal silica in water. 2. VOC Content: Zero volatile organic compounds. 3. pH: 9.5-10.5. • 4. Consistency and Color: Non-gel forming with no visible residue or whitening when applied to concrete surfaces. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 35 16 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING B. Joint Filler: Semi-rigid, 2-component, self-leveling, 100%solids, rapid curing, polyurea control • joint and crack filler with Shore A 80 or higher hardness. 1. Type recommended by hardener-sealer-densifier manufacturer and compatible with hardener-sealer-densifier. C. Latex Based Grout to fill exposed air pockets and aggregate lost due to grinding process 1. Type recommended by hardener-sealer-densifier manufacturer and compatible with hardener-sealer-densifier. 2. Bonding agent allows concrete dust to receive densification process and does not introduce colors outside of concrete matrix, no epoxy based grout product. D. Oil Repellent Sealer: Ready to use, silane, siloxane and fluoropolymer blended water based solution sealer, quick drying, low-odor, oil and water repellent, VOC compliant and compatible with chemically hardened floors. 1. Type recommended by hardener-sealer-densifier manufacturer and compatible with hardener-sealer-densifier. E. Metal-bond and resin-bond diamond tooling appropriate for grinding, polishing and refinement of bonded abrasive polished concrete floor. 1. 13 millimeter metal-bond, industrial diamond impregnated grinding segment for aggregate exposure and latex grout application. 2. Resin bond diamond impregnated tooling for refinement and polishing. 2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION EQUIPMENT A. Grinder: Triple-headed planetary type having fully independent speed/directional control of plate and satellite heads, with minimum 700 pounds grinding pressure and phase correction in conjunction with vacuum filtration system. PART 3 -EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate,with installer present, for conditions affecting performance and quality of finish. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until such observations have been made, unsatisfactory conditions are corrected, and have been approved in writing to Architect. B. Verify that base slab meet finish and surface profile requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 -Cast-In-Place Concrete, and Project Conditions above. C. Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents. D. Concrete must be in place a minimum of 28 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application can begin. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent finishes and floor that will be exposed. B. Verify that protection is adequate daily and with each stage of finishing. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Floor, cast stair components and expansion joint infill to be prepared for densifier application with specified diamond grinding steps, where applicable, followed by final polishing steps: 1. Level Two( Satin/ Honed) requires 150 grit metal bonded diamonds, 50 grit resin diamonds, 120 grit resin diamonds, 220 grit resin diamonds, densifier and 400 grit resin diamonds; B. Sealing, Hardening and Polishing of Concrete Slabs: 1. Application is to take place at 28 days after new slab has been placed. Existing slabs with cementitious cast underlayment or fill back areas using polymer modified cementitious fill • should be polished no sooner than 14 days after placement. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 35 16 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 2. Densifier shall be applied by a certified applicator, following applicable procedures as recommended by the manufacturer and as required to match approved mock-up. 3. Achieve hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the sheen. 4. Finish to within %"of vertical surfaces where practical. Finish remainder of slab to vertical surface with hand held grinder/polisher. 5. Polish to pre-determined level based on approved mock-up. C. Sealer: 1. Apply sealer on entire floor as final finish of polished concrete. Follow application directions and burnish as recommended to level required to match mock-up final sheen. D. Hand Tool Grinding/Polishing: Provide consistent floor finish level up to edge of walls and other vertical floor mountings or floor penetrations, including stairs, stair treads, and floor expansion joint infilled components. 3.04 CLEANING A. Keep work area clean and free of debris at all times. B. Remove spatter or dusting from adjoining surfaces, as necessary, depending on grinding process. C. Repair or replace damaged surfaces caused by preparation, polishing, or cleaning operations. D. Remove debris from jobsite. 1. Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers in accordance with local regulations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application,for time period • recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Final Protection of Polished Concrete: 1. Following completion of the final polishing, protect finished work until fully cured in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. 2. After finish work is fully cured, and prior to opening area to traffic, protect from other trades by covering with a breathable product, such as"Ramboard" or thin curing blanket. Do not use hardboard or any wood based products in direct contact with concrete as wood tannins will leave stain patterns on concrete surface. 3.06 A. Manufacturer, Owner representative, polishing sub and responsible party for facility maintenance to review manufacture recommended maintenance program of polished floor. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 54 00 CAST UNDERLAYMENT • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment. B. Primer. C. Sealer. D. Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and product limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on surface preparation, mixing instructions, environmental limitations, and installation instructions. C. Manufacturer's Documentation: Verify mix expiration dates are not exceeded. D. Sealer: Submit product data demonstrating compatibility with underlayment and finish floor material. E. AHJ certificate of compliance that underlayment materials conform to requirements for the required fire rated assembly. F. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, with minimum five years experience. • B. Provide priming and sealing materials certified by manufacturer to be compatible with underlayment and other topical materials and that will not adversely affect underlayment or interfere with application of finishes. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure,freezing, and ambient temperature greater than 105 degrees F. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Prepare mock-up in location designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with underlayment work until workmanship of mock-up has been approved by Architect. B. Construct mock-up of underlayment material, minimum 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, illustrating all portions of specified work. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 24 hours before, during and 72 hours • after installation of underlayment. C. During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 54 00 CAST UNDERLAYMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Underlayment: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements;www.ardexamericas.com. 2. Dependable Chemical Co., Inc: www.floorprep.com. 3. Hacker Industries, Inc: www.hackerindustries.com. 4. Maxxon Corporation: www.maxxon.com. 5. USG,www.usg.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gypsum-Based Underlayment: Gypsum based mix, that when mixed with water in accordance with manufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 3000 psi, tested per ASTM C472. 2. Density: Maximum 120 lb/cu ft. 3. Final Set Time: 1 to 2 hours, maximum. 4. Thickness: 1 inch at tile and resilient flooring; 1 1/4 inch at carpeted areas. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials. C. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type. D. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer. E. Sealer: Manufacturer's standard sealer that is compatible and accepted by finish flooring • materials. 2.03 MIXING A. Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Sealing tape for application to wood stud wall framing plates to stop moisture migration into wood from underlayment. B. Sealant: Elastomeric Sealant, see Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. C. Acoustic Underlayment: 1. Acousti-mat II —www.maxxon.com <http://www.maxxon.com> 2. USG Sound mat SRM-25—www.usg.com/levelrock-srm-25-sound-reduction-mat 3. Quiet Qurl 55/025 MC—www.keenebuilding.com PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum byproducts, or other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth. B. Vacuum clean surfaces. C. Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry. D. Close floor openings. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 03 54 00 CAST UNDERLAYMENT • 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place to indicated thickness, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft. C. Place after partition installation. 3.04 CURING A. Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached. B. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field inspection and testing, as specified in Section 01 40 00. B. Placed Material: Agency will inspect and test for conformance to specification requirements. 1. Prepare compression test cubes for each placement of 1,000 square feet or less. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and cracking. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces. 3.07 SEALER A. Sealing: Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods, including but not limited to; bathrooms, toilet rooms, laundry areas, and all areas within 10 feet of all other sinks with manufacturer's approved sealer and according to the manufacturer's specifications. Any floor • areas where the surface has been damaged shall be cleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering or location. Where floor goods manufacturers require special adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these recommendations. B. Floor Goods Procedures: See the manufacturer's"Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Underlayments" brochure for guidelines for installing finished floor goods. 3.08 END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clay Facing Brick. B. Mortar. C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Flashings. E. Installation of Lintels(see 05 50 00 for lintels).. F. Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar. C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. Include the following: 1. Masonry Units a. Include data on material properties material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test reports for: 1) Efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. 2) Durability of surface appearance after 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 (or a list of addresses of buildings in Project's area where proposed brick has been used successfully and with a minimum five year in-place history of durability. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Joint reinforcement 6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. G. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with recommendations and distributed standards of the Masonry Institute of Oregon including "Technical Notes on Brick Construction" by Brick Industry Association (BIA) and "TEK • Manual for Concrete Masonry Design and Construction" by National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA). SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and • color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Appearance: Where brick and CMU is exposed to view, use full sized, uncut units except as required for end conditions and penetrations. Install with even, tooled joints throughout. 1.04 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 43 39 Coordinated Mock-ups. 1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS • A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. B. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. C. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. D. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER • F. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph , do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Mutual Materials;www.mutualmaterials.com. a. Contact: Mike Baker, (503)650-2939, mbaker@mutualmaterials.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Color and Texture: Two color blend a 50-50 mix of Mediterranean and Castle Gray- both smooth. 2. Size: 2-1/2 inch x 11-1/2 inch Norman;with 1/2 inch joints. 3. Joint: Concave tooled joint. C. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units can be sawn to produce equivalent effect. 1. Special corner shapes, to meet requirements for specified coursing; 8x8 inches nominal and standard size brick solid/without holes. 2. Special radiused shapes, of size and type to meet requirements for specific radiused building coursing conditions indicated. D. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. E. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not • effloresced." 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. D. Pigments for Colored Mortar: None; standard gray mortar. E. Water: Clean and potable. F. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with • ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated G. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. B. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Provide two-piece assemblies hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs or to concrete shear walls. • 1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER 2. VVire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick. • 3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches. 4. Seismic Feature: Provide lip, hook, or clip on end of wire ties to engage or enclose not less than one continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire of 0.1483 inch diameter. C. Metal-to-Metal Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; corrosion resistant finish or hot dip galvanized to ASTM Al53/A153M. D. Steel Lintel Angles: See Section 05 50 00. E. Shelf Angle and Support Brackets: See Section 05 50 00. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304, soft temper; 26 gage, 0.0187 inch thick;finish 2B to 2D. B. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D4637, Type I, 0.040 inch thick. C. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self-adhering composite material comprising rubberized asphalt adhesive compound bonded to cross-laminated polyethylene film, minimum 0.030 inch total thickness. D. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. B. Weeps: Polyester mesh. C. Cavity Vents: Polyester mesh. D. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of • wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage. Provide system manufactured by Mortar Net. E. Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cleaners for Brick Subject to Metallic Staining: 1) 202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 2) Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc. F. Cleaning Solution: Eco Chem NMD 80. 2.06 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. 1. Type S for all applications. B. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous • pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER • unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. E. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible, cut edges concealed. F. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform • thickness. C. Brick Units: 1. Bond: 1/3 Running Bond. 2. Coursing: Four units and four mortar joints to equal 12 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: As indicated above. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar,with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, hold back one-half-unit length for one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. C. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the brick D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls. • B. Install cavity vents in veneer walls at 32 inches on center horizontally below shelf angles and lintels and at top of walls. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER 3.06 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -MASONRY VENEER A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. D. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete with seismic masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete shearwall with two metal fasteners of type indicated. 2. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Maintain air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, on Structural notes. 3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all 1111 locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. B. Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. C. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products or open head joints to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose-fill insulation. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER • E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material. F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products or open head joints to form vents. 3.09 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 90 05 for sealant performance. D. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: B. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 1111 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total C. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. D. Joints 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for pipes and conduit. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. • B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING,AND CLEANING • A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application 3.14 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. D. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fines and smears before tooling joints. E. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. F. Clean masonry with a proprietary non-acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.15 PROTECTION 1110 A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 05 16 SHOP APPLIED METAL COATING • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and shop applied high-performance coating on steel fabrications specified in the following Sections: 1. 05 50 00- Metal Fabrications B. Coating System: Thermally fused polymer primer and top coat. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Proposed preparation and film thicknesses. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on prepared steel angle, 12 inches long. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Coordinated Sample: Railing infill panel, coordinate with Section 05 75 00. D. Applicator's qualifications. E. Sample warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm that specializes is high performance thermally fused powders. Member of Powder Coating Institute (PCI). 1. Provide products from one Manufacturer. 110 B. Applicator's Qualifications: Experienced powder coater complying with the following: 1. Approved by Manufacturer. 2. Member of PCI is preferred. 3. Established in-house quality control in compliance with PCI recommendations or NACE requirements, including certified inspector. C. Single Applicator: Arrange for work in this Section by one applicator. Work may be executed in Applicator's shop or fabricator's shop, providing adequate facility for preparation, application, and protection of personnel and products. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Coated Steel Fabrications: Do not handle coated products until coating is set and attains 90% hardness. 1. Deliver products protected with recycled and recyclable cardboard and paper. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's and Applicator's 10 year product and application warranty against coating defect including specified performance requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Coating Powders: 1. Akzo Nobel Interpon Powder Coatings. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Spraylat Powder Coatings. 4. Tiger Drylac Powder Coatings. B. Acceptable Portland Area Applicators: • 1. Portland Powder Coating, Inc. 2. Powder Tech, Inc. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 05 16 SHOP APPLIED METAL COATING 3. Tufcoat, Inc. 11111 2.02 COATING POWDER A. Primer and top coat from one acceptable manufacturer and recommended by Manufacturer for use together. B. Primer: Epoxy or urethane resin with zinc-rich filler or mio-zinc filler,formulated to prevent steel corrosion and create a barrier to water. C. Top Coat: Polyurethane color coating for exterior exposure complying with the following: 1. Performance Requirement: Comply with AAMA 2604. 2. Gloss: Semi-gloss, MPI level 5. 3. Color: Match Architect's sample. 2.03 FIELD TOUCH-UP COATING A. When required by Contractor for field touch-up, provide primer and top coat in liquid form in aerosol cans. Label cans including Project, product and contents, shelf life, basic application instructions. 2.04 PREPARATION A. Examine metal fabrications. Notify fabricator of defects that must be corrected before coating. Defects include: 1. Rough areas not complying with fabrication standard. 2. Pits or areas that may cause coating failure. B. Comply with coating Manufacturer's instructions, but not less than the following. C. Steel: SSPC-SP6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning or SSPC-SP8 Pickling. D. Galvanized Hardware: Blast cleaning or as recommended by Manufacturer. 2.05 SHOP FINISHING A. Apply primer and top coat within 8 hours of preparation. Products may be held overnight in warm oven, only. B. Apply coating in compliance with manufacturer's instructions to achieve thickness, gloss and performance specified. 1. Primer Thickness: not less than 3.5 mils. 2. Top Coat Thickness: not less than 2.5 mils. C. Apply top coat to pre-geled primer. D. Galvanized Fasteners: Finish exposed portion. Mask working threads. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of work finished in this Section is specified in fabrication Sections. B. Coordinate delivery schedule so that finished fabrications are installed as quickly as possible and as near Substantial Completion as practical. 3.02 FIELD TOUCH UP A. Prepare surface by SSPC-SP3. B. Sand adjacent finish to feather edge. Constrain feathering to less than 1 inch strip. C. Touch up damaged and uncoated surfaces immediately with primer to approximate power version. Apply two coats if necessary. D. Touch up top coat to approximate powder version. Feather edge. Apply several coats if necessary. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 05 16 SHOP APPLIED METAL COATING • 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION • A. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. END OF SECTION r • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 111111 PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements"for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications"for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 3. Division 09 Section "Painting and Coating"for surface preparation and priming requirements. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,"that support design loads. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Structural steel shop drawings shall contain sufficient detail and information to allow complete fabrication and erection of the structure without reference to the contract drawings either on the fabrication shop floor or at the project site. The steel detailer shall generate all shop drawing fabrication and installation details from the structural and • architectural drawings and specifications. The use of reproductions or photocopies of the contract drawings shall not be permitted. a. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. b. Include embedment drawings. c. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. d. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 2. Shop drawing re-submittals shall clearly identify all revisions to previous submittals. a. Heavy ink, clouded outlines (revision clouds) shall be drawn around revised areas of individual sheets. b. Engineer/Architect will not review information outside of revision clouds on resubmitted drawings. C. Welding Certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Articles to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Product Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. • 4. Shop primers. 5. Nonshrink grout. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING G. Source quality-control test reports. • H. Written Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs): In accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements for each welded joint proposed for use whether prequalified or by testing. Include all welding that will be performed during fabrication (shop)and installation/erection (field) Include the following items as applicable for the welding process: 1. Indicate as-detailed configuration, and the maximum and minimum fit-up configurations. 2. Identify specific electrode and manufacturer. 3. List actual values of welding parameters to be used so clear instruction is provided to welders. 4. Steel specification(s)and grade(s)to be welded. 5. Thickness range of materials to be joined. 6. Type of joint. 7. Type of weld. 8. Size of weld. 9. Position of welding. 10. Flux and shielding gas. 11. Electrode diameter. 12. Voltage (except SMAW). 13. Current(amperage) or wire feed speed. 14. Travel speed. 15. Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperatures: Provide minimum preheat and interpass temperature for all welds, including tack welds, in accordance with AWS D1.1, Table 3.2. The Contractor may specify higher minimum temperatures as a part of the WPS. Preheat and interpass temperatures lower than those required by AWS D1.1, Table 3.2, are permitted provided the WPS has been qualified by testing. Minimum preheat and • interpass temperatures shall be verified at a distance of 3 inches from the joint or for materials over 3 inches in thickness at a distance equal to the thickness of the part. 16. Maximum Preheat and lnterpass Temperatures: The maximum preheat and interpass temperature permitted is 550 degrees F, measured at a distance of 1 inch from the joint. This maximum temperature may not be increased with or without qualification testing. 17. Number and placement of passes. 18. Technique (stringer or weave bead). 19. Shielding gas flow rate. 20. Other pertinent information specific to the weld. I. Procedure Qualification Record (PQR): In accordance with AWS D1.1 for all procedures qualified by testing. Qualify all welds for the maximum heat input to be used on the project. J. Manufacturer's Certifications: For all welding electrodes, fluxes, and shielding gasses to be used. Certifications shall satisfy the applicable AWS A5 requirements. K. Test Reports: Copies of reports of tests conducted on shop and field bolted and welded connections. Include data on type(s)of tests conducted and test results. L. Surveys: Submit certified copies of each survey conducted by a registered land surveyor, showing elevations and locations of base plates and anchor bolts to receive structural steel, and final elevations and locations for major members. Indicate discrepancies between actual installation and contract documents. M. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations, bearing the seal and signature of a Professional Engineer, employed by the Contractor and registered in the state of the project, for the following: 1. Connections that differ from that indicated in the contract documents. 2. Requests for substitution of member sizes or material grades. • 3. Modification of the strength or configuration of structural framing for the convenience to accommodate the erection sequence, construction equipment, and/or material availability. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING • N. Maintain one copy of each document on-site. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: The installer shall have at least five years experience in this size and type of structure. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel". 1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 2. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1, "Qualification," (or approved equal). a. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and joint configuration. b. Welders who have not used the welding process for a period of 6 or more months shall be recertified. c. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility. d. WPSs for each joint type shall indicate proper AWS qualification and be available where welding is performed. e. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before performing further welding. D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" (with exceptions noted in Part 1 of this Section). 2. AISC 360 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 14th edition. 3. RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 4. ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A structural engineer who is licensed in the State of Oregon and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers'written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.06 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.07 EXCEPTIONS TO AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES A. Add the following paragraph to Section 1.8.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges: The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for site safety. The Fabricator and Erector shall review the Contract Documents and if the structure, as shown on those documents, is in conflict with the requirements of any safety regulations, the Fabricator shall notify the Structural Engineer of Record prior to commencing shop drawing production. If the Fabricator and/or Erector fail to notify the Structural Engineer of Record, as stated above, they shall become responsible for all costs for correcting such conflicts with the requirements of any and all safety regulations." B. Add the following paragraph to Section 7.10.3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges: The Erector shall have the sole responsibility for determining the means and methods used to properly and adequately brace the framing during erection." C. Revise Section 7.14 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges as follows: The correction of minor misfits by moderate amounts of reaming 2E grinding, welding-or Wig, and the drawing of elements into line with drift pins, shall be considered to be normal erection operations. Errors that cannot be corrected using the foregoing means, or that require major welding, cutting or changes in member or Connection configuration, shall be promptly reported to the Owner's Designated Representatives for Design and Construction and the Fabricator by the Erector, to enable the responsible entity to either correct the error or approve the most efficient and economical method of correction to be used by others." Particular note shall be paid to the commentary for this section of the RISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, which reads as follows: As used in this Section, the term "moderate"refers to the amount of reaming, grinding, welding or cutting that must be done on the project as a whole, not the amount that is required at an individual location. It is not intended to address limitations on the amount of material that is removed by reaming at an individual bolt hole, for example, which is limited by the bolt-hole size and tolerance requirements in the AISC and RCSC Specifications." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes, and Bars: Refer to the General Structural Notes. B. W-Shapes: Refer to the General Structural Notes. C. Channels, Angles: Refer to the General Structural Notes. D. Plate and Bar: Refer to the General Structural Notes. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: Refer to the General Structural Notes. F. Steel Pipe: Refer to the General Structural Notes. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING • G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 1. Welding electrodes shall have a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi using AWS A5 classification test. 2. Welding filler metals, as supplied by the manufacturer, shall meet the requirements for H16 (16 mL diffusible hydrogen per 100 grams deposited weld metal)as tested using the mercury or gas chromatograph method as specified in AWS A4.3, "Standard Methods for Determination of Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding." The manufacturer's Certificate of Conformance shall be considered adequate proof that the supplied electrodes meet this requirement, and no additional testing of filler metal samples or of production welds is required. 3. All low hydrogen electrodes shall be stored, handled, protected from atmospheric exposure and redried, if required, per AWS D1.1, 5.3. 4. FCAW electrodes shall be received in moisture-resistant packages that are undamaged. They shall be protected against contamination and injury during shipment and storage. Electrode packages shall remain effectively sealed against moisture until the electrode is required for use. When removed from the protective packaging and installed on machines, care shall be taken to protect the electrodes and coatings, if present, from deterioration or damage. Modification or lubrication of an electrode after manufacture for any reason is not permitted, except drying shall be permitted when recommended by the manufacturer. 2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS,AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. • 1. Finish: Plain; except where exposed to weather, Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. B. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain; except hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C, where noted in the Drawings. C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6). 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain; except hot-dip zinc coating,ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C, where noted in the Drawings. 2.03 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting"and Division 09 Section "Interior Painting." B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. 2.04 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate • according to AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" (with exceptions noted in Part 1 of this Specification Section). SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. • 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. B. Re-Entrant Corners: Provide 1/2-inch radius at all re-entrant corners, unless noted otherwise. C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.06 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, • appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for mill material. 2. Continuously seal joined members exposed to weather by continuous welds. 3. Tack welds incorporated into the final weld shall be of the same quality as the final welds, including preheat requirements. The filler metals shall be identical, unless qualified by testing and meeting the requirements of Specification 05 12 00, Part 1, "Submittals" article. C. Erection Connections, etc: Place holes, plates, or other attachments required by the Erector so as not to interfere with or cause any other detrimental effect to structural members or their connections. 2.07 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces both located within the building envelope and concealed from view. 2. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Surfaces to be field welded. 4. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 5. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 6. Galvanized surfaces, except those to be subsequently painted. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 111 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING • C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.08 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES A. Fabrication Tolerances: Unless otherwise noted, fabricate structural members to referenced AISC Specifications for allowable tolerances. Do not camber in excess of amounts shown on drawings. 2.09 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize those structural steel members and accessories that will remain exposed to weather and as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Materials for galvanizing shall be geometrically suitable for galvanizing as specified in ASTM A384 and A385. B. Bolts, nuts and washers, and iron and steel hardware components shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A 153. C. Surface Preparation: Steel shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter: Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SSPC-SP-6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." D. Coating Requirements 1. Weight: The weight of the galvanized coating shall conform to Table 2 of ASTM A 123 or Table 1 of ASTM A 153, as appropriate. 2. Surface Finish: The galvanized coating shall be continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly distributed as possible, and free from any defect that is detrimental to the stated end use of the coated article. a. Determine the integrity of the coating by visual inspection and coating thickness measurements. b. For galvanized surfaces to be painted, do not passivation-quench structural steel following galvanization. Prepare surfaces in accordance with ASTM D 6386. c. Where slip factors are required for slip-critical connections, these shall be obtained after galvanizing by suitable treatment of the faying surfaces in accordance with the latest edition of the Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 bolts as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation. 3. Adhesion: The galvanized coating shall be sufficiently adherent to withstand normal handling during transport and erection. E. Touch-Up and Repair 1. Mechanical Damage: Repair areas damaged by welding;flame cutting; or during handling, transport, or erection in accordance with ASTM A 780 by one of the following methods: a. Cold Galvanizing Compound (zinc-rich paint): Per Part 2, "Primer"Article, in accordance with ASTM A 780, Annex A2. 1) Spray-or brush-apply the touch-up paint in multiple coats to a dry film minimum • thickness of a 6 mils (4 mils for material less than 1/4-inch thick). Apply a finish coat of aluminum paint to provide a color blend with the surrounding galvanizing. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2) Verify coating thickness by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic 411 gauge. 2. Wet Storage Stain a. Remove any wet storage stain if formed and discovered prior to leaving the galvanizer's plant unless late pick up or acceptance of delivery has necessitated the material being stored in unfavorable conditions. Remove wet storage stain before installation so that premature failure of the coating will not occur. Remove wet storage stain as follows: 1) Arrange the object so that their surfaces dry rapidly. 2) Remove light deposits by means of a stiff bristle(not wire) brush. Heavier deposits are to be removed by brushing with a 5 percent solution of sodium or potassium dichromate with the addition of 0.1 percent by volume of concentrated sulfuric acid. Apply with a stiff bristle brush, and leave for approximately 30 seconds before thoroughly rinsing and drying. 3) Alternatively, a proprietary product, such as Oakite Highlite or equal,which is intended for this purpose, may be used according to manufacturer's recommendations. 4) Check coating thickness in the affected areas to ensure that the zinc coating remaining after the removal of wet storage stain is sufficient to meet or exceed the requirements of the specification. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to inspect shop welds and high-strength bolted connections and tests, and to prepare test reports in accordance with "Testing and Inspection"Article 3.6. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 411 A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments,with steel erector present,for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"with exception noted in Part 1 of this Specification Section, and AISC 360 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings". B. Base Plates: Clean concrete-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates. 1. Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 9 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 11111 C. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. D. Splice members only where indicated. E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. G. Reaming: Light drifting will be permitted to draw the parts together, but drifting to match unfair holes will not be permitted. Any enlargement of holes necessary to make connections in the field shall be done by reaming with twist drills, care being taken not to weaken the adjoining metal. If, in the judgement of the Engineer/Architect, the extent of the reaming is such that holes cannot be properly filled or accurately adjusted after reaming, the faulty member shall be discarded and replaced with a new one, and all costs and expenses resulting therefrom shall be paid by the Contractor. H. Cutting and Fitting: No cutting of sections, either flanges, webs, stems or angles shall be done by the Contractor without the consent of the Engineer/Architect, unless this cutting is particularly specified or shown on the drawings I. Corrective Measures 1. Any errors in locations or inaccuracies in the setting of anchor bolts, base plates, bearing plates, or other items of attachment or support for steel work shall be reported to the Engineer/Architect, and shall be corrected in a manner subject to the approval of the Engineer/Architect. • 2. Any misfits due to errors in fabrication shall be reported immediately to the Engineer/Architect, along with proposed method of correction of same and Engineer/Architect approval obtained before proceeding with corrective measures. 3. No members shall be cut or burned without specific approval in writing. 4. Bolted or welded connections,joints, or fastenings, which are classified as defective in the opinion of the Engineer/Architect, shall be corrected by the Contractor in a manner subject to the Engineer/Architect's approval. 3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" (with exceptions noted in Part 1 of this Specification Section)for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for mill material. 3. Tack welds incorporated into the final weld shall be of the same quality as the final welds, including preheat requirements. The filler metals shall be identical, unless qualified by testing and meeting the requirements of Specification 05 12 00, Part 1, "Submittals" article. 4. FCAW electrodes shall be protected from atmospheric exposure as follows: a. Electrode spools shall be identified and monitored for total atmospheric exposure • time. Electrodes that have been exposed for periods exceeding an accumulated 24 hours may be dried when manufacturer's recommendations show that drying is SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 10 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING effective at removing moisture and restoring electrodes to their designated diffusible • hydrogen level. Dry as specified by the manufacturer. If the electrode or the electrode spool is damaged by baking, the electrode shall not be used. 5. Each Welder working on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or mark. Each Welder shall mark or stamp this identification symbol at each weldment completed and inspected by the welder. Stamps, if used, shall be low-stress type. All welds shall be marked or stamped. C. Erection Connections, etc: Place holes, plates, or other attachments required by the Erector so as not to interfere with or cause any other detrimental effect to structural members or their connections. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections and tests and to prepare test reports in accordance with "Testing and Inspection"Article 3.6 below. 3.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. All structural steel work is subject to special inspection. Testing Agency and Inspector Requirements: 1. Special Inspector: Testing Agency shall provide qualified "Special Inspector"who will perform the inspection services. 2. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests, and state in each report whether test specimens comply with or deviate from requirements. 3. Testing agency will notify the Owner and Engineer/Architect immediately of discrepancies in the work which are time-critical or affect the construction progress. 4. Inspector will • a. Verify material identification. b. Verify bolt tightening. c. Inspect welding. B. Fabrication Inspection: When approved by the Building Official, the Owner, and Engineer/Architect,full-time special inspection in the fabrication shop by the Owner's Testing Agency may be waived, subject to the following: 1. Subject to the prior approval of the City of Portland, the Fabricator participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant. 2. All shop inspection is provided by the Contractor, per the requirements herein, and is documented. Reports and test results are to be available for the Owner's Inspector to review. 3. Periodic inspection by the Owner's Inspection Agency is allowed by the Fabricator. 4. Certified Plants: Continuous plant inspection is not required at plants producing prefabricated steel products which are certified by the Building Official. C. Contractor Responsibilities Related to Shop and Field Inspections: 1. Maintain complete records of all quality control and testing performed by the Contractor. 2. Furnish all electrical power, turning or moving of members, hoisting, staging, and other facilities required for inspection. 3. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or erected so required inspection and testingcan be accomplished. 4. Correct deficiencies in, or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. 5. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 6. Grant Inspectors full authority to inspect all material and work that fails to conform in every respect to these specifications. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 11 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING III7. When required by Engineer/Architect or Owner's Independent Testing Agency or Contractor's engaged inspection organization, make adequate platforms available to the Inspectorr for the purpose of checking high-strength bolts and welds. Scaffolding shall be provided to ensure safe performance of this operation. D. Shop and Field Tests and Inspections: Comply with Special Inspections and Testing Program Sheet S0.03 of the Drawings. 3.07 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION III • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 1111 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items, including: 1. Vehicle corner guards. 2. Balcony frame and associated railings (for handrails and guardrails see Section 05 52 00- Aluminum Railing Systems). 3. Steel embeds. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Exterior steel canopy. 6. Roof access ladder(non-ferrous from stair/ladder manufacturer). 7. Elevator pit ladder. (non-ferrous from elevator manufacturer-see Section 14 20 10). 8. Elevator shaft track structural supports. 9. Elevator sump grate. 10. Elevator hoist beam. 11. Steel bollards. 12. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. B. ANSI A14.3-American National Standard for Ladders-- Fixed --Safety Requirements. C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. D. ASTM Al53/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel • Hardware. E. ASTM A283/A283M- Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. F. ASTM A325- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. G. ASTM A325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric). H. ASTM A501/A501 M- Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. I. ASTM B210- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. J. ASTM B210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes (Metric). K. ASTM B211 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire. L. ASTM 8211 M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold-Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric). M. ASTM B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. N. ASTM 8221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]. O. AWS A2.4- Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society. • P. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M -Structural Welding Code-Steel;American Welding Society. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Q. SSPC-Paint 15-Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings. • R. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Primers(Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, plans, elevations, sections, details of installation connections and attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Templates: For anchor bolts. D. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." B. When required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), provide a design that is under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -STEEL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth,flat surfaces without blemishes. • B. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing. 1. Steel Tubing Cold-Formed: Steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. D. Plates: ASTM A 283. E. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, standard weight(Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. G. Perforated Steel Panels: 16 gauge, 0.3125" holes staggered at 3/8"centers. H. Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010) malleable iron or ASTM A 48, Class 30 (ASTM A 48M, Class 200)gray iron. I. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts,washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. J. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts)complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches(41 by 41 mm). 2. Metal thicknesses in last subparagraph above and subparagraph below are 12, 14, and 16 gage, respectively. 3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; 0.0966-inch (2.5-mm) minimum thickness; unfinished. K. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for materials being welded. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS • L. Primer: Shop primer for ferrous metal (Unless Noted Otherwise); fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664 and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. M. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. N. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MATERIALS -ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210 (ASTM B210M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. C. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM 8211 (ASTM B211 M), 6061 alloy, T6 temper. D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. 1. Fasteners: Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls, of type, grade, and class required by application indicated. 2.03 MATERIALS -STAINLESS STEEL A. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar: ASTM 666; ASTM A 240. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches(41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches(200 mm) o.c. Provide • with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout. C. Plastic-Based Metal Filler Compound: Bondo by U.S. Chemical and Plastics Co. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. E. Steel Embed Plates: Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Connections, General: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth, and contour welded surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed • fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Fabricate loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. 1. Galvanize plates after fabrication when exposed to exterior elements. H. Brick Veneer Lintels and Relief Angles: Fabricate from steel angles of sizes and types indicated and galvanize per ASTM A 123/A 123M. I. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work from structural steel of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded anchors at 24 inches(600 mm)o.c, or as indicated in Structural Documents. 2. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. J. Steel Grating: 1. Produce metal bar gratings of description indicated per NAAMM marking system that comply with the following: a. Metal Bar Grating Standard: "Standard Specifications for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating Treads" published in ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 "Metal Bar Grating Manual." b. Fabricate welded steel grating at elevator pit to comply with requirements indicated below: 1) Grating Mark W-19-4: Welded grating with bearing bars 1-3/16 inches o.c. and cross bars 4 inches o.c. 2) Bearing Bar Size: 3/4 X 1/8 inches. • c. Traffic Surface for Steel Bar Gratings: Plain. d. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.7 oz. per sq. ft. of coated surface. e. Fabricate removable grating sections with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. 1) Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated, or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, for attachment to supports. K. Steel Bollards: See Drawings for details. 1. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch-(6-mm-) minimum steel plate.Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm)anchor bolts. 3. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch-(6-mm-)thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. L. Steel Ladders: 1. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated; prime paint finish. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. 2. Siderails: Continuous, steel, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. 3. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. a. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Support each ladder with welded or bolted steel brackets at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 60 inches o.c. a. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS • 1) Bracket Material at Interior: 3/8-inch by 2 1/2-inch bar, with 3-inch leg at wall or floor for attachment with 3/4-inch lag bolt at wall and 3/-inch x 2-1/2" expansion anchor at floor. 2) Bracket Material at Exterior: As indicated. 3) Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung unless otherwise noted, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure handholds. b. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung that is filled with aluminum-oxide grout. c. Shop prime at interior and exterior locations, unless otherwise indicated. M. Elevator Pit Ladder: See Section 14 20 10. N. Building Entry Canopy: 1. Provide canopy of design indicated. Fabricate to detail from structural steel complying with referenced standards and from structural steel decking of corrugation configuration indicated. Fabricated accurately for anchorage to connection components so componets fit tightly to each other and to building structure. 2. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: a. Joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical. 1) Welded Joints: Continuously welded and ground smooth and flush. 2) Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline; concealed fastenings only. 3) Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. 4) Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for highest • quality gloss finish. 3. Finish: Prepare substrate for shop painting. O. Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish. P. Elevator Hoistway Rail Support Columns: Column sections, bracing, and connections; prime paint finish. Q. Elevator Sill Supports: Angle sections, prime paint. R. Steel Handrails/Guardrails: Design and size for shop fabrication for shop thermally fused and field high performance coating finishes. 1. Material: 1 1/2-inch schedule 40 steel pipe and fittings. 2. Finish (exterior application): Thermally fused; See Section 05 05 16. 3. Finish (interior application): See Section 09 96 00. 4. Horizontal railing infill; 3/16 inch stainless steel cable with fittings. 2.06 PREFABRICATED LADDERS A. Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible. 1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this section. 2. Materials: Aluminum; ASTM B221 (ASTM 8221 M), 6063 alloy, T52 temper. 3. Finish: Mill finish aluminum. 4. Products: a. O'Keeffe's Inc; Model 500: www.okeeffes.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.07 FINISHES -STEEL • A. Appearance of Finished Work:Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. C. Prime paint steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items specified for painted exterior finish. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete,where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. E. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Shop prime ferrous-metal items not indicated to be galvanized. 1. Hot-dip galvanize items outside the conditioned building envelope to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable, unless they are to be powder coated.. a. For those surfaces to be painted after galvanizing, prepare surfaces in accordance with ASTM D 6386. b. For those surfaces to be powder coated after galvanizing, prepare surfaces in accordance with ASTM D 7803. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Unless noted otherwise, prepare uncoated ferrous-metal • surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." a. Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. F. Powder-Coated Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prepare metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil,flux, and other foreign matter. 2. Treat prepared metal with pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils(0.04 mm). 4. Color: To be selected. 2.08 FINISHES -ALUMINUM A. Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride system; color as scheduled. 2.09 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS • 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. Steel Bollards: 1. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm)toward bollard. • 2. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. G. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 52 00 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEMS • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum handrails and railings. B. Accessories. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. See definitions in ASTM E985 for railing-related terms that apply to this Section. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Handrails and railings shall withstand structural loading as determined by allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following standards. 1. Aluminum:AA SAS-30. 2. Cold-Formed Structural Steel: AISI SG-673, Part I. 3. Glass: Fully tempered glass in glass-supported handrails and railings require a design with a safety factor of three applied to the applicable modulus of rupture listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12. B. Structural Performance: Provide handrails and railings capable of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stress of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections: 1. Top Rail: Shall withstand the following loads: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf(890 N)applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per foot(730 N/m)applied horizontally or vertically downward. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Handrails not Serving as Top Rails: Shall withstanding the following loads: • a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf(890 N) applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per foot(730 N/m) applied in any direction. 3. Guard Infill Area: Shall withstand the following loads: a. Concentrated horizontal load of 200 lbf(890 N) applied to 1 square foot(0.09 m2) at any point in system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing infill area. Loads need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails in determining stress on guard. C. Thermal Movements: Handrails and railings shall allow for movements resulting from 120 degree F (49 degree C) changes in ambient and 180 degree F (82 degree C) surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. D. Corrosion Resistance: Separate incompatible materials to prevent galvanic corrosion. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Preparation instructions and recommendations. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Installation methods. 2. Submit product data for manufacturers product lines of handrails and railings assembled from standard components, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Grout, anchoring cements and paint products. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and • railings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Samples: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 52 00 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEMS 1. Color Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors • available for products with factory-applied color finishes. 2. Finish Selection: Provide sections of railing or flat sheet metal which depict available mechanical surface finishes. 3. Verification Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components indicated below and of same thickness and metal indicated for the work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. a. 6 inch (152 mm) long sections of each different linear railing member, including handrails and top rails. E. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Design Data: For installed handrails and railing systems indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the professional engineer who was responsible for their preparation. 2. Qualification Data: Submit documentation demonstrating capability and experience in performing installations of the same type and scope as specified by this Section. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 3. Certificates: Submit certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOC's). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the manufacture of aluminum handrails and railings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of 15 years. • 2. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of five years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing aluminum handrails and railings similar in type and scope to that required for this Project. 3. Welder Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS standard qualification procedures. Operators shall carry proof of qualification on their persons. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of Federal, State, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities. C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2. D. Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of the work, fabricate and erect mock-ups for each type of finish and application required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of work. Locate mock-ups on site in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the Architect. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Obtain the Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final unit of work. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit of work. 1. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of work. E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum handrails and railings from a single source with resources to produce products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the work. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 52 00 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEMS • 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain environmental conditions(temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.08 WARRANTY A. General: See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals. B. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard form outlining the terms and conditions of their standard Limited Warranty: 1. Surface Finish Warranty: One year limited warranty. 2. Material Integrity Warranty: One year. C. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. All supplemental materials not expressly specified in this section shall be approved by the Architect prior to installation. • PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Basis: Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Equivalent products by other manufacturers are acceptable. The Architect will be the sole judge of the basis of what is equivalent. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Design Basis: Welded Picket Rail by Railcraft International Inc. www.railcraft.com. B. Metals: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. 1. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. a. Extruded Bar and Tube: ASTM B221/6221M, Alloy 6063-T5/T52. b. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube:ASTM B429/B429M,Alloy 6063-T832. c. Drawn Seamless Tube:ASTM B210/B210M,Alloy 6063-T832. d. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209/B209M, Alloy 6061-T6. e. Die and Hand Forgings:ASTM B247/B247M, Alloy 6061-T6. f. Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy A356-T6. 2. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Provide cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide cast brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. b. Provide formed or cast brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. c. Provide formed steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with • snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 52 00 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEMS d. Provide brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal anchorage. Locate set screws • on bottom of bracket. C. Railing Components: 1. Extruded Aluminum Components: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum components as follows: a. Standard Post: 2.376 inches (60.35 mm) by 2.376 inches (60.35 mm)with radiused corner, 0.100 inch (2.54 mm)wall thickness. b. Bottom Rail: 1.6926 inches(42.99 mm) high by 1.676 inches (43.57 mm) high with a 0.765 inch (19.43 mm)wide pocket on the top and an open bottom. c. Picket: 0.750 inches (19.05 mm) by 0.750 inches (19.05 mm), 0.062 inch (1.57 mm) wall thickness. d. Top Rail: Circular cross section, radius as indicated on the Drawings or, if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards with an open bottom, 0.0866 inch (2.20 mm)wall thickness. 2. Condensation Insert: Provide rigid plastic post insert to evacuate entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members, 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) by 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) by 4-1/8 inches(105 mm) high. a. Basis of Design: "Dri-Post System," Hansen Architectural Systems, Inc. D. Fasteners: 1. Handrail Anchors: Select fasteners of type, grade and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 2. Handrail and Railing Component Anchors: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. • a. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are standard fastening method for handrail and railing indicated. b. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cast-in-Place and Post Installed Anchors: Provide anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four items the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Cast-in-place anchors. b. Chemical anchors. c. Expansion anchors. E. Grout and Anchoring Cement: 1. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: Provide premixed,factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2. Interior Anchoring Cement: Provide factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at project site to create pourable anchoring, patching and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Assemble handrails and railings in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain • structural value of joined pieces. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 52 00 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEMS • B. Form changes in direction of railing members as shown on the Drawings. C. Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. D. Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets,flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to connect handrail and railing members to other construction. E. Tempered glass shall be cut to final size and shape before heat treatment; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glass. Provide thickness indicated on the Drawings, not less than required to support structural loads. F. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railings to concrete or masonry. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. G. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components as indicated on the Drawings to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. J. Provide mounted handrail wall returns at wall ends unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm)or less. 2.04 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM MFM for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Appearance of Finished Work: • a. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent units are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of final samples. Noticeable variations in the same unit are not acceptable. b. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of final samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Aluminum Finish: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Powder Coat Finish: AA-C12-C42-R1x(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard baked powder coat finish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, surface preparation, pretreatment, and application. a. Material: Polyester powder coating, 3.0 mil (0.076 mm). Comply with AAMA 2604, including, but not limited to, average film thickness. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1) Series," Forrest Paint Co. 2) 38,"TIGER Drylac U.S.A., Inc. b. b. Material: Polyester powder coating, 3.0 mil (0.076 mm). Comply with AAMA 2605, including, but not limited to, average film thickness. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1) Series," Forrest Paint Co. 2) 75," TIGER Drylac U.S.A., Inc. c. Color: TBD. d. Gloss: TBD. 2. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12-C22-A41 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, • non-specular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil [0.018 mmj)complying with AAMA 611. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 52 00 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEMS 3. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AA-M21-C22-A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, III non-specular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,film thicker than 0.7 mil [0.018 mm]with integral color or electrolytically deposited color)complying with AAMA 611. Provide color to match the Architect's sample, or, if no sample, as selected by the Architect from within full range of industry colors and color density range. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Examine substrates to receive anchors verifying that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for the Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 2. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchors, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the Project site. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: ill 1. Fitting: Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 2. Cutting and Placement: Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. a. Do not weld, cut, or abrade coated or finished surfaces of railing components that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. b. Align rails so variations from level or parallel alignment do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet(1.6 mm per m). c. Provide manufacturer's proprietary system to evacuate entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources, in order to prevent water from entering the concrete slab. In lieu of the manufacturer's proprietary system, if acceptable to the Architect, provide another means to evacuate the entrapped water, i.e., a weephole and epoxy fill system("drill-and-fill"). d. Anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete.After posts have been inserted into sleeves, solidly fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-metallic, non-shrink grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions. e. Anchor posts in concrete by forming or core drilling holes not less than 5 inches (127 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm)greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-metallic, non-shrinkgrout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions. 1) Cover anchorage joint with a round steel flange attached to post by welding to post after placement of anchoring material. 2) Cover anchorage joint with a round steel flange attached to post by set screws. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 05 52 00 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEMS • 3) Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8 inch (3 mm) buildup, sloped away from post. 3. Corrosion Protection: Provide separation as recommended by manufacturer on concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals. 4. Adjusting: Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting joint's space posts at interval indicated, but not less than required to achieve structural loads. 5. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. B. Non-Welded Railings Connections: Use mechanical joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. C. Installing Glass Panels in Glass Handrails and Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written instructions. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert and connect factory-fabricated and factory-assembled glass panels. 1. Erect glass handrails and railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized technical personnel. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and appoint exposed areas with same material. B. Cleaning: Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make • required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Installer, that shall ensure that the aluminum handrails and railings shall be without damage at time of Substantial Completion. B. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products. 4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 6. Wood furring. 7. Wood sleepers. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual)or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. • 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Shear panels. 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Powder-actuated fasteners. 6. Expansion anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING • A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: Kiln dried, unless otherwise indicated. C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer,which meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational 41111 engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX)for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior concrete walls. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY • 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches(460 mm)above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.03 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing. 2. Species: Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. B. Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions. 2. Species: Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Ceiling Joists: Construction or No. 2 grade, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 1. Species: Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 1. Species: Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. E. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 1. Application: Exposed exterior and interior framing. 2. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 2.04 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS 411 A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a single manufacturer. B. Laminated-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strands oriented to the length of the member and then fed into a press, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D5456 and manufactured with waterproof adhesives complying with ASTM D2559. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Weyerhauser Company. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: As indicated on the General Structural Notes. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: As indicated on the General Structural Notes. 4. Tolerances: a. Depth: + 1/16". b. Width: + 1/16". 5. Identification: a. Laminated Strand Lumber(LSL) shall be identified by a stamp indicating the product type and grade, manufacturer's name, plant number and the independent inspection agency's logo. C. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists. 2. Material: All-veneer product, glued-laminated wood, or product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and veneers. 3. Thickness:As indicated on the drawings. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004BURN HAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER • A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and the following species: 1. Hem-fir; WCLIB or 110A/PA. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1. Hem-fir or hem-fir(north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select-boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.06 FASTENERS • A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers. G. Post-Installed Anchors: As indicated on the General Structural Notes. 2.07 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with substitution requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. USP Structural Connectors. B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY • C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A(HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. D. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-)wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm), unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. E. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch-(50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-)wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm), unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. F. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 1. Strap Width: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm), unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm), unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. G. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm)thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. H. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch (25 mm)above base and with 2-inch-(50-mm-) minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch (1.6 mm)thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch (2.8 mm)thick. I. Joist Ties: Flat straps,with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. 1. Width: 3/4 inch (19 mm). • 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). 3. Length: As indicated. J. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm)thick. Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. K. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm)wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm)thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. L. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm)thick by 36 inches(914 mm) long. M. Hold-Downs: Continuous rod system as indicated on the drawings. N. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches (29 mm) wide by 9/16 inch (14 mm) deep by 0.034 inch (0.85 mm)thick with hemmed edges. O. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 inch (24 by 24 by 1 mm)thick with hemmed edges. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1/4-inch (6-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing • 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls, lap minimum 4-inches at seams in sill sealer. H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, • specialty items, and trim. J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm)o.c.with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches(2438 mm)o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal-(38-mm actual-)thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet(6 m) o.c. K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: IP 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY • 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members,with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Comply with indicated fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard. 2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3.02 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-)size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm)o.c. • 3.04 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness whose widths equal that of studs, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal-(38-by-140-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm)o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior non-load-bearing partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches(406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. For interior bearing partitions: As indicated on the drawings. 4. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm)and less in width, 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual)depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual)depth for openings 10 to 12 feet(3 to 3.6 m) in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double jamb studs for openings 60 inches (1500 mm)and less in width, and triple jamb studs for wider openings, unless otherwise indicated on the • drawings. Provide headers of depth indicated. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.05 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION • A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches(76 mm) on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches (1200 mm). C. Do not notch joists unless done within manufacturer's written perameters. D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches (102 mm)or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness by depth of joist over supports. F. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. G. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm)o.c., between joists. 3.06 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. C. Provide collar beams (ties)as indicated or, if not indicated, provide 1-by-6-inch nominal- (19-by-140-mm actual-) size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches(1219 mm)o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. D. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions if any. 3.07 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. 3.08 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal-(38-by-286-mm actual-) size, minimum. 2. Material: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-1/2 inches(89 mm)of effective depth. 4. Spacing: At least three framing members for each 36-inch (914-mm)clear width of stair. B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm)variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm)variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 15 00 WOOD DECKING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Softwood lumber structural wood decking. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing details, and framed openings. C. Samples of Wood Deck Exposed To View: Submit two samples, 12 inch in length illustrating wood grain, stain, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Lumber Decking: Fabricated to AITC 112. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, graded under SPIB rules as AITC Select quality. 2. Size: as indicated on Structural plans. 3. Pattern: AITC standard beveled V-joint with single tongue and groove. 4. Moisture Content: 19 percent, maximum. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fastener Type and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. • 2. Fastener Type and Finish for Composite Decking: Stainless steel, trim head. 3. Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of decking. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 INSTALLATION - BOARD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. C. Secure with fasteners. Side spike planks together, through pre-drilled holes. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Surface Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Subflooring. 4. Underlayment. 5. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent • testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. • 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's"Fire Resistance Directory." SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING 2.02 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS • A. Plywood: Either DOC PS1 or DOC PS2. B. Premium Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. C. Thickness: As indicated on the drawings. D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.03 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.04 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. • C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. c. National Gypsum Cmopany; Gold Bond e(2)XP. d. Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass e. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches(1219 by 2438 mm)for vertical installation. 2.05 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: As indicated on the Drawings, but no less than 48/24. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.06 ROOF SHEATHING AT PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING A. Exterior Grade A-C, T&G Plywood Roof Sheathing. B. Span Rating:As indicated on the Drawings, but no less than 48/24. C. Nominal Thickness:As indicated on the Drawings. 2.07 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1 single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: As indicated on the Drawings, but no less than 48/24. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING • B. Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)over board or uneven subfloors. 2.08 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 2.09 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm)wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. B. Sheathing Tape for Foam-Plastic Sheathing: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by • manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's"International Building Code." D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING 3.02 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION • A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide,"for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Subflooring: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. 2. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. 3. Underlayment: a. Nail or staple to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends. 3.03 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm)gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards • without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm)o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)from edges and ends of boards. D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches(200 mm)o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)from edges and ends of boards. E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 13 LAMINATE VENEER LUMBER- DESIGN/BUILD • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Laminated Veneer Lumber B. Accessories 1.02 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A. Products shall be proven by testing and evaluation in accordance with the provisions of ASTM D-5456. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including descriptions of component materials, dimensions of specified products, design properties, allowable spans, construction details and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings sealed by the designer indicating member types, sizes, locations and connection details. D. Certificate: Certification by Laminated Veneer Lumber manufacturer that products delivered are of the same design and construction as those evaluated by the independent inspection agency. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications:A professional structural engineer registered in the State of Arizona. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. • C. Parallel Strand Lumber shall be manufactured under an approved third party inspection agency. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Unload, handle, and store material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. C. Storage: Laminated Veneer Lumber, if stored prior to erection, shall be protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Basis: RedBuilt;www.redbuilt.com. B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to Basis of Design requirements: 1. Pacific Woodtech Corporation; www.pacificwoodtech.com. 2. Boise Cascade Corporation. 3. Finnforest USA. 4. Georgia-Pacific. 5. Jager Building Systems, Inc. 6. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 7. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. 8. Roseburg Forest Products Co. 9. Standard Structures Inc. • 10. Stark Truss Company, Inc. 11. West Fraser Timber Co., Ltd. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 13 LAMINATE VENEER LUMBER - DESIGN/BUILD 12. Weyerhaeuser Company. • C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. See Structural Notes for Laminated Veneer Lumber requirements. 2.03 TOLERANCES A. Finished Length (as specified) + 1/8". B. Depth: + 1/16", -0 (Rim Board) 1. + 1/16", -0 (all other products). C. Width: + 1/6" 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, sized to suit application. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Simpson Strong-Tie. b. USP Structural Connectors. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION • A. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation. B. Install members plumb, level and as indicated. C. Fasten members to supporting framing as recommended by the LVL manufacturer and the hanger manufacturer. D. Provide temporary bracing to hold members in position until permanently secured. E. Cut holes in members only as allowed by the manufacturer. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 23 PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER 11111 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parallel Strand Lumber B. Accessories 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 2559-Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior(Wet Use) Exposure Conditions; 2004. B. ASTM D-5456-Standard Specification for Evaluation of Structural Composite Lumber Products. C. NER-481- National Evaluation Service, Inc. (NES) Report No. NER-481. 1.03 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A. Products shall be proven by testing and evaluation in accordance with the provisions of ASTM D-5456. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing layout and detail necessary for determining fit and placement in the building. C. Certificate: Certification by Parallel Strand Lumber manufacturer that products delivered are of the same design and construction as those evaluated by the independent inspection agency. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Parallel Strand Lumber shall be manufactured under an approved third party inspection agency. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Storage: Parallel Strand Lumber, if stored prior to erection, shall be protected from the weather. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Trus Joist. B. Aceeptable manufacturers pending conformance to Basis of Design requirements: 1. Louisiana Pacific Corporation. 2. Weyerhaeuser Company. • 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Code Reports: Materials shall comply with NES Report No. NER-481. B. Manufacturing Process: Parallel Strand Lumber shall be manufactured from strands oriented to the length of the member and then fed into a press. All members are to be free of finger or scarf joints or mechanical connections in full-length members. C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall be of the waterproof conforming to the requirements of ASTM D-2559. • 2.03 TOLERANCES A. Finished Length (as specified) + 1/8". SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 23 PARALLEL STRAND LUMBER B. Depth: + 1/16", -0 (Rim Board) • 1. + 1/16", -0 (all other products). C. Width: + 1/6" 2.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Parallel Strand Lumber shall be identified by a stamp indicating the product type and grade, NER report number, manufacturer's name, plant number and the independent inspection agency's logo. 2.05 HARDWARE A. All hardware is to be fabricated by others according to the details contained in the contract documents. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION A. Handling and Erection: 1. Erected and install in accordance with the General Structural Notes on the Structural Drawings and manufacturer's drawings and installation suggestions provided. 2. Do not subject Parallel Strand Lumber to temporary construction loads that may cause stresses beyond design limits. 3. Holes, cuts, or notches not previously approved by the engineer shall not be permitted. 4. Erect Parallel Strand Lumber under direct supervision of qualified personnel. 3.02 FIRE RATING A. Parallel Strand Lumber may be used in fire-resistive assemblies as a substitute for conventional wood framing. Parallel Strand Lumber, shall be sized for the same load-carrying • capacity as the solid-sawn lumber specified in the assembly, and its dimensions shall be equal to or greater than those specified for the solid-sawn lumber. B. Parallel Strand Lumber may also be used in lieu of conventional wood for fire blocking (1-1/4" net thickness). END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 33 PRE-FABRICATED WOOD I-JOISTS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood chord and plywood or particleboard web joists for floor framing; bridging, bracing and anchorage; framing for openings; and preservative treatment of wood. 1.02 REFERENCES A. APA—Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA/EWA PSI 400—Performance Standard for Wood I Joists. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM D2559—Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior(Wet Use) Exposure Conditions. C. National Evaluation Service (NES): Report No. NER-200. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings which indicate sizes and spacings of joists, fastener description and spacings, loads, framed openings, stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Oregon. Submit joist configurations, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing. C. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations that conform to the dimensions and design loads shown in the drawings, stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Oregon. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS • A. Evaluation reports, from ICC-ES. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design members and their connections to supporting structure for the more stringent of the applied loads and deflection limitations shown on the drawings or as required by the applicable building code. B. Where joist size and spacing is indicated on the drawings, products with a lesser strength or stiffness (El) shall not be substituted nor shall equivalent products at a larger spacing. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. I-Joist Quality Assurance Agency. 2. Manufacturers Requirements. 3. National Evaluation Services (NES) Report NO. NER-200. 4. APA Design/Construction Guide: I Joists for Residential Floors(Form x 710). 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Design joists and associated components under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Oregon. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00—Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect structural components from warping or distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. Protect from weather by covering with waterproofing sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 33 PRE-FABRICATED WOOD I-JOISTS PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Boise Cascade Corporation. 2. Georgia-Pacific. 3. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 4. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. 5. RedBuilt LLC 6. Roseburg Forest Products Co. 7. Stark Truss Company, Inc. 8. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: ASTM D2559. B. Wood Blocking, Support Members and Framing for Openings, beveled plates. C. Fasteners: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate joists to achieve structural requirements specified. B. Brace members for support during transit. C. Fabricate to achieve minimum end bearing per manufacturer's requirements. D. Frame special sized openings in web as indicated on Drawings. • 2.04 MATERIALS A. Flange Material: Dimension lumber; or, structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. B. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. C. Structural Properties: Provide units matching the depths indicated and with design strength and stiffness (El) values not less than those indicated. D. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400,factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth,joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Each of the joists shall be factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 60 00—Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify supports and openings are ready to receive joists. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement and bearing and support items. 3.03 ERECTION • A. Install products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 33 PRE-FABRICATED WOOD I-JOISTS • B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners in each intended fastener hole. D. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. F. Do not splice members between supports unless otherwise indicated. G. Place headers and supports to frame openings. H. Frame openings between joists with lumber and provide blocking and framing as required to support facing materials,fixtures, specialty items and trim in accordance with Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". I. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section. 3.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Joists shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the weather. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00—Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Framing Members: 1/2" maximum, from indicated position. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood roof trusses. 2. Wood girder trusses. 3. Wood truss bracing. 4. Metal truss accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing"for roof sheathing. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required. 2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. • 4. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates. 6. Show splice details and bearing details. 7. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of anchorage hardware as needed to transfer design loads from trusses to wall framing and/or other primary structure below. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses and their anchorage to wall framing and/or primary structure below, indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For metal connector-plate manufacturer and fabricator. B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum specific gravity. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and specific gravity. C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss fabricating firm. D. Evaluation Reports: For the following,from ICC-ES: 1. Metal-plate connectors. 2. Metal truss accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI • and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services 1111 needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Oregon. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Oregon to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 • unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: 3. Roof Trusses: Vertical snow load deflection of 1/360 of span. Vertical total load deflection of 1/240. 4. Anchorage as required to transfer design loads from trusses to wall framing and/or other primary structure below. C. Truss layout shall be as shown on the structural drawings,when given. D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's"National Design Specifications for Wood Construction"and its"Supplement." 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 3. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES • B. Minimum Specific Gravity for Top Chords: 0.50. C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2.03 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.; an ITW company. 2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company. 3. CompuTrus, Inc. 4. Eagle Metal Products. 5. Jager Building Systems, Inc.; a Tembec/SGF Rexfor company. 6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 7. Robbins Engineering, Inc. 8. Truswal Systems Corporation; an ITW company. B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer. C. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. D. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A(HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 (Z180)coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)thick. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified • in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written recommendations of metal framing manufacturer. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 2.05 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product specified by truss designer or comparable product by one of the following to transfer design loads from trusses to wall framing and/or other primary structure below: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details • required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure • uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector_plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. 1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated. • I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. 1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. K. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members. L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design,when approved by Architect. 3.02 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer,when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. 1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 18 00 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued-laminated timber. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For connectors, include installation instructions. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. B. Material Certificates: For preservative-treated wood products, from manufacturer. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Current ICC reports for structural glued-laminated timber and • timber connectors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC- or APA-licensed firm. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed Work. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from single species. 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. 3. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with AITC A190.1. B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Douglas fir-larch that complies with structural properties, combination symbols, and beam stress classification indicated on the General Structural Notes. • C. Species and Grades for Beams: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 18 00 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 1. Species and Combination Symbol: As indicated on the drawings. • D. Appearance Grade: As indicated on the General Structural Notes. 1. For Premium and Architectural appearance grades, fill voids as required by AITC 110. For Premium appearance grade, use clear wood inserts, of matching grain and color,for filling voids and knot holes more than 1/4 inch (6 mm)wide. E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.02 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); nuts complying with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and,where indicated, flat washers. C. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil (0.05-mm)dry film thickness. D. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. B. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. C. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Wiped Stain Finish: Manufacturer's standard, dry-appearance, penetrating acrylic stain and sealer; oven dried and resistant to mildew and fungus. 1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations, or where appearance is important, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Clear Finish: Within conditioned interior spaces. Manufacturer's standard, two-coat, clear varnish finish; resistant to mildew and fungus. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of structural glued-laminated timber. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 18 00 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION • 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb, and with uniform, close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking. 2. Install timber connectors as indicated. B. Fit structural glued-laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing and finishing. 1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 2. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. 3.03 ADJUSTING • A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Division 09. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. 2. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood door frames. C. Wood casings and moldings. D. Sheet materials. E. Interior& Exterior Fire Retardant Treated Wood Boarding -Wall, Ceiling, and Underside of Exterior Canopy. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A135.4-American National Standard for Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard. C. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. AWI (QCP)- Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org. E. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards. F. BH MA A156.9-American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). G. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce). 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated . and adjacent components. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointing details, and accessories. 1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMACIWI (AWS). D. Samples: Submit two samples of finish plywood, 18 x 18 inch in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish. E. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 18 inch long. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator. 2. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)for Premium Grade. B. Interior Woodwork Items: 1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, wall caps, handrails, and Miscellaneous Trim: Poplar, prepare for paint finish. 2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00. C. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. 2.03 INTERIOR TRIM A. Standard Moldings: Medium density fiberboard, as manufactured by Mouldings and Millwork, or approved. 1. Size:As shown in the drawings. B. Base: Medium density fiberboard, as manufactured by Mouldings and Millwork, or approved. 1. Size:As shown in the drawings. C. Wood Soffits: 1. Exterior Soffits: • a. Species: Western Red Cedar. b. Grade: Clear, vertical grain. c. Size: 5/4 x 6 inches, S4S; corners eased. d. Finish: Penofin Verde, color to match architect's sample e. Fasteners: Stainless steel; fastener pattern as indicated. 2.04 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Hardwood Lumber: Poplar species, plain sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; paint grade for use as molding, trims, and casing. 2.05 SHEET MATERIALS A. MDF: Medium Density Fiberboard complying with ANSI/AHA A208.2, Class MD, no added formaldehyde. 1. SierraPine Medite II or approved. 2.06 FASTENINGS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application;where exposed match surrounding finishes of hardware, where not exposed, gplain steel or galvanized as application requires. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, and grounds; provide softwood lumber of any species. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer. C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.08 HARDWARE A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY • 2.09 FASTENING A. Adhesive for purposes other than laminate installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application. 2.10 FINISH A. Shop prime all MDF and MDFX per section 09 90 00. 2.11 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative(Surface Application): Penofin Verde 2.12 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.13 SHOP FINISHING A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5- Finishing for grade specified and as follows: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. • C. See Section 06 10 00 for installation of recessed wood blocking. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Base 1. WB-1: TBD 2. WB-2: TBD 3. WB-3: TBD 4. WB-4: TBD END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Cabinet hardware. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A135.4-American National Standard for Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard. C. ANSI A208.2-American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use. D. AWI (QCP)- Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org. E. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards. F. BHMA A156.9-American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). G. HPVA HP-1 -American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association (ANSI/HPVA HP-1). H. NEMA LD 3.- High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. I. WI (CCP)-Certified Compliance Program (CCP). J. WI (MCP)- Monitored Compliance Program (MCP). 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before • starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet and countertop substrate and finish. E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bergeners. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/1M (AWS)for Premium Grade. B. Wood Veneer Faced Cabinets at Common Lounge: Premium grade. 1. Exposed Surfaces: HPVA Grade A, species TBD, plain sliced, random-matched. 2. Interface Stydle for Cabinet and Door: Style 1 -Overlay; flush overlay 2.03 SHELVING A. Quality: AWS Custom grade. B. Shelves: 1. Melamine with matching PVC edge. a. Thickness and size as indicated, or if thickness not indicated as required by AWS standards for spans indicated. 2. Painted MDF-X. a. Panel Edges: Natural, sanded, eased edges. b. Corners: eased. C. Supports: Knapp &Vogt, extra heavy duty standards and supports, or as indicated. 1. Standard: No. 85ANO-84. 2. Shelf Support: Double bracket, No. 185ANO-16, 16 inches deep. • 2.04 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. General: Provide materials that comply with reference standard and specified requirements. B. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. C. Formaldehyde Free: Provide composite wood products with no added formaldehyde, made without urea-formadehyde adhesives or binders. D. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00. E. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site. F. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. G. Wood Veneer Plywood: 1. Grade: HPVA Grade A. 2. Species: To Match Control (TBD) H. Hardwood Edgebanding: Use solid hardwood edgebanding matching species, color, grain, and grade for exposed portions of cabinetry. I. Medium Density Fiberboard, Exterior(MDF-X): ANSI/AHA A208.2, Class MD-Exterior, formaldehyde-free, moisture resistant. 1. 100% recycled fiber. 2. SierraPine Medex. J. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, APA shop grade except APA Marine MDO where"Marine" is indicated. 1. No added Formaldehyde. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK • K. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4 L. HPDL, High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as follows: 1. Provide sequence matching across each elevation. 2. Carry figure of cabinet fronts to toe kicks. • E. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. 2.08 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. C. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5- Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System- 12, Polyurethane, Water-based. b. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. 1111 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. • 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 73 00 COMPOSITE WOOD DECKING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Composite wood decking. 1.02 DESIGN PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance 1. Deck: Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sf 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Indicate sizes, profiles, surface finishes, and performance characteristics. 2. Samples: 12 inches long decking and fascia samples illustrating size, profile, color, and surface finish. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions on care and cleaning of composite wood products. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle composite wood in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Store composite wood level and flat, off ground or floor, with supports at each end and maximum 24 inches on center. C. Do not stack composite wood over 12 feet high. D. Cover composite wood with waterproof covering, vented to prevent moisture buildup. 1.05 WARRANTIES • A. A. Furnish manufacturer's 25 year warranty providing coverage against checking, splitting, splintering, rotting, structural damage from termites, and fungal decay of composite wood. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of design; Trex Select, manufactured by Trex Company, Inc. B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance equaling or exceeding Design Basis manufacturer's performance specifications: 1. Bear Board Engineered Plastic Systems, LLC; bearboardlumber.com. 2. Fiberon; www.fiberondecking.com. 3. TimberTech; timbertech.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6 00- Product Requirements 2.02 MATERIALS A. Composite Wood: 1. Composition: Reclaimed wood and plastic with integral coloring; free from toxic chemicals and preservatives. 2. Profiles: a. Decking: Actual 1.375 x 5.5 inches x maximum practical length. 3. Surface texture:woodgrain. 4. Color: TBD 5. Characteristics: a. Abrasion resistance: 0.01 inch wear per 1000 revolutions, tested to ASTM D2394. b. Hardness: 1124 pounds, tested to ASTM D143. c. Self ignition temperature: 743 degrees F, tested to ASTM D1929. 4111 d. Flash ignition temperature: 698 degrees F, tested to ASTM D1929. e. Flame spread rating: 80, tested to ASTM E84. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 73 00 COMPOSITE WOOD DECKING f. Water Absorption when tested in accordance with ASTM D-1037, %vol. <1.35%, • %mass <1.29%. g. Thermal expansion coefficient, 36 inch long samples: 1) Width: 35.2 x 10-6 to 42.7 x 10-6. 2) Length: 16.1 x 10-6 to 19.2 x 10-6. h. Fastener withdrawal, tested to ASTM D1761: 1) Nail: 163 pounds per inch. 2) Screw: 558 pounds per inch. i. Static coefficient of friction: 1) Dry: 0.53 to 0.55, tested to ASTM D2047. 2) Dry: 0.59 to 0.70, tested to ASTM F1679. 3) Wet: 0.70 to 0.75, tested to ASTM F1679. j. Fungus resistance,white and brown rot: No decay, tested to ASTM D1413. k. Termite resistance: 9.6 rating, tested to AWPA E-1. I. Specific gravity: 0.91 to 0.95, tested to ASTM D2395. m. Compression: 1) Parallel: 1806 PSI ultimate, 550 PSI design, tested to ASTM D198. 2) Perpendicular: 1944 PSI ultimate, 625 PSI design, tested to ASTM D143. n. Tensile strength: 854 PSI ultimate, 250 PSI design, tested to ASTM D198. o. Shear strength: 561 PSI ultimate, 200 PSI design, tested to ASTM D143. p. Modulus of rupture: 1423 PSI ultimate, 250 PSI design, tested to ASTM D4761. q. Modulus of elasticity: 175,000 PSI ultimate, 100,000 PSI design, tested to ASTM D4761. r. Thermal conductivity: 1.57 BTU per inch per hour per square foot at 85 degrees F, tested to ASTM C177 2.03 ACCESSORIES • A. Fasteners: composite wood screws of length recommended by composite wood manufacturer for profile being fastened. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install composite wood in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cut, drill, and rout composite wood using carbide tipped blades. C. Pre-drill fastener holes located closer than 1 inch from edges. D. Cut ends square and true. E. Do not use composite wood products as structural members. F. Do not exceed maximum spans recommended by manufacturer. G. Place boards perpendicular to supports. H. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows at least one support. I. Leave expansion spaces between abutting boards and between boards and adjacent construction: 1. End gaps between boards: 1/8 inch at ambient temperatures of 60 degrees F and above and 3/16 inch at ambient temperatures below 60 degrees F. 2. Side gaps between boards: 1/4 inch at ambient temperatures of 60 degrees F and above and 3/8 inch at ambient temperatures below 60 degrees F. 3. Gaps between boards and adjacent construction: 1/4 inch at ambient temperatures of 60 degrees F and above and 1/2 inch at ambient temperatures below 60 degrees F. J. Place boards to span three or more supports. • K. Fasten each board to each support with two fasteners. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 73 00 COMPOSITE WOOD DECKING • 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean composite wood to remove stains: 1. Rust and ground-in dirt: Clean surfaces with cleaner recommended by manufacturer 2. Oil and grease: Clean surfaces with detergent containing degreasing agent. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 82 05 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel system for adhesive mounting. B. Moldings, adhesive, and joint sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. D. Maintenance Instructions. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Marlite; www.marlite.com 2. Kemlite Company, Inc. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 PANEL SYSTEM A. Plastic Panel System: Factory finished panels, trim, sealant, and accessories. B. FRP Panels: Fiberglass reinforced polyester, USDA approved for incidental food contact. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 (Class NI). 2. Surface Texture: Gently pebbled, high-gloss. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard selection. 4. Thickness: 3/32 inch, nominal. 5. Width: 48 inches. 6. Height: 96 inches. 7. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. 8. Flexural Modulus: 3,100 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. 9. Tensile Strength: 7,000 psi,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. 10. Tensile Modulus: 1,600,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. 11. Barcol Hardness: 35,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2583. 12. Impact Resistance: 7.2 ft-lb/in, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 256, Izod method. • 13. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 0.0000157 in/in/degree F, measured in accordance with ASTM D 696. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 06 82 05 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING 14. Water Absorption: 0.72 percent,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 570. • 15. Specific Gravity: 1.8,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 792. C. Panel Trim: Extruded PVC, in manufacturer's standard colors to match panel color.. 1. Outside corners, inside corners, edge trim, and division molding. D. Sealant: Manufacturer's Silicone Sealant; gunnable silicone rubber; Match panel color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimatize to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use the adhesives recommended by the panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local regulations; obtain manufacturer's approval of alternative adhesives. • C. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8 inch expansion space. D. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary and replace if not possible to repair to original condition. E. Protect installed products until completion of project. F. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous dampproofing. B. Protection boards. C. Drainage panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application until dampproofing has cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Bitumen: Emulsified asphalt, ASTM D 1227; with fiber reinforcement other than asbestos (Type II). • B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41/D41 M, compatible with substrate. C. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D2822, Type I. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Drainage Panel: 1/4 inch thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich. B. Protection Board: Rigid insulation specified in Section 07 21 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply bitumen with mop. B. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. C. Place drainage panel directly over dampproofing, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. D. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforced hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt waterproofing at perimeter foundation walls abutting storm water planters B. Drainage panel/protection board assembly. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water and complies with physical requirements in CAN/CGSB-37.50, "Hot Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing." B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing/waterproofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS A. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute B. ASTM ASTM International (formerly American Society for Testing and Materials) C. FMG Factory Mutual Global D. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association E. UL Underwriters Laboratories F. TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association 1.04 SUBMITTALS • A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, tie-ins to adjoining systems, and other termination conditions. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations. F. Sample Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's and Installer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting waterproofing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed to install waterproofing manufacturer's products; and who is eligible to receive waterproofing warranty specified. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, sheet flashings, protection course, through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for • storing and mixing with other components. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING B. Store materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and • within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below 0 deg F. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain,fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements or that do not remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years after date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written waterproofing Installer's warranty, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling all materials concealing extenst of failed waterproofing.. C. Provide separate warranty for each separate assembly; manufacturer and contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Basis: American Hydrotech, Inc.; Monolithic Membrane 6125; www.hydrotechusa.com. B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to, or exceeding the Design Basis product performance specifications and requirements specified herein: 1. American Permaquik Inc.; Permaquik 6100;www.permaquik.com. 2. Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing Inc.; CCW-500R; www.carlisle-ccw.com.. 3. Henry Company; 790-11 EV Reinforced waterproofing; www.henry.com.. 4. CETCO; Strataseal HR; buildingmaterials.cetco.com. 5. Tremco Incorporated; Tremproof 150; www.tremcosealants.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.Substitutions. 2.02 MEMBRANE A. Single-component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt with the following properties measured per applicable test methods in CAN/CGSB-37.50: 1. No U.S. product standard exists for hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt. Properties below are from CAN/CGSB-37.50. Additional properties may be reported by manufacturers. Add to list to suit Project. 2. Flash Point: Not less than 260 deg C or not less than 25 deg C above manufacturer's maximum recommended application temperature. 3. Cone Penetration: 110 maximum at 25 deg C, and 200 maximum at 50 deg C. 4. Flow: 3 mm maximum at 60 deg C. 5. Toughness: Not less than 5.5 J 6. Ratio of Toughness to Peak Load: Not less than 0.040. 7. Adhesion Rating: Pass. 8. Water-Vapor Permeance: 1.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m. 9. Water Absorption: 0.35-g maximum mass gain, or 0.18-g maximum mass loss. • 10. Pinholing: None. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING • 11. Low-Temperature Flexibility: No cracking. 12. Crack Bridging Capability: No cracking, splitting, or loss of adhesion. 13. Heat Stability: Comply with requirements for penetration, flow, low-temperature flexibility, and viscosity when heated for five hours at manufacturer's recommended application temperature. 14. Viscosity Test: 2 to 15 seconds. 2.03 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Primer: ASTM D 41, asphaltic primer. B. Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended spun-bonded polyester fabric. C. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: 50-mil- minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives and predrilled metal termination bars and anchors, with the following physical properties as measured per standard test methods referenced: 1. Tensile Strength: 1400 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C. 2. Elongation: 300 percent minimum;ASTM D 412. 3. Tear Resistance: 125 psi minimum; ASTM D 624, Die C. 4. Brittleness: Does not break at minus 30 deg F; ASTM D 2137. D. Sealants and Accessories: Waterproofing manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories. E. Protection Sheet: ASTM D5147 Fiberglass reinforced, SBS modified bitumen sheet smooth surfaced; min. 0.085- inch thick:for use as a protection sheet over completed membrane. 1. Or approved. F. Drainage Panel: Drainage layer with geotextile filter fabric on earth side. • 1. Composition: Dimpled polystyrene core; polypropylene filter fabric. G. Protection Board: Polystyrene rigid foam board, 1 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete substrate have cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by. plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. 1. All concrete surfaces must be dry, smooth, free of depressions, voids, protrusions, clean and free of unapproved curing compounds, form release agents and other surface contaminants. a. All concrete surfaces shall be No. 2 finish or better in accordance with ICRI standards. b. Remove all existing roofing materials and other contaminants that may affect adhesion of new waterproofing membrane. Use grinders or other mechanical means to remove all materials not allowed to remain on the surface of existing concrete. c. Surfaces to receive new waterproofing materials must be clean and smooth concrete, • free of all foreign debris. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray • affecting other construction. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil,form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. 1. Retain subparagraph below for decks when a controlled substrate surface finish is needed for waterproofing adhesion. 2. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast-cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents. Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.03 JOINTS,CRACKS,AND TERMINATIONS A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joints and cracks, deck drains, corners, and penetrations according to CAN/CGSB-37.51, "Application of Rubberized Asphalt, Hot-Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing,"and waterproofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate. Before filling, remove dust and dirt according to ASTM D 4258. 2. Adhere elastomeric flashing sheet to substrate in a layer of hot, rubberized asphalt. Extend elastomeric flashing sheet a minimum of 6-inches on each side of joints and • cracks and beyond deck drains, corners, and penetrations. 3. Select subparagraph above or below. 4. Embed reinforcing fabric into a layer of hot, rubberized asphalt. Extend reinforcing fabric a minimum of 6-inches on each side of joints and cracks and beyond deck drains, corners, and penetrations. B. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge joints with elastomeric flashing sheet extended a minimum of 6-inches on each side of joints and adhere to substrates in a layer of hot, rubberized asphalt. 3.04 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install flashing sheets at terminations of waterproofing membrane according to CAN/CGSB-37.51, "Application of Rubberized Asphalt, Hot-Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing,"and waterproofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Prime substrate with asphalt primer. C. Install elastomeric flashing sheet and adhere to deck and wall substrates in a layer of hot, rubberized asphalt. D. Extend flashing sheet up walls or parapets a minimum of 8-inches where applicable without extending above bottom edge of finish paver elevation or as shown on drawings and 6-inches onto deck to be waterproofed. E. Install termination bars and mechanically fasten to top of flashing sheet at terminations and perimeter of roofing at 8-inches on center with concrete expansion anchors. 3.05 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Install reinforced waterproof membrane in areas indicated on the Drawings, which include roofs, podiums, terraces, and planters. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING • B. Apply rubberized asphalt according to CAN/CGSB-37.51, "Application of Rubberized Asphalt, Hot-Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing,"and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Heat rubberized asphalt in an oil-or air-jacketed melter with mechanical agitator specifically designed for heating rubberized-asphalt waterproofing. D. Start application with manufacturer's technical representative present. E. Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow to dry. F. Reinforced Membrane: Apply waterproofing to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt to a thickness of 90 mils; embed reinforcing fabric, overlapping sheets 2-inches; and spread another 125-mil-thick layer to provide a uniform, reinforced, seamless membrane 215 mils thick. G. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated or required by manufacturer. H. Cover waterproofing with protection layer before membrane is subject to traffic. 1. Install protection layer with weatherlapped joints. 3.06 FILTER AND DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION (FOR OVERBURDEN) A. Coordinate installation of filter and drainage materials with installation of overburden materials as specified elsewhere. B. Cover waterproofing with Protection Layer/Root Barrier material before membrane is subject to traffic. Install with all side and end laps weather lapped a minimum of 4-inches, or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Extend up all vertical surfaces. C. Install Drainage Layer/aeration mat loose laid over the entire surface of areas to receive overburden and cut to fit within 1-inch of penetrations. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to • maintain continuity and secure to one another as required to achieve stability. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. D. Install Filter Layer materials continuously over drainage layer with sides and ends lapped a minimum of 12-inches. Extend material up all vertical surfaces and terminate above soil line. Cut to fit tight around all penetrations, and install additional layer around pipes and clamp into position with material extended a minimum of 6-inches over field material. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. 1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2-inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not exceeding a depth of 4-inches. Maintain 2-inches of clearance from top of sheet flashings. 2. Flood each area for 72 hours. 3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until waterproofing installation is watertight. B. Engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing. 3.08 CURING, PROTECTING,AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. • C. Protect installed board insulation from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction • immediately after installation. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 18 14 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Evaluation/Preparation of Substrate to Receive Pedestrian Traffic Waterproofing B. Pedestrian Traffic Waterproofing/Flashing Application C. This specification is based on the Design Basis Manufacturer's specification to assure completeness. Although named products are used throughout this Section, the Owner intends open bidding by comparable systems. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. All submittals which do not conform to the following requirements will be rejected. C. Submittals Prior to Contract Award Shall Include: 1. Letter from the proposed primary system manufacturer confirming that the bidder is an acceptable Contractor authorized to install the proposed system. 2. Letter from the primary system manufacturer stating that the proposed application will comply with the manufacturer's requirements in order to qualify the project for the specified guarantee. D. Product Data: Include product characteristics and limitations. Identify dissolving solvents, fuels, and potential destructive compounds. E. Samples: Submit two system samples of cured membrane, 3 x 6 inch in size, illustrating exposed individual system layers, selected color, surface texture, and variations. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include special environmental conditions required to install traffic membrane and potential incompatibilities with adjacent materials. • G. Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and cleaning. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing installation of traffic membrane,with minimum five years of experience, certified in writing by the waterproofing materials manufacturer to install the primary waterproofing products, and furnish competent and full time supervision, experienced mechanics, all materials, tools, and equipment necessary to complete, in an acceptable manner, the waterproofing system installation in accordance with this specification. C. Product Quality Assurance Program: Primary roofing materials shall be manufactured under a quality management system that is monitored regularly by a third party auditor under the ISO 9001 audit process. D. Project Acceptance: Submit a completed manufacturer's application for waterproofing guarantee form along with shop drawings of areas to receive waterproofing, showing all dimensions, penetrations, and details. The form shall contain all the technical information applicable to the project. The project must receive approval by the membrane manufacturer, through this process, prior to shipment of materials to the project site. E. Local Regulations: Conform to regulations of public agencies, including any specific requirements of the city and/or state of jurisdiction. F. Manufacturer Requirements: The primary materials manufacturer shall provide trained • company personnel to attend necessary job meetings, perform periodic inspections as necessary, and conduct a final inspection upon successful completion of the project. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 18 14 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING 1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING • A. Delivery: Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original sealed and labeled containers and in quantities required to allow continuity of application. B. Storage: Store closed containers in a cool, dry, well ventilated area away from heat, direct sunlight, oxidizing agents, strong acids, and strong alkalis. Keep products away from open fire, flame or any ignition source. Store temperature sensitive products at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. C. Damaged Material: Any materials that are found to be damaged or stored in any manner other than stated above will be rejected, removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. D. Handling: Handle all materials in such a manner as to preclude damage and contamination with moisture or foreign matter. Keep away from open fire, flame, or any ignition source. Vapors may form explosive mixtures with air. Avoid skin and eye contact with this material. Avoid breathing fumes. Do not eat, drink, or smoke in the application area. Workers shall wear long sleeve shirts, long pants and work boots. Workers shall wear butyl rubber or nitrile gloves when mixing or applying this product. Safety glasses with side shields shall be used for eye protection. Use local exhaust ventilation to maintain worker exposure below TLV as listed on MSDS for respective products. If the airborne concentration poses a health hazard, becomes irritating or exceeds recommended limits, use a NIOSH approved respirator in accordance with OSHA Respirator Protection requirements under 29 CFR 1910.134. The specific type of respirator will depend on the airborne concentration. A filtering face piece or dust mask is not acceptable for use with this product if TLV filtering levels have been exceeded. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Requirements Prior to Job Start 1. Notification: Give a minimum of 5 days notice to the Owner and manufacturer prior to • commencing any work and notify both parties on a daily basis of any change in work schedule. 2. Permits: Obtain all permits required by local agencies and pay all fees which may be required for the performance of the work. 3. Safety: Familiarize every member of the application crew with safety regulations recommended by OSHA and other industry or local governmental groups. B. Environmental Requirements 1. Precipitation: Do not apply materials during precipitation or in the event there is a probability of precipitation during application. Take adequate precautions to ensure that materials, applied membrane, and building interiors are protected from possible moisture damage or contamination. 2. Temperature Restrictions- PMMA-based Materials: Do not apply catalyzed resin materials if there is a threat of inclement weather. Follow the resin manufacturer's specifications for minimum and maximum ambient, material and substrate temperatures. Do not apply catalyzed resin materials unless ambient and substrate surface temperatures fall within the resin manufacturer's published range. C. Protection Requirements 1. Protection: Provide protection against staining and mechanical damage for newly applied waterproofing and adjacent surfaces throughout this project. 2. Limited Access: Prevent access by the public to materials, tools, and equipment during the course of the project. 3. Debris Removal: Remove all debris daily from the project site and take to a legal dumping area authorized to receive such materials. 4. Site Condition: Complete, to the Owner's satisfaction, all job site clean-up including building interior, exterior, and landscaping where affected by the construction. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 18 14 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING III1.06 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee- Reinforced Systems: Upon successful completion of the project, and after all post installation procedures have been completed, furnish the Owner with the manufacturer's 10 year guarantee covering labor and materials. 1. 10-year Waterproofing Guarantee PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS A. Liquid-Applied Pedestrian Traffic Waterproofing System: A reinforced fluid-applied, polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) resin-based waterproofing system having a colored acrylic chip/clear finish surfacing as selected from the manufacturer's standard palette of colors. 1. Design Basis: Siplast Terapro Reinforced Pedestrian Traffic Waterproofing System. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pedestrian traffic waterproofing system specified. Manufacturers providing products comparable to those specified that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Kemper System; www.kemper-system.com. 2. Soprema, Inc. USA;wwwsoprema.us. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Membrane/Flashing Waterproofing Materials 1. Primer: A PMMA-based primer for over wood and plywood substrates. a. Pro Primer W by Siplast; Irving, TX 2. Flashing Resin: A thixotropic, flexible, acrylic, PMMA-based resin for use in combination 1 • with a fleece fabric to form a monolithic, reinforced flashing membrane used in conjunction with a reinforced or unreinforced PMMA waterproofing system. a. Terapro Flashing Resin by Siplast; Irving, TX 3. Base Resin: A flexible, acrylic PMMA-based resin for use as waterproofing in a reinforced or unreinforced PMMA waterproofing system. a. Terapro Base Resin by Siplast; Irving, TX 4. Fleece: A non-woven, needle-punched polyester fabric used as a reinforcement in catalyzed resin flashing and field membrane systems. a. Nominal Thickness: 40 mils (1 mm) b. Weight: 110 grams per square meter c. Pro Fleece by Siplast; Irving, TX 5. Waterproofing/Wearing Layer Resin: A PMMA-based resin combined with aggregate filler to provide a waterproofing/wearing layer in a reinforced or unreinforced PMMA waterproofing system. a. Terapro VTS Resin by Siplast; Irving, TX 6. Aggregate Filler for Waterproofing/Wearing Layer Resin: A quartz aggregate blend/filler added to the waterproofing/wearing layer resin to produce a PMMA-based resin/aggregate slurry waterproofing/wearing layer. a. Terapro VTS Aggregate Filler by Siplast; Irving, TX 7. Color Finish: A pigmented, multi-component, PMMA-based finish layer for use in resin-based waterproofing and flashing systems. a. Pro Color Finish by Siplast; Irving, TX 8. Pro Color Chips: synthetic chips in colors designed to be broadcast into the color finish. 9. Clear Finish: A clear PMMA-based finish layer for resin based waterproofing systems. a. Pro Clear Finish (satin) by Siplast; Irving, TX • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 18 14 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING 2.03 WATERPROOFING ACCESSORIES • A. Cleaning Solution/Solvent: A clear solvent used to clean and prepare transition areas of in-place catalyzed resin to receive subsequent coats of resin and to clean substrate materials to receive resin. 1. Pro Prep by Siplast; Irving, TX 2. Paste: A PMMA-based paste used for remediation of depressions in substrate surfaces prior to the application of the waterproofing system or used as a leveling layer at fleece overlaps of reinforced waterproofing systems. a. Pro Paste by Siplast; Irving, TX 3. Catalyst: A peroxide-based reactive agent used to induce curing of acrylic resins. a. Pro Catalyst Powder by Siplast; Irving, TX 4. Chip Surfacing: A blend of flat, angular, pigmented polymer flakes and silica suitable for broadcast into the color finish layer of the waterproofing system. The chip/silica blend shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the waterproofing membrane. a. Pro Color Chips by Siplast; Irving, TX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTRATE EXAMINATION A. General: Verify that the substrate is suitable to receive work. Notify the general contractor and/or specifier in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Bring substrate deficiencies into an acceptable condition prior to commencing work. B. Plywood Substrate Requirements: Plywood substrates shall be A/C or better, exterior grade sheathing having a minimum thickness of 3/4 inch. Plywood shall be installed with the"A" side up. All plywood edges shall be supported by blocking or primary framing, and shall be fastened with non-corrosive screws at a minimum 6 inches on center along panel edges and a minimum • 12 inches on center over intermediate supports. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide protection to prevent dust/debris accumulation, spillage and resin overruns. B. Cleaning: Remove oil and grease with a commercial grade cleaner; thoroughly rinse and dry. Sweep, blow, or vacuum loose surface debris in areas to receive resin. C. Taping: Utilize masking tape at perimeters and joints of the area to be waterproofed to provide neat terminations. D. Preparation of Steel/Aluminum Substrates: Grind to generate a"white-metal" surface and remove loose particles. Extend preparation area a minimum of 1/2-inch (13 mm) beyond the termination of the waterproofing/flashing system. Notch steel surfaces to provide a rust-stop where detailed. E. Plywood Substrate Preparation: Prime ACX plywood surfaces, including vertical surfaces at joints, using the specified primer prior to the application of the waterproofing membrane. Fill joints using the specified paste, and reinforce the joints with a 6 inch (15 cm)wide strip of resin/fleece/resin. 3.03 LIQUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Mixing and Catalyzing of Resins: Thoroughly mix the entire drum of uncatalyzed resins for 2 minutes if pouring the resin into a second container when batch mixing. Catalyze only the amount of material that can be used within its pot life. Add pre-measured catalyst powder to the resin component and stir for 2-minutes using a slow-speed mechanical agitator or mixing stir stick. The amount of catalyst added is based on the weight of the resin used. Refer to the waterproofing system manufacturer's literature for mixing ratios. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 18 14 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING • B. Mixing and Catalyzing of Waterproofing Resin/Aggregate Filler Blends: Thoroughly mix the entire drum of uncatalyzed resin and slowly add amount of filler specified by the waterproofing system manufacturer. Once the filler has been mixed into the resin component, add pre-measured catalyst powder to the resin/filler mixture and stir for 2-minutes using a slow-speed mechanical agitator. The amount of catalyst added is based on the weight of the resin used. Refer to the waterproofing system manufacturer's literature for mixing ratios. C. Priming: Using the appropriate primer, apply to masonry, concrete and plywood surfaces that will receive the waterproofing membrane or flashing. Apply the primer using a roller at the minimum rate specified by the primer manufacturer and allow to cure for a minimum of 45 minutes. Increase application rates over other absorbent substrates. Do not let resin pool or pond. Do not over-apply primers as this may interfere with proper primer catalyzation. When calculating application rates, make allowances for saturation of roller covers and application equipment. D. Flashing Membrane Application: Complete flashing application prior to the waterproofing membrane application in the field of the roof area. Using masking tape, mask the perimeter of the area to receive the flashing system. Pre-cut fleece to ensure a proper fit at transitions and corners prior to flashing membrane application. Apply a base coat of catalyzed flashing resin to the substrate with a roller or brush at the minimum rate specified by the resin manufacturer. Extend the catalyzed flashing resin 1/8 inch (3 mm) beyond where the fleece reinforcement will be placed. Embed the specified fleece reinforcement into the wet, catalyzed flashing resin base coat using a wet, but not saturated, roller or brush to remove trapped air. Overlap the fleece a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm). Apply an additional coat of catalyzed flashing resin between layers of overlapping fleece. Apply a finish coat of catalyzed flashing resin immediately following the embedment of the fleece with a roller or brush at the minimum rate • specified by the resin manufacturer, ensuring full saturation of the fleece reinforcement. Remove the tape before the catalyzed resin sets. Make allowances for saturation of roller covers and application equipment when calculating resin quantities. Allow to cure for a minimum of 45 minutes. E. Application of Reinforced Chip-Surfaced Waterproofing System over Prepared Substrates: 1. Using cleaner/solvent, wipe flashing membrane and primer surfaces to receive the field membrane. Allow the surface to dry for a minimum 20 minutes before continuing work. 2. Using a roller, apply a layer of catalyzed base resin over the primed substrate at the minimum rate specified by the resin manufacturer. Embed the fleece reinforcement into the wet, catalyzed base resin waterproofing layer using a wet, but not saturated, roller to remove trapped air. Overlap side and end laps of the fleece a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm). Apply an additional coat of catalyzed base resin between layers of overlapping fleece. Apply a second coat of catalyzed resin immediately following the embedment of the fleece with an application roller or brush at the minimum rate specified by the resin manufacturer, ensuring full saturation of the fleece reinforcement. Allow to cure for a minimum of 45 minutes before application of the wearing layer of resin. 3. Apply a layer of catalyzed waterproofing resin/aggregate filler mixture using a trowel at the minimum rate specified by the waterproofing system manufacturer. Use a spiked roller to remove trowel marks and to even the application of the waterproofing resin/aggregate filler mixture. Following cure, smooth the surface of the catalyzed waterproofing resin/aggregate filler mixture using the sharp edge of a trowel, sandpaper or a fine-surfaced wheel. 4. Inspect the surface of the cured resin/aggregate filler mixture to identify low or uneven areas. Clean identified areas with cleaner/solvent and allow a minimum of 20 minutes for the solvent to evaporate. Apply paste to level or smooth low or uneven areas. Allow the paste to cure for a minimum of 60 minutes before installation of the color finish layer. • 5. Apply a layer of color finish using a prepared roller over the catalyzed resin/aggregate filler mixture at the minimum rate specified by the waterproofing system manufacturer. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 18 14 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC WATERPROOFING 6. Immediately broadcast the chip/silica blend into the wet color finish using a hopper gun at • the minimum rate specified by the waterproofing system manufacturer. Allow to cure for a minimum 2 hours and remove loose chips using a blower or vacuum. Sweep excess chips from the surface. Allow to cure for an additional hour following removal of excess chips. 7. Apply clear finish using a prepared roller over the embedded chip/silica surface at the rate specified by the waterproofing system manufacturer. 8. If work is interrupted for more than 12 hours, or the surface of a catalyzed resin layer becomes dirty or contaminated from exposure to the elements, thoroughly clean the area with cleaner/solvent. Allow a minimum of 20 minutes for the solvent to evaporate before continuing work. Complete the next application procedure within 60 minutes following the evaporation of the cleaner/solvent. F. Application of Color Finish over Flashings: 1. Mask the previously applied horizontal surfaces and install a layer of the specified color finish with a prepared roller over the flashing system on vertical surfaces at the minimum rate specified by the waterproofing system manufacturer. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTIONS A. Site Condition. All areas around job site shall be free of debris,waterproofing materials, equipment, and related items after completion of job. B. Notification Of Completion: Contractor shall notify manufacturer by means of manufacturer's printed Notification of Completion form of job completion in order to schedule a final inspection date. C. Final Inspection: Hold a meeting at the completion of the membrane application attended by all parties that were present at the pre job conference. A punch list of items required for completion shall be compiled by the Contractor and the manufacturer's representative. • Complete, sign, and mail the punch list form to the manufacturer's headquarters. D. Issuance Of The Guarantee. Complete all post installation procedures and meet the manufacturer's final endorsement for issuance of the specified guarantee. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water repellents applied to exterior masonry surfaces and exposed concrete surfaces. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide water repellents coating with the following properties based on testing manufacturer's standard products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating Project conditions using same materials and application methods to be used for Project. B. Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens. 1. Brick: ASTM C 67. 2. Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C 140. 3. Hardened Concrete: ASTM C 642. 4. Stone: ASTM C 97. C. Water-Vapor Transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 96. D. Permeability: Minimum 80 percent water-vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM D 1653. E. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Maximum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 514. F. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellency after 2500 hours of weathering in comparison to specimens before weathering, per ASTM G 154. G. Delete paragraph and subparagraphs below if application is not on reinforced concrete surface, • including traffic-bearing horizontal surfaces such as parking decks. Test results below are examples only; revise to suit Project. H. Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests. 1. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent. 2. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least one week prior to starting work; require attendance of affected installers; invite Architect and Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements. C. Applicator Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that the applicator complies with requirements. D. Certification by water repellent manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of VOCs. E. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of water repellents with requirements indicated. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Water Repellent Material: Two gallons of each type installed. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience and who employs trained installers approved by water repellent manufacturer for application of manufacturer's products. B. Owner reserves the right to provide continuous independent inspection of surface preparation and application of water repellent. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Prepare a representative surface 36 by 36 inch in size using specified materials and preparation and application methods on surfaces identical to those to be coated; approved mock-up constitutes standard for workmanship. B. Locate where directed. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the following conditions, except with written approval by Architect: 1. Ambient temperature or temperature of substrate is less than 40 deg F or more than 90 deg. F. 2. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days. 3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F are predicted within 24 hours. 4. Surfaces have been wet within the last 4 days. 5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F. 6. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated. 1.08 WARRANTY • A. Special Water-Repellent Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the applicator and water repellent manufacturer, covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena,failure of prepared and treated substrate,formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1/16 inch wide, fire, vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all types of water repellents by a single manufacturer. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated. C. Design Basis: Evonik Industries (formerly Degussa. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 63 00- Product Substitution Procedures. 2.02 PENETRATING WATER REPELLANTS A. Clay Masonry(Brick)Water Repellent: Clear, isobutyltrialkoxysilane or silane and siloxane blend with more than 40%solids and 3.3 lb/gal. or less of VOCs: 1. Product: Chem-Trete BSM-40 VOC B. Concrete and Stucco Water Repellent: Clear, isobutyltrialkoxysilane with more than 40%solids and 3.3 lb/gal. or less of VOCs: 1. Product: Chem-Trete BSM-40 VOC. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure surface is sufficiently dry. 1. Formed Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that could prevent adhesion or penetration of water repellents. B. Test for pH level, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals. C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. E. Test Application: Before performing water-repellent work, including bulk purchase and delivery of products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner approved by Architect to demonstrate the final effect(visual, physical, and chemical)of planned application. Proceed with work only after Architect approves test application or as otherwise directed. F. Verify that all sealant joint are installed prior to application of water repellant. • 3.02 APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer's approved written instructions, unless otherwise indicated 1. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. B. Water Repellent: Apply a heavy, full saturation coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure spray equipment. Start at bottom of wall and work up. Continue application until surface is fully saturated. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized technical service representative to inspect and approve the substrate before application, to instruct the applicator on the product and application method to be used, and to perform acceptance testing. 1. Perform static pressure water penetration test, 6 inch water column, 4 hours. 2. Test Equipment: Standard Rylon tube. 3. Submit written report. 3.04 CLEANING A. Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas. B. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation below on-grade concrete slabs. B. Batt and blanket insulation for both thermal and acoustical properties in exterior and interior wall, ceiling, and roof construction. C. Closed cell spray foam for filling roof framing cavity, roof to wall connections, perimeter window and door shim spaces, penetrations, and crevices in exterior wall and roof, at underside of tuck under parking ceiling/floor framing, and maintaining continuity of air and moisture barriers within framed cavities. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.03 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.04 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work • of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation (PVA paint used as vapor retarder-see Gypsum Board Assemblies). B. Insulation in Floor/Ceiling Assemblies: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. C. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board. 2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Expanded Polystyrene(EPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type XI; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 5. Board Thickness: Indicated in drawings. 6. Board Edges: Square. 7. Compressive Resistance: 5 psi. 8. Thermal Conductivity(k factor)at 25 degrees F: 0.18. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Roof Insulation: See Section 07 54 23-Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing. 2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be • used, at Contractor's option. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION B. Batt and Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665; formaldehyde free, preformed batts and blankets • conforming to the following: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 4. Minimum Thermal Resistance: a. Thickness: 1) 6 inch batts: Minimum R-21. 2) 3-1/2 inch batts: Minimum R-13. 5. Facing: Unfaced. 2.04 SPRAY FOAM INSULATION A. Foamed-In-Place Insulation: 1. BASF Polyurethane Foam Enterprises LLC: www.basf.us. 2. Demilec(USA) LLC; www.demilecusa.com. 3. Icynene Inc; www.icynene.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Medium-density, rigid or semi-rigid, closed cell polyurethane foam; providing a vapor barrier,water proof barrier and code approved application thickness sufficient to provide R-Values indicated; foamed on-site, using blowing agent of water or non-ozone-depleting gas. 1. Aged Thermal Resistance(R-value): [6] (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu, minimum,when tested at 1 inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 after aging for 180 days at 41 degrees F. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: Vapor retarder; 1 perm, maximum,when tested at intended thickness in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, dessicant method. • 3. Water Absorption: 1 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2842. 4. Air Permeance: 0.004 cfm/sq ft, maximum, when tested at intended thickness in accordance with ASTM E2178 at 1.5 psf. 5. Closed Cell Content: At least 90 percent. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 7. Locations: a. Where batt insulation does not meet or does not entirely fill cavity. b. Inside stud cavities surrounding openings. c. Roof to wall connections. d. Underside of bays and floor overhangs. e. Bay roofs f. Miscellaneous cavities and other locations indicated. 2.05 VAPOR RETARDER A. Vapor retarder accomplished with PVA primer see Sectio 09 90 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat,free of honeycomb,fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. IP SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION • 3.02 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in a manner consistent with continuing the continuity of the thermal and vapor barriers of the building envelope to pass third party inspection of insulation installation meeting or exceeding HERS Grade I. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces with full contact to all surfaces filling cavity without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces so that insulation make full contact against trim edge surfaces filling cavity . Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION • 0 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Complete wall and soffit weather resistive system: 1. Concealed sheet water-resistive barrier and air barrier. 2. Liquid-applied membvrane flashing. 3. Flexible self-adhesive flashing. 4. Mechanically attached tansitions and flashings. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not a vapor retardant and not necessarily air tight. B. Vapor Retarders: Materials to make exterior walls,joints between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls water vapor-resistant. C. Air Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through exterior walls,joints between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions. C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D. Installation instructions and standard details selected for this Project. 1. Indicate sequence of installation and coordination with building corners, windows, door frames, balconies and standard penetrations. • E. Installer's qualifications and approvals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: experienced installing products in this Section. 1. Approved by exterior finish the sheet weather resistant barrier system manufacturer for work associated with guaranty of this section. B. Inspecting Agent: Certified by Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau for inspection of weather barrier systems. 1. Owner will select and pay for inspection service. C. Moisture Barrier Mock-Up: Separate—stand alone installation of complete weather resistive barrier system and wall flashing to establish installation standards including: 1. Bottom, top and corner of wall 2. Window and A/C port. 3. Door opening 4. Standard penetration D. Final Inspection: Manufacturer's representative shall provide a comprehensive final inspection after completion of barrier system. Installation errors shall be addressed and final punch list completed prior to cladding over system. E. Pre-Installation Conference: Include Manufacturer. Review warranty requirements in conjunction with mock-up. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Install air barrier, vapor retarder, and water-resistive barrier materials in mock-up specified in Section 01 43 39. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING • A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS • A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty against failure of product to perform as specified and intended. Replace Warranty to cover defective materials. or installation. Include materials and labor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER MATERIAL COMPATIBILITY A. Coordinate compatibility requirements of all Water-Resistive/Air Barrier System components and their accessory materials between manufacturers. Basis of Design: VaproShield, WrapShield. 1. Use a single-source manufacturer for all Weather Resistive Barrier components and accessories listed below wherever possible to ensure compatibility and warranty requirements are met—or—coordinate compatibility requirements of all components between manufacturers. 2.02 SHEET WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Sheet Weather Resistive Barrier(WRB) (Water-resistive, vapor permeable, air barrier): 1. Design Basis:VaproSheild, WrapShield. 2. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.03 WATER-RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER TRANSITION AND FLASHING MEMBRANES A. Liquid Flashing Membrane at rough openings shall be VaproLiqui-Flash Permeable Liquid Applied Flashing Membrane: • 1. Thickness: 12-15 mils 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 14 perms @ 12 mils 3. Peel strength: 12 pli B. Self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane shall be VaproFlashing SATM by VaproShield, a zero VOC self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable membrane having the following properties: 1. VaproFlashing SATM Orange: 11-1/2 inches or 19 inches wide x 164 feet long 2. Air Leakage: < 0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa)when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 3. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms (2875ng/Pa.s.m2) 4. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage C. Mechanically attached air barrier transition and flashing membrane shall be VaproFlashing by VaproShield, a zero VOC mechanically attached water-resistive vapor permeable membrane having the following properties: 1. VaproFlashing Orange or Black: 6 1/2 inches, 11 3/4 inches or 19 2/3 inches wide x 164 feet long 2. Air Leakage: <0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa)when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 3. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms (2875ng/Pa.s.m2) 4. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Water-Resistive Flashing and Penetration Tapes • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS • 1. Tapes shall be VaproTape by VaproShield: UV stable, double and single sided, moisture-resistant flexible tape with adhesive backing having the following properties: 2. VaproTape(Single-Sided): 20 mil thick by 3 inches (76 mm)wide penetration seam tape 3. VaproTape (Double-Sided): 30 mil thick by 1 inch (25 mm)wide penetration seam tape 4. VaproTape UV-Resistant Black: 35 mil thick by 4 inches (102 mm)wide penetration seam tape B. Sill Pan Protection System 1. Extruded PVC sections with integral sloped shape, preformed corner dams and window unit spacer supports configured to drain moisture from window unit base to exterior shall be VaproSillSaverTM by VaproShield. Coordinate selection of sill pan depth with window unit frame size. VaproSillSaver is designed for use with nail flanged equipped windows only. C. Flashings Panels: Provide at all exterior mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection envelope penetrations. 1. Combination of high-density polyethylene(HDPE), low-density polyethylene (LDPE), and thermoplastic elastomer weatherproof seal: a. Polyethylene: 1) HDPE, Specific Gravity, ASTM D 1505: 0.953 g/cm3. 2) HDPE, Tensile Strength at Yield, ASTM D 638: 3,100 psi. 3) LDPE, Specific Gravity, ASTM D 792: 0.917 g/cm3. 4) LDPE, Tensile Strength at Yield, ASTM D 638: 1,300 psi. b. Thermoplastic Elastomer 1) Hardness, ASTM D 2240, Shore A, 10 Seconds: 46. 2) Specific Gravity, ASTM D 792: 1.05 g/cm3. • 3) Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 490 psi. 2. Provide product models as recommended by manufacture for each application. 3. Product: Quickflash Weatherproofing Products, Inc; www.quickflashproducts.com or approved. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Penetration Sealant: as recommended by WRB manufacturer; Dow 758 only.. E. Fasteners: Vapro Caps; large, flat headed type, corrosion resistant. F. Other products recommended by manufacturer for complete, water-tight installation procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. B. Examine substrates. Do not proceed until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and details approved by Owner's representative. B. Unless otherwise detailed, the following procedures shall be considered as minimal • requirements for the Weather Resistive Barrier System installation. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS C. Where conditions differ between these requirements and the drawings, provide a request for • interpretation to determin document intent. 1. WRB on Exterior Walls: Single layer, sealed to form a continuous water and air barrier air-tight membrane. a. Over sheathing specified in Division 06, and other locations indicated. b. Install WRB from bottom of wall to top, shingle fashion. c. Lap vertical joints not less than 12 inches, and seal so that sealant is not visible as it fastens both membrane sheets together. Stagger all adjacent vertical joints. d. Lap horizontal joints not less than 6 inches and seal so that sealant is not visible as it fastens both membrane sheets together. e. Seal all perimeter edges joints perimeter and penetrations of sheet WRB. f. Lap flexible flashing onto Sheet Weather Barrier below openings. g. Seal all edges with joint sealant to act as air barrier. 2. WRB on Soffits: Single layer,with 2 inch overlap, 6 inch side lap. 3. WRB in coordination with flashings. a. Seal edge to flashing at openings and penetrations. b. When required by flashing manufacturer's written recommendations, prime substrates. 4. Provide Liquid Flashing Membrane at rough openings of window, door, louver and similar openings: a. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by liquid flashing manufacturer; treat joints in substrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by membrane manufacturer prior to application of liquid flashing. 5. Provide Flexible Flashing at the following locations: a. Flexible Flashing at building corners: under WRB moisture barrier, 6 inches wide on each face. • b. Flexible Flashing at bottom edge of wall sheathing, 6 inches wide c. Liquid Flashing Membrane at rough openings at window, door, louver and similar openings: 1) Extend all areas to interior edge of framing. 2) Sills: Form a complete, sealed, drainable waterproof'pan' under windows, doors and wall louvers employing Manufacturer's recommended details. 3) Extend up jambs as indicated. 4) FF around various penetrations, 8 inches wide beyond penetration, form a seal onto penetrating item. 5) FF Under WRB where items will be surface mounted to exterior finish with fasteners through wall, 8 inches beyond edges of item. 6) FF at other locations indicated in Drawings. 7) FF at Flanged Windows: install to form a seal between window frame and underlying wall flashing. 8) FF at top of Parapet: from back side, over top, down exterior face 8 inches. D. Flexible Flashing Sealant: Seal edges of adhesive where it could bleed into finish. Seal joints waterproof. E. Install continuous, horizontal strip of flexible flashing at all concealed top edge of metal flashing, Section 07 62 00, between metal flashing and wall. 1. Lap WRB over wall flashing and cover vertical surface of metal flashing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed. B. Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a mock-up installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Flexible sheet membranes for underlayment, valley protection, and detailing and penetrations. C. Associated metal flashings and accessories. D. Ridge and eave vents. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D226/D226M-Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. ASTM D3462/D3642M -Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules. C. ASTM E96/E96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. D. ASTM E108-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. E. NRCA MS104-The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association. F. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. G. UL(RMSD)- Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics and limitations. 1. Certificate of Compliance: Provide Certificate of Compliance from an independent laboratory indicating that the asphalt fiberglass shingles made in normal production meet or exceed the requirements of the following: a. ASTM E 108/UL 790 Class A Fire Resistance b. ASTM D 3161/UL 997 Wind Resistance. c. ASTM D 3462 C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal flashings and installation details. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture/pattern; for color selection and texture selection. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Shingles: 100 sq ft of each type and color in unbroken bundles. H. C.Warranties: Sample of Standard and special warranties. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual and for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this section and manufacturer's material and workmanship requirements. 1. Installer of Asphalt Shingles shall be a factory trained installer by manufacturer. B. Roof Covering Fire Classification: Class A when tested in accordance with ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. • C. Products Required to Comply with Wind Resistance Criteria: 110 MPH, UL listed and labeled. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES D. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge shingles, vented nail base, rigid insulation under vented nail • base, underlayment, starter shingles and self adhering sheet underlayment from single source manufacturer. E. Primary Roofing Materials Manufacturer Requirements: 1. Manufacturer shall have been in business manufacturing Laminated Asphalt Shingles for a minimum of ten (10)years. 2. Manufacturer shall be an associate member in good standing of the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA), Western States Roofing Contractors Association (WSRCA)or the Midwest Roofing Contractors Association (MRCA). F. Installer Qualifications: Show that roofing contractor has been an applicator for the submitted manufacturer's products for 10 years prior to this Project. 1. Roofing contractor to provide references for at least 5 projects of similar size and scope in the last three years. G. Sustainable Design Requirements: 1. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)of Project site. H. Submitted product must have a documented ICC-ES Evaluation Report to be considered. I. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this sectio 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface is wet and when ambient air • temperatures are below 40 degrees F or as recommended by manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Shingles subjected to terms and conditions of the standard Manufacturer's 30 year Limited Warranty. The Warranty includes limited term resistance to wind, up to 110 MPH. 1. Wind warranty coverage is subject to the shingles being sealed. B. Warrantable failures shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturing defects. 2. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a reasonable time. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHINGLES A. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D3462/D3642M; Class A fire resistance. 1. Architectural Shingles: GAF Timberline Lifetime shingles or approved. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt, unperforated, complying with ASTM D226/D226M, Type I ("No.15"). 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 10 wire gage, 0.1019 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II with mineral fiber components, asbestos free, and free of toxic solvents per manufacturer. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES • 2.04 METAL FLASHINGS AND VALLEYS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, open valley flashing, roof chute vent penetration, and other flashing indicated. 1. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 2. Form eave edge flashing to extend minimum 2 inches(50 mm)onto roof and minimum 0.25 inches (6 mm) below sheathing. 3. Coat concealed surfaces of flashings with bituminous paint. B. Steel Sheet Metal: Prefinished and galvanized steel sheet, 26 gage, 0.0179 inch minimum thickness, G90/Z275 hot-dipped galvanized; PVC coated, color. C. OSB Primer: Use manufacturer's recommended substrate primer when OSB is the substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners. C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges,warps, or voids. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work • B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. C. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch as recommended by shingle manufacturer. F. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate,fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler. G. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection. H. Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 12 inches on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and application indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Install underlayment over entire roof area, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. C. Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection. D. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement. 3.04 INSTALLATION -VALLEY PROTECTION • A. Valleys to be galvanized sheet metal. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES B. Install one ply of smooth surfaced roll roofing, minimum 18 inches wide, centered over valleys. • C. Weather lap joints minimum 6 inches. D. Nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. 3.05 INSTALLATION -METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. B. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement. 3.06 INSTALLATION -SHINGLES A. General: Install asphalt shingles with six(6) nails according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's"Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's"The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge,with self-sealing strip face up at roof eave edge. C. Install shingles in coursing pattern with 5-5/8 inch (125 mm)weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. D. Install starter strip along rake edge. E. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond fascia boards. F. Extend shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. G. Extend shingles on one slope across valley and fasten. Trim shingles from other slope 2 inches (50 mm)from valley center line to match metal valley. H. Utilize an approved Hand Tab Sealant: For Low Slope application of Asphalt Shingles below 4 in 12, in geographic locations known for wind gusts, or at roof slope locations where negative wind pressures can be created due to building configuration. When bonding of self sealing shingles may be a concern, consider applying additional field applied daubs of plastic cement, or an approved "tabbing" sealant. I. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual shingle tab exposed to weather, to prevent lifting. J. Install ridge vents centered over ridge. K. Cap hips and ridges with individual shingles. Place to avoid exposed nails. L. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or Work projecting through roof with weather tight placement of Counter flashings. M. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. N. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured metal panels for walls,with related flashings and accessory components. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout,joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel and soffit panel, 18 inch by 18 inch in size illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.04 MOCK-UP A. See mock-up requirements in Section 01 43 39 - Coordinated Mock-up 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 77 00-Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 25-year performance warranty, stating the following: 1. Architectural fluorocarbon finish: a. Will be free of fading or color change in excess of 5 Hunter delta-E units as determined by ASTM D2244-02. b. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D4214-98 method D659. c. Will not peel, crack, chip, or delaminae. 2. Metal substrate will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate. C. Installer's Warranty: Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and/or workmanship, covering repairs required to maintain wall panels watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for five years following Project Substantial Completion date. 1. Furnish written warranty, signed by installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Skyline Sheetmetal. 1. Panel Type A; 8 inch horizontal smooth to configuration detailed. 2. Panel Type B:Horizontal corrugated similar to Morin U-12, to configuration detailed. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 63 00- Product Substitution Procedures. 2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS • A. Wall Panel System: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel system, site assembled. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS 1. vfrebly. • 2. ProDesign ide andexterior size panels componentsand to withstand subgirtaming deadassandmlive loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall. 3. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/90 of span. 4. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. 5. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. 6. Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects; pieces of longest practical lengths. 7. Corners: Factory-fabricated in one continuous piece with minimum 18 inch returns. 8. Exterior Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating, top coat over epoxy primer. 9. Exterior Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester wash coat. B. Exterior Panels: 1. Profile: Horizontal; style as indicated. 2. Side Seams: Double-interlocked with reveal, sealed with continuous gaskets. 3. Material: Precoated steel sheet, minimum 22 gage thick. 4. Panel Width: As indicated. 5. Color: Dark Brown /Bronze. C. Subgirts: 1. Profile as indicated; to attach panel system to building. 2. Formed stainless steel, 16 gauge. D. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. E. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; _gage,—inch thick; manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system. F. Trim: Same material,thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. G. Anchors: Galvanized steel. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Precoated Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M Structural Steel (SS)or Forming Steel (FS), with G90/Z275 coating; continuous coil-coated on exposed surfaces with specified finish coating and on panel back with specified panel back coating. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient; ultraviolet and ozone resistant. B. Sealants: 1. Exposed Sealant: Elastomeric; silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane. 2. Concealed Sealant: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant. C. Sealants: As specified in Section 07 90 05. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels. IP SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS • 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install subgirts perpendicular to panel length, securely fastened to substrates and shimmed and leveled to uniform plane. Space at intervals indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation. C. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. D. Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 2 inches. E. Provide expansion joints where indicated. F. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. G. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION • I . SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Siding panels. B. Soffit panels. C. Accessories and trim. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods, including nailing patterns. 4. Applicable model code authority evaluation report(ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, CCMC, etc.) 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Provide installer with not less than 5 years of experience with products similar to those specified. B. Pre-Installation Conference: Comply with Division 1. Review detailing and coordination with weather barrier and openings. Require Mock-ups if project requirements are not completely understood by Installer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products off the ground, on a flat surface, and under a roof or separate waterproof covering. 1111 1.05 WARRANTY A. Register manufacturer's warranty, made out in Owner's name,with copy to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. James Hardie Industries NV(JHINV), 26300 La Alameda, Suite 25, Mission Viejo, California 92691. Tel 1-888 J-HARDIE or 1-888 542-7343. www.jameshardie.com. B. Nichiha Fiber Cement; 6659 Peachtree Ind. Blvd. SuiteAA, Norcross, GA 30092. Tel: 1-866-424-4421; www.nichiha.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 PANELS A. Fiber Cement Board Panels- General: Cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure into boards with smooth face; complying with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II; machined edges; for nail attachment. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 0, smoke developed index of 6, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 (Class I/A). 2. Flammability: Noncombustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 3. Flexural Strength: At least 1450 psi when in equilibrium condition, and at least 1015 psi when in wet condition, tested in accordance with ASTM C 1185. 4. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: Less than 1 x 10"-5/inch/inch/degree F,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 228. 5. Water Vapor Transmission: Less than 7.0 perm-inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. 6. Freeze Thaw Resistance: At least 80 percent flexural strength retained, when tested in • accordance with ASTM C 1185. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 7. UV Resistance: No cracking, checking, or erosion,when tested for 2000 hours in • accordance with ASTM G 155 (or G 26). 8. Water Tightness: No water droplets on underside,when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1185. B. Vertical Siding: Panelized FiberCement Siding. 1. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 2. Size: 48 by 96 inches, nominal. 3. Style: Smooth panel. 4. Finish: Factory primed all surfaces. C. Soffit: Fiber Cement Soffit, ventilated and non-ventilated where indicated. 1. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 2. Style: Smooth texture, 12 inches wide. 3. Finish: Factory primed all surfaces. D. Reveals: Fry Reglet extruded aluminum reveals 1. Size and Type: As indicated in Drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Trim: Fiber cement board, cut from siding material; prime cut edges. 1. Sizes: a. 5/4 smooth by 6 inches nominal, at lap. b. 4/4 smooth by 6 inches nominal at panels. B. Furring: 1/2 inch APA rated sheathing plywood furring strips, borate treated. C. Sealant: All purpose paintable silicone sealant. D. Sheet Metal Flashing: Minimum 26 gage galvanized steel sheet, or aluminum, or as indicated • in Drawings. E. Corrosion-resistant insect screen for vertical termination points of drainage or ventilation. F. Ring Shank Nails: Length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch into solid backing; hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel. Fill nail holes flush with surface prior to applying final finish. Installer is responsible for engineering of fasteners into plywood, metal studs, and other substrates not prescriptively mentioned by the manufacturer to meet project wind load requirements; wind loads based on 10 ft. sq. effective area windward: 18.77 psf, leeward 25.1 psf at the building corners and 20.3 psf everywhere else. 1. Apply sealer and paint after fastening. G. Screws: No exposed fasteners on surface of fiber cement siding. 1. Type: Stainless steel,fiber cement screws with plugs.. 2. Corrosion Resistance: 1000 hours of salt spray test per ASTM 8117 with no visible sign of surface red rust. 3. Length:As required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch into solid backing. H. Weather Resistive Barriers: As specified in Section 07 25 00. 1. Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 07 90 05. J. Finish Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to commencing installation, verify governing dimensions of building, layout of furring, and condition of all substrate components. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions that would be detrimental to • proper installation. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING • B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawing details. 1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to location of project. 3. Use trim details indicated on drawings. 4. Touch up all field cut edges by priming before installing. 5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage. B. Over Wood with Wood Furring: Fasten siding through furring strips and sheathing only. Verify holding strength of fasteners and pull-out value of substrate(s)with fiber cement siding manufacturer before proceeding. C. Furred Installation: Leave space at top and bottom open; top may be behind soffit. D. Install corrosion-resistant insect screen at bottom of furring strips by wrapping a strip of screen behind bottom ends of vertical furring strips. E. Install sheet metal flashing above door and window casings and horizontal trim in field of siding. F. Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect. G. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. H. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09 90 00. 1. Refer to alternate for Finish Paint requirements. 111 3.04 CLEANING A. At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project site. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) 1111 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermoplastic membrane roofing system, mechanically attached, including all components specified. B. Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.com. C. Commencement of work by Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by Contractor that this specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessary prerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification of the Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or the project conditions. 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before start of roofing work, Contractor shall hold a meeting to discuss the proper installation of materials and requirements to achieve the warranty. 1. Require attendance with all parties directly influencing the quality of roofing work or affected by the performance of roofing work. 2. Notify Architect well in advance of meeting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide membrane manufacturer's printed data sufficient to show that all components of roofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified requirements • and with the membrane manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for the system type specified; include data for each product used in conjunction with roofing membrane. C. Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used. D. Shop Drawings: Provide: 1. Provide the roof membrane manufacturer's standard details customized for this project for all relevant conditions, including flashings, base tie-ins, roof edges, terminations, expansion joints, penetrations, and drains. 2. For tapered insulation, provide project-specific layout and dimensions for each board. E. Specimen Warranty: Submit prior to starting work. F. Installer Qualifications: Letter from manufacturer attesting that the roofing installer meets the specified qualifications. G. Pre-Installation Notice: Copy to show that manufacturer's required Pre Installation Notice (PIN) has been accepted and approved by the manufacturer. H. Executed Warranty. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering. C. Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. • B. Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications, scheduling, and inspections. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) C. Warranty: Firestone Limited 20-Year Warranty covering membrane, roof insulation, and other • indicated components of the system. 1. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation. 2. Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by: a. Ordinary wear and tear of the elements. b. Manufacturing defect in Firestone brand materials. c. Defective workmanship used to install these materials. d. Damage due to winds up to 90 mph. 3. Not Covered: a. Damage due to winds in excess of 90 mph. b. Damage due hurricanes or tornadoes. c. Hail. d. Intentional damage. e. Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance, or service. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Basis: Firestone Building Products LLC: www.firestonebpco.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 1. Submit evidence that the proposed substitution complies with the specified requirements. 2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Roofing System: Firestone Ultra-Ply Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) single-ply membrane. 1. Membrane Attachment: Mechanically fastened. 2. Comply with applicable local building code requirements. 3. Provide assembly having Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Class A Fire Hazard Classification. 4. Provide assembly complying with Factory Mutual Corporation (FM) Roof Assembly Classification, FM DS 1-28 and 1-29, and meeting minimum requirements of FM 1-90 wind uplift rating. B. Roofing System Components: Listed in order from the top of the roof down: 1. Membrane: Thickness as indicated. 2. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non-reinforced foam core. a. Product: Firestone, Resista rigid insulation board. b. Compressive Strength: 16 psi; ASTM D 1621 c. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. d. Board Thickness: As indicated, tapered where indicated. e. Thermal Resistance: LTTR-value of 5.7.minimum per inch. f. Board Edges: Square. Stagger layer joints. 3. Vapor Retarder: One layer SBS modified bitumen base sheet; heat fused. 2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Membrane: Flexible, heat weldable sheet composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber; complying with ASTM D6878/D6878M,with polyester weft inserted reinforcement and the following additional characteristics: 1. Thickness: 0.060 inch plus/minus 10 percent,with coating thickness over reinforcement of 0.024 inch plus/minus 10 percent. 2. Thickness: 0.080 inch plus/minus 10 percent,with coating thickness over reinforcement of 0.030 inch plus/minus 10 percent for membranes below pedestal paver systems. Provide additional 80mil TPO for membranes under pedestal paver systems. Provide • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) • additional 12 by 12 inch 80 mil TPO layer sealed to 80 mil membrane below pedestal paver systems at each under pedestal feet.. 3. Sheet Width: Provide the widest available sheets to minimize field seaming. 4. Solar Reflectance: 0.84, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM C1549. B. Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membrane manufacturer. C. Curb and Parapet Flashing: Same material as membrane, with encapsulated edge which eliminates need for seam sealing the flashing-to-roof splice; precut to 18 inches wide. D. Formable Flashing: Non-reinforced,flexible, heat weldable sheet, composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber. 1. Thickness: 0.060 inch plus/minus 10 percent. 2. Tensile Strength: 1550 psi, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638 after heat aging. 3. Elongation at Break: 650 percent, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM D638 after heat aging. 4. Tearing Strength: 12 lbf, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1004 after heat aging. 5. Color: White. 6. Acceptable Product: UltraPly TPO Flashing by Firestone. E. Tape Flashing: 5-1/2 inch nominal wide TPO membrane laminated to cured rubber polymer seaming tape, overall thickness 0.065 inch nominal; TPO QuickSeam Flashing by Firestone. F. Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing; Pourable Sealer by • Firestone. G. Seam Plates: Steel with barbs and Galvalume coating; corrosion-resistance complying with FM 4470. H. Termination Bars: Aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge; 1.3 inches wide by 0.10 inch thick; Firestone Termination Bar by Firestone. I. Cut Edge Sealant: Synthetic rubber-based, for use where membrane reinforcement is exposed; UltraPly TPO Cut Edge Sealant by Firestone. J. General Purpose Sealant: EPDM-based, one part, white general purpose sealant; UltraPly TPO General Purpose Sealant by Firestone. K. Molded Flashing Accessories: Unreinforced TPO membrane pre-molded to suit a variety of flashing details, including pipe boots, inside corners, outside corners, etc.; UltraPly TPO Small and Large Pipe Flashing by Firestone. L. Roof Walkway Pads: Non-reinforced TPO walkway pads, 0.130 inch by 30 inches by 40 feet long with patterned traffic bearing surface; UltraPly TPO Walkway Pads by Firestone. 2.04 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS - A. Base Sheet: Torch grade SBS polymer-modified bitumen sheet, reinforced with non-woven fabric, complying with ASTM D6163/D6163M, Type I, Grade S, or ASTM D6164/D6164M, Type I, Grade S, formulated for torch application to substrate and cap sheet; Firestone SBS Poly Torch Base or SBS Glass Torch Base. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Wood Nailers: PS 20 dimension lumber, Structural Grade No. 2 or better Southern Pine, Douglas Fir; or PS 1,APA Exterior Grade plywood; pressure preservative treated. 1. Width: 3-1/2 inches, nominal minimum, or as wide as the nailing flange of the roof • accessory to be attached to it. 2. Thickness: Same as thickness of roof insulation. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) B. Pedestals Pavers: See Section 32 14 16. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Where manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices and industry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. B. Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installation period. C. Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notification that this project requires a manufacturer's warranty. D. Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel. E. Temporary closures,which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings, terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight condition. F. Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allow proper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Do not work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to 80 degrees F. G. Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofing work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work. • 1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants and coatings. 2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen, adhesives, and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray. 3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by other trades. H. Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer. I. Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers and cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deform deck. B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in the substrate before commencing with roofing work. C. Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains. D. Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable of project conditions and requirements. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Take appropriate measures to ensure that fumes from adhesive solvents are not drawn into the building through air intakes. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) B. Prior to proceeding, prepare roof surface so that it is clean, dry, and smooth, and free of sharp edges, fins, roughened surfaces, loose or foreign materials, oil, grease and other materials that may damage the membrane. C. Fill all surface voids in the immediate substrate that are greater than 1/4 inch wide with fill material acceptable insulation to membrane manufacturer. D. Seal, grout, or tape deck joints, where needed, to prevent bitumen seepage into building. 3.04 VAPOR RETARDER A. Before installing insulation install vapor retarder directly over the deck. B. Ensure that all penetrations and edge conditions are sealed to prevent moisture and air drive into the roofing system. 3.05 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Beginning at low point of roof, place membrane without stretching over substrate and allow to relax at least 30 minutes before attachment or splicing; in colder weather allow for longer relax time. B. Lay out the membrane pieces so that field and flashing splices are installed to shed water. C. Install membrane without wrinkles and without gaps or fishmouths in seams; bond and test seams and laps in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions and details. D. Install membrane mechanically attached to the substrate using seam battens, fasteners, and edge securement as specified and as required by membrane manufacturers. E. Mechanical Attachment: Install fasteners in the seams, covered by membrane. 1. Lay out fasteners in compliance with FM Class specified in PART 2, as recommended by • membrane manufacturer, and as indicated, whichever is most stringent. 2. Properly engage fasteners in the deck with head flush with the countersunk portion of seam plate. F. Edge Securement: Secure membrane at all locations where membrane terminates or goes through an angle change greater than 2 in 12 inches using mechanically fastened reinforced perimeter fastening strips, plates, or metal edging as indicated or as recommended by roofing manufacturer. 1. Exceptions: Round pipe penetrations less than 18 inches in diameter and square penetrations less than 4 inches square. 2. Metal edging is not merely decorative; ensure anchorage of membrane as intended by roofing manufacturer. 3.06 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install flashings, including laps, splices,joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as required by membrane manufacturer's recommendations and details. B. Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings, gravel stops, and copings in locations indicated on the drawings,with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal onto membrane. 1. Follow roofing manufacturer's instructions. 2. Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation. 3. Install water block sealant under the membrane anchorage leg. 4. Flash with manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated. 5. Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge. 6. If the roof edge includes a gravel stop and sealant is not applied between the laps in the metal edging, install an additional piece of self-adhesive flashing membrane over the • metal lap to the top of the gravel stop; apply seam edge treatment at the intersections of the two flashing sections. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) 7. When the roof slope is greater than 1:12, apply seam edge treatment along the back edge of the flashing. 3.07 FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require maintenance, and where indicated on the drawings. B. Walkway Pads: Adhere to the roofing membrane, spacing each pad at minimum of 1.0 inch and maximum of 3.0 inches from each other to allow for drainage. 1. If installation of walkway pads over field fabricated splices or within 6 inches of a splice edge cannot be avoided, adhere another layer of flashing over the splice and extending beyond the walkway pad a minimum of 6 inches on either side. 2. Prime the membrane, remove the release paper on the pad, press in place, and walk on pad to ensure proper adhesion. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for warranty purposes(i.e. not a sales person). B. Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas, including bitumen, adhesives, sealants, and coatings. B. Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the work of this section; comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components and surfaces. C. Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durable protection and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and conductor heads. B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications. C. Reglets and accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile,jointing pattern,jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating metal finish for each color. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA 1793 and CDA A4050 requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years of documented experience. 1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING • A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. B. Zinc/Aluminum Flashings:ASTM A 792 with AZ55, 45%zinc/55%aluminum alloy applied by a continuous hot dip coating process. C. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. D. Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 Ib/sq ft thick. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. Prefinish exposed fasteners to match sheet metal color. B. Underlayment: ASTM D2178, glass fiber roofing felt. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. D. Primer: Zinc chromate type. E. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. • F. Sealant to be Concealed in Completed Work: Non-curing butyl sealant. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM G. Sealant to be Exposed in Completed Work: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, 100 percent 1111 silicone with minimum movement capability of plus/minus 25 percent and recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; clear. H. Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 90 05. I. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. J. Reglets: Surface mounted type, galvanized steel;face and ends covered with plastic tape . 2.03 FABRICATION A. Provide prefinished galvanized (or AZ55 coated)sheet metal fabrications unless indicated otherwise. B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. C. Fabricate cleats of same type sheet metal, minimum 8 inches wide, interlocking with sheet. D. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 1. Coping: Align seams with cladding joints, or as indicated. Fold front edge 45 degrees. E. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. F. Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams for telescoping fit. G. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. I. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. • 2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: SMACNA(ASMM), Rectangular profile. B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in accordance with SMACNA(ASMM). D. Seal metal joints. 2.05 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NRCA designs and SMACNA detailing. B. Clamping Roof Drains and Vents: Lead. C. Posts, Pipes, and Conduit: Prefinished galvanized steel cone shape and counter flashing with draw-band and top sealant channel. D. Equipment Pad: Galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film 111 thickness of 15 mil. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM • C. Prime all metal flashing surfaces to receive flexible flashing. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply a bead of sealant to flashing prior to installation of flashing. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. E. Seal metal joints watertight. F. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. G. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum. H. Align downspout boots with location of downspouts as indicated. Downspouts to be plumb. Provide splash block at base of downspout. I. Ensure no metals, including alloys of the same base metal, are placed together in a manner, combination or location likely to give rise to damage by electrolytic action or other corrosion. In particular avoid metal to metal contact between aluminum and metals other than an appropriate grade and composition of stainless steel as per the recommendations of the material manufacturer and to the approval of the Architect. Ensure that dissimilar materials are to be treated or protected in such a manner as necessary to prevent corrosive action. J. Isolation of dissimilar metal surfaces to prevent electrolytic action shall be accomplished by materials which are impervious to moisture and non-absorptive. • K. All steel parts shall receive a protective treatment commensurate with their respective functions and locations. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Gutters, Downspouts and Scuppers: Prefinished. B. Trim and Through-Wall Flashing: Prefinished. C. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings: Prefinished. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals. B. Roof access hatches, manual operation. C. Roof vents. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed layout developed for this project. Show dimensioned location and number for each type of roof accessory. D. Warranty Documentation: 1. Submit manufacturer warranty. 2. Ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.03 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. • 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Package according to manufacturers' recommendations and store where directed. C. Extra material is intended for use in the event of damage after project completion and shall not be used to replace materials damaged during construction. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED CURBS A. Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies: 1. AES Industries Inc.: www.aescurb.com. 2. The Pate Company: www.patecurbs.com. 3. Roof Products &Systems (RPS) by Commercial Products Group of Hart& Cooley, Inc: www.rpscurbs.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies: Factory-assembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded corners, integral counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water. 1. Sheet Metal: Hot-dip aluminum zinc alloy coated steel sheet(Galvalume)complying with ASTM A792/A792M;AZ55 coating designation; 18 gage, 0.048 inch thick. 2. Roofing Cants: Provide integral sheet metal roofing cants dimensioned to begin slope at top of roofing insulation; 1:1 slope; minimum cant height 4 inches. 3. Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not • on insulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck. 4. Provide the layouts and configurations shown on the drawings. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES C. Curbs Adjacent to Roof Openings: Provide curb on all sides of opening,with top of curb • horizontal for equipment mounting. 1. Provide preservative treated wood nailers along top of curb. 2. Insulate inside curbs with 1-1/2 inch thick extruded polystyrene insulation. 3. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches, minimum. 4. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches, minimum. D. Equipment Rails: Two-sided curbs in straight lengths, with top horizontal for equipment mounting. 1. Provide preservative treated wood nailers along top of rails. 2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches, minimum. 3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches, minimum. E. Pipe, Duct, and Conduit Mounting Pedestals: Vertical posts, minimum 8 inches square unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide sliding channel welded along top edge with adjustable height steel bracket, manufactured to fit item supported. 2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches, minimum. 3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches, minimum. 2.02 ROOF HATCHES, MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION A. Manufacturers- Roof Hatches: 1. Acudor Products Inc; Galvanized Steel Roof Hatch: www.acudor.com.w 2. Bilco Company: ww.bilco.com.w 3. Dur-Red Products: ww.dur-red.com. 4. Lane-Aire manufacturing Corporation;www.lane-aire.com. 5. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart& Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 1111 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled fully galvanized steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release hardware. 1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on a sloped roof. 3. Size(s): 30 inches by 36 inches or as indicated on drawings; single-leaf style. 4. Features: Exterior release for fire department access; perimeter frame integral safety railings; multiple latch points providing air-tight seal. C. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction. 1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load. 2. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage, 0.03 inch thick. 3. Finish: Factory prime paint. 4. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber. 5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter. D. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. 1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load. 2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release. 4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release. 5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior. 6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES • 2.03 LADDER SAFETY POST A. Manufacturers- Roof Ladder Safety Post System: 1. Bilco Co.: LadderUp;www.bilco.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Furnish and install where indicated on plans at roof hatch ladder safety post system Model LU-1. The safety post system shall be field assembled and installed per the manufacturer's instructions. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Safety post system shall be atelescoping tubular section that locks automatically when fully extended. Upward and downward movement shall be controlled by a stainless steel spring balancing mechanism. Unit shall be completely assembled and be provided with fasteners for securing to the ladder rungs in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.. 2. Safety post system shall be provided with a fully adjustable mounting system and come with all hardware to accommodates virtually any ladder rung size or spacing. 2.04 HATCH RAIL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers- Roof Hatch Rail System: 1. Bilco Co.: www.bilco.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Furnish and install where indicated on plans hatch rail system Model RL-SSW. The hatch rail system shall be field assembled and installed per the manufacturer's instructions. C. Performance Requirements: • 1. Hatch rail system shall attach to the cap flashing of the roof hatch and shall not penetrateroofing material. 2. Hatch rail system shall satisfy the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 and shall meet OSHA strength requirements with a factor of safety of two. 3. UV and corrosion resistant construction with a twenty-five year warranty. 4. Self-closing gate shall be provided with hatch rail system. D. Posts and Rails: Shall be round pultruded reinforced fire retardant safety yellow colored fiberglass treated with a UV inhibitor. E. Hardware: Mounting brackets shall be %4"thick hot dip galvanized steel. Hinges and post guidesshall be 6063T5 aluminum. Fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2.05 VENTS A. Soffit Vent 1. Basis of Design; Air Vent Inc.: SV202, aluminum Soffit Vent; www.airvent.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Attic Relief Air Vent: 1. American Aides Ventilation Corporation; www.americanaldes.com. a. Product: Round aluminum roof cap. b. Model: RCR #22436X-12 2. Optional Product: Air Vent Inc.; www.airvent.com a. Product: Round metal dome roof cap; B-144 Metal Dome 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 63 00- Product Substitution Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory III preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity. B. Ensure that no metals, including alloys of the same base metal, are placed together in a manner, combination or location likely to give rise to damage by electrolytic action or other corrosion. In particular avoid metal to metal contact between aluminum and metals other than an appropriate grade and composition of stainless steel as per the recommendations of the material manufacturer and to the approval of the Architect. Ensure that dissimilar aluminum alloys in contact with each other are compatible with each other or isolated.Any other dissimilar materials are to be treated or protected in such a manner as necessary to prevent corrosive action. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. III END OF SECTION III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all penetrations, perimeters and interuptions to fire-rated assemblies and smoke-resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. C. Acoustical isolation accessories for electrical outlet boxes. D. Weather-resistant exterior firestopping at exterior sheathing penetrations. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E119-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. B. ASTM E2307-Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems. C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.. D. FM P7825-Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation. E. SCAQMD 1168- South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168;www.aqmd.gov. F. UL(FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. G. IAS AC291 Accreditation Criteria for Special Inspection Agencies H. NFPA 221 Fire Walls and Fire Barriers I. NFPA 251 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials J. IAS AC291 • 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of F.irestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. G. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey)will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1. Provide products from a single manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Able to show at least 10 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. 2. Licensed or approved by authority having jurisdiction, where applicable. D. Installing Mechanic's Qualifications: Trained and certified by firestopping manufacturer and able to provide evidence thereof. • E. Pre-Installation Conference: Include AHJ inspector and 3rd party inspector. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 1.05 MOCK-UP • A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project. 1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions, install one assembly for each different combination. B. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work. C. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not accepted. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Do not install work until work area is dry and moisture will not be present for at least 3 days. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products that comply with requirements from a single manufacturer, one and only one of the following: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Specified Technologies Inc. 3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. • 2.03 ACOUSTIC MATERIALS A. Acoustical Isolation: Putty Pad of rubber material, clay is unacceptable. 1. Acoustical Isolation material at outlets and junction boxes in demising and corridor walls and ceilings. 2.04 APPLICATIONS A. Contractor to provide Delegated Design firestopping systems 1. Firestopping shall complie with code and building fire barriers. 2. Fire Barrier: Firestopping at perimeters and penetrations. 3. Floor Perimeters: Fire-Smoke containment assembly at storefront assembly construction, where required. 2.05 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2.06 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. Provide paintable surface material where firestopping is exposed to view, excluding maintenance areas. C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. D. Pillow firestopping is not allowed. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 84 00 FIR ESTOPPING • 2.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide firestopping identification stenciled to surface adjacent to each required system installed. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:. Indicate special procedures. D. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance"Article. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: • 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. 5. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193. 6. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 7. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.04 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window, wall, air barrier system, and doors under provisions of Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements and 01 43 39- Coordinated Mockups. B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted. C. Locate where directed. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after • installation. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS 1.06 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. B. See Section 07 25 00 for sealants compatible with weather resistant barrier system. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. 1. VOC Content: Provide sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Roofing Sealant: 300 g/L. c. Single Ply Membrane Sealer: 450 g/L. d. Other sealants: 420 g/L. e. Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. f. Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as • demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E. Exterior Building Joint Sealant: Dow Corning 795,for vertical joints including: 1. Panel joints 2. Joints between products 3. Joints in sheet metal fabrications F. Exterior Building Joint Sealant, non-bleeding: Dow Corning 756 SMS. 1. Use in contact with stone or ceramic tile to assure no bleeding. 2. Provide non-staining warranty G. Exterior Pavement Joint Sealant: Sonneborn SL-2, 2-part urethane H. Interior Horizontal Concrete Joint Sealant: Sonneborn Epolith-P, 2-part epoxy I. Interior Vertical Joint Sealant: Sonneborn Sonolac, 1-part acrylic J. Interior Bath and Toilet Room Sealant: GE Sanitary 1700 or Dow 786, silicone K. Interior Acoustical Joint Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound, complying with ASTM C919. Protective Treatments, Inc. PTI 808 Acoustical Sealant. L. Colors: Selected from full range except where custom color is specified. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS • 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. 411 B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated steel doors. E. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. • B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Door Top Closures: Flush on exterior doors. Inverted top closure acceptable on interior doors. 2. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 3. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 4. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BH MA A156.115,with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 6. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness B. Hollow metal doors and frames: 1. Exterior openings from electrical rooms, stairways, and bike room. 2. Interior openings into trash room, water room, bike room, building services, and other utility spaces. C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type;for • instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors;where two requirements • conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.02 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100); Level 2- Heavy-Duty, Physical Performance Level B, Model 2-Seamless. 2. Core: Kraftpaper honeycomb. 3. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M,with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 4. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 5. Finish: Factory primed, and field finished. B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100); Level 2- Heavy-Duty, Physical Performance Level B, Model 2-Seamless. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch. 4. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100); Level 2- Heavy-Duty, Physical Performance Level B, Model 2- Seamless. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive pressure"). a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL(Underwriters Laboratories)- UL (BMD). b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. • 3. Core: Mineral board. 4. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 2.03 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100), Level 1 Door Frames: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum thickness. b. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100), Level 1, 18 gage, 0.042 inch, minimum thickness. 2. Finish: Same as for door. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Fully welded type. D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knockdown type. E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed. B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center • mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES • D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory-or shop-assembled frames. 2.05 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. F. Touch up damaged factory finishes. • 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 HARDWARE SETS END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 12 14 PRE-FINISHED METAL DOOR FRAMES IIIPART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-rated and fire rated, shop pre-finished metal frames, for interior site assembled applications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, frame configuration profiles, product components, including anchorage, accessories, and finish colors and textures. 1. Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, spacing and location of embosses and cut-outs for hardware. E. Samples: Submit one verification sample for selected finish and texture. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions; indicate special installation instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with • minimum five years documented experience and having all staff"Certified Prefinished Frame Installers." B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated 1. Individuals that are certified for the installation of site assembled door frames. 2. Refer to manufacturer's Internet web site for listing of Certified installers. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND PROTECTION A. Factory package door frames individually with surfaces protected against shipping and handling damage until time of installation. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels in tact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. D. Store frames in a dry weather protected area off the ground. Do not cover with a tarp. Do not create a moisture chamber over product in storage. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurement before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, and fabrication schedule with construction progress schedule to avoid construction delays. B. Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation. C. Sequence installation to ensure concealed electric wire connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 12 14 PRE-FINISHED METAL DOOR FRAMES PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Frames: 1. Durbarton Corporation: Product: Rediframe; www.durbarton.com. 2. Basis of Design-Timely Industries: Product: Timely Frames;www.timelyframes.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Frame Material: Cold rolled steel, or extruded aluminum section for interior frames. B. Frame Profile: Non-rated and fire rated: 1. C" Series, 1.2 mm (18 gage minimum)thick or equivalent in aluminum. C. Frame Casings: 1. Wood trim, see Section 06 20 00. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcement Bracket for Closers. B. Reinforcement Brackets for Door Guards. C. Fasteners: 1. Interior Frames: Drywall type (or equivalent for aluminum). 2.04 FABRICATION A. Frames: Fabricate frames as indicated on shop drawings. 2.05 FINISH A. Door Frames: • 1. Factory applied primer for field finish painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, and other Work,which have been previously installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before starting work. B. Verify that rough opening sizes,wall thickness, and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. B. Metal Door Frames: 1. Install frames plumb and square, per shop drawings, and manufacturer's printed instructions.Verify opening and dimensions with shop drawings. Use door as a template to insure proper alignment and clearances. 2. Install frames over finished walls and anchor through faces in structure as indicated on drawings. C. Secure frame to wall with appropriate type fasteners. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for fasteners. Install casing on frame. D. Anchor frame with one drywall-type screw adjacent to each casing clip. E. Install silencers on interior door frames and adjust strike plate to hold door tight to stops when closed. F. Coordinate frame installation with hardware installation specified in Section 08 71 00 and doors in Section 08 14 16. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 12 14 PRE-FINISHED METAL DOOR FRAMES • 3.03 FINAL INSPECTION A. Inspect each opening for operation, hardware, appearance, and installation. Make required adjustments. B. Repair or replace damaged or defective frames. C. Replace frames defective under terms of manufacturer's warranty. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris per project requirements identified in Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Mangement and Controls. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect installed product's finish surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 11111 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration;fire rated, non-rated, and acoustical. B. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E1408- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems. B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards. C. ICC (IBC)- International Building Code. D. NFPA 80 -Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. E. WDMA I.S. 1A- Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association. (ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A) F. WI (CCP)-Certified Compliance Program (CCP). G. VVI (MCP)- Monitored Compliance Program (MCP). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, • blocking for hardware,factory machining,factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). D. Specimen warranty. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch in size cut from top corner of door. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer,warping beyond specified installation tolerances, • defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors;flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated. B. Scope: 1. Interior doors and frames for Residential Units. 2. Unit Interior Door Frame:AWS Chapter 6, Custom grade, 09 90 00 opaque paint finish 2.03 DOORS AND PANELS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Standard Duty performance, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 7-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated;flush construction. 1. Hardboard facing for field opaque finish where indicated on drawings. C. Doors within Units: 1-3/8 inches thick unless otherwise indicated;flush construction. 1. Hardboard facing for field opaque finish where indicated on drawings. 2.04 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core(FD), plies and faces as indicated above;with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting. B. Hollow Core Doors: Type-Standard (FSHC); plies and faces as indicated. C. Particle Core acceptable provided it meets fire rating requirements. • 2.05 DOOR FACINGS A. Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish: Hardboard. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Louvers: 1. Louver Blade: Flush louver where indicated on drawings. 2.07 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware. C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings,with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished. E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.08 SITE FINISHING -WOOD VENEER DOORS A. See Section 09 90 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS • B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. END OF SECTION 111 • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 17 23 PREHUNG WOOD DOORS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush hollow core prehung interior wood passage doors for dwelling units. B. Wood door frames. C. Wood casings. 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Obtain hardware templates from hardware manufacturer prior to starting fabrication. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details, installation instructions, hardware, and anchor recommendations. C. Test Reports: Show compliance with specified criteria. D. Shop Drawings: Show layout and profiles; include assembly methods. 1. Indicate product components, including hardware locations and preparations, accessories, finish colors, patterns, and textures. 2. Indicate wall conditions, door and frame elevations, sections, materials, gages, finishes, location of door hardware by dimension, and details of openings; use same reference numbers indicated on Drawings to identify details and openings. E. Samples: Provide finish samples for all products. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. • Indicate special installation instructions. G. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. H. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. B. Deliver doors, materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store doors as recommended by manufacturer. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals for for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer standard warranty indicating that doors will be free from material and workmanship defects from the date of substantial completion for the time periods indicated below: 1. Door System: 5 Years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. B. Door Style: 1. Flush Veneer: a. Quality Level: Custom Grade with A grade veneer, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 4. b. Face Materials: Ili1) Paint grade, hardboard SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 17 23 PREHUNG WOOD DOORS c. Door Type: Hollow core • 1) Stiles: (a) Softwood,finger joined, paint grade. 2) Rails: Softwood,finger joined, paint grade. 3) Core: Honeycomb,with either ladder or grid with core cell size no greater than 6 by 6 inches, and fully expaned to door stiles and rails. 4) Blocking added for robe hook. d. Thickness: 1) 1-3/8 inches. C. Jambs: 1. Profile: Solid flat double rabbeted. 2. Width: a. coordinate jamb width with wall assembly. D. Casing: 1. Type: a. Paint grade,finger joined, or MDF, see Section 06 20 00.. 2. Profile: a. See Section 06 20 00 E. Hardware: 1. Hinges and passage set, see Section 08 71 00- Door Hardware. 2.02 FINISHES A. Paint Surface: 1. Prime for field finish painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Inspect door prior to installation. B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with door manufacturer recommendations.Verify rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Prepare door for installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Place door unit into opening and level hinge side of jamb. Use shims fastened through jamb and stop to level and temporarily secure in place. B. Level latch side of jamb. Use shims fastened through jamb and stop to level and temporarily secure in place. C. Verify spacing between jamb and door is uniform on all sides. Adjust as necessary. D. Shim top of jamb in center of opening and fasten with nail. E. Re-check for square, level and even spacing around door. Nail securely in place through stop, jamb, shims and into studs every 12 inches. F. Set nails. G. Install trim on both sides using nails every 12 to 16 inches. 3.05 TOLERANCES • A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 17 23 PREHUNG WOOD DOORS • B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 30 00 ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Smoke detector activated elevator door smoke containment screen and control system designed to provide a tight-fitting, smoke- and draft-control assembly. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. End-of-line diode (3.9V, 2W). Installed at smoke detector to monitor the circuit. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A240/240M-Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels. B. ICC Evaluation Service ES-AC77-Acceptance Criteria for Smoke-Containment Systems Used With Fire-Resistive Elevator Hoistway Doors and Frames. C. ICC Evaluation Service report ESR-1136 D. NFPA Codes and Standards: 1. 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. 105- Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies. 3. 72-2002 and 2007— National Fire Alarm Code E. UL Standards: 1. 268 -Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 2. 508- Industrial Control Equipment. 3. 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 4. 1784-Air Leakage Tests for Door Assemblies. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, with complete general and specific installation instructions, recommendations, and limitations. C. Shop Drawings: Include door width and height,jamb width,jamb and head projection, screen width, mounting height, and housing width. Show and identify related work performed under other sections of the specifications. 1. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualifications: 1) Proof of manufacturer qualifications. 2) Proof of Installer qualifications. 3) Certifications: Copy of specified items. 4) Manufacturer's installation instructions and testing procedures 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals; submit following items: 1. Operation and Maintenance Manual. 2. Manufacturer's Warranties 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Overall Standards: 1. Manufacturer shall maintain a quality control program in accordance with ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria 77. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum seven years experience in producing smoke containment systems of the type specified. • 2. Installer Qualifications: Factory trained by manufacturer. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 30 00 ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SYSTEM C. Certifications: • 1. Manufacturer's ICC Evaluation Service report ESR-1136. 2. Testing Laboratory Label. 3. UL Listing. D. Pre-Installation Meeting: 1. Schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting prior to commencement of field operations with representatives of the following in attendance: Owner, Architect, General Contractor, smoke containment system sub-contractor, and electrical sub-contractor. 2. Review substrate conditions, requirements of related work, installation instructions, storage and handling procedures,and protection measures. 3. Keep minutes of meeting including responsibilities of various parties and deviations from specifications and installation instructions. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals. B. Provide manufacturer's standard one year warranty. C. Maintenance and Testing: 1. Perform minimum semi-annual maintenance and testing on each smoke containment system as required by the manufacturer's warranty, code agency evaluation reports, and as required by local authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide test documentation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 1111 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Smoke Guard, Product: Model 200;ww.smokeguard.com. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 3 cfm (0.001416 m3/s) per sf of door opening at 0.1 in (25 Pa) water pressure differential at ambient temperature and 400 degrees F (204 degrees C)tested per IBC 2000 714.2.3. B. Label each smoke containment system with following information: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Maximum leakage rating at specified pressure and temperature conditions. 3. Label of quality control agency. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Screen: 1. Film: Minimum 1 mil (0.025 mm)thick transparent polyimide film reinforced with minimum 100 denier Nomex yarn at .25 in (6.35 mm)each way. 2. Magnetic Strips: Flexible multi-pole strips attached to longitudinal edges of film with low modulus silicone adhesive. B. Housing: 20 gage, powder coated, cold rolled steel container with dust cover and door with concealed hinges and a latch. Housings are 55 inches or 64 inches in length, plus 1-1/2 inches for a junction box on the left side. C. Mandatory Auxiliary Rails: 1. Material: 16 gage ASTM A 240/240M, Type 430, ferritic stainless steel. 2. Size: 2 in (51 mm)wide, 1" (25 mm) deep, as shown in Shop Drawings. D. Rewind Motor: NFPA 70, 90v DC. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 30 00 ELEVATOR DOOR SMOKE CONTAINMENT SYSTEM • E. Release Mechanism: Comply with UL Standard No. 864. F. Screen Rewind Switch: Include switch to rewind screen into housing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed. 1. Verify related work performed under other sections is complete and in accordance with Shop Drawings. 2. Verify wall surfaces and elevator door frames are acceptable for installation of smoke containment system components. B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install smoke containment system components in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Test: Follow manufacturer's cycle test procedures. 1. Notify Owner's Representative, local Fire Marshal, alarm sub-contractor and [elevator sub-contractor][elevator service company] minimum one week in advance of scheduled testing. 2. Complete maintenance service record. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate required testing and maintenance procedures to Owner's Representative. B. Maintenance and Testing: 1. Perform minimum semi-annual maintenance and testing on each smoke containment system as required by the manufacturer's warranty, code agency evaluation reports, and as required by local authority having jurisdiction. 2. Retain permanent record of tests. C. Qualified Smoke Guard Inspector assesses unit(s)after exposure to a fire event. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 1111 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall, and ceiling locations. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ITS (DIR)- Directory of Listed Products; lntertek Testing Services NA, Inc.. B. UL(FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated access doors. 1. Provide access doors of fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. B. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey)as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1111A. Coordinate the work with other work requiring access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS 2.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall access door and frame units. B. Ceiling access door and frame units. 2.03 WALL AND CEILING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. ACUDOR Products Inc: www.acudor.com. 2. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. 3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart& Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded,filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. C. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed D. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies that units are to be installed in. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. • 3. Material: Formed Steel. 4. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch (1.5 mm)steel. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 5. Door panels: 0.070 inch (1.8 mm)single thickness steel sheet. • 6. Hardware: a. Hinge, Fire-Rated-Units: 175 degree steel hinges with non-removable pin. b. Hinge: Non-Fire-Rated Units: 175 degree steel hinges with removable pin. c. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock. 7. Galvanized, hot dipped finish. 8. Prime coat with baked primer. 9. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel. 10. Door panels: 0.070 inch double sheet with integral non-combustible insulation filler. 11. Steel Finish: Primed. 12. Primed and Factory Finish: Polyester powder coat; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 13. Hardware: a Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. • END OF SECTION 4111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead coiling metal grilles and operating hardware, electric operation. B. Wring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical equipment. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and alignment procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of grille and operating hardware assembly. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.04 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. • B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide 300,000 cycle warranty for installed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Grilles: 1. Design Basis: Cornell Iron Works, Inc; www.cornelliron.com. a. Product: Visionaire ESG12 Brick Pattern Grill B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to the Design Basis manufacturer's product preformance requirements: 1. The Cookson Company; : www.cooksondoor.com. 2. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation; : www.waynedalton.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 GRILLE AND COMPONENTS A. Grille: Aluminum; horizontal bar curtain, coiling on overhead counterbalanced shaft. 1. Finish: Anodized, clear color. 2. Electric operation with emergency egrees option. 3. Mounting: Wall Surface mounted. B. Curtain: Round horizontal bars connected with vertical links. 1. Horizontal bars: 5/16 inch diameter. 2. Bar spacing: 2 inch on center. 3. Tube spacers: 1/2 inch diameter. 4. Spacer spacing: 3 1/4 inch on center. 5. Vertical links: 5/8 x 1/8 inch flat bar. • 6. Link spacing: 6 inch on center. 7. Bar Ends: Provide with nylon runners for quiet operation. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 8. Bottom Bar: Back-to-back angles with tubular resilient cushion. • C. Guides: Extruded aluminum angles, of profile to retain grille in place with snap-on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. D. Hood Enclosure: Sheet metal; completely covering operating mechanisms; internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 1. Material: Same metal as grille. 2. Sheet Metal Thickness: 22 gage, 0.0329 inch. 3. Finish:Matching grille components. E. Hardware: 1. Lock Cylinders: Specified in Section 08 71 00. F. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid-travel;with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Galvanized Steel Bars: Galvanized to minimum coating thickness grade in accordance with ASTM Al23/A123M. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, galvanized to minimum G90/Z275 coating. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, rollable temper. 2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION A. Electric Operators: 1. Mounting: Side mounted. 2. Motor Enclosure: a. Exterior grilles: NEMA MG 1, Type 4; open drip proof. b. Interior grilles: NEMA MG 1, Type 1; open drip proof. 3. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp; continuous duty. 4. Motor Voltage: 110 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. 5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2,full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 6. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1. 7. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second. 8. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 9. Manual override in case of power failure. B. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each operator. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. Surface mounted. C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install grille unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES • C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 27 17. F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. G. Install perimeter trim. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean grille and components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead sectional garage doors, electrically operated. B. Operating hardware and supports. C. Electrical controls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions. E. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting. F. Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare part sources. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 4111 B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. C. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. 1.04 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements. B. Warranty: 1. Installer: a. Correct defective Work within a [two]year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 2. Sectional Garage Door: a. 10-year finish: For a period of 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion b. 1-year for parts and materials. 3. Electric Operator: a. Model 81 55 (Belt Drive): 1) 4-year motor. 2) 10-year belt. 3) 1-year parts PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sectional Garage Doors- Design Basis : Clopay Corporation; Classic Collection Value Series: www.clopaydoor.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers pending conformance to comperable product specifications and performance requirement:: • 1. Fimbel Architectural Door Specialties: www.fimbelads.com. 2. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 411 2.02 STEEL DOOR COMPONENTS A. Steel Doors: Traditional Short Panel T50S, single layer construction 1. Performance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads equal to 1.5 times design wind loads specified by local code without damage or permanent set,when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using 10 second duration of maximum load. 2. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches thick. 3. Panel Joint Section: Weatherstripped tongue and groove profile. 4. Exterior/Interior Finish: Multi-layer finish system; hot dipped galvanized layer, protective metal oxide pretreatment and baked on primer and top coats. 5. Operation: Electric. 2.03 DOOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 inch minimum thickness; 2 inch wide, continuous one piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch thick. B. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel;floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side. C. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient hollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact. D. Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels. E. Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length. F. Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length. 2.04 ELECTRICAL OPERATORS A. Sectional Garage Door Operators- Design Basis : LiftMaster, by Chamberlain Group, Inc.; Liftmaster 8155, Contractor Series: www.liftmaster.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers pending conformance to comperable product specifications and performance requirement: 1. The Genie Company: www.geniecompany.com. 2. Overhead Door Corporation: www.overheaddoor.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Operator, Controls,Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Motor: a. Horsepower: 1/2. b. RPM: 1,625. c. Thermal Protection: Automatic. d. Lubrication: Permanent. 2. Drive Mechanism: a. Model 8155: 1) Drive Means: Full reinforced belt drive. 2) Reduction Means: Gear 16:1. 3) Door Linkage: Adjustable door arm. 3. Logic Type: a. Solid-state microcontroller with built-in surge suppressor. 4. Dimensions: • a. Installed Length: 124 inches for 7-foot door opening. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS • b. Maximum Door Opening: 7 feet 6 inches; opening up to 10 feet with optional rail. c. Headroom Clearance Required: 2 inches. 5. Shipping Weight: a. Model 8155: 1) Head: 21 pounds. 2) Rail: Belt 17 pounds. 6. Adjustments: a. Auto-Force. b. Electronic Limit Settings. 7. Travel Rate: a. 7 inches per second. 8. Electrical: a. Voltage: 120V AC, 60 Hz. b. Wattage: 540W. c. Current Rating: 6.0A. d. UL Listed. e. Length of 3-Prong Line Cord: 4 feet. 9. Security+2.0 Radio Controls: a. LiftMaster 891 LM 1-Button Remote Control. b. Coding System: Smart receiver code button and indicator light. c. Operating Range: 200 feet(approximately). d. Operating Temperature: -31 degrees F to 149 degrees F. e. Battery for Remote Control: 3V, lithium. f. Remote Control Radio Frequency: 310, 315 and 390 MHz tri-band. • g. Radio Receiver Frequency: Frequency agile 310, 315 and 390 MHz. h. Security+2.0 anti-burglary coding. 10. MyQ Powered Radio: a. 902 to 928 MHz. b. 50-channel FHSS (Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum). c. Provides two-way communication from garage door operator and MyQ Accessories. d. Enables remote closing of garage door with key MyQ Accessories. e. LiftMaster 828LM Internet Gateway: Enables monitoring and control of garage door operators and lighting controls via Internet-enabled smartphone, tablet or computer (sold separately). 11. Control Panel: a. LiftMaster 882LM Multi-Function Control Panel. 1) Light Control: Turns operator lights on/off. 2) Adjustable light timer. 3) Illuminated push-button. 4) Lock Mode: Locks out outside remote controls. 12. Security+ 2.0 Encrypted Controls: a. LiftMaster 882LM Multi-Function Control Panel. b. Maintenance Alert System. c. Light Control: Turns operator lights on/off. d. Program remote controls, keypads and MyQ Accessories. e. Lock Mode: Locks out outside remote controls. 13. Lighting: a. Number of Bulbs: 1. b. Maximum Wattage: 100 x 1. c. Adjustable time, solid-state delay(1.5 to 4.5 minutes). • d. Enhanced CFL (Compact Fluorescent) compatible. 14. Materials: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS a. Chassis: Steel. • b. Chassis Cover: Steel. c. Rail: Solid steel T. d. Trolley: Steel. 15. Convenience/Safety Features: a. The Protector System safety reversing sensors. b. Alert-2-Close unattended close operation with select accessories (must not be used with one-piece door). c. Emergency/quick release. d. Automatic trolley reconnect. e. Ventilation/pet opening. f. Down safety reverse. g. Up safety stop. h. Door open/beam obstructed/lights on. i. PosiLock secure lock system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal. B. Apply primer to wood frame. 1111 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit components. F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 90 05. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean doors and frames and glazing. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS • 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 36 16 SINGLE-PANEL SLIDING BARN DOORS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated single-panel wood sliding barn doors with operating hardware. B. Coordinate location and installation of concealed blocking for support of tracks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions. C. Shop Drawings: D. Product Data: Provide track profiles, acceptable load data, Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening tolerances.and connection requirements. E. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical sliding door panel corner construction, provide sample hardware, accessories, and finishes. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of residential sliding doors with not fewer than three years of experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site and store in manufacturer's protective cartons until openings are ready for door installation. • B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install doors when ambient temperature is below 60 degrees F and/or relative humidity conditions are greater than 50 percent. B. Maintain minimum temperature and humidity conditions for 24 hours prior, during and there after. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SLIDING BARN DOORS A. Sliding Barn Doors: Solid wood stiles, rails, and panel planks,factory fabricated, and fitted for hardware. 1. Door Configuration: One horizontal sliding panel. a. Stile and Rail Frame: Solid lumber, 1-3/4 by 5-1/2 inches. b. Frame Corners: Mortise and tenon joinery. 1) Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and rigidly joined corners. c. Door Panel Interior Horizontal Planks: Solid lumber, of same type as stiles and rails, 3/4 by 3-1/2 inches tongue and groove planks. 2. Wood Species: Clear, vertical grain, rift cut Hemlock/Fir, of type suitable for staining. 3. Finish: Factory applied stain to match Architect's sample. • B. Construction: Factory assemble door panel, factory fit for operating hardware. 1. Panel Sizes: 3 feet 6 inches wide by 7 feet high. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 36 16 SINGLE-PANEL SLIDING BARN DOORS 2.02 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES • A. Track: Barn Door Hardware, 402 Straight B. Pull Handles: Akzent; both sides of door. C. Sliding Panel Bottom Rollers: Brushed Stainless steel, adjustable. D. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber. E. Fasteners: Of size and type as recommended by manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that above door and adjacent to opening concealed blocking for support of tracks have been installed and are ready to receive track attachments. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit in conjunction with travel direction. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach track level for proper operation of sliding components. C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten sliding door assembly to wall construction without distortion or imposed stresses. 3.04 TOLERANCES • A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 foot straight edge. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces. B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Clean finished surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to door manufacturer. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 41 26 ALL-GLASS SLIDING DOORS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. All-glass Sliding doors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each component in all-glass entrance assembly. C. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing layout, dimensions, identification of components, and interface with adjacent construction. 1. Include field measurements of openings. 2. Include elevations showing: a. Appearance of all-glass entrance layouts. b. Locations and identification of manufacturer-supplied door hardware and fittings. c. Locations and sizes of cut-outs and drilled holes for other door hardware. 3. Include details of: a. Requirements for support and bracing at openings. b. Installation details. c. Appearance of manufacturer-supplied door hardware and fittings. 4. Schedule: Listing of each type component in all-glass entrance assemblies, cross-referenced to shop drawing plans, elevations, and details. D. Certificates: Contractor's certification that installer of entrance assemblies meets specified qualifications. III 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum three years of experience installing entrance assemblies similar to those specified in this section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. All-Glass Sliding Doors: 1. Design Basis: The Sliding Door Company. a. Wall slide, Solo Design. 2.02 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ASSEMBLIES A. All-Glass Sliding Doors:Factory fabricated assemblies consisting of frameless glass panels fastened with metal structural fittings in configuration indicated on the drawings. 1. Operational Loads: Designed to withstand door operation under normal traffic without damage, racking, sagging, or deflection. 2. Prepared for all specified hardware whether specified in this section or not. 3. Finished metal surfaces protected with strippable film. 4. Factory assembled to greatest extent practicable; may be disassembled to accommodate shipping constraints. 5. Three inch stile with double upper track. III 6. Extended botom track, double 9 inch. 7. Designer extended ADA pulls, no lock. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 41 26 ALL-GLASS SLIDING DOORS 2.03 MATERIALS • A. Glass: Flat glass meeting requirements of ASTM C1036, Type I -Transparent Flat Glass, Quality Q3, and Kind FT,fully tempered, in accordance with ASTM C1048, and as follows: 1. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 2. Color: Class 1, Clear. 3. Temper glass materials horizontally; visible tong marks or tong mark distortions are not permitted. B. Sealant: One-part silicone sealant, conforming to ASTM C920, clear. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Glass: Tempered float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C1036, Type I, Quality Q3,fully tempered in accordance with ASTM C1048, Kind FT, and as follows: 1. Thickness: 5mm. 2. Color: Clear, Class 1. 3. Prepare glazing panels for indicated fittings and hardware before tempering. 4. Polish edges that will be exposed in finished work to bright flat polish. 5. Temper glass materials horizontally; visible tong marks or tong mark distortions are not permitted. B. Aluminum Components: Conforming to ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M),Alloy 6063, Temper T5. C. Sealant: One-part silicone sealant, conforming to ASTM C920, clear. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are acceptable. B. Do not begin installation until substrates and openings have been properly prepared. • C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Tolerances: 1. Horizontal Components and Sight Lines: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet variation from level, non-cumulative. 2. Vertical Components and Sight Lines: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet variation from plumb, non-cumulative. 3. Variation from Plane or Indicated Location: Not more than 1/16 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors to operate correctly,without binding to frame, sill, or adjacent doors. B. Adjust door hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products prior to Date of Substantial Completion. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 41 26 ALL-GLASS SLIDING DOORS • B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. Leasing Office and Common Room Sliding Glass Doors 1. Manufacturer: The Sliding Door Company 2. Style: Wall Slide, Solo Design, 2 Panels, Clear 5mm Tempered Glass 3. Color: Silver Finish 4. Size: 3 inch with double upper track, double extended bottom track, double 9 inch designer extended ADA pulls, no lock. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Infill panels of glass. C. Aluminum doors and frames. D. Weatherstripping. E. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Wind and Seismic Criteria: Indicated in Structural Drawings 2. Positive Design Wind Load: 20 lbf/sq ft. 3. Negative Design Wind Load: 20 lbf/sq ft. 4. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 5. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 6. Story Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated in Structural Drawings; criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement. 7. Thermal Resistance of Framing: R of 0.46 (low-e). 8. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. 9. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of no less than 60 measured at the frame when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. 10. Water Leakage: None,when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 6.00 lbf/sq ft. 11. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 12. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details and C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions,framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and dimensional limitations. E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located. B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply one case of spray paint(touch-up)for each type and color provided in the Work of this Section. C. Extra materials are intended for use in the event of damage after completion of the project and shall not be used to replace materials damaged during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STOREFRONT A. Design Basis: Arcadia Inc.,www.arcadiainc.com. 1. Exterior Storefront Framing System: AG 451TSeries Thermal System. 2. Exterior Door and Frame System: Thermal Heavy Duty Medium Stile; Arena 450T Series. 3. Interior Storefront Framing System:AR 450 Series, Non-Thermal System. 4. Interior Door and Frame System: Non-Thermal medium stile; MS362HD Series B. Aluminum-Framed Store Front: Factory fabricated,factory finished aluminum framing members with related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Front-set. 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: a. Exterior System: 2 inches wide by 4 1/2 inches deep. b. Interior System: 2 inches wide by 4 1/2 inches deep. 3. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 8.00 lb/sq ft. a. Water Resistance: No water leakage when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a static test pressure of 8.00 lb/sq ft. 4111 4. Air Infiltration: Less than 0.06 cf/min./sf air leakage at 6.24 psf. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS • 5. Deflection Limitation: Limit mullion windload deflection of L/175 with full recovery of glazing materials, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 330. a. System shall not deflect more than 1/8" at the center point, or 1/16"at the center point of a horizontal member, once deadload points have been established. 6. System shall accommodate expansion and contraction movement due to surface temperature differential of 180 degrees F. 7. Seismic testing shall conform to AAMA recommended static test method for evaluating performance of curtain walls and storefront wall systems due to horizontal displacements associated with seismic movements and building sway. 8. Thermal Performance—When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.1 the following results should be attained: U-Maximum .63/CRF—minimum of 59. 9. Finishes: Class I natural anodized. a. Exterior Finish: Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. b. Interior Finish: Class II Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A32 Integrally colored anodic coating not less than 0.4 mils thick. 1) Color: Dark Bronze; match Architect's color sample. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Glazing stops: Flush. 3. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings. 4. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of • delegated design structural steel member. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00. C. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Exterior Door: a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. b. Top Rail: 4-1/2 inches wide. c. Vertical Stiles: 6 inches wide. d. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide. e. Glazing Stops: Square. f. Finish: Same as storefront. 2. Interior Doors: a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. b. Top Rail: 3-5/8 inches wide. c. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2 inches wide. d. Bottom Rail: 10-1/2 inches wide. e. Glazing Stops: Square. f. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). C. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. • E. Exposed Flashings: Aluminum sheet, 20 gage, 0.032 inch minimum thickness; finish to match framing members. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS F. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick stainless steel. • G. Perimeter Sealant: Silicone specified in Section 07 90 05. H. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00. I. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. J. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00. K. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich. 2.04 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Other Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00. B. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. C. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors. D. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all doors. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Finish: Class I clear anodized. B. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. C. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. • D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. E. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. F. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. G. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. H. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. I. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. 2. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 3. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 4. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that,when assembled, have the following characteristics: a. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. b. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. c. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. d. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. e. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. f. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS IIIg. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. 5. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. a. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. b. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. 6. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. a. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. b. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. 7. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 8. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. III B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Use spray foam insulating sealant(Section 07 21 00) in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. K. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure. L. Install hardware using templates provided. 1. See Section 08 71 00 for hardware installation requirements. M. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. N. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05. O. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 0 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS P. Ensure that no metals, including alloys of the same base metal, are placed together in a • manner, combination or location likely to give rise to damage by electrolytic action or other corrosion. In particular avoid metal to metal contact between aluminum and metals other than an appropriate grade and composition of stainless steel as per the recommendations of the material manufacturer and to the approval of the Architect. Ensure that dissimilar aluminum alloys in contact with each other are compatible with each other or isolated. Any other dissimilar materials are to be treated or protected in such a manner as necessary to prevent corrosive action. Q. Isolation of dissimilar metal surfaces to prevent electrolytic action shall be accomplished by materials which are impervious to moisture and non-absorptive, and approved by Architect via RFI. R. All steel parts shall receive a protective treatment commensurate with their respective functions and locations. S. Where used to the exterior of air-seals, or in any location vulnerable to moisture, steel shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. T. Field welds on galvanized steel shall be treated with an approved field cold galvanizing process (e.g. ZRC). Remediation of finish of galvanized steel shall be as per the requirements of ASTM A780. U. Aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, fireproofing, plaster, masonry, or absorptive materials of any kind shall be coated with an anti-galvanic material, impervious to moisture. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated tubular extruded plastic(PVC)windows with fixed sash and matching sliding doors. B. Factory glazed including infill panels. C. Operating hardware. D. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 701/702-Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals;American Architectural Manufacturers Association. B. AAMA-American Architectural Manufacturers Association-www.aamanet.org. 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11 "North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors,and Skylights". 2. AAMA 303-08"Voluntary Specification for Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Exterior Profiles" 3. AAMA 501.1-05"Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows Curtain Walls and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure" 4. AAMA 502-12"Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products" 5. AAMA 800-07"Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants" C. ASTM-American Society for Testing and Materials—www.astm.org 1. ASTM E 283-04"Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across • the Specimen" 2. ASTM E 330-02 "Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference" 3. ASTM E 331-09"Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference" 4. ASTM E 547-09 "Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential" 5. ASTM E 1105-08"Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference" 6. ASTM E 2190-02"Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation" D. NFRC—National Fenestration Rating Council—www.nfrc.org 1. NFRC 100-04 "Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U Factors" 2. NFRC 102-04 "Procedure for Measuring the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems" 3. NFRC 500-04 "Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Condensation Resistance Values" E. IGCC— Insulating Glass Certification Council—www.igcc.org F. SGCC—Safety Glazing Certification Council—www.sgcc.org G. ANSI Z97.1-04 "American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials used in Buildings— Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test" H. 16 CFR 1201 "Consumer Product Safety Commission Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials—codified at Title 16, Part 1201 of the Code of Federal Regulations" • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. Performance Requirements: As specified in PART 2,with the following additional requirements: B. Forced Entry Resistance: Conform to ASTM F588 requirements for performance level 10 for window type A. C. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of window. 1. Calculate design pressures in accordance with applicable code. D. Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel. E. Vapor Seal: No vapor seal failure at interior static pressure of 1 inch, 72 degrees F, and 40 percent relative humidity. F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547 with a field test pressure of not less than 6.00 lb/sq ft. G. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. H. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. Position thermal insulation on exterior surface of air barrier and vapor retarder. I. Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction of plastic to suit glass, infill, and perimeter opening construction. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchors, fasteners, glass, and internal drainage. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions,framed opening tolerances, affected related work, installation requirements. 1. Indicate surrounding installation and attachment of window, moisture barrier, vapor retarder,finish systems, and joint sealers. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of the following showing compliance with specified grade: 1. Evidence of AAMA Certification. 2. Evidence of WDMA Certification. 3. Evidence of CSA Certification. 4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with • minimum 5 years of experience, and a manufacturer approved installer. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS • 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members or joints. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a ten year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Vinyl Windows: 1. Design Basis:VPI Quality Windows; Product Endurance PVC Series, and Marathon Series, swinging doors, with ADA Accessible compliant sill.. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS A. Vinyl Windows and Doors: Factory fabricated frame and sash members of extruded hollow • ultra-violet-resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC)with integral color; with factory-installed glazing, hardware, related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. a. Product Type: C- Casement window, FW- Fixed window, and H - Hung window, vertically sliding. 2. Color: White. 3. Size to fit openings with minimum clearance around perimeter of assembly providing necessary space for perimeter seals. 4. Framing Members: Fusion welded corners and joints, with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity; concealed fasteners. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to exterior side by means of weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation within glazing channel, or other migrating moisture within system. 6. Glazing Stops, Trim, Flashings, and Accessory Pieces: Formed of rigid PVC, fitting tightly into frame assembly. B. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific window type: a. Performance Class: CW40. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Glazing: Insulated double pane, annealed glass, clear, low-E coated, argon filled, with glass thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions and acoustic rating indicated. B. AAMA Class and Rating: Forced entry resistant. AAMA Labeled units. Comply with Oregon residential energy code. C. Windows: Extruded, hollow, tubular, ultra-violet resistant polyvinyl chloride(PVC)with integral • color; factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS 1. Performance Requirements: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 HC40. • 2. Configuration: as indicated on Drawings. 3. Color: Manufacturer standard white. D. Frames: Size and profile as indicated;flush glass stops with flush tamperproof screws fastened. E. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit. F. Insect Screens: Woven aluminum mesh; 14/18 mesh size. 1. Color: White. G. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard; permanently resilient, profiled to maintain weather seal in accordance with AAMA 701/702. H. Fasteners: Stainless steel. I. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type. J. Opening limiters: At all window except L1 courtyard windows. 2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00 of Types described below: 1. Glass in Exterior Lights: IGU Type. 2.05 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's standard. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Casement/Awning Sash: Steel rotary arm sash operating mechanism with fold-down handle and two bar adjustable hinges and keepers fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops. • B. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings, removable pivot clips for cleaning. C. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock. D. Finish of Exposed Hardware: Baked enamel, match interior sash and frame color. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing, mullions and sash members with fusion welded corners and joints, in a rigid jig. Supplement frame sections with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity. B. Form snap-in glass stops, closure molds, weather stops, and flashings of extruded PVC for tight fit into window frame section. C. Form weather stop flange to perimeter of unit. D. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. E. Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view. F. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. G. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers. H. Double weatherstrip operable units. I. Factory glaze window units. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare openings to be intolerance, plumb, level, provide for secure anchoring, and in accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive this work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install window unit assemblies in accordance with manufacturers instructions and applicable building codes. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities as necessary. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist, and maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. F. Install operating hardware. G. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. H. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 90 05. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Mock-up: Demonstrating all common aspects applicable to Project. Include flashing and accessory products. Coordinate with work indentified in Section 01 43 39-COORDINATED MOCK-UP. B. Installation: Coordinated with flexible flashing and sill pans, initial units for in-place mock-ups. C. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in accordance with ASTM E1105 using uniform pressure and same pressure difference as specified for laboratory tests. 1. Test 4 windows, randomly selected. 2. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense. D. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for air leakage, in accordance with ASTM E 783 using uniform pressure of 6.24 psf. 1. Test two windows, one at level 2 and one at level 4, as directed by Architect. E. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces. • B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS C. Remove excess glazing sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable 11111 to sealant manufacturer and appropriate for application indicated. 3.08 SCHEDULE CATEGORY TEST TYPE TEST STANDARD QUANTITY NOTES IN PLACE WATER ASTM E1105 2 RANDOMLY SELECTED AIR ASTM E783 2 MOCK-UP WATER ASTM E1105 1 AIR ASTM 783 1 END OF SECTION Ill 11111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow metal, wood and aluminum doors. B. Thresholds. C. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. NFPA 80- Fire Doors and Windows. C. AWI -Architectural Woodwork Institute-Quality Standards. D. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. E. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. F. UL 305- Panic Hardware. G. DHI - Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. H. UBC7-2, UL 10-C (Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.)—Positive Pressure Testing Standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates and installation instructions indicating special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware and 1111 electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Samples: 1. To be furnished only upon request and prior to submittals of the last draft of Hardware Schedule and prior to delivery of hardware. 2. Submit one sample of each exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with the schedule. 3. Sample will be reviewed by the Architect for design, color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 4. Samples to be returned to the supplier. Units which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the work. E. Hardware Schedule: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures. 2. Hardware schedule is intended for coordination of the Work. Review and acceptance by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified. 3. Based on door hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Comply with the following format: HW SET: XX(EXAMPLE) EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581 P6 QUA KEYED ALIKE 626 FAL FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1 EA PERMANENT CYL 21-020 EV 29 S145 SC81 SS FC 626 SCH 1 EA CLOSER W/STOP 689 FAL SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE • 1 SET SEALS 488S BLK ZER 4. Hardware schedules prepared in the horizontal manner are not acceptable. Doors listed for the same hardware, but of dif-ferent sizes shall be listed under separate headings. 5. Include separate key schedule, showing clearly how Owner's final instructions on keying of locks have been fulfilled. F. Contract Closeout Documents: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01 70 00- Exection and Closeout Requirements. 2. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 3. Maintenance Data and Installation Instructions: Include templates and data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance for each type of hardware installed and templates. 4. All factory order numbers and dates shall be provided to the Owner for warranty purposes. 1.04 TEMPLATE HARDWARE A. Install hardware to metal surfaces in accordance with template list. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI A117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. NFPA 101. 3. ANSI A117.1. 4. NFPA 25. 5. NFPA 252. 6. UBC7-2 and UL10C. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.)from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 5 years, and who is, or who employs an experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. C. Fire-Rated Openings: 1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. Where"S Labeled" positive pressure is required, provide hardware, including gasketing, that meets UBC7-2 and UL10C testing standards. 2. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors(with supplementary marking on doors' UL or FM labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware"), provide UL or FM label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire-rated doors and frames. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE III1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of supplier. B. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware manufacturer or as directed by the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Door hardware of equivalent quality, size, type, finish, and func-tion to that specified will be considered as an acceptable substitution. Requested substitutions must be submitted for approval at least seven (7) days prior to bid date. Specified Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers Manufacturers 1 Hinges Ives (IVE) McKinney 2 Pivots Ives(IVE) Rixson 3 Bypass &bifold Hardware K.N. Crowder(KNC) Johnson, Henderson 4 Latches and Lock Sets Falcon (FAL) None 5 Interior Unit Locks . Schlage(SCH) None 6 Surface Door Closers Falcon (FAL) None 7 Exit Devices Falcon (FAL) None 8 Electric Strikes Von Duprin (VON) HES 9 Push/Pulls Ives (IVE) Tice, Trimco 10 Door Stops and Holders Ives (IVE) Trimco 11 Overhead Stops Glynn Johnson (GLY) Rixson III 12 Kickplates Ives (IVE) Trimco, Tice 13 Thresholds &Weatherstripping Zero (ZER) NGP, Pemko, Steelcraft 14 Boxed Power Supplies Schlage (SCE) Von Duprin, Falcon 2.02 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match finish of every hardware unit of each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. In general, match all items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set for color and texture. B. The Architect will decide whether hardware units match the accepted samples and match each other satisfactorily. Units will be judged when held 2 feet apart at a 3-foot distance. C. Unless indicated otherwise, door hardware items shall be furnished in the following finishes: 1. Latches and Lock Sets: 626. 2. Exit Devices: 630 (where specified.) 3. Butt Hinges: 630/652. 4. Entry Pulls: 630. 5. Surface-Type Door Closers: 689. 6. Miscellaneous Hardware: 626/630. 7. Kick Plates: 630. 2.03 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. B. Furnish screws for installation,with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish screws to match the hardware finish, or if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such other work as closely as possible, except as IIII otherwise indicated. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE C. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when the door is closed, • except to the extent no standard manufactured units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Through bolting not allowed, unless screw or bolt heads are concealed. D. Provide fasteners which are compatible with both the unit fastened and the substrate, and which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material or fastener. E. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only or on edges of door. 2.04 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: 1. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. 2. Provide parallel arms, except as otherwise indicated. Provide spring-cush type arms where closer must be used to stop doors. Use maximum degree of opening permitted. Provide heavy duty parallel arms at high use/abuse outswing doors. 3. Pressure relief valves are not permitted. B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. C. Hydraulic closers to carry 10-year published manufacturer's warranty. 2.05 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units (edge trim, viewers, knockers, mail drops and similar units); either machine screws or self-tapping screw. 2.06 KICKPLATES111 A. Unless otherwise specified or required, metal kickplates shall be 0.050-inch thick and beveled four edges. B. Unless otherwise specified or required, kickplates shall be 10 inches high, mop plates 6 inches high and armor plates 30 inches high, and the length shall be 2 inches less door width at single doors and 1 inch less door width of pairs of doors. C. Install plates with oval-head full-thread screws spaced uniformly at a maximum of 5 inches and to match the kickplate. D. Kickplate at handicapped (designated) doors shall be minimum 10 inches high to meet Federal, State and local requirements(except 6 inches at unit entry doors). 2.07 HINGES/BUTTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely(both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Width of butts shall be as required to clear projection trim. In no case shall barrel of butts project more than required by conditions of installation. D. Butts shall be fully mortised. E. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3. Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. • 4. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • 5. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves. F. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 2.08 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS A. Strikes: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set. 2. a. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt. 2.09 LOCK THROW: A. Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch and deadbolt used on pairs of doors with rating above 20 minutes. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. B. Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw on other latch and deadlock bolts. C. Use mortise locks with integral occupancy indicator at public unisex toilet. Unit must be equipped with ADA thumbturn and have simultaneous retraction of latch and deadbolt when inside lever is turned. 2.10 EXIT DEVICES A. Provide exit devices of the type and at the location indicated in the hardware groups. B. Exposed parts of exit devices shall be of the metal and finish specified herein. C. Furnish with provisions for concealed mounting. Through-bolts are not acceptable unless required by fire codes or fire tests. D. Exit devices to be used on Class A, B, C, D or E labeled doors shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed devices. Dogging features shall be omitted and latches shall have 3/4-inch deadlocking latchbolt. E. Where cylinder operation is called for in the hardware groups, the cylinders shall be keyed with the other cylinders in the keying schedule. F. Exit devices to have 3-year manufacturer's published warranty. G. Exit devices shall have a cast/flush end cap. No overlapping edges are allowed. 2.11 PUSH/PULL UNITS A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation; through-bolted for matched pairs, but not for single units. B. Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation; through-bolted for matched pairs, but not for single units. 2.12 WEATHERSTRIPPING/GASKETING A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weather-stripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. B. Standard doors listed as 20 minute shall have gasketing listed for 20 minute or greater. C. Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled. D. For doors classified for"S labeled", positive pressure installation shall have special gasketing • required under UBC7-2 and UL10C. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 2.13 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS III A. Provide door stops and holders of the type indicated by catalog number in the hardware groups. B. Door holders shall have the maximum degree of hold-open or stop as to prevent damage to other hardware, doors, or walls. C. Holders shall be of the proper size and operation to suit the individual door design and swing. 2.14 DOOR SILENCERS A. Provide rubber door silencers for all door frames at openings having single-acting doors in wood or pressed steel frames that are not gasketed. B. Provide three silencers for single doors and four silencers for each pair of doors. 2.15 KEYING A. Door Locks: Furnish a new Schlage"Everest 29 S145" Keyway master key system. Meet with Owner to determine specific keying requirements. Produce a written keying schedule for Owner approval within 10 days of meeting. B. Keys shall be nickel silver. C. Keys shall be furnished as follows: 1. Construction keys: 12 total. 2. Master keys: 5 total. 3. Change keys: 3 per cylinder or core. 4. Control key(at interchangeable core cylinders): 1 total. D. At substantial completion and when so directed by Owner, replace construction key system with final master key system. Return temporary construction cores (at interchangeable core cylinders)to hardware supplier after installation of permanent cores. III E. On-Site Handling of Keys: 1. Place construction keys in one envelope, clearly identified, and deliver with hardware. 2. Deliver all final keys in person to Owner or by registered mail. 2.16 KEY LOCK BOX A. Manufacturer: Knox Company, 1-800-552-5669 or www.knoxbox.com 1. Model: 3200 series, recessed mounting kit. 2. Size: 4" high x 5"wide x 3 '/4"deep and suitable for security key card. 3. Lock: UL Listed, double action rotating tumblers, hardened steel pins. 4. Housing: %" steel plate. 5. Door: 'h"thick, hinged steel door with interior gasket. 6. Alarm tamper switch: Not required. 7. Finish: Black, TGIC polyester powder coat, factory applied. B. Location: As indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide stainless steel washers or metal plate to prevent pull-through. C. Ordering and installation: 1. Contractor must obtain authorization order form from local fire department. Orders will not be accepted without authorization form. 2. Install box with door in open position. 3. Contractor shall arrange for Fire Department and the Owner to inspect the installation at the same meeting. 4. Fire Department shall load keys into vault and lock the box while Owner is observing. 2.17 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: 24 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE IllPART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Before installation occurs, a jobsite meeting shall take place between the supplier, installer& manufacturer's representative for the locks, closers &exit devices to discuss proper installation methods to be used. B. Install each hardware item in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Where cutting and fitting is necessary to install hardware,which is later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item com-pletely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed. D. Hardware Mounting Heights from Finished Floor to Centerline of Hardware Item: Unless noted otherwise, comply with the following mounting heights: 1. Top Hinge: Jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 10 inches from head of frame to center line of hinge. 2. Bottom Hinge: Jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 12 1/2 inches from floor to centerline of hinge. 3. Center Hinge: Equal distance between top and hinges. • 4. Locksets: 38 inches. 5. Dead Locks: 48 inches. 6. Push Plates: 42 inches from finish floor to center of plate. Cut for cylinder where required. 7. Door Pulls: 42 inches. 8. Push pad type exit devices: 40 inches. 9. Other hardware shall be installed as recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00, Quality Requirements. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. B. Lubricate moving parts with type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer(silicone-type spray if no other recommended.) C. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. D. Where hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the Work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware and doors. Door control devices to be adjusted by factory representative to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating III equipment. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004SETS BURNHAMDOOR&ASH APARTMENTS HARDWARE PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 3.05 HARDWARE • HW SET: 01 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 100 104D 150A EACH TO HAVE: MFR QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FFINISH26I IVE 2 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET 626 IVE 2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT 689 VON 2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 630 FAL • 1 EA ELEC PANIC RX-EL-25-C-C-LBR-718 HARDWARE 1 EA ELEC PANIC RX-EL-25-C-EO-LBR 630 FAL HARDWARE 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9264F 36" 20" 0 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 2 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT SC70-30 689 FAL 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER SC70-61 689 FAL 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 900-BBK 900-2RS LGR VON 1 PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAMS 1 PROVIDE RISER DIAGRAMS ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: 120VAC TO POWER SUPPLY. RUN 12 GA WIRE (HOME RUN 0-200 LINEAL FEET)TO EL DEVICES. CONNECT WALL MAGS TO FIRE ALARM. HW SET: 02 DOOR NUMBER: 100A 100B 104A 104B EACH TO HAVE: MFR QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FFINISH26 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER NOTE: SLIDING DOOR ASSEMBLY. COORDINATE CYLINDER TYPE, QUANTITY,AND CAM REQUIREMENTS WITH DOOR MANUFACTURER. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 9 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • HW SET: 03 DOOR NUMBER: 100C EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581 P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 04 DOOR NUMBER: 146 R101A R102A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5681 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE • 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK MA301 OCCUPIEDNACANT QGM QG 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER HW SET: 05 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 100D EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB42 630 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET W101S QUA 626 FAL 1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE 2 EA FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG SEM7850 689 LCN 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER (HEAD, JAMBS, &ASTRAGAL) 1 EA ASTRAGAL 43SP 600 ZER NOTE: CONNECT WALL MAGNETS TO FIRE ALARM. I . SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 10 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • HW SET: 06 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 100E 150B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-C-EO-LBR 630 FAL 1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-EL-F-25-C-NL-LBR 630 FAL HARDWARE 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 SET MEETING STILE SEALS 8195AA CLR ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 900-BBK LGR VON 1 PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO POINT WRING DIAGRAMS 1 PROVIDE RISER DIAGRAMS ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 NOTE: 120VAC TO POWER SUPPLY. RUN 12 GA WIRE (HOME RUN 0-200 LINEAL FEET)TO EL DEVICE. HW SET: 07 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 100F EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5681 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET W101S QUA 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG SEM7850 689 LCN 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER NOTE: CONNECT WALL MAGNET TO FIRE ALARM. HW SET: 08 ELEC • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 11 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • DOOR NUMBER: 100G EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-25-R-NL-512 630 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE 24VDC 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 • HW SET: 09 DOOR NUMBER: 102A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581 P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA OH STOP 4505 630 GLY SILENCERS PROVIDED WITH TIMELY FRAME HW SET: 10 DOOR NUMBER: 104C 105 109 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK W561 P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION • 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 12 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE • 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER HW SET: 11 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 106A EACH TO HAVE: MFR QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FFINISH52 IVE 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581 P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 630626 SCH VON 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE 24VDC 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 HW SET: 12 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 106B EACH TO HAVE: MFR QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FFINISH30 IVE 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581 P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 24-031 EVEREST 29 S145 630626 SCH VON 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE 24VDC 630 IVE 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG14 689 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA 630 IVE 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34"X 2 LDW B4E0 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 6363ZER 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL LK ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 13 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 HW SET: 13 DOOR NUMBER: 107 112A 112C 112D EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 24-031 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG14 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER • HW SET: 14 DOOR NUMBER: 108A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581 P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8402 34"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-V3 MSLA-10 ZER HW SET: 15 DOOR NUMBER: 108B • EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 14 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE • 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581 P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 24-031 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG14 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8402 34"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-V3 MSLA-10 ZER HW SET: 16 DOOR NUMBER: 110A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-C-EO-LBR 630 FAL 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-C-NL-LBR 630 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 - 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL • 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET MEETING STILE SEALS 8195AA CLR ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER HW SET: 17 DOOR NUMBER: 110B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-NL 630 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 SS FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER HW SET: 18 - NOT USED • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 15 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • HW SET: 19 ELEC - NOT USED HW SET: 20 - NOT USED HW SET: 22 DOOR NUMBER: 114 144 244 344 444 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET W101S QUA 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE • 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER HW SET: 23 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 113A 113B 113C EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581 P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8402 34"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER HW SET: 24 DOOR NUMBER: 111 112B 141A 364 365 441A • EACH TO HAVE: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 16 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR • 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER HW SET: 25 DOOR NUMBER: 141B 141C 145 264 265 267 367 368 441B 441C EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 SS FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER • HW SET: 26 DOOR NUMBER: 143A 143B 243A 243B 245 343A 343B 345 443A 443B 445 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB42 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE 2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB 689 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 SS FC 689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER 1 EA SEAL 488S (ASTRAGAL) BLK ZER 1 EA ASTRAGAL 43SP 600 ZER • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 17 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • HW SET: 27 DOOR NUMBER: E101 E102 E201 E202 E301 E302 E401 PG101A PG102 PG103 PG104 PG105 PG106 PG107 PG108A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER HW SET: 28 DOOR NUMBER: 246 346 446 S101 S102A S103A S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S301 S302 S303 S304 S305 S401 S402 S403 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET W101S QUA 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL • 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER HW SET: 30 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 100H S105 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-NL 630 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE 24VDC 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF • DIVISION 28 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 18 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION • 28 HW SET: 31 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: S103B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-EO 630 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE 24VDC 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF • DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 HW SET: 32 DOOR NUMBER: 241A 241B 341A 341B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB42 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581 P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE 2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB 689 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 DS FC 689 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 SS FC 689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER 1 EA SEAL 488S (ASTRAGAL) BLK ZER 1 EA ASTRAGAL 43SP 600 ZER • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 19 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • HW SET: 33 DOOR NUMBER: 142 242 342 442 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-NL 630 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER HW SET: 34 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 440A 440B • EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET 626 IVE 1 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581 P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 1006-J 1000-104 24VAC FSE 630 HES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA 689 FAL 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER SC70-61 689 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER HW SET: 35 DOOR NUMBER: • S501 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 20 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE EACH TO HAVE: • QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581 P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 24-031 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER NOTE: LOCK SIDE ON STAIR SIDE. FREE INGRESS FROM ROOF AT ALL TIMES. HW SET: 36 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 151A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE • 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE 24VDC 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 HW SET: 37 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 151B 152A EACH TO HAVE: (gTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE 24VDC 630 VON SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 21 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • 1 EA OH STOP 100S ADJ 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 HW SET: 38 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 152B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 24-031 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE 24VDC 630 VON 1 EA OH STOP 100S ADJ 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 REG 689 FAL • 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 381A AL ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER HW SET: 39 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 153A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 24-031 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE 24VDC 630 VON 1 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 100H ADJ 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 REG 689 FAL 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER • 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-V3 MSLA-10 ZER SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 22 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • HW SET: 40 DOOR NUMBER: 153B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581 P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 24-031 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SSHO 689 FAL 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-V3 MSLA-10 ZER HW SET: 41 DOOR NUMBER: 154 • EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK W581 P6 QUA 626 FAL KEYED ALIKE FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 EA K-I-L CYLINDER 21-020 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-V3 MSLA-10 ZER HW SET: 43 DOOR NUMBER: R101 R102 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET 626 IVE 1 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-NL-OP 630 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH • 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 23 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • 1 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9264E 36"20" 0 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA 689 FAL 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER SC70-61 689 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER HW SET: 44 DOOR NUMBER: 268 S104 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET W101S QUA 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 SS FC 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL 488S BLK ZER • HW SET: 45 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: 426 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET 626 IVE 1 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581 P6 QUA 626 FAL SCHLAGE C KEYWAY 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 1006-J 1000-104 24VAC FSE 630 HES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT SC70-30 689 FAL 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER SC70-61 689 FAL 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 24 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • HW SET: 46 ELEC DOOR NUMBER: S102B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-25-R-NL 630 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-061-ICX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE 24VDC 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA MOTION SENSOR SCANII WHT SCE ACCESS CONTROL-WORK OF DIVISION 28 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION 28 • HW SET: 47 DOOR NUMBER: PG101 B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MER 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK CS210TD NEP JUPCAM 10-121 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC61 REG OR PA AS REQ 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER EA DOOR SWEEP 381A AL ZER EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER HW SET: 48 DOOR NUMBER: PG108B • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 25 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK CS210TD NEP JUPCAM 10-121 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC61 REG OR PA AS REQ 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER SET SEALS 188S BLK ZER EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER HW SET: R01 DOOR NUMBER: Al EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK CS210TD NEP JUPCAM 10-121 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 EVEREST 29 S145 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC61 REG OR PA AS REQ 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 6"X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE • 1 EA DOOR STOP 061 652 IVE 1 EA DOOR VIEWER U698 626 IVE (PROVIDE 2 @ ACCESSIBLE UNITS: 117, 353, 434, 437) NOTE: INSTALL SPRING STOP AS NEEDED. STOP CAN BE MOUNTED ON BASE, BOTTOM OR TOP OF DOOR, UPPER WALL, OR INTERSECTING DOOR. HW SET: R02 DOOR NUMBER: Cl C2 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 3.5 X 3.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK F40 JAZ 626 SCH 1 EA DOOR STOP 061 652 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY IVE NOTE: INSTALL SPRING STOP AS NEEDED. STOP CAN BE MOUNTED ON BASE, BOTTOM OR TOP OF DOOR, UPPER WALL, OR INTERSECTING DOOR. 0 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 26 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE HW SET: R03 • DOOR NUMBER: B1 B2 D1 D2 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 3.5 X 3.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET F10 JAZ 626 SCH 1 EA DOOR STOP 061 652 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY IVE NOTE: INSTALL SPRING STOP AS NEEDED. STOP CAN BE MOUNTED ON BASE, BOTTOM OR TOP OF DOOR, UPPER WALL, OR INTERSECTING DOOR. HW SET: R04 DOOR NUMBER: El E2 E3 E4 E5 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET BI-PASS TRACK SET C-538 KNC 2 EA FLUSH PULL 221 626 IVE 411° HW SET: R05 DOOR NUMBER: FG EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS444 626 IVE BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER • NOTE:VINYL DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLY. HW SET: R06 DOOR NUMBER: DF EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5PB1 3.5 X 3.5 652 IVE 2 EA ROLLER LATCH RL32 626 IVE 2 EA SINGLE DUMMY TRIM F170 JAZ 626 SCH • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 27 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE • 2 EA OH STOP 450S 630 GLY (USE 061 SPRING STOPS IN UNIT 437) 2 EA SILENCER SR65 GRY IVE HW SET: R07 DOOR NUMBER: H1 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET TRACK ASSEMBLY 280SWT KIT/6 PEM 1 EA FLUSH PULL RO 95A 626 ROC HW SET: R08 DOOR NUMBER: SF EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR • 1 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET 626 IVE 1 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA PATIO LOCK W201S QUA 626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC61 SSHO 689 FAL 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT SC60-30 689 FAL 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER SC60-61 689 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 103A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ASHRAE NFRC 2001 Terms and abbreviations: 1. U-Value; U-Factor, winter. Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 2. VLT; Visible Light Transmittance. Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 3. SHGC; Solar Heat Gain Coefficient. Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 4. STC; Sound Transmission Class, STC, when tested per ASTM E 90. B. Safety Glazing: Laminated glass complying with ASTM C 1172, and testing requirements of 16 CFR 1201, Category II or tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, and testing requirements of CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category II. C. Fire Protective Glass: Glass complying with and conforming to requirements of NFPA 257/252. D. Fire Resistive Glass: Glass complying with and conforming to requirements of ASTM E 119/NFPA 251. E. Safety Glazing Conditions: Requiring safety glazing by code or local authority having jurisdiction. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Select type and thickness of all glass and glass units to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with building code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit center-of-glass deflection to the smallest of the following: a. The displacement associated with the structural capacity of the glazing unit. b. L/100, where L is the shortest side dimension of the unit measured in inches. c. 3/4 inch. 3. Thermal Loading: Design glass to resist thermal loads at service including those induced by differential shading within individual lites. 4. Material thicknesses listed are minimum. C. Safety Glazing: Provide safety glazing of type indicated at glazing conditions where shown and where additionally required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide laminated glass at all horizontal, sloped, and overhead glazing applications. D. Heat Strengthening and Tempering: Flatness for 6mm glass panels shall not exceed 0.0030 inches for localized deformation. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. B. ANSI Z97.1 -American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. 1111 C. ASCE 7- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING D. ASTM C864-Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, • Setting Blocks, and Spacers. E. ASTM C920-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C1036- Standard Specification for Flat Glass. G. ASTM C1048-Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass. H. ASTM C1172- Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. I. ASTM C1193-Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. J. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. K. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. L. ASTM E2190-Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. M. GANA(GM)-GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America. N. GANA(SM)- GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America. O. SIGMA TM-3000-Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Convene meeting prior to fabrication of glazing units and coordinate with meetings for glazing framing systems work. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. • C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1. Design Data: When required by AHJ. 2. Safety Glazing: Identify all locations where required. E. Samples; Submit the following: 1. Glass; Two 12 by 12 inches in size of glass and insulated glass units showing coloration and design. 2. Sealants; One 8 inch long bead of glazing sealant in selected color F. Test reports: Provide published test reports that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1. Testing reports required for non-standard or special products. G. Installer's Qualifications. H. Sample Warranties. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual, and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING • C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain ultra clear float glass, tinted float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and insulating glass from single source manufacturer(for each glass type). E. IGU Fabricator: Company whose location, equipment, and processes are certified by the coated glass manufacturer. F. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years documented experience. 1. A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 1.08 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements. B. See Section 01 43 39- Coordinated Mock-Up. C. Provide mock-up of including glass. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal • failure, interpane dusting or misting, deterioration of coatings(s); and to provide for replacement of failed units. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as peeling, cracking, or related defects developed from normal use that are not associated with breakage or with actions in violation of written guidance from the manufacturer. Warranty to cover all costs associated with full replacement of failed units. C. Laminated Glass Units: Provide manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by ASTM C 1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. Warranty to cover all costs associated with full replacement of failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL GLASS REQUIREMENTS A. Glass Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than [6.0]mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with • "Performance Requirements"Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING C. Exposed Edges of Glass: Ground and polished. • D. Performance Properties: 1. U-Factors (Winter): Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq.ft. x h x deg F. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient(SHGC),Visible Light Transmittance (VLT), and Ultraviolet Transmittance (UVT): Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Visible Light Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 4. Sound Transmission Class, STC,when tested per ASTM E 90. 5. Assure that edge seal is compatible with glazing system. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select), unless otherwise indicated. 1. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select), unless otherwise indicated. a. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1) AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc.: www.na.agc-flatglass.com. 2) Cardinal Glass Industries:www.cardinalcorp.com. 3) Guardian Industries Corp.: www.sunguardglass.com. 4) Pilkington North America Inc.: www.pilkington.com/na. 5) PPG Industries, Inc.: www.ppgideascapes.com. 6) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Float Glass with Frosted Film: See Glazing Accessories. B. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; of • class, kind and condition indicated; horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed. 1. Maximum roll wave distortion from top to bottom of wave as measured using calibrated industry accepted equipment: 0.005 inch. C. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent for 6 mm thick glass. 1. Ultraclear Float Glass Manufacturers/Products: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.03 LAMINATED GLASS UNITS A. Laminated Glass: Float glass, heat strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 2. Plastic Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral, 0.030 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated, or required by performance requirements. 3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by the tong-less horizontal method. B. Laminated Glass Unit Fabricators: 1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com. • 2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING • 3. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 4. Certified fabricators of listed float glass manufacturers. 2.04 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING UNITS A. Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL- or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated glazing and complying with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II without the use of a surface-applied film. 1. Rating: 20-minute openings where hose stream test is not required. a. Products: 1) Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite NT 2) O'Keeffe's Inc., SAFTIFIRST: www.safti.com, SuperLite C/SP. 3) SCHOTT North America Inc.; www.us.schott.com, Pyran Platinum F. 4) Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America: www.vetrotech.com, SGG Keralite FR-F. 5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.05 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Fabricator/Manufacturers: Certified by coated glass manufacturer. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, clear anodized finish, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 5. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products"Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types"Article. 411 2.06 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc(formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Glazing Putty: Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor use, knife grade consistency; dark grey color. C. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning. D. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50 matching color. 2.07 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size to fit application; black color. • 1. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. • c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option II; Black color. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. F. Smoke Removal Unit Targets: Adhesive targets affixed to glass to identify glass units intended for removal for smoke control. G. Decorative Glazing Film: Translucent polyester film for permanent bonding to glass. 1. Thickness: 0.008 inch, minimum. 2. Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. 3. Light Transmission of Film: As selected by Architect. 4. Accessory Materials: As recommended or required by film manufacturer. 2.08 LAMINATED GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type LG#1: Clear laminated glass. 1. Outer and Inner Ply: 3-mm heat strengthened float glass. 2. Unit Thickness: 6.0 mm. 3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030-inch. 4. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Glass Type LG#2: Clear laminated glass. 1. Outer Ply: 3-mm fully-tempered coated float glass. a. Coating: Scratch resistant coating on No. 1 surface. 2. Inner Ply: 3-mm fully-tempered coated float glass. a. Coating: Scratch resistant coating on No. 4 surface. • 3. Unit Thickness: 6.0 mm. 4. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030- inch. 5. Provide safety glazing labeling. 6. Application: Entry doors and as indicated. 2.09 INSULATED GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type IG#1 (West and South): High-performance, low-e-coated, solar control clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass, except heat-strengthened float glass where required, and fully tempered float glass where indicated. a. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. b. Manufacturers! Products: 1) Cardinal, LoE3 366. 2) Guardian, SNX 62/27. 3) PPG, Solarban 70 XL on Starphire. 4) Viracon, VNE 1-63. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass, except heat-strengthened float glass where required, and fully tempered float glass where indicated. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 60 to 65 percent. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 to 0.30. 9. Provide safety glazing labeling where required. B. Glass Type IG#2 (North and East): Low-e-coated, solar control clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING • 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass, except heat-strengthened float glass where required, and fully tempered float glass where indicated. a. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. b. Manufacturers/Products: 1) Cardinal. LoE 366 2) PPG, Solarban 70. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass, except heat-strengthened float glass where required, and fully tempered float glass where indicated. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 65 to 70 percent. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29- 0.24 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 9. Provide safety glazing labeling where required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. • C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD(TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 3.06 PROTECTION • A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass mirrors B. Mirror accessories 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified requirements. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of GANA(TIPS). 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.05 WARRANTY II) A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mirror Design Criteria: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirror material deflection to 1/200, or to the flexure limit of glass, with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. B. Mirror Glass: Clear float type with copper and silver coating, organic overcoating, arrised edges, 6 mm thick minimum. 1. Size: As noted on drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. B. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA(TIPS)and manufacturers recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, and free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. 3.02 CLEANING • A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. • 3.03 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 91 00 LOUVERS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers,frames, and accessories. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers,frames, and accessories. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head,jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior surfaces. E. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Maintenance Data: Include lubrication schedules, adjustment requirements . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. • 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of connections. 1. Finish: Include coverage against degradation of exterior finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERS A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511. 1. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. B. Stationary Louvers : Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with intermediate mullions matching frame. 1. Free Area: 50 percent, minimum. 2. Blades: Drainable 3. Frame: 6 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and with continuous recessed calulking channel each side. 4. Aluminum Thickness: Frame 12 gage, 0.0808 inch minimum; blades 12 gage, 0.0808 inch minimum. 5. Aluminum Finish: Class II natural anodized;finish welded units after fabrication. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M), 11111 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 08 91 00 LOUVERS PART 3 EXECUTION 4111 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement of control mechanism. Lubricate operating joints. 3.04 CLEANING A. Strip protective finish coverings. B. Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION • 11111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Acoustic insulation. E. Gypsum sheathing. F. Cementitious backing board. G. Gypsum wallboard. H. Joint treatment and accessories. I. Textured finish system. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute. (replaced SG-971) B. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. C. ANSI A118.9-American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. D. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C645-Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. F. ASTM C754-Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. G. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. H. ASTM C954- Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm)to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness. I. ASTM C1002-Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. J. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. K. ASTM C1178/C1178M-Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. L. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. M. ASTM C1629/C1629M -Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels. N. ASTM C1658/C1658M- Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. O. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES • A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES B. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: • 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240. C. Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated,with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. 5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch depth, for attachment to substrate through one leg only. B. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements. C. Suspended Ceiling System: 1. Armstrong, Product: QuickStix Locking Pocket Ceiling Framing System. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to • minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 3. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 4. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 5. Thickness: a. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. B. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and shower ceilings. 2. Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C1178/C1178M. C. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated. 3. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4. Type C Thickness: 1/2 inch. 5. Edges: Tapered. D. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; • sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES • 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. E. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM Cl177/C 1177M. 3. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated. 4. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 5. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch. 6. Edges: Square, for vertical application. F. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends square cut. 1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM C1396/C1396M;water-resistant faces. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. C. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 25 00. D. Water-Resistive Barrier: No. 15 asphalt felt. E. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise. • 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. F. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Chemical hardening type compound. G. Spray-on gypsum wall board vapor-retarding primer on interior face of exterior walls, to provide less than 1-perm vapor resistance. 1. Products: a. Benjamin Moore, Super Spec Latex Vapor Barrier Primer Sealer b. Sherwin Williams, Moisture Vapor Barrier Primer/Finish B72W12. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. H. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish. I. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain. J. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.033 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium plated for exterior locations. K. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to Ioadbearing steel studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. • 3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements. • B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members. E. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of: 1. Framed openings. 2. Wall mounted cabinets. 3. Plumbing fixtures. 4. Toilet accessories. 5. Wall mounted door hardware. 6. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 7. Bike Rack/Hooks. 8. Wall mounted handrail brackets 3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around • electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where firestopping is provided. 3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Exterior Soffits: Install exterior soffit board perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing members or other solid backing. C. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.07 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES • 1. Level 3 with very light spray texture unless noted otherwise. See finish schedule on drawings. 2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish in first floor common and corridor areas, Leasing Lobby-smooth texture-seeFinish Schedule. 3. Level 2: In utility areas such as electrical, mechanical, and janitors, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 4. Level 1: Exterior gypsum sheathing whether or not accessible in the completed construction. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Non-ceramic trim. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108.1C- Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. B. ANSI A108.4-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive. C. ANSI A108.5-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. D. ANSI A108.6-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy. E. ANSI A108.8-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout. F. ANSI A108.9-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. G. ANSI A108.10-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework. H. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of • Cementitious Backer Units. I. ANSI A108.12-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. J. ANSI A108.13-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone. K. ANSI A118.11 -American National Standard Specifications for EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. L. TCNA(HB)- Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation -Version. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers'data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal • methods, and polishes and waxes. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions. • 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA(HB) on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation,with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. See Section 01 43 39- Coordinated Mock-Up, for mock-up requirements. C. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on the drawing s, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: 1. Statements Tile:www.statementstile.com 2. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com. 3. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 4. United Tile: www.unitedtile.com 5. Pental Granite and Marble, Cindy Mahaffey. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Non-Ceramic Trim: anodized aluminum , style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1. Applications: a. Transition between floor finishes of different heights. 2. Manufacturers: a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com. 2.03 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; B-4050 Multi-Purpose Adhesive: www.prospec.com. 2. Bonsai American, Inc; B-4050 Multi-Purpose Adhesive: www.prospec.com. 3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 4. Custom Building Products; OmniGrip: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 5. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com. 6. Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset bond type; use Type I in areas subject to prolonged 11111 moisture exposure. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING • C. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, thinset bond type. D. Tile Setting Adhesive: Elastomeric, waterproof, liquid applied. 2.04 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; Permalastic System: www.prospec.com. 2. Bonsai American, Inc; Permalastic System: www.prospec.com. 3. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 4. Custom Building Products; MegaLite: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 5. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed: www.laticrete.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Mortar Bed Materials: Portland cement, sand and water. C. Mortar Bond Coat Materials for Thin-Set Installations: 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. 3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 4. Furan: ANSI A118.5. 5. For Exterior Glue Plywood: ANSI A118.11. 2.05 GROUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand: www.prospec.com. 2. Bonsai American, Inc: www.prospec.com. • 3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Standard Grout: Any type specified in ANSI A118.6 or A118.7. 1. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard color selction. 2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Uncoupling Membrane: 1/8 inch thick polyurethane matting with three-dimensional grid structure with dovetail shaped cavities and fleece webbing laminated to the underside to provide a mechanical bond to the substrate adhesive (DITRA). 1. Acceptable Product: Schluter Systems"DITRA." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. 41111 B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable 411 flatness tolerances. D. Install tile backer board in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using galvanized roofing nails or corrosion-resistant bugle head drywall screws. Bed fiberglass self-adhesive tape at all joints and corners with material used to set tiles. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1A thru A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA(HB) recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place the joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive. I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. K. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. L. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. III M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS -THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA(HB) Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat,with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated. 3.05 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA(HB) Method W245. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. 3.08 TILE SCHEDULE A. CT-1: TBD. B. CT-2: TBD. C. CT-3: TBD. END OF SECTION III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635/C635M-Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. C. ASTM E580/E580M- Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions. D. ASTM E1264-Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. E. UL(FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. D. Samples: Submit two samples 3 by 3 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner. • F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistive Assemblies: Complete assembly listed and classified by UL (FRD)for the fire resistance indicated. B. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. USG: www.usg.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Acoustical Units- General: ASTM E1264, Class A. C. Acoustical Tile Type : Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the following characteristics: • 1. Size: 12 by 12 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 3. Surface Color: White. • 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Suspension Systems- General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. B. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Acoustical Insulation: Specified in Section 07 21 00. D. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION-SUSPENSION SYSTEM 41) A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M, ASTM E 580/E 580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size. D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. I. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. J. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. K. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. • 2. Overlap and rivet corners. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS • L. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.03 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist,warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 2. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding. H. Install hold-down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system; comply with fire rating requirements. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. ACT-1: TBD. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 54 27 LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS 1110 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Linear wood ceiling system for interior ceilings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product specifications and installation instructions for ceiling wood materials. C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing ceiling component lengths and placement, and other details required for a complete, code compliant installation conforming to specified requirements. D. Samples: Submit for approval, (2) 12 inch long wood ceiling member samples of each different components'dimensional and/ors and cross sectional patterns, representitive of typical grain pattern, coloring and finish for the Linear Wood Ceiling. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Premium Grade. Wood wall and ceiling/soffit components shall be provided by one manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five (5)years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: The installer must be a firm with a minimum of five(5)years of successful experience in installation of wood systems of similar requirements to this project. The installer must be acceptable to the architect, manufacturer, and owner's representative. 410 D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wood ceiling system components conforming to Class 1, or A, flame spread and smoke developed ratings, when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. Provide an independent test report for the wood material certifying conformance to ASTM E-84 and Class 1 or A ratings. E. Environmental Standards: When required the wood shall originate from well managed forests as certified by accredited and recognized industry certifying organizations such as"FSC". 1.04 COORDINATION A. Linear Wood Ceiling Layout and Installation: Coordinated with other work that may penetrate or attach to walls, ceilings and soffits. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interior installation shall be done only when the temperature and humidity closely approximate the interior conditions that will exist when the building is occupied. The heating and cooling systems shall be operating before, during, and after installation; with the humidity of the interior spaces maintained between 25 and 55 percent. B. It is important that plenums have proper ventilation, especially in high moisture areas. There shall be no excessive build up of heat in the wall areas. C. Prior to the start of installation, all exterior windows and doors are to be in place, glazed, and weather-stripped. The roof is to be watertight, and all wet trades'work is to be completed, and thoroughly dry. D. Mechanical, electrical, and other utility service installations beyond the wall or ceiling plane shall have been completed. No materials should rest against, or wrap around, the wall or ceiling attachment components. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING • A. Deliver wood components to project site in original, unopened packages. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 54 27 • LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS B. Materials shall be stored flat and level in a fully enclosed space, for a minimum of seventy-two • (72) hours immediately prior to installation. Panelized linear wood system components shall be stored in the room in which they will be installed. The temperature and humidity of the room shall closely approximate those conditions that will exist when the building is occupied. Panelized linear wood panels and strips must be stored off the floor. C. Exercise care when handling to avoid damage. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer: Provide one (1)year manufacturer's warranty to cover material and labor to replace defective material for panelized linear wood system for interior ceilings and walls and exterior walls and canopy soffit against manufacturing defects. Because of differing site conditions,wood stains and colorings can vary with age, and are excluded from this warranty. C. Installer: Provide one(1)year installer's labor warranty to replace defective installation workmanship for panelized linear wood system for interior ceilings and walls and exterior walls and canopy soffit. PART 2 -PRODUCT 2.01 LINEAR WOOD PANELS A. Design Basis: Rulon International, Inc; rulonco.com 1. Contact: Nick Mastrogiovanni at nmastrogiovanni@rulonco.com, or(206) 948-2099. B. WD-1 —Interior Continuous Linear Wood Ceilings: 1. Linear Wood Strips: AWS Premium Grade, wood species TBD,with a custom stain matching Architect's control sample. Finish With 100%solid vacuum coated (seamless) finish. Finish will be free of any measurable volatile organic compounds(VOC). 411 2. Manufacture linear wood strips in random lengths with tongue-and-groove ends, or in nominal fixed lengths depending on area dimensions. The Linear Open Style shall be 4 inch modules, having wood strips 3/4 inches thick by 3-3/4 inches wide with a 1/4 inch reveal without a factory-installed fiberfelt spacer between the wood strips. 3. Dimensional Tolerances: ± 1/8 inch. 2.02 EDGES, BORDERS,AND PERIMETER TRIMS A. Edges, Borders, and Perimeter Trims: Provide edges, borders, and perimeter trims, of size and type necessary for termination of system components conforming to details and in accordance with Premium Grade standards. 2.03 FINISHES AND COLORS A. Factory finish all wood componts with clear sealers,wood stains, or semi-transparent color treatments matching Architect's sample. Product finishes shall be spray-applied to a smooth-sanded surface conforming to Premium Grade finish standards.. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Linear Open Ceiling Layout: The contractor shall measure ceiling areas and establish the layout of the hangers and cliprails, in accordance with installation instructions. The contractor shall furnish the layout for supports that shall be installed for suspension of ceilings. He shall furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clips, or similar devices for installation, in time to coordinate the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Installation shall comply with applicable regulations and industry standards. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 54 27 LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS • B. Panelized Linear Wood Panels: Installed panels to furring or suspension system conforming to manufacturers printed instructions. C. Linear Wood Ceiling: Perimeters: Using a leveling device, lay out and install perimeter trim, as specified. 1. Suspensions: Install suspension systems to comply with appropriate industry standards. 2. Locate cliprails perpendicular to wood direction, 4 inches from one wall for the first cliprail, continuing 24" maximum, on center, ending within 4 inches of the opposite wall. 3. Install #12-Gauge wire hangers 4 feet on center, along each cliprail. Attach wire hangers to inserts, screw eyes, or other connecting devices that are secure and appropriate for suspending the ceiling and that will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. D. HVAC and Light Fixture Suspensions: Electrical and mechanical installations must be supported independently of the linear wood ceiling. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING,AND REPAIR A. Make adjustments necessary to properly align, level, flush and plumb system components to eliminate system irregularities. B. Upon completion of installation, clean full system to remove dirt, dust, grease, oils, and fingerprints. C. All work which cannot be successfully cleaned or repaired shall be removed and replaced. 3.04 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of installation, the owner's representative shall inspect all finished surfaces to ensure that work has been performed in a manner satisfactory to the owner. Any deficiencies in • the installed wall shall be corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Wood (WD): 1. WD-1: TBD END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient luxury vinyl plank flooring with acoustic backer. B. Epoxy adhesive C. Resilient sheet flooring. D. Resilient tile flooring. E. Installation accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. E. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710. F. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1. For linoleum flooring, report rapidly-renewable content and urea-formaldehyde content. • H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing,with color and pattern through wear layer thickness. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2034, Type corresponding to type specified. 2. Backing: Jute fabric. 3. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch, minimum, excluding backing. 4. Seams: Heat welded. B. Linoleum Welding Rod: Solid color linoleum produced by flooring manufacturer for heat welding seams, in color in color matching predominant flooring color. 2.02 PLANK FLOORING A. Luxury Solid Vinyl Plank: Layered construction consisting of clear vinyl wear layer, decorated layer, solid vinyl layer, and acoustic backing: • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to type • specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux(CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. Size:As scheduled below from manufacturer's standard line of available products 4. Wear Layer Thickness: 12mm. 2.03 TILE FLOORING A. Rubber Tile: Homogeneous color and pattern throughout thickness. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1344, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Design: Smooth. 3. Size: 24 by 24 inch nominal. 4. Overall Thickness: 0.125 inch. 2.04 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove. 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: cementitious; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof types recommended by flooring manufacturer; epoxy based at plank flooring in bathrooms. C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION • A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation per manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. a. Ensure lines are square. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING • b. Field of tiles shall be installed with directional marking on back all aligned in the same direction, or in a quarter-turned fashion. c. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. d. Adjust as necessary to accommodate door openings. e. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. a. Collect and recycle broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. b. When installing multiple dye lots, 'shuffle'the tiles to mix the dye lots, creating a random look, or use the different lots in different areas. 3. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and doorframes. 4. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. a. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. 5. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. a. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining marking device. 6. Trowel Adhesive Method: Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. a. Spread adhesive with a 1/16 inch D x 1/32 inch W x 1/32 inch A U-notch trowel. b. Allow adhesive to dry to the touch. c. Following installation of tile(typically within an hour after installing) roll entire floor • area with a 100 lb roller to ensure proper bonding. 7. Protect flooring from traffic for 12 hours before and after installation per adhesive manufacturer's instructions to allow proper set up time. 3.04 TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. 3.05 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. 3.08 SCHEDULE A. LVT-1: TBD B. LVT-2: Maple Finish for Fitness Room C. LINO-1: TBD D. LINO-2: TBD E. RB-1: TBD • F. RB-2: TBD END OF SECTION SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 65 00 • • •SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. RESILIENT FLOORING Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet, stretched-in, with cushion underlay and direct-glued. B. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2859- Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials. B. ASTM E648-Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. C. CRI (CIS)-Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute. D. CRI (GLA)-Green Label Testing Program -Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute. E. CRI (GLC)- Green Label Testing Program-Approved Product Categories for Carpet; Carpet and Rug Institute. F. CRI (GLCC)- Green Label Testing Program -Approved Product Categories for Carpet Cushion; Carpet and Rug Institute. G. CRI (GLP)-Green Label Plus Testing Program- Certified Products; Carpet and Rug Institute. H. NFPA 253- Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. 1111 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Samples: Submit two samples 24 by 24 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet and cushion material specified. E. Submit two, 12 inch long samples of edge strip for each color specified. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours after installation. • C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Shaw, Interface, Patcraft, Mannington, Mohawk. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Cushion: 1. Leggett& Platt, Inc: ww.lpurethane.com. 2. Healthier Choice. 2.02 CARPET w A. Carpet, Type CPT-2: 1. Roll Width: 12 ft. 2. Color: See Schedule. 3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.45 watts/sq cm,when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. 4. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the"pill test"). 5. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. B. Carpet Type CPT-3: Tufted, nylon conforming to the following criteria. 1. Roll Width: 12 ft. 2. Color: See Schedule. 3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm,when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. 4. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the"pill test"). 5. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. 2.03 CUSHION A. Cushion: Healthier Choice, Premium Carpet Cushion. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application,with attachment devices. B. Adhesives-General: Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC content of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. C. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer. D. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material; releasable type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesives to sub floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for adhesive installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710; obtain • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING • instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. D. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings. 1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic. 2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent pieces. 4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area. E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance. 3.04 STRETCHED-IN CARPET A. Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across door openings. Use edge strip where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. B. Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces, but not more than 3/8 inch. C. Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor. D. Lay out cushion so that seams will be perpendicular to, or offset from, minimum 6 inches from carpet seams. E. Butt cushion edges together and tape seams. F. Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours. G. Double cut carpet seams,with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately. H. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. Tuck edges into space between tackless strip and wall. 3.05 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately. B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive. C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing. • E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING 3.06 INSTALLATION ON STAIRS • A. Install tackless strips at back of treads,with pins facing riser, and at bottom of riser,with pins facing tread. B. Install carpet on stairs with the run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peaking of backing at nosings. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.08 SCHEDULE A. CPT-4: TBD END OF SECTION III III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2859- Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials. B. CRI (CIS)-Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute. C. CRI (GLA)-Green Label Testing Program-Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute. D. CRI (GLC)- Green Label Testing Program-Approved Product Categories for Carpet; Carpet and Rug Institute. E. CRI (GLP)- Green Label Plus Testing Program- Certified Products; Carpet and Rug Institute. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. E. Submit two, 12 inch long samples of edge strip, base cap, and stair nosing. 1111 F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bentley. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIAL A. See Schedule below. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered; • maximum VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with Section 09 05 61. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. E. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. F. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 05 61. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. • C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI (CIS). C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. F. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. G. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage,from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. CPT-1: TBD. B. CPT-2: TBD. C. CPT-3: TBD. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall covering . 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations with seaming layout. D. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, 54 by 36 inch in size illustrating color, finish, and texture. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of covered surfaces. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability. B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C. Do not store roll goods on end. • 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer. B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall covering. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BASE BID MANUFACTURER A. Carnegie;www.carnegiefabrics.com; Product Axis Embroider 6731. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Requirements for All Wall Coverings: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: No visible staining or discoloration and no damage to surface texture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1308. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. C. Termination Trim: Extruded plastic, clear. D. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate. E. Substrate Primer and Sealer: Alkyd enamel type. 411 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to requirements of the wall covering manufacturer. B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wall coverings if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16 inch/ft. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. B. Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry. C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Apply one coat of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand smooth. E. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use wall covering in roll number sequence. C. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. D. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and • ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tightly. E. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. F. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. G. Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface. H. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. I. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll. J. Install termination trim. K. Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. WC-1: TBD END OF SECTION 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. C. Surfaces to be finished are indicated in this section and on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. B. MPI (APL)- Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association. C. MPI (APSM)- Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Master Painters and Decorators Association. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss and Sheen Levels: As defined by MPI except this specification uses common names defined below rather than numbered levels: 1. Flat: Gloss Level 1 2. Velvet: Gloss Level 2 3. Eggshell: Gloss Level 3 4. Satin: Gloss Level 4 5. Semi-gloss: Gloss Level 5 6. Gloss: Gloss Level 6 7. High Gloss: Gloss Level 7 • 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number(e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system (copy of relevant MPI Manual page is acceptable). C. Schedule of Paints: List each coating and finish system for all surfaces that require paint. List special washes, surface preparation, sealers, primers, intermediate coats and final coats. 1. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. List dry film thickness for each coat in each finish system 3. Identify minimum total dry film thickness for each system. D. Certification by listed Manufacturer's Representative that products comply with Contract Documents and are compatible with applicable substrates and with each other. E. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. F. Samples: Submit three paper"drop"samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available. G. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Minimum Standard: MPI "Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and "MPI Approved Products List" and GreenSeal Label (GS-11). 1. MPI Renovation Standard: "Maintenance and Repair Manual." 2. Certified testing reports for all GS-11 requirements by independent testing agency may be accepted in lieu of GreenSeal Label. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Manufacturer's Representative: Direct employee of Manufacturer who is authorized by Manufacturer to perform duties specified in this Section: 1. Benjamin Moore: Randy E. Tessman, CSI CDT 2. Glidden Professional: Terry Decker, CSI, CDT, LEED AP. 3. Miller Paint Company: Amy Tacke: 4. PPG: Raymond V. Nicholson, CSI CDT 5. Rodda/Cloverdale: Steve Gray, CSI CDT. 6. Sherwin-Williams: Brian Keil, CSI, CCPR 1.06 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for general requirements for mock-up. B. Provide interior gypsum wall board panel, minimum 10 feet long by 8 feet wide, illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. D. Locate where directed. E. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING IIIA. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers are listed in Part 1. 1. Substitution Requests for Manufacturer will not be accepted. 2. Submit Substitution Requests for paint systems by acceptable Manufacturer per Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING • B. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. C. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. D. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS -GENERAL A. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Paints and Coatings: Provide products listed in Master Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI Categories, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide Manufacturer's highest quality product in MPI category. 2. Provide ready mixed paints and coatings, except field-catalyzed coatings. 3. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under • conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 4. Products in containers with GreenSeal Label. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. D. Patching Material: Latex filler. E. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS A. Provide Premium Grade systems(2 top coats)as defined in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, except as otherwise indicated. B. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide Custom Grade system. C. Where sheen is not specified or more than one sheen is specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. D. Provide colors as directed by Architect. 2.04 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Asphalt Paving Marking: 1. EXT 2.1A Latex Zone/Traffic Marking: MPI #97. B. Concrete Paving Marking: 1. EXT 3.2E Latex Zone/Traffic Marking: MPI #97. C. Concrete Sealer: 1. EXT 3.2G Sealer, Clear: MPI #104. • D. Cementitious Composition Board: Fiber Cement Siding and Trim 1. EXT 3.3A Latex: Latex MPI #10, 11, 15 or 119. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING E. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: 111 1. See Section 09 96 00. F. Galvanized Metal, Not Chromate Passivated: 1. Applications include but are not limited to doors and frames. 2. EXT 5.3J W.B. Light Industrial Coating: W.B. Primer MPI#134, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #161, #163, or#164. G. Dressed Lumber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to paneling at canopies,fencing. 2. EXT 6.3G Polyurethane, Clear, 2 Component: Polyurethane MPI#78, gloss. 2.05 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: 1. INT 3.2F Concrete Floor Sealer: Concrete Floor Sealer MPI #104. B. Cementitious Composition Board: 1. INT 3.3G Institutional Low OdorNOC: Interior Primer Sealer MPI #149, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #143, 144, 145, 146, 147 or 148. C. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: 1. INT 5.1N W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Epoxy Primer MPI#101, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #151,#153, or#154. 2. INT 5.1S Institutional Low OdorNOC: Primed Interior Hollow Metal Doors/Frames, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #143, 144, 145, 146, 147 or 148. D. Galvanized Metal, Not Chromate Passivated: 1. Applications include but are not limited to doors,frames, railings, and piping. 2. INT 5.3K W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Waterborne Primer MPI #134, W.B. Light 11111 Industrial Coating MPI #151, #153, or#154. E. Glue Laminated Timber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to beams and columns. 2. INT 6.1G Semi Transparent Stain, Semi Transparent Stain MPI #13. F. Dressed Lumber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to doors, door frames,window frames, window casings, trim, baseboards, and moldings. 2. INT 6.3V Institutional Low OdorNOC: Latex Primer MPI #39, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #143, 144, 145, 146, 147 or 148. G. Woodwork(Not Floors or Stairs): 1. Applications include but are not limited to casework, cabinets, and trim: 2. STN or CLR: WB Clear Polyurethane over stain (system not listed by MPI): Stain where indicated and 3 coats polyurethane. a. Basis of Design: Timber Pro UV, Crystal Urethane, non-yellowing, 145 g/L VOC. b. Stain: Manufacturer's compatible product, color selected from full range. 3. INT 6.4T Institutional Low OdorNOC: Latex Primer MPI #39, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #143, 144, 145, 146, 147 or 148. H. Gypsum Board and Dressed Lumber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to gypsum board walls, ceilings, soffits, and bulkheads. Also includes doors,frames, and items of fiberboard such as; trim, casings, baseboards, and molding. 2. EPT- INT 9.2F Epoxy,W.B.: Latex Primer Seal MPI #50, Epoxy MPI #115 3. PT: INT 9.2M Institutional Low OdorNOC: Latex Primer Sealer MPI #50, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #145, gloss level 3. 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE --SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Paint all exposed surfaces except where indicated not to be painted or to remain natural; the term "exposed" includes areas visible through permanent and built-in fixtures when they are in place. B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, indicated on the Drawings, and as follows: 1. If a surface, material, or item is not specifically mentioned, paint in the same manner as similar surfaces, materials, or items, regardless of whether colors are indicated or not. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings the same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Paint surfaces to be concealed behind permanently installed fixtures, equipment, and furnishings, using primer only, prior to installation of the permanent item. 4. Paint back sides of access panels and removable and hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 5. Finish top, bottom, and side edges of exterior doors the same as exposed faces. C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted; factory-primed items are not considered factory-finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finish. 3. Items indicated to remain naturally finished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Anodized aluminum. 6. Brick, precast concrete, integrally colored plaster. • 7. Polished and brushed stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead. 8. Acoustical materials. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials; report incompatible primer conditions and submit recommended changes for Architect's approval. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. E. Measure the ph factor of concrete, masonry, and mortar before starting any finishing process, using the method specified in MPI Architectural Painting Manual. 1. Report results in writing to Architect before starting work. 2. If results of test indicates need for remedial action, provide written description of remedial action. If a different primer or paint systems is required, state the total cost of the change. Do not proceed with remedial action or change without receiving written authorization from Architect. 3.03 PREPARATION 411 A. Prepare surfaces as specified in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and as follows for the applicable surface and coating; if multiple preparation treatments are specified, use as SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING many as necessary for best results; where the Manual references external standards for • preparation (e.g. SSPC standards), prepare as specified in those standards; comply with coating manufacturer's specific preparation methods or treatments, if any. B. Coordinate painting work with cleaning and preparation work so that dust and other contaminants do not fall on newly painted,wet surfaces. C. Surface Appurtenances: Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixtures, light fixture trim, escutcheons, machined surfaces,fittings, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. 1. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before preparation and finishing. 2. After completing painting in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. E. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Concrete, Cement Plaster and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 1111 I. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer. J. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. K. Concrete Floors to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. L. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. M. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. N. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale,weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. O. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. P. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces. Q. Glue-Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing,wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING • 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified or recommended by MPI Manual, using the preparation, products, sheens, textures, and colors as indicated. 1. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. B. Do not apply finishes over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film; do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Use applicators and methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied and according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied; use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted; produce results free of visible brush marks. 2. Roller Application: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Application: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 4. Where application method is listed in the MPI Manual for the paint system that application method is required; otherwise any application method recommended by manufacturer for material used and objects to be painted is acceptable. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate; provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application • method. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 3. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices,welds, and exposed fasteners receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. E. Apply finish to completely cover surfaces with uniform appearance without brush marks, runs, sags, laps, ropiness, holidays, spotting, cloudiness, or other surface imperfections. 1. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material recommended by manufacturer, unless the surface has been prime coated by others; where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appear, recoat primed and sealed surfaces to ensure finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 2. Apply first coat to surface that has been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 3. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat will not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 5. If manufacturer's instructions recommend sanding to produce a smooth, even surface, sand between coats. 6. Before applying next coat vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING B. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint • materials from site. C. Protect other work,whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as approved by Architect. D. Provide"Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in MPI Manual. 3.06 SCHEDULE -COLORS A. PT-1: TBD B. PT-2: TBD C. PT-3: TBD D. PT-4: TBD E. PT-5: TBD F. PT-6: TBD END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Section 05 12 00 exposed structural steel. 2. Section 05 50 00 steel fabrications. B. Section includes option for thermally fused shop finish in lieu of liquid coatings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated. 1. Samples on 1/4 inch thick steel plate, 8 by 12 inches. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards: 1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for products and coating systems indicated. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 55 and 90 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist;when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)and the following chemical restrictions: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. • 3. Anticorrosive Coatings: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. 4. Stains: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 5. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by • weight of total aromatic compounds(hydrocarbon compounds containing 1 or more benzene rings). 6. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. I. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. C. Coordinate selection of shop primer with selection of intermediate and top coatings. Product shall comply with requirements in this Section. 2.02 GLAZE COATING FOR STEEL A. 3-Coat System: 1. Zinc-rich epoxy primer, 2.5 to 3.0 dry film mils. 2. High-build epoxy intermediate coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 3. Pigmented aliphatic urethane top coat, 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. B. Color: Match Architect's sample. C. Gloss: Semi-gloss, MPI GL-5. D. Performance Requirements:AAMA 2604. E. Warranty: Remove and replace defective coating system within 5 year warranty period. F. Basis of Design: Tnemec system as follows: 1. Primer: 90-97 2. Intermediate: Series 66. 3. Top: Series 73 G. Acceptable Manufacturer's: Comparable products and system from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore. 2. Carboline. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. • 4. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS • 5. Tnemec. 2.03 SHOP FINISHING A. Prepare and apply primers in shop. B. Optional Shop Finish: Thermally fused 3-coat system comparable to specified liquid system. 1. Provide same dry film thicknesses, color and gloss. 2. Submit system for approval per Section 01 60 00, Substitution Request. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated, but not less than specified. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled IIIin the trades involved. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. D. Coordination of shop-applied prime coats with high-performance coatings is critical. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. 1. Blast clean according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Field Touch-up: SSPC-SP 3"Power tool cleaning." 3.03 PREPARATION OF HOT-DIP GAVANIZED STEEL FOR PAINTING AND COATING A. Eliminate the use of post-galvanizing treatments detrimental to paint and coating adhesion. B. Prepare galvanized surfaces for painting and coating by removing zinc oxide and zinc hydroxide conforming to theo surface preparation techniques and guidelines under ASTM D 6386. C. Application of paint and coatings must be performed within the timeline provided for under ASTM D 6386. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. B. Apply primer to steel as soon as possible after surface preparation, same day and within 8 • hours. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS C. Apply subsequent coats within Manufacturer's recommended recoat time for previous coat. • 1. Comply with Manufacturer's recommended surface preparation when recoat time is exceeded. D. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. E. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. F. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE III PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior signage: 1. Room and door signs. 2. Interior directional and informational signs. 3. Emergency evacuation maps. 4. Plaque. B. Exterior Signage: 1. Building identification signs. 2. Site directional, traffic, and parking signs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. IIID. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. Ill 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide"tactile"signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set • PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 411 4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the drawings; in addition, provide"window"section for replaceable occupant name. 6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not ' the numbers shown on the drawings; in addition, provide"window" section with sliding "In Use/Vacant" indicator. 7. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those shown on the drawings. 8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names"MEN" and"WOMEN", room numbers to be determined later, and braille. C. Interior Directional and Informational Signs: D. Emergency Evacuation Maps: E. Building Identification Signs: 1. Use individual metal letters. 2. Mount on outside wall in location shown on drawings. F. Traffic Signs: To match campus standards; locate where indicated on the drawings. 2.02 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica,Arial, or other sans serif font. 1111 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: Clear. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color. 2.03 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch. 2.04 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS A. Metal Letters: 1. Mounting: Tape adhesive. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal. B. Exposed Screws: Chrome plated. C. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly,with horizontal edges level. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE • C. Locate signs where indicated: 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions. D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, residential bathrooms, and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B456-Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Bobrick and Gatco. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS III A. Accessories-General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. B. Keys: Provide 5 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key lockable accessories. C. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No.4 Brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated zinc alloy brackets, spindleless type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll. 1. Product: B-2746 manufactured by Bobrick. B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle(PTD-1): Recessed flush with wall, stainless steel; seamless wall flanges, continuous piano hinges, tumbler locks on upper and lower doors. 1. Product: B-36903 manufactured by Bobrick. C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser,wall-mounted, recessed, with stainless steel cover and horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gage refill indicator, tumbler lock. 1. Product: B-4063 manufactured by Bobrick. D. Seat Cover Dispenser(SCD-1): Stainless steel, recessed, reloading by concealed opening at base, tumbler lock. 1. Product: B-3013 manufactured by Bobrick. E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish. III 1. Standard Duty Grab Bars: a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force, minimum. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTSACCESSORIES PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 TOILETSECTION 10 28 00 , BATH, AND LAUNDRY b. Dimensions: 1-1/2 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, • exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. d. Products: 1) Bobrick, B-6897.99. 2) Bobrick, B-6806.99 x 18. F. Coat Hook: Stainless steel. 2.05 DWELLING UNIT BATHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Holder: Gatco, 4683 B. Robe Hook: Gatco 4685 C. Towel Bar: Gatco 4680 D. Hand Towel Bar: Gatco 4682 2.06 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness, satin-finished,with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners. 1. Product: Moen manufactured by DN2145CH, or Gatco curved version. 2.07 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION • A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the drawings. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated. D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 31 00 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured steel box fireplace. B. Accessories, including spark arrestor screen and circulating fan. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL 127- Standard for Factory-Built Fireplaces; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Built-in firebox with concealed flue; rectangular shape; gas starter and circulating fan. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fuel: Natural gas specified in Division 22. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide fire box cabinet dimensions, clearances required from adjacent dissimilar construction, applicable regulatory agency approvals, electrical characteristics of fan. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fire box rough opening dimensions, rough opening sizes for chimney flue, and fan size. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that fireplace components meet or exceed UL requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and component installation sequence, clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction, and 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS • A. Conform to applicable code for clearances from adjacent materials, chimney height above roof line requirements, and unit UL approval. B. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as complying with UL 127. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufactured Fireplaces: 1. Montigo: TBD. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Fire Box: Formed insulated steel cabinet, rectangular shaped interior, configured to include chimney outlet and cleanout, refractory brick lining. B. Exposed Cladding: Prepainted steel. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel type. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Exposed to View Surfaces: As selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on drawings. • B. Verify that proper power supply and fuel source are available. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 3.02 INSTALLATION SECTION 10 31 00 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES A. Install unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure chimney in opening framing with appropriate fasteners. C. Carefully cut holes for fan wall switch and grilles. D. Install flashings to ensure moisture is shed from chimney flue.END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set • 1111 PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. UL(FPED)- Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS • A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers-General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and.indicated. B. CFC, HCFC and Halon are prohibited. C. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class A:B:C. 2. Size: 2A1OBC. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Box Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type, typical, surface type at garage. 1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Trim: Stainless steel, returned to wall surface, with 5/16 inch projection, 1 inch wide face at typical fully recessed cabinets;formed steel at garage installations. C. Door: Architectural Series, 0.036 inch thick stainless steel, reinforced for flatness and rigidity at typical recessed, and reinforced formed steel at garage; Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano.hinge. Provide latch with nylon catch. • D. Door Glazing: Vertical duo clear 1/8 inch thick acrylic. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004BURN HAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. • G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: No. 4 stainless steel and baked enamel finish, white color at garage installations. H. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure rigidly in place. C. Place extinguishers in cabinets. END OF SECTION III • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 51 43 CHAINLINK STORAGE LOCKERS • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following as base bid, see Section 01 23 00 for alternate: 1. Fencing system complete with all hardware, infill mesh, union extrusions, posts, rails, gates, and accessories necessary for a complete and aesthetically balanced installation. 2. Swinging gates and related hardware. 3. Concrete foundation for posts. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Manufacturer shall supply a Modular Fencing System complete with all hardware, posts, rails, unions, security mesh panels, gates and accessories necessary for a complete and aesthetically balanced installation. B. Design Requirements: Fencing system, and installation shall be engineered for security. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each product indicated, include manufacturer's recommendations for installation. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, locations, components, materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, finishes of components, installation and operational clearances, gate swings, post sizes, spacing and mesh type, gate details/dimensions, details of post anchorage, and post attachment/bracing. D. System design shall be certified by a Registered Engineer. Submit complete Shop Drawings sealed by a registered engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project. SE. Samples: Color selections and samples for finishes on fence and accessories if requested by the specifier. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and the materials and techniques specified. Consult manufacturers installation instructions and DVD for clarifications. B. Provide fencing system and gates, as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary erection accessories, fittings and fastenings C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. D. Field Quality Control to be conducted by Owner's Project Manager or GC's field supervisor. 1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver fence materials, gates, posts, and accessories to project site, completely pre-finished. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damages occurred during shipping. Materials shall be handled and stored properly to protect against damage and theft. B. Handle fence components to protect finish coating from any scuffs, abrasion or other damage during unloading and installation. Excessive damage to factory applied coatings will be cause for rejection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Fencing System: Subject to the performance and design requirement specified herein, fence • and gates shall be manufactured from the following materials: B. Fence Framework: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 51 43 CHAINLINK STORAGE LOCKERS 1. Panel joint extrusion manufactured per ASTM B221 to manufacturer's standard, size and • shape as shown on the drawings. 2. Security mesh, infill panels to be carbon steel mesh, LouverMesh 94 pattern, 94%screen, 1 'h"x 14ga, and shall be powder coated to match fence. 3. Tubing for rails and posts if square, to be formed per ASTM F2408 from coil steel with minimum yield of 50,000 psi; Posts to be galvanized per ASTM A653 G-90 for material galvanized after forming, and the O.D. is to receive a conversion coating and a clear inorganic coating for better adhesion of final color coating.Posts with greater than 7ga wall thickness shall be formed per ASTM A53, A500 or A501, grade B,with a minimum yield of 46,000 psi, and shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Tubing for rails and posts is round shall comply with ASTM F1043, Material Design Group 1A, external and Posts shall have press-on type steel caps zinc plated to ASTM D633, Service Class II, or malleable steel caps galvanized to ASTM A123. 4. Sheets, rails and posts to be cut, sized, and located as indicated in the certified and approved shop drawings. 5. Rail attachment brackets shall be stainless steel or galvanized steel, with stainless, galvanized or zinc plated fasteners. All brackets and fasteners shall be finished to match fence finish and color. 6. Size: Panel sizes shall be as shown on approved shop drawings. 7. Swing Gates: a. Design of gates shall be as shown on the Drawings. b. Gate frames and infill panels: Materials as described above in 2.01: 1) Frame members shall be MIG welded. Truss rods or cables to be used to prevent gate sag and allow for future adjustment. 2) Gate posts, anchoring and transom frame: Size as determined by Engineer, based on gate size, security requirements, and installation type. • 3) Hinges: Manufacturer's standard hinges, structurally capable of supporting gate leaf and allow opening and closing without binding. Non-lift-off type hinge design shall permit gate to swing 180 deg. Hinge pins shall be non-removable. 4) Latch: Capable of retaining gate in closed position and have provision for padlock. 5) Keeper: Provide keeper for each gate leaf over 5 feet wide. Gate keeper shall consist of mechanical device for securing free end of gate when in full open position. 2.02 POWDER COATED FACTORY FINISH A. Coating Material: Posts, post caps, rails, brackets,joint extrusions and security mesh shall be finished with a factory applied TGIC polyester powder coating of the"Super-Durable" class. Powder coated finish shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria: 1. ASTM B117 Salt Spray Resistance, 5% salt spray at 95° F and 95% relative humidity, 1,000 hour test, single scribe, 1/8"creep and/or#8 blisters is failure. 2. ASTM D3359, Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Method B, coating retention of not less than 95%. 3. ASTM D2794, Impact Resistance, minimum resistance to impact not less than 120 in. /lb. 4. ASTM D3363, Film Hardness by Pencil Test, minimum hardness: 2H. 5. ASTM D4141, Solar Concentration Exposure Testing, Method C (Equivalent to EMMAQUA NTW), coating must test to a minimum of 50% Gloss Retention at 1,400 MJ/m2 with no film failure, chalking, cracking or checking and no more than 10%fading. a. Thickness: Film thickness of 2-4 mils as measured by manufacturer's standard powder coat measurement and inspection procedures. b. Pretreatment: The fence sheeting and framework shall be prepared using a pre-treatment cleaning system to remove foreign material and to properly prepare the 4111 surface to achieve the coating system requirements specified above. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 51 43 CHAINLINK STORAGE LOCKERS • c. Curing: Heat cure in accordance with powder manufacturer's prescribed cure schedule to properly crosslink and bond finish to metal substrate. d. Color: Black PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify areas to receive fencing. B. Coordinate fence installation with work of other sections listed in these specifications. C. Examine conditions under which fencing and gates are to be installed. Notify Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until conditions are satisfactory to the installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fence and gates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Install fencing to provide security as specified. B. Handle fence components to protect finish coating from any scuffs, abrasion or other damage during installation. Excessive damage to factory applied coatings will be cause for rejection. C. Space posts at dimensions indicated in the shop drawings. Attach fence rails to posts using stainless steel or galvanized steel, panel hanger brackets supplied by manufacturer. Field welding of rails to posts is unacceptable as it will cause significant damage to the galvanizing and powder coat protective finishes. D. Post base: anchor posts to existing concrete floor with expansion anchors. Coordinate size and location of anchors with structural engineer. E. Install gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware • using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. F. Avoid unnecessary cutting, drilling and welding of pre-finished fence components. If necessary to cut drill, weld or otherwise modify product due to field conditions, repair factory finish in accordance with item G. below. G. Touch-up any necessary areas by lightly sanding; apply a zinc-rich cold galvanizing primer followed by a high quality acrylic lacquer paint to match finish. (Touch-up paint available from manufacturer) Note:field applied touch-up cannot match the performance of factory applied finishes and should be limited in use. 3.03 CLEANING A. Fence contractor shall remove packing materials and unused product and level uneven areas due to excavations created by fence installations. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 55 23 MAIL BOXES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Multiple mail boxes with hinged and locked doors. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 39 CFR 111 - U.S. Postal Service Standard 4C. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for components. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, construction and anchorage details, dimensions, rough-in openings sizes, quantity and arrangement of box sizes. 1. Show field measurements on shop drawings. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation procedures, special considerations, and maintenance information. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mail Boxes: 1. Manufacturer: Design Basis;Auth-Florence Manufacturing Company; Product Florence 4C06D-10+, aluminum finish:www.authflorence.com. 2. Acceptable mannufacturers pending conformance to Design Basis requirements and requirements specified herein: • a. Auth-Florence Manufacturing Company : www.authflorence.com. b. Bommer Industries, Inc: www.bommer.com. c. Salsbury Industries; Product 3707D-12: www.mailboxes.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MAIL BOXES SERVED BY U.S. POSTAL SERVICE A. Comply with U.S. Postal Service Standard 4C. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Front Loading Panel Frame: 1. Aluminum with mill finish. B. Box Door: 1. Aluminum with mill finish. C. Box Construction: Sheet steel, zinc coated, 22 gage thick, fabricated into modular stackable units, baked enamel flat black finish. Pre-punch bolt holes in box for stack bolting to each other and anchoring to adjacent construction; engraved doors for identifying each box. D. Nominal Box Sizes: Configured as follows: 1. Box Depth: 17 inches. 2. Mail Box: 13 by 6 inches. 3. Parcel Box: 13 by 17 inches. E. Postal Box Locks: USPS standard, two keys per box. F. "Out-Going Mail" Lock Box: Face plate to match front loading panel frame, box of galvanized steel construction, 13 by 12 inch size, lockable with cylinder provided by Post Office. G. Aluminum Finish: Thermally fused polymer powder system. • 1. Color: TBD SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 55 23 MAIL BOXES PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and U.S. Postal Service regulations. B. Install and secure boxes in position, neatly, and accurately stacked. C. Install doors and adjust to operate smoothly. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 56 23 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted wire closet shelving. B. Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, with installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of shelving and attachment to substrates. D. Selection Samples: For each color selection required, submit color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and finish. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. C. Store flat to prevent warpage and bending. PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wire Storage Shelving: 1. ClosetMaid Corporation : www.closetmaid.com. 2. RubberMaid Closet and Organization Products : www.rubbermaidcloset.com. 3. Schulte Corporation;www.schultestorage.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated-wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, with all components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling and warping. 1. Model B: Continuous slide type integral hanger rod. 2. Construction: Cold-drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi resistance welded into uniform mesh units, square, rigid, flat, and free of dents or other distortions,with wires trimmed smooth. 3. Coating: Epoxy, applied after fabrication, covering all surfaces. 4. Epoxy Coating: Non-toxic epoxy-polyester powder coating baked-on finish, 3 to 5 mils thick. 5. Standard Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at 1 inch. B. Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware; include support braces, wall brackets, back clips, end clips, poles, and other accessories as required for complete and secure installation; factory finished to match shelving. C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting substrates. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 56 23 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect areas to receive shelving, to verify that spaces are properly prepared to receive shelf units, and are of dimensions indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify appropriate fastening hardware. C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with shelf surfaces level. B. Cap exposed ends of cut wires. C. Install back clips, end clips at side walls, and support braces at open ends. Install intermediate support braces as recommended by manufacturer. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean soiled surfaces after installation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage. III B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion in a manner that eliminates evidence of replacement. END OF SECTION 111111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 56 39 INTERIOR BICYCLE RACKS • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior bicycle racks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation instructions, options, and methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including clearances from adjacent walls, doors, and obstructions. D. Samples: Standard color samples. E. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. 1. Handle racks with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the finish. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION A. Wall mounted bicycle racks for indoor storage. ® B. Bicycle racks for exterior storage, see Section 12 93 00. 2.02 BICYCLE RACKS A. Indoor Bicycle Racks(Wall Mounted): 1. Manufacturer: Rutland Industries; www.rutlandindustries.com 2. Model: Mini Mum Vertical Bike Rack, surface-mounted installation with security cable and tamper resistant concrete anchor screws. 3. Color: Black. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive bicycle racks. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of bicycle racks. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1. Ensure surfaces to receive bicycle racks are clean, flat, and level unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install bicycle racks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated on the drawings. B. Install bicycle racks level, plumb, square, accurately aligned, correctly located, and without warp. C. Permanent Surface Mounting: Anchor bicycle racks securely in place to structure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Use hardware and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 56 39 INTERIOR BICYCLE RACKS E. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as • approved by Architect. F. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean bicycle racks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove temporary protective coverings. C. Clean installed work to like-new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed bicycle racks from damage during construction. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 80 13 PET GROOMING SPECIALTIES IllPART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bird barrier strip for prevention of pest birds and climbing animals from landing, roosting, nesting or climbing on architectural surfaces. B. Mounting Hardware C. Pet Grooming Supplies 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Installation methods. 2. Types of mounting hardware. 3. Anchorage and fastening methods. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings for specified model, and mounting condition. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.04 STORAGE & HANDLING A. Provide storage to keep shipping boxes dry, clean and undamaged. Do not stack or place other IDpackaging on the shipping boxes. B. Keep grooming equipment and mounting hardware in original packaging until needed for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Grooming Table: 1. Product: Therapet Hydraulic Grooming Table a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Requirements: a. Size: 36 inches long by 24 inches wide. b. Construction: Steel sheet and steel tubing. c. 36" bolted grooming arm made of tubular steel. d. Vertical adjustment by hydraulic foot pump including solid steel bar and adjustable screw. e. 10 inch vertical adjustment(29 to-39 inches) . f. Textured rubber grooming surface. g. 100% polyester grooming Loop. B. Dryer: 1. Product: Metro Vac Air Force Stowaway Dryer. a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Requirements: a. Air Volume: 65/130 CFM b. Air Speed: 14,000/28,000 FPM. c. Heat: Warm Air. Ill d. Motor: 4.0 HP. e. Amps: 11.25. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 10 80 13 PET GROOMING SPECIALTIES f. All steel body. g. Mounts securely to wall. h. Third arm for hands free drying. C. Wash Tub : 1. Product: Groomer's Best Walk-In Grooming Tub a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Requirements: a. Height: 12 inches off floor surface. b. Construction: 18 gage 304 stainless steel fully welded. c. Tubular stanless steel legs with leg levelers. d. Four animal restraint eyelets. e. Hot and cold water port available right, left, or center D. Wash Kit For Tub: 1. Product: Groomer's Best Plumbing Kit for Pet Tub. a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Requirements: a. 4 inches on-center chrome faucet with two handles. b. 3/8 inch thick polyurethane heavy-duty coiled hose. c. Full spray head with comfortable hold-down lever-shuts off completely when not in use. d. 3 1/2 inch chrome drain with "spin-n-lock" strainer/hair trap. e. 1 1/2 inch white PVC "P"trap with three wing nuts. f. Heavy-duty spray head, stainless steel holder. PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Visually inspect installation surfaces to make sure all surfaces are clean, dry and free from debris or other conditions that could impede the work flow of this section. B. Notify architect of detrimental conditions and do not proceed until these conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements:Verify dimensions of each installation surface. B. Verify installation surface finishing requirements are complete before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines. B. Protect all surfaces allowing no gaps in barrier strip coverage. C. Fasten mounting hardware as recommended by the manufacturer. Follow hardware spacing guidelines and installation procedures supplied by manufacturer. 3.04 3.5 -ADJUSTMENTS/CLEANING A. Remove debris and waste materials from project site. B. Inspect finished installation. Make any adjustments needed to conform to manufacturer's required installation guidelines. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 11 13 BICYCLE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted air compressor. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: .1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Anchorage and fasteners. 4. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including tolerances and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, and obstructions. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.03 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Handle equipment with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the finish. 1.04 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT 4110 A. Air Compressor: 1. Manufacturer:Campbell Hausfeld 2. Model: 18035 Portable Air Compressor 3. Air Compressor 2 gallon compact tank. 120 volts. 100 maximum PSI. ISO 1217 free air delivery SCFM at 40/90 PSI-.51/.39. Lightweight and easy to carry. Maintenance free oil-less pump. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 63 00- Product Substitution Requirements. 5. Location: Bicycle repair room PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive equipment. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory substrates have been properly repaired. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ensure surfaces to receive equipment are clean, flat, and plumb/level. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install bicycle equipment level, plumb, square, and correctly located as indicated on the drawings. 3.04 CLEANING • A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 11 13 BICYCLE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT 3.05 PROTECTION • A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 12 00 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parking entry height guard -clearance bar. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets on product to be used, including, equipment characteristics and limitations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including clearances from adjacent ceiling mounting. Indicate equipment layout requirements, D. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's recommended installation anchorage procedures and special requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the placement of equipment frames and anchors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS • A. Parking entry height guard -clearance bar: 1. Encore Commercial Products, Inc; www.postguard.com. 2. Ideal Siled; www.idealshield.com 3. Simon Marketing Group, LLC; www.simonmarketinggroup.net. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Substitution Requirements. 2.02 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Clearance Bar: Fade and impact resistant high density polyethylene (HDPE). 1. Diameter: 4 1/2 inches. 2. Length:As indicated. 3. Color: Yellow. 4. Signage Graphics Kit: Black all capital letters and numbers. 5. Bar end closures. B. Hardware: 1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/Eye hooks, chain lengths, mounting bracket and anchors Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install parking Parking entry height guard-clearance bar components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 12 00 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.03 ADJUSTING • A. Adjust system components for proper clearances. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 24 16 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Delegated Design, supply, and installation of building maintenance and fall protection equipment for regular maintenance of the building and building components including: 1. Roof mounted fall arrest saftey anchors. 2. Horizontal cable lifeline restraint system. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS A. Design window fall protection system to suit building maintenance requirements and in accordance with plans, specifications, standards, regulations, and codes. B. Confirm all anchor components will provide adequate attachment to the building and are suited to current suspended maintenance practices. Confirm compatibility with industry standard equipment. C. Ensure all anchor components conform to proper engineering principles and conform to the requirements of window cleaning/suspended maintenance equipment, its application and safety requirements. D. Design system fall arrest safety anchors and equipment supports to comply with all governing code requirements. E. Design system fall arrest safety anchors and equipment supports to comply with the latest code mandated structural requirements. 1. Ensure design of primary support equipment is capable of sustaining without failure at least four times the maximum static working load applied or transmitted to the components, i.e. a 4 to 1 stability factor. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data sheet, for each specified product. C. Submit shop drawings showing complete layout and configuration for a complete system, including all components and accessories. Clearly indicate design loads and fabrication details, hardware, and installation details. D. Shop drawings to include installation and rigging instructions and all necessary Restrictive and Non-Restrictive Working Usage Notes and General Safety Notes. E. Shop drawings to be reviewed, signed, and stamped by a professional engineer, complete with calculations and test reports. F. Delegated Design Procedures: Comply with Section 01 33 16. G. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Experience and proof of insurance. H. Welder's certificates, as applicable. I. Sample Warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of the work of this Section and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications:A company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section, with not less than ten years of documented experience, and capable of providing field service representation during construction and approving application method. C. Installer Qualifications: A company experienced in performing work of this section who has • specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 24 16 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM D. Manufacturer's Insurance: Manufacturer to provide proof of liability insurance to protect against • product and system failure in the amount required by Owner. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with OSHA regulations as follows: 1. OSHA Standard 1910, Subpart D, Walking and Working Surfaces. 2. Appendix C to 1910 Subpart F, Personal Fall Arrest Systems. F. Manufacturer's Field Service Technical Representative: 1. Visit site not less than two times, or more if required, to review technical procedures critical to fall protection system installation. a. Start of installation to observation anchoring conditions suitability for fall protection system. b. Observation of completed installations. G. Source Quality Control: Ensure equipment components and materials are from single manufacturer. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the following OSHA regulations: 1. 1910, Subpart D (Walking and Working Surfaces). 2. Appednix C, Subpart F, to 1910 (Personal Fall Arrest Systems). 3. "OSHA Ruling on Window Cleaning by Bosun's Chair" Memorandum to Regional Administrators from P.K. Clark, Director, Directorate of Compliance Programs. 4. 1910.33, Subpart F (Powered Platforms). B. Comply with IBC with State of Oregon Amendments. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with requirements of Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays, and to minimize site storage time. C. Protect Work of this Section during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage or deterioration. D. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels intact and in sizes to suit project. E. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1.07 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit 1 copy of system Equipment Manual & Inspection Log Book, with"Initial Inspection Certification for Use" and "Inspection Sign-Off'forms completed. B. Submit 2 copies of a reduced plastic laminated as-built shop drawing showing equipment locations and details. This drawing is to be posted near exits onto the roof. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. C. Warranty: Two-years commencing on date of Substantial Completion set by Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Design Basis: Guardian Fall Protection;www.guardianfall.com. 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 24 16 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM 0 1. Product: CB12 Anchors or approved. B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to or exceeding Design Basis performance requirements: 1. Pro-Bel Enterprises Limited;www.pro-bel.ca. 2. XSPlatforms; xsplatforms.com C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 1. Companies, such as miscellaneous metal fabricators, who are not normally engaged in the design and manufacture of window cleaning/suspended maintenance equipment, are not acceptable. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate work true to dimension, square, plumb, level and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance. B. Grind off surplus welding material and ensure exposed internal and external corners have smooth lines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and areas upon which the work of this Section depends. Report to the Contractor in writing, defects of work prepared by other trades and other unsatisfactory site conditions which would cause defective installation of products, or cause latent defects in workmanship and function. B. Verify that substrate conditions which have been previously installed under other sections or contracts, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions IIIprior to installation. C. Verify site dimensions. D. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied. E. Commencement of work implies acceptance of prepared work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate fall protection equipment work with work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. B. Ensure structure or substrate is adequate to support complete fall protection equipment system. C. Ensure structural steel to receive safety anchors has adequate bearing surface as indicated on shop drawings and has 100 percent welds between anchors and structural steel where applicable. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Co-ordinate installation with work of related trades. C. Install all work true, level, tightly fitted and flush with adjacent surfaces as required. D. Substrate to receive anchor base plate to have adequate bearing surface as indicated on shop drawings. E. Manufacturer to assist and/or supervise installation of suspended maintenance equipment installed by others. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND INSPECTION • A. Adjust and leave equipment in proper working order. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 24 16 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM B. Complete"Initial Inspection-Certification for Use"form included in Equipment Manual & • Inspection Log Book. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product from damage during construction. B. Correct damage to adjacent materials caused by fall protection equipment installation. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Include complete maintenance on fall protection equipment for 12 months after date of acceptance by Owner. B. Repair or replace parts of fall protection equipment whenever required due to defect and normal wear and tear. C. Use only standard parts of product line of manufacturer of fall protection equipment. D. Maintain locally adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes. E. Provide personnel to perform work under supervision and in direct employ of fall protection equipment system manufacturer or manufacturer's licensed agent. F. Perform work during regular trade working hours satisfactory to Owner. G. Provide emergency call-back at no extra cost and ensure fulfillment of maintenance and emergency service without undue loss of time to Owner. H. Ensure that maintenance personnel register with designated building personnel at time of inspections and maintenance. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. B. Laundry appliances. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL(EAUED)- Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 DWELLING UNIT; KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated. B. Refigerator: GE, GTH18ISXSS C. Range: GE, JB650STSS D. Microwave: GE, JNM1951SRSS E. Dishwasher(DW-1): 1. Manufacturer: GE 2. Model: GDF510PSDSS 3. Color: Stainless 4. Size: 24 inch 5. Energy Star F. Garbage Disposal: 1/3 hp 2.02 DWELLING UNIT; LAUNDRY APPLIANCES A. Clothes Washer: GE, WCVH4800, white. B. Clothes Dryer: GE, DCCH480E, white. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor built-in equipment in place. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust equipment to provide efficient operation. 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 3.03 CLEANING SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES • A. Remove packing materials from equipment and properly discard. B. Wash and clean equipment. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 82 27 WASTE COMPACTORS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged waste compactor unit and discharge container. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z245.2-American National Standard for Stationary Compactors--Safety Requirements for Installation, Maintenance, and Operation. B. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association. C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. D. WASTEC (SCRG)-WASTEC Listing of Rated Stationary Compactors; Waste Equipment Technology Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide unit capacities, physical dimensions, utility requirements and locations, point loads. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate machine location, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, clearances required . D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Operation Data: Include description of system operation, adjusting and testing required. F. Maintenance Data: Identify system maintenance requirements, servicing cycles, lubrication types required and local spare part sources. • G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment Rating: In accordance with ANSI Z245.2. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for operating unit. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of unit. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Apartment/highrise Compactors: 1. Design Basis: Marathon Equipment Co; Product Mini-Mac, model 3A : www.marathonequipment.com. 2. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to Design Basis requirements and requirements specified herein: a. Stellar Industries Inc.; K-Pac; www.stellarindustries.com. b. Wastequip Inc; www.wastequip.com. • c. Wilkinson-Hi-Rise LLC: www.whrise.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 82 27 WASTE COMPACTORS 2.02 APPLICATIONS • 2.03 COMPACTORS -GENERAL A. Motors: NEMA MG 1. B. Control Panels and Remote Equipment Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosures; factory finished; wall-mounted unless otherwise indicated. C. Discharge Containers: Heavy duty steel; factory-finished for outdoor use; manufacturer's standard type unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors and Fasteners: Galvanized steel; where embedded in concrete, provide to concrete installer for installation. 2.04 WASTE COMPACTORS A. Compactor Operational Criteria: 1. Service Location: Interior. 2. Type: Top loading, horizontal operating. 3. Control Mode: Fully automatic. 4. Refuse Source: Chute. B. Compactor Features: 1. Construction: Steel, welded. 2. Trash Inlet and Outlet: Galvanized. 3. Control Panel: On/Off key switch, emergency STOP button, cycle selector switch for single cycle operation. 4. Cycling: Governed by electric eye connected to signal light to indicate discharge bag is full. 5. Compacted Discharge: Rear loading. • C. Discharge Container: 1. Type: As provided by local hauler. **confirm compatibility with local trash disposal companies.** 2. Lockable container using a 1-sided latch. D. Vibration and Dampening Materials: Kinetics KNM100ALQ, line the horizontal landing of the chute where waste will impact before entering the compactor. E. Anchors and Fasteners: Galvanized steel; where embedded in concrete, provide to concrete installer for installation. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Vibration and Dampening Materials: Kinetics KNM100ALQ. B. Anchors and Fasteners: Galvanized steel; where embedded in concrete, provide to concrete installer for installation. C. Odor Neutralizer Unit: Sonozaire 115A, installed per manufacturer's requirements. D. 2 Cubic Yard Bins. Provide two. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that anchors are correctly positioned. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install unit and inlet hopper in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and with standards required by authority having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate with waste chute discharge. C. Anchor unit securely in place. 411 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 11 82 27 WASTE COMPACTORS • D. Touch-up minor damaged surfaces caused during installation. Replace damaged components as directed by Architect. E. Adjust unit mechanism to achieve specified requirements. 3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstrate and instruct Owner on unit operation. Describe unit limitations. END OF SECTION 411 • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL BLINDS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. • B. Horizontal fabric honeycomb up/down blinds. C. Operating hardware. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds. B. Take field measurements to determine sizes required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Typical at All Units Excluding Ground Gloor. 1. Basis of Design: Norman Window Fashions; Product Performance Faux Wood Blinds: www.normanshutters.com. • a. Size: 2 inch. b. Color: Pure White. c. Operating System; Standard Chord Lock. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Horizontal Honeycomb Shades: Typical at Ground Floor Units Windows. 1. Basis of Design: Hunter Douglas; Product Applause: www.hunterdouglas.com. a. Fabric; Sunterra-Cloud b. Pleat Size: 3/4 inch. c. Operating System; Standard Chord Lock. d. Mounting; Wall Surface Mounted at Bldg A& Opening Head Mounted at Bldg B. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/2 inch. B. Fabricate blinds to cover window frames completely. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. C. Place intermediate head supports at 30 inch on center. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM&ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL BLINDS 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES • A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. See room finish schedule for locations. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 22 16 DRAPERY, TRACK, AND ACCESSORIES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed steel track. B. Nylon carriers, cords, and accessories. C. Fabric Draperies(Owner furnished, Owner installed). 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate location and installation of concealed blocking for support of recessed tracks. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide track profiles, acceptable load data, finishes available, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate end track location, width of window opening, location of blocking for anchors, appurtenances and interferences, adjacent construction, operating hardware, and support bracket details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures, perimeter conditions requiring attention. E. Maintenance Data: Include data for motor, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, control adjustments, spare part sources. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Carriers: Quantity equal to 5 percent of those installed. • 3. Extra Control Cords/Wands: Two of each type installed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up for one model room of full drapery track run in designed location as an integral part of a window and ceiling intersection assembly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Drapery Track and carriers: 1. Kirsch, Inc: www.kirsch.com. 2. Silent Gliss USA, Inc: www.silentgliss-usa.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Tracks: Formed steel, bi-parting operating traverse rods, regular duty channel track. B. Track Brackets: Formed steel wall type, for recessed installation, with screws and inserts for attachment. C. Carriers: Nylon roller 3 per foot, type. D. Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop, free end weighted. E. Drapery Farics: See Schedule at end of this Section. 2.03 FINISHES • A. Exposed Surfaces: Baked enamel,white. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 22 16 DRAPERY, TRACK, AND ACCESSORIES PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concealed anchors are in correct position. B. Verify that electrical service is correctly located and of proper characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install drapery tracks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend track 12 inches both sides with window trim for single track; 18 inches for double track where exposed. C. Mount track support brackets on solid backing. Where mounting location does not align with solid backing, provide expanding anchors for each screw hole location. D. Anchor tension pulley to wall. E. Set cord pulls so that cord pull is 12 inches below window sill in full open position. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust drapery hardware for smooth operation. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Fabrics (F): 1. F-1: TBD 2. F-2: TBD 3. FB-1: TBD 4. FB-2: TBD END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER SHADES • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually operated roller shades. 1. Sunscreen roller shades. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM G 21 -Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. NFPA 701-99- Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. C. WCMA A100.1 -Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2007. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include: 1. Styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features, finishes and operating instructions. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations, mounting details and installation methods. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items • are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Shade mounting assembly and attachment. 2. Size and location of access to shade operator and adjustable components. 3. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot. E. Samples for Verification: 1. For the following products: a. Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch-square section of fabric,from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material. b. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches long. F. Window Treatment Schedule: For roller shades using same designations indicated on Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. G. Maintenance Data: Include methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls, in maintenance manuals 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of five years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of five years experience installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn. • Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER SHADES 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING • A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Contracting Officer of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth (except EcoVeil): Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty. 1. EcoVeil standard non-depreciating 10-year limited warranty. B. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manually Operated Roller Shades: • 1. Basis of Design: a. MechoShade Systems, Inc.; Style- Manual, Color; Ecoveil- Silver Birch; www.mechoshade.com. 2. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to basis of Design requirements: a. A and I Manufacturing b. Draper Inc.;www.draperinc.com. c. Solarfective Products Limited;www.solarfective.com d. Nysan Shading Systems Ltd.; www.nysan.com e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Shade Band Material: Fiberglass and acrylic blend. 1. Fabric Width: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Pattern: Mesh 3. Style: EcoVeil by MechoShade or equivalent. 4. Colors: Eggshell 5. Material Solar-Optical Properties: Exterior reflective 6. Material Openness Factor: a. 5 percent.at Leasing Office. 7. Material UV Blockage: 85 percent. 8. Bottom Hem: Straight. B. Rollers: 1. Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging. 2. Designed to be easily removable from support brackets. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER SHADES 11111 3. Removable spline fitting integral channel in tube manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material. 4. Provide capacity for one roller shade band(s) per roller, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 5. Installations with a single row of aligned rollers are either regular or reverse roll. Installations with a double row of queued or overlapping rollers can be same roll or opposite. Coordinate direction of roll with fascia and pocket design. 6. Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller. C. Mounting Brackets(exposed to view and in ceiling pocket): 1. Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or headbox. D. Standard Headbox Installation at Leasing Office: 1. Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators; length as indicated on Drawings; removable design for access. 2. Pocket-Style Headbox at Units: U-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; with a bottom cover consisting of slot opening of minimum dimension to allow lowering and raising of shade and a removable or an openable, continuous metal access panel concealing shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators within. E. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide exposed-to-view, external-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation. F. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement • without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes. G. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous-loop bead-chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and bracket lift operator. 1. Position of Clutch Operator: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Position of Clutch Operator: Left side of roller, as determined by hand of user facing shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide adaptor. 4. Lift-Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for balancing roller shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. 5. Loop Length: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level. 6. Bead Chain: Stainless steel. 7. Cord Tensioner Mounting: Wall. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting • fascia, roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER SHADES E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket,fabricated from metal • noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Finish: Color-Coat metal components exposed to view. Apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. G. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: Matching or coordinating with shade band color, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. C. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. D. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. • 3.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for distance between roller shades and glass with clearances between shade perimeter and surrounding construction, glass type, and placement of heating/cooling air supplies to avoid heat buildup and possible damage to glass. Generally retain option for 2 inches (50 mm) in paragraph below. See Evaluations and GANA's"Glazing Manual." 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install shades in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass and allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Unit kitchen cabinets. B. Unit vanity cabinets. C. Casework hardware. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. BHMA A156.9-American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). B. KCMA A161.1 - Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (ANSI/KCMA A161.1). C. KCMA(DIR)- Directory of Certified Cabinet Manufacturers; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions and construction details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, large scale plans, elevations, clearances required, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances. D. Samples: Submit two plywood veneer samples, 18 x 18 inch in size, illustrating each color of finish. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1 and KCMA Certified. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Residential Casework: 1. Lanz Cabinets. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Countertops: As specified in Section 12 36 00. B. Manufacturer: Basis of Design at Units; Lanz. 1. Face frame melamine cabinets. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.03 HARDWARE A. Drawer and Door Pulls at Units: Lanz- Premium Line. B. Catches: Magnetic. C. Drawer Slides: Extension arms, steel construction, minimum 75 lb rating. D. Hinges: Salice 110 degree concealed clip hinge, 6-way adjustable, self closing.. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. Se B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture could accumulate. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK C. Form smooth edges. Form material for countertops, shelves, and drain boards from III continuous sheets. D. Exposed Base Cabinet End Panels: Exposed surfaces to match exterior cabinet finish, scribe to fit flush to floor,wall, and underside of countertop. Outer edge of panel to align with face of drawer or door. Panel to be rectangular without cut/notch for toe kick. 2.05 FINISHES A. Interior Surfaces: Melamine, off white. B. Exposed to View Surfaces (Door and drawer faces and backs): As scheduled below PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered. C. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components,with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Use filler strips; not additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Close ends of units, back splashes, shelves and bases. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly. Ill 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity. END OF SECTION III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work. B. Countertops for manufactured casework. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A161.2- Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate Countertops. B. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard. C. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards. E. AWMAC (GIS)- Guarantee and Inspection Services Program. F. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Surface Fabricators Association. G. ISFA 3-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Surface Fabricators Association. H. MIA(DSDM)- Dimensional Stone Design Manual. I. NEMA LD 3- High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. J. PS 1 -Structural Plywood. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. • B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. F. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions(temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits • recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic resin over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: a. Kitchens: 3 cm. b. Bathrooms: 2 cm. 2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA 3-01 and NEMA LD 3; orthopthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes indicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual. b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Polished. c. Color and Pattern: See Schedule below. d. Manufacturers: 1) Pental, Daltile, or Touchstone. 3. Other Components Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/2 inch thick; square edge. 5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Wood-Based Components: 1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; • minimum 3/4 inch thick;join lengths using metal splines. C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable,with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece;join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS • C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum. B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum. C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. 3.07 SCHEDULES • A. SS-1: TBD B. SS-2: TBD C. SS-3: TBD END OF SECTION 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stainless steel entrance floor gratings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating properties of walk-off surface, component dimensions and recessed frame characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and details for recessed frame. 1. For recessed frames located within a dimensionally restricted area, show dimensions of space within which the frame will be installed. D. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning instructions, stain removal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Entrance Entrance Floor Mat: 1. Design Basis: Construction Specialties, Inc.: www.c-sgroup.com a. Product: Pedimat. B. Floor Mats:Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to Design Basis requirements and requirments specified herein: 1. American Floor Products Company, Inc: www.afco-usa.com. 2. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com. 3. R.C. Musson Rubber Co: www.mussonrubber.com. • 4. Pawling Corporation: www.pawling.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATS A. Entrance Floor Mat and Frame Assembly: M1 Pedimat: Combination vinyl/acrylic rails and aluminum hinge connectors. B. Carpet Mat: Cut nylon pile permanently bonded to vinyl backing. 1. Size:As indicated in drawings. 2. Edge: One inch black matching vinyl border on all edges. 3. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. C. Recessed Frame: Level base frame, 1/4 inch thick 6063-T6 aluminum alloy exposed top strip, 3/4] inch deep, with anchoring features. 1. Size:As indicated in drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Vacuum clean floor recess. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install walk-off surface in floor recess flush with finish floor after cleaning of finish flooring. 3.03 TOLERANCES END OF SECTION 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS III PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included in this Section: Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary to complete the installation of all site furnishings shown on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03—Concrete 2. Division 05— Metals. 3. Division 22—Plumbing. 4. Division 26—Electrical. 5. Division 31 —Earthwork. 6. Section 32 13 13—Concrete Paving. 7. Section 32 14 13—Precast Concrete Unit Paving. 8. Section 32 91 13—Soil Preparation. 9. Section 32 93 00—Trees, Shrubs and Groundcover. 10. Division 33—Utilities. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures". 1. Product information indicating quantity, factory finish, and size of products. 2. Samples as indicated. 3. Provide shop drawings for all metal fabrications and as indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete fabrications in this section shall meet the requirements of Division 03—Concrete. B. Metal fabrications in this section shall meet the requirements of Division 05— Metals III 1. Fabricator for water feature metal work, fire ring components, and steel planter walls shall have completed custom steel site furniture work with a record of successful performance, and with minimum 5 years'experience C. Wood fabrications in this section shall meet the requirements of Division 06—Wood. D. Fabricator for fire ring and steel planter walls shall have completed custom steel site furniture work with a record of successful performance, and with minimum 5 years'experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BIKE RACK A. Bicycle Rack: 1. Manufacturer: Huntco (503)224-8700 2. Model: Staple Bike Rack 3. Material: Sch 40 Steel Pipe, powdercoat black. 4. Attachment: Surface mount with tamper-resistant concrete anchor bolts. 2.02 CUSTOM WOOD BENCH A. Custom Wood Benches: custom manufacture as shown on the drawings. 1. Western Red Cedar Glulam Planks: a. Acceptable vendors: 1.) Altruwood Lumber, (503) 972-2682 2.) Viridian Wood Products, (877) 909-9663 3.) Or approved equal. b. Requirements: 1.) Dimensions: as shown on the drawings. 2.) Moisture content: not to exceed 19%. IP3.) Dressing: planks shall be planed and sanded, with edges eased. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS 4.) Grade: all heartwood. Flaws endemic to reclaimed lumber are acceptable with the • following stipulations: A.) Sound knots are acceptable. B.) Surface cracks or checks less than 1/3 total plank thickness are acceptable. C.) Old construction holes are acceptable. Holes which are open through the plank may be left open. Holes which do not extend through the plank must be filled. D.) Old embedded construction hardware(nails,bolts, etc.)which have been machined flush with the surface of the plank are acceptable. 5.) Finish: exterior-grade clear-coat finish, Cetol by Sikkens or approved equal. 2. Hardware: Stainless Steel, as shown on drawings. 3. Steel Straps: Powder Coated Steel Strap, color to be determined 2.03 METAL PLANTERS A Metal Planters: 1. Manufacturer: ORE,www.orecontainers.com 2. Model: A.)Type 1: 1110, L 60"W 20" H 24", aluminum B.)Type 2: 1002: Large- L 27"W 27" H 28" , aluminum C.)Type 3: Custom-L 72"W 72" H 36" , aluminum (heavy gauge), built in two sections, provide shop drawings 3. Color: powder coat Charcoal Gray 2.04 FIRE PIT A. Fire pit: by Cement Elegance; 1. Manufacturer: Cement Elegance, http://www.cementelegance.com/firepits.html 2. Model: 'Transition' including steel burner bar and plate and gas line accessories 3. Lava rock: black, available from Outdoor Fire Designs, 866-601-8842. III 4. Timer: A.) Push button Timer. Manufacturer: Leviton model LTB60-1 L, or approved equal. B.) GFCI Cover, as needed. 5. Manual Shutoff Valve: A.)Hargrove Multi-Turn Angled Brass Shut-Off Valve-47131, or approved equal. 6. Provide electrical and gas connections as required. 7. Provide signage as required by Owner and as shown on the Drawings. 2.05 BOULDERS A. Boulders at Courtyard and Front Entry: Rustic Basalt Boulders by Clackamas Landscape Supply, clackamaslandscapesupply.com; size as shown on drawings, to be approved and located in the field by landscape architect 2.06 METAL EDGER A. Metal edger to be Permaloc"Cleanline", 3/16-inch thick by 4-inch deep, aluminum with "Mill Finish color", in 8-foot sections, as manufactured by Permaloc Corporation, (800)356-9660, or approved equal. Anchor using 12-inch aluminum stakes. 2.07 BARBEQUE A. The following stainless steel barbeque components are available from Viking Range, 800-845- 4641: 1. Grill and cabinet: VQBO4121. 2. Cabinet with pull-out trash drawer:VTPO1810. 3. Cabinet with three drawers: VBO1830. 4. Spacer panel:VLFR4. 5. Back panels: (2)VBP18, VBP41, and VBPFLR4. 6. Side panels: (2)VSP30. III B. Install all range components per manufacturer's instructions. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS • C. Provide 1-1/4-inch thick exterior food-grade countertop, charcoal color, Corian or approved equal, to fit barbeque components with 1-inch reveal all sides, typical. D. Provide cast-in-place concrete footing as detailed on drawings. Coordinate installation of supports for barbeque components with footing and paver installation. E. Provide gas and electrical connections as required. Coordinate work with other trades. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION—GENERAL A. Install site furnishings in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on Drawings. B. Provide attachment devices for attaching furnishings to concrete as required. C. Provide concrete footings as required and as shown on the Drawings. D. Coordinate installation work with other trades. 3.02 INSTALLATION—FIRE PIT A. Install fire pit in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, as indicated on Drawings, and per Local, State and Federal Codes. 3.03 COMPLETION A. Protect finished surfaces and elements from damage during installation. B. Clean exposed surfaces after installation of site furnishings. Use cleaning materials suitable for each material to be cleaned; do not stain or mar surfaces during cleaning. • END OF SECTION • 41) SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 12 93 13 EXTERIOR BICYCLE RACKS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bicycle racks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including clearances from adjacent walls, doors, and obstructions. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Handle racks with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION A. Exterior bicycle Racks: Device allows user provided lock to simultaneously secure one wheel and part of the frame on each bicycle parked or racked. B. Bicycle racks for indoor storage and in unit storage, see Section 10 56 39. 2.02 BICYCLE RACKS • A. Inverted U-shaped: Manufacturer- Fairweather BR-#3; Mounting- Surface 1. Finish: Black, powder coat. Semi-Gloss PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ensure surfaces to receive bicycle racks are clean, flat, and level. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install bicycle racks level, plumb, square, and correctly located as indicated on the drawings. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 20 10 PASSENGER ELEVATORS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Complete geared electric elevator systems. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under this Section: 1. Hoist Beam: See Section 05 50 00. C. Work Supplied Under Other Sections: 1. Lighting in hoistway overhead for machine space, with switch located in hoistway on the strike jamb side of access panel. 2. Hoistway ventilation shall be in accordance with local and national building code requirements. 3. Guide Rail Support shall be structurally adequate to extend from pit floor to top of hoistway, with spans in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction and final layouts. 4. Removable barricades at all hoistway openings, in compliance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502 in addition to any local code requirements. 5. Lifeline attachments capable of withstanding 5000 lb load in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502. Provide a minimum of 2 at the top, front of each hoistway. 6. Pit lighting: Fixture with switch and guards. Provide illumination level equal to or greater than that required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000, or applicable version. 7. Control room lighting with switch. 8. Access Doors:As required for access to manual brake at top landing (one for each elevator). Access door shall be self-closing, self-locking. D. Industry and government standards: • 1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2. ADAAG-Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 3. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code 4. ANSI/NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows 5. ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC 360-Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.. B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M-Structural Welding Code- Steel; American Welding Society. C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National fire Protection Association. D. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. E. UL(BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. F. UL(ECMD)- Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting one week prior to starting work. 1. Review schedule of installation, installation procedures and conditions, and coordination with related work. 2. Review use of elevator for construction purposes, hours of use, scheduling of its use, cleanliness of cab, employment of operator, maintenance of system. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for each proposed system. • 1. Cab design, dimensions, layout, and components. 2. Cab and hoistway door and frame details. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 20 10 PASSENGER ELEVATORS 3. Layout, finishes, and accessories and available options. • 4. Controls, signals and operating fixtures, system operating panels, and indicators. 5. Color selection charts for cab and entrances. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following information: 1. Clearances and travel of car. 2. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. a. Pit ladder. 3. Location and layout of equipment and signals. 4. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. 5. Maximum rail bracket spacing. 6. Maximum loads imposed on building structure. 7. Hoist beam requirements. 8. Location and sizes of access doors. 9. Location and details of hoistway door and frames. 10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Operation and maintenance data: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard maintenance and operation manual. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this section. B. Designer Qualifications: Design guide rails, brackets, anchors, and machine anchors under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Perform seismic design in accordance with • applicable code. D. Perform welding of steel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.IM. E. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80. F. Perform electrical work in accordance with NFPA 70. G. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. H. Installer Qualifications: Employees and supervisor on payroll of elevator equipment manufacturer. I. Products Requiring Fire Resistance Rating: Listed and classified by UL. J. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. If the construction site is not prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed ship date, the General Contractor shall be responsible to provide a safe, dry, and easily accessible storage area on or off the premises. Additional labor costs for double handling will be the responsibility of the general contractor. B. Delivered elevator materials shall be stored in a protected environment in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. A minimum storage area of 10 feet by 20 feet is required adjacent to the hoistway. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide manufacturer warranty for a period of one year. The warranty period is to begin upon • Substantial Completion of the Contract. Warranty covers defects in materials and SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 20 10 PASSENGER ELEVATORS • workmanship. Damage due to ordinary use, vandalism, improper or insufficient maintenance, misuse, or neglect do not constitute defective material or workmanship. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. The elevator manufacturer shall provide maintenance service consisting of regular examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment for a period of 12 Months after date of substantial completion. Replacement parts shall be produced by the original equipment manufacturer. B. Maintenance service be performed during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include regular time call back service. C. Maintenance service shall not include adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELEVATORS A. Elevator No. 1: Passenger, geared electric. 1. Design Basis: Otis Elevator Co: www.otis.com, Gen2 MRL. 2. Hoistway Doors and Frames: Stainless steel. 3. Cab Height: 108 inches. 4. Door Type: Single leaf each side. 5. Door Operation: Center opening. 6. Emergency gurney accessible. 7. Rated Net Capacity: 3500 lbs. 8. Rated Speed: 150 ft/min. 9. Number of Stops: 4. • B. Elevator No. 2: Passenger, holeless hydraulic type with cylinder in hoistway. 1. Design Basis: Otis Elevator Co: www.otis.com, holeless hydraulic. 2. Hoistway Doors and Frames: Stainless steel. 3. Cab Height: 108 inches. 4. Door Type: Single leaf each side. 5. Door Operation: Center opening. 6. Emergency gurney accessible. 7. Rated Net Capacity: 2500 lbs. 8. Rated Speed: 110 ft/min. 9. Number of Stops: [4]. 2.02 CAB INTERIORS A. Ceiling: Mirror finish with LF97 square recessd LED light fixtures. 1. Side Walls: Satin stainless steel. 2. Front Wall: Satin stainless steel. 3. Rear Wall: Satin stainless steel with adhered 3-Form panel extent of the rear wall, full height of wall less skirting height, and centered on rear wall. a. 3-Form Varia Ecoresin Panel: 1) Engineered acrylic resin 2) Sheet Size: Maximum 4'x 8' 3) Thickness: Minimum 1/2" b. Sheet minimum performance attributes: 1) Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635). Material must attain CC2 Rating for a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) and greater. 2) Self-Ignition Temperature(ASTM D 1929). Material must have a Self-ignition • temperature greater than 850°F. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 20 10 PASSENGER ELEVATORS 3) Density of Smoke(ASTM D 2843). Material must have a smoke density less • than 10%. 4) Color infusion must use water soluble dyes and penetrate at least 150 microns into material. 5) Applied coatings must be low-VOC, contain non-toxic pigments, not contain any heavy metals and be approved for exterior use. 6) Matte surface should be completely renewable onsite. c. Hardware attachment 1) 3form Point support system 2) Material: stainless steel 3) Barrel Length: 1/2-inch 4) Cap Option: 3/4-inch, standard 5) Attachment points: Minimum 6 per panel 4. Floor: Porcelain tile. 5. Skirting: Satin stainless steel. 6. Handrail: Round, satin stainless steel. 2.03 CONTROLS A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing buttons and hall lanterns. B. Door Controls: 1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor. 2. Render"Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatching terminal with doors open. 3. If doors are prevented from closing for approximately ten seconds because of an obstruction, automatically disconnect door reopening devices, close doors more slowly until obstruction is cleared. Sound buzzer. 4. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equip with photo-electric light rays. C. Landing Buttons: Stainless steel type, one for originating UP and one for originating DOWN calls, one button only at terminating landings; marked with arrows. D. Car Direction Indicators: Illuminating Amber. E. Interconnect elevator control system with building fire alarm systems. F. Generic, non-proprietary controller and maintenance parts. G. Warranty and Maintenance Service: 1 year contract. H. Provide"Firefighter's Operation" in accordance with applicable code. Designated Landing: Per Fire Marshal. I. Provide Otis compatible pit ladder under this Section. 2.04 EMERGENCY POWER A. Arrange elevator operation to operate under emergency power when normal power supply fails. B. Emergency Power Supply: Self-contained battery power. C. Provide operational control circuitry for adapting the change from normal to emergency power. D. Upon transfer to emergency power, advance one elevator at a time to a pre-selected landing, stop car, open doors, disable operating circuits, and hold in standby condition. E. After the above operation has completed one complete cycle, operate one pre-selected elevator in normal operation from the emergency power supply. If the pre-selected car fails to operate, automatically select another car to operate. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 20 10 PASSENGER ELEVATORS • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Field measure and examine substrates, supports, and other conditions under which elevator work is to be performed. B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C. Prior to start of Work, verify hoistway is in accordance with shop drawings. Dimensional tolerance of hoistway from shop drawings: -0 inches +2 inches. Do not begin work of this section until dimensions are within tolerances. D. Prior to start of Work, verify projections greater then 2 inches (4 inches if ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000 applies) must be beveled not less then 75 degrees from horizontal. E. Prior to start of Work, verify landings have been prepared for entrance sill installation. Traditional sill angle or concrete sill support shall not be required. F. Prior to start of Work, verify elevator pit has been constructed in accordance with requirements, is dry and reinforced to sustain vertical forces, as indicated in approved submittal. Verify that sumps or sump pumps located within pit will not interfere with installed elevator equipment. G. Prior to start of Work, verify control space has been constructed in accordance with requirements, with access coordinated with elevator shop drawings, including Sleeves and penetrations. H. Verify installation of GFCI protected 20-amp in pit and adjacent to each signal control cabinet in control space. 3.02 PREPARATION • A. Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related accessories. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment, guides, controls, car and accessories in accordance with manufacturer installation methods and recommended practices. B. Properly locate guide rails and related supports at locations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings. Anchor to building structure using isolation system to minimize transmission of vibration to structure. C. All hoistway frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway. Coordinate installation of sills and frames with other trades. D. Lubricate operating system components in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. E. Perform final adjustments, and necessary service prior to substantial completion. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Guide rail brackets attached to steel shall be installed prior to application of fireproofing. 2. Coordinate construction of entrance walls with installation of door frames and sills. Maintain front wall opening until elevator equipment has been installed. a. Ensure adequate support for entrance attachment points at all landings. b. Coordinate wall openings for hall push buttons, signal fixtures and sleeves. Each elevator requires sleeves within the hoistway wall. c. Coordinate emergency power transfer switch and power change pending signals as required for termination at the primary elevator signal control cabinet in each group. d. Coordinate interface of elevators and fire alarm system. e. Coordinate interface of dedicated telephone line. 3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS • A. Perform recommended and required testing in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 20 10 PASSENGER ELEVATORS B. Obtain required permits and provide originals to Owner's Representative. • 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to substantial completion, instruct Owner's Representative on the proper function and required daily maintenance of elevators. Instruct personnel on emergency procedures. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 91 00 FACILITY CHUTES • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gravity chutes for waste (trash, refuse) and recyclables. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A463/A463M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process. B. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association. C. NFPA 82-Standard on Incinerators and Waste and Linen Handling Systems and Equipment; National Fire Protection Association. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene 7 days before start of installation to review code requirements, manufacturer's recommendations, and related work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheets on each component, indicating which options are provided. C. Shop Drawings: Detailed layout of chute and components, indicating interface with structure, enclosing walls, and utilities; show: 1. Openings in floors and required clearances. 2. Location and size of each field connection to structure. • 3. Pipe sizes and locations. 4. Electrical wiring sizes, conduits, and location of connections. 5. Clearly indicate components required but not furnished by chute installer. D. Reports: Submit for each test/inspection . E. Certificates: Certify that chute assembly meets or exceeds NFPA 82 and specified requirements. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping and electrical connections. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturers operation instructions. 1. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional requirements. 2. Include control wiring diagrams. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Sanitizing Solution or Chemicals for Cleaning Chute: 2 gallons. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section: 1. With minimum 5 years of documented experience. 2. Approved by manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional requirements. • B. Contractor Warranty: Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 91 00 FACILITY CHUTES 1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE • A. Maintenance Service: Provide service and maintenance of chute and equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Chutes and Chute Components: Use one of the following: 1. Chutes International;www.chutes.com. 2. Wilkinson-Hi-Rise LLC; : www.whrise.com. 3. U. S. Chutes Corp; : www.uschutes.com. 4. Valiant Products, Inc; : www.linenchutes.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. All components need not be made by the same manufacturer, provided manufacturer providing assembled units assumes responsibility for all components. 2.02 CHUTES A. Waste and Recyclables Chutes: Sheet metal, round, constant diameter extending from above roof to lowest floor, with intake doors at each floor and bottom outlet into room designated on drawings; complying with requirements of NFPA 82 and local code. 1. Diameter: 24 inches inside. 2. Intake Doors: Hopper type, no locks, ADA compliant pneumatic assisted operator, that opens door. 3. Interlock system and sensors that automatically prevent: a. Opening more than one intake door at a time. b. Opening any intake door when temperature in chute exceeds predetermined, • adjustable temperature. c. Opening any intake door when spray cleaning is in progress. d. Opening any intake door when compactor is not ready to accept waste. 4. Manual controls to activate spray cleaning from discharge room. 5. Discharge Doors 6. Roof Vent 7. Fire Protection Sprinkler 8. Electric Controls 9. Disinfecting/ Deodorizing Spray System a. Manual control from discharge room. 10. Vibration and Sound Dampening Accessories. 11. Intake Door Size: 15 by 18 inches wide by high. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Chute: Factory-fabricated to the greatest extent possible, with continuously welded or lock-seamed joints and smooth, non-snag interior(no protruding bolts, rivets, hardware, sharp edges or corners). 1. Material: Aluminum-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A463/A463M CS Type B, with minimum T1-40/T1 M-120 coating. 2. Sheet Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.06 inch. 3. Chute Offsets(as required): Reinforced with additional layer of sheet metal at impact zones. 4. Throat Sections: Provide sloped throat sections for intake doors, of same material and construction as chute. 5. Fabricate with support frames at each floor with sound isolator pads and expansion joints in chute between each support point. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 91 00 FACILITY CHUTES • B. Intake Doors: Factory-assembled door and frame, self-closing and positive-latching; frame designed for chase construction, flush-mounted. 1. Material: Stainless steel, brushed or satin finish. 2. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hour("B" label)with 30-minute temperature rise of 250 degrees F. 3. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hour("B"label)with 30-minute temperature rise of 250 degrees F 4. Pulls: T-handle or lever handle latch; polished stainless steel. 5. Signs: Mark on frame or door face the purpose of the chute, using engraving, integral raised lettering, or other permanent signs. C. Discharge Doors: Aluminum-coated steel; normally-open, 1 1/2-hour("B" label)fire rated, with fusible link closing; style as required by chute configuration. D. Access Doors: Same construction and fire rating as intake doors,with locks; provide wherever equipment requiring maintenance is located inside chute, including sprinklers and plumbing and electrical connections. E. Intake and Access Door Locks: Mortise or rim cylinder locks keyed alike; key removable only when door is locked. 1. Access Doors: Provide 2 keys for each door. F. Roof Vent: Full diameter, extending minimum 48 inches above roof level, with roof deck flange. 1. Material: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Counterflashing and clamping ring of non-ferrous metal compatible with chute material. 3. Top Unit: Screened vent. G. Fire Sprinklers: Comply with NFPA 82 and NFPA 13; provide 1/2 inch NPS sprinkler heads mounted inside chute intake throats at the following locations: 1. At or above the top intake opening. 2. At the lowest intake opening. 3. In buildings of more than two stories, at every other floor. H. Spray Cleaning Equipment: 1. Flushing Spray: Solenoid controlled 3/4 inch NPS spray head mounted above top intake door. 2. Sanitizing Unit: Tank and feeder to introduce disinfectant into flushing spray line. a. Provide backflow preventer valve and actuator switch. b. Minimum 1 gallon capacity. c. Minimum.1 gallon capacity. d. Accessible through access door immediately above top intake door. I. Electrical Controls: 110 VAC. J. Vibration and Dampening Materials: Kinetics KNM100ALQ, wrap entire length of chute. K. Mounting Isolators: Neoprene or fiberglass isolators, sized for loads, manufactured by Knetics or Mason Industries. L. Nameplates: Identify the manufacturer in conspicuous location on chute doors and equipment, using permanent nameplate, casting, or stamping. M. Insulation: Fiberglass batt or blanket insulation, minimum 4 inches thick, without facings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Complete chute installation and testing before completion of enclosing construction. B. Coordinate sprinkler and spray cleaning devices with size, location and installation of service utilities. • C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 14 91 00 FACILITY CHUTES 3.02 INSTALLATION • A. Install chutes and equipment in accordance with NFPA 82 requirements and manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain fire-resistive capacity of enclosing walls. C. Install chute plumb and without offsets or obstructions that might prevent free fall of materials, except where indicated on drawings. D. Anchor securely in manner required to withstand impact and weight of materials in chute. 1. Mount chute with vibration isolators,full length. E. Wrap chute and intake throats with insulation, securing without compressing insulation. F. Install roof vent flange to roof deck prior to installation of roofing. G. Install counterfashing after roofing installation. H. Adjust doors and other operating components for smooth operation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Place bagged material of expected size in chute to verify free fall. C. Test all components for proper operation. 1. Operate doors, locks, and interlocks. 2. Operate spray cleaning devices. 3. Simulate fire conditions inside chute to verify sprinkler and detector operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. After completion of enclosing walls, clean exposed chute components; do not remove testing agency labels. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This work consists of clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing of trees, stumps, shrubs, brush, vines,vegetative growth and debris within the limits designated on the plans or as required by the Architect. 1. Except such materials as are designated to remain or which are to be removed in accordance with other Sections of these specifications. 2. Work shall also include the preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to remain. B. Clearing and grubbing consists of clearing the surface of the ground of the designated areas of all trees, stumps, brush, undergrowth, hedges, heavy growth of grass or weeds,fences, structures, pavement, debris, and of any nature, natural obstructions or such material,which in the opinion of the Architect, or this representative, is unsuitable for the foundation of embankments, pavements, or other required structures, including the disposal from the project of all spoil materials. 1. When Owner designates a disposal site or designates placement of stripping and topsoil in landscape or other areas,this Work shall also include placement of stripping,top soils and useable materials, resulting from clearing and grubbing. C. The referenced specification for this Section is the "Oregon Standard Specifications for • Construction" 2008 edition as prepared by the Oregon Department of Transportation and the Oregon Chapter of the American Public Works Association, and its revisions and supplements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 20 00—Earth Moving B. Section 31 25 00-Erosion/Sediment Control 1.3 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Utility Systems: The existing utility systems shown are based on record drawings supplied by the Owner,and"surface"field survey. Prior to constructing any of the utility systems, the contractor shall"pot-hole"all connection points and utility crossings to verify inverts,sizes, locations, and potential conflicts. Any discrepancies shall be reported to the Architect for resolution or re-design. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials used in conjunction with this work shall be considered incidental to the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.1 PREPARATION SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING A. The areas denoted on the plans to be cleared and grubbed under this item shall be staked on the III ground prior to construction. The clearing and grubbing shall be approved by the testing agency prior to any grading operations. B. All spoil materials removed by clearing and grubbing shall be disposed of by removal from the site by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or placed as approved by the Architect. Topsoil shall be segregated in the Contractor's removal operation. Stockpiled for use in the landscape areas, segregation and acceptance of this material shall be approved by the Architect. C. As far as practicable,waste asphalt concrete and masonry shall be removed from the site, however, isolated pieces 8"or smaller may be placed in embankments. When embankments are constructed of such material, this material shall be placed in accordance with the Section, "Earth Moving". 1. Any broken asphalt concrete or masonry which cannot be used in construction and all other materials not considered suitable for use elsewhere, shall be disposed of by the Contractor. 2. In no case shall any discarded materials be left in windrows or piles adjacent to or within the project limits. 3.2 BLASTING A. Blasting will not be allowed. 3.3 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES III A. The removal of existing structures and utilities required to permit orderly progress of work, unless abandoned,shall be accomplished by local agencies, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The Contractor shall remove abandoned structures and utilities. 1. Whenever a telephone or power pole, pipeline,conduit,sewer, roadway,or other utility is encountered and must be removed or relocated,the Contractor shall notify the proper local authority or owner and attempt to secure prompt action. 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. In areas designated to be cleared and grubbed, all stumps, roots, buried logs, brushes,grass, and other unsatisfactory materials shall be removed. B. Tap roots and other projections over one and one-half(1-1/2)inches in diameter shall be grubbed out to a depth of at least eighteen(18)inches below the finished subgrade or slope elevations. C. All holes remaining after the grubbing operation in embankment areas shall have the sides broken down to flatten out the slopes, and shall be filled with acceptable material, moistened and properly compacted in layers to the density required in the Section"Earth Moving". The same construction procedure shall be applied to all holes remaining after grubbing in the excavation areas where the depth of holes exceeds the depth of the proposed excavation. END OF SECTION 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING • PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for walks, pavements and lawns and grasses. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. • E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill 411 or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground • services within buildings. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: meet the requirements of ODOT SS 00330.12—Borrow Material; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in diameter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups. D. Subbase Material: g/4"or 1 %2" minus material meeting the requirements in ODOT SS 00641 — Aggregate Subbase, Base, and Shoulders Base Aggregate, with the exception that the aggregate has less than 5 percent passing a U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve and at least two mechanically fractured faces. The imported granular material should be placed in lifts with a maximum uncompacted thickness of 12 inches and be compacted to not less than 95 percent 1111 of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. E. Base Course: 3/4"or 1 %z" minus material meeting the requirements in ODOT SS 00641 — Aggregate Subbase, Base, and Shoulders Base Aggregate, with the exception that the aggregate has less than 5 percent passing a U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve and at least two mechanically fractured faces. The imported granular material should be placed in lifts with a maximum uncompacted thickness of 12 inches and be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. F. Structural Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940;with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inchsieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Bedding Course: Should consist of well-graded, granular material with a maximum particle size of 1 inch, less than 5% by weight passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve, and meet ODOT SS 00405.13—Pipe Zone. The material should be free of roots, organic matter, and other unsuitable materials. Backfill for the pipe base and pipe zone should be compacted to at least 90 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. H. Within building and pavement areas, trench backfill placed above the pipe zone should consist of imported granular material meeting the requirements of ODOT SS 00405.14— Class B Backfill. The backfill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698. I. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57;with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- • inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING • 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface. C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls as specified on the plans. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. • 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. • 3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation • of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom,without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile, borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.8 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. • 3.9 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.10 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING • 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.11 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.12 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as • follows: 1. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness. 3.13 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.14 LANDSCAPE AREAS A. Restore landscaping and irrigation in disturbed areas to match the landscape materials and irrigation coverage prior to construction. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL III A. B. C. D. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 698, ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.16 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent III construction operations or weather conditions. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION/SEDIMENT CONTROL • PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Erosion/Sedimentation Control (ESC) is required on this project. Construction of all erosion control measures shall be in accordance with the City of Tigard Erosion Control standards and as noted on the construction plans. The implementation of the ESC and the construction, maintenance, replacement, and upgrading of these ESC facilities is the responsibility of the Contractor until all construction is completed and approved and the vegetation/landscaping is established. B. The boundaries of the clearing limits shown on this plan shall be clearly flagged in the field prior to construction. During the construction period, no disturbance beyond the flagged clearing area shall be permitted. The flagging shall be maintained by the Contractor for the duration of the construction. C. The ESC facilities shown on this plan and/or details must be constructed in conjunction with all rough grading and site utility construction, in such a manner as to ensure that sediment and sediment laden water do not enter the drainage system, roadways, or violate applicable water standards. D. The ESC facilities shown on the plan and/or details are the minimum requirements for anticipated • site conditions. During the construction period, these ESC facilities shall be upgraded as needed for unexpected storm events or site conditions to ensure that sediment and sediment-laden water do not leave the site. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 10 00-Site Clearing B. Section 31 20 00—Earth Moving PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. All materials used in conjunction with this work shall be considered incidental to the work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE A. The ESC facilities shall be inspected daily by the Contractor and maintained as necessary to ensure their continued functioning. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION/SEDIMENT CONTROL B. At no time shall more than one foot of sediment be allowed to accumulate within a trapped catch • basin. All catch basins and conveyance systems shall be cleaned prior to paving. The cleaning operation shall not flush sediment-laden water into the downstream system. C. Stabilized construction entrances will be constructed at the beginning of construction. These entrances shall be maintained by the contractor of this project for the duration of the project. Additional measures may be required to ensure that all paved areas adjacent to the project are kept clean for the duration of the project. D. Sediment fences, bio-bags, and straw bale barriers shall be removed when they have served their useful purpose and when approved by the engineer, but not before the upslope area has been permanently stabilized. Sediment fences and straw bale barriers installed by others will be removed by those who installed the materials. E. Construction and maintenance of graveled construction entrances, temporary sediment fences, and straw bale sediment barriers shall follow the guidelines established in the handbook. F. All erosion control work shall follow the guidelines established on the plans. G. All materials shall be in good physical condition to provide proper sediment retention. H. Sediment fences and barriers shall be inspected by the contractor immediately after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall. Any required repairs shall be made immediately. 4110 END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING • PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work of this Section consists of furnishing and applying asphalt mixes, tack coats, and placing asphalt concrete pavement in accordance with the applicable requirements of the standards listed below. 1. The asphalt concrete shall be constructed on a prepared underlying course in accordance with these specifications and shall conform to the dimensions and typical cross and with the lines and grades section shown on the plans. 2. The referenced specification for this Section is the "Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction"2008 edition as prepared by the Oregon Department of Transportation and the Oregon Chapter of the American Public Works Association, and its revisions and supplements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 20 00—Earth Moving: Preparation of site for paving and base. B. Section 32 17 23- Painted Pavement Marking: Pavement markings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 4110 2.1 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Mix Design 1. Provide mix design for '/2" Dense, Level 2 HMAC as specified on the plans in accordance with the Standard Specifications. B. Tack Coat 1. Tack coat material shall be CSS-1 or CSS1 h in accordance with the Standard Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Tack Coat: Per the Standard Specifications 1. All curbs, longitudinal and transverse joints shall be coated with a sufficient amount of tack coat material prior to placing the adjacent panel. This may be accomplished with hand distribution equipment. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for removing any tack applied to exposed curb faces or other finish surfaces. Tack all surfaces between layers. B. Asphalt Concrete Paving Surface Course • 1. Meet requirements of the Standard Specifications. 2. Obtain approval for aggregate base course before placing paving surface course. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING • 3. Place asphalt surface course when temperature shall be 40 degrees F. and rising, and when base is dry and free of frost. 4. Place asphalt materials at temperatures between 200 and 250 degrees F. 5. Compact asphalt surface course thoroughly and uniformly to at least 95% of maximum density as determined in conformance with AASHTO T 180, per the requirements of the Standard Specification. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 13 13 • CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Work consists of the construction of Portland cement concrete sidewalks, curbs, and driveways outside the limits of paseo sidewalk and plaza paving. 1. The Portland cement concrete shall be constructed on a prepared underlying course in accordance with these Specifications and shall conform to the dimensions and typical cross section and with the lines and grades shown on the plans. 2. The referenced specification for this Section is the "Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction"2002 edition as prepared by the Oregon Department of Transportation and the Oregon Chapter of the American Public Works Association, and its revisions and supplements. • 3. Public Right-of-Way: All public work construction in thepublic right-of-way shall be 9 y in accordance with the applicable requirements of the City of Tigard Design Standards and Specifications. 4. All sidewalks and ramps shall be constructed to American's with Disabilities Act (ADA) standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Meet requirements of Standard Specifications, and applicable requirements of City of Tigard. B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed. D. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. E. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete used under this Section shall be Class 3000 per the Standard Specifications, and the applicable requirements of the City of Tigard. 111 2.3 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 13 13 • CONCRETE PAVING 2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to the City of Tigard Standards and Specifications. B. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m). 2.6 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to the City of Tigard Standard Specifications. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 2.7 WHEEL STOPS A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 7 inches high by 5 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter, 10-inch (254-mm) minimum length. • PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING III 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures,walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm)] radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. 1110 B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing,transporting, and placing concrete. C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. D. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. 3.6 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power- driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture. III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 13 13 • CONCRETE PAVING C. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. D. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. E. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. F. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. G. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound or a combination of these methods. 3.7 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch . (6 mm). 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus. 3.8 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one-quarter to one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. B. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. C. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. • END OF SECTION SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING • r • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set • • PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 —General Conditions 2. Division 05—Metals 3. Section 12 93 00—Site Furnishings 4. Division 31 — Earthmoving 5. Section 32 13 13—Concrete Paving B. References: 1. ICPI —Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute. 2. ASTM 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of paver specified. B. Three samples of the paver intended for use on the project shall be submitted to the Architect. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for subsequent use. C. When requested by the Architect, qualifications of the paver installer shall be submitted. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer must have 5 years of professional installation experience with the material or work of comparable size and complexity. Contractor must have experience with the installation of polymeric sand. 1.04 MOCK UP A. Prior to installation of work, provide one 4-foot by 4-foot mock-up for each paver and assembly • type required for approval by Architect. Use materials, pattern, and joint treatment approved for final work. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver pavers to the site in clearly identified pallets or similar container. Store above ground protected from damage or weather. B. Handle pavers in such a way as to prevent breakage; use of defective pavers will not be permitted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAVER A. Sand Set Paver. Available manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products available from Willamette Graystone. 1. Paver Type 1: Holland, Color Charcoal. running bond pattern 2.02 SAND SETTING MATERIALS A. Sand Set Concrete Pavers: 1. Bedding sand should conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C33 or CSA A23.1. Do not use mason sand, stone dust or waste screenings. 2. Polymeric Sand as manufactured by Alliance Designer Products 1-866-212-1611, Super Sand. 2.03 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. Nonwoven geotextile fabric as manufactured by US Fabrics 1-800-518-2290, Type 115 NW or approved equal. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS 2.04 METAL EDGER • A. Paver restraint to be Permaloc StructurEdge 1/8-inch by 1-5/8-inches, and Mill Finish Aluminum Restraint in an 8-foot section as manufactured by Permaloc Corporation, Holland, MI (800) 356- 9660. Anchor using 10-inch by 3/8-inch spiral steel spikes, 12-inches on center(typical), 4- inches on center as required. B. Steel Edger at Water Feature: to match Planter Walls, as detailed on the Drawings and per the requirements of Division 05—Metals. 2.5 EFFLORESCENCE CLEANER A. Diedrich 202, or as recommended by paver manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SAND SET PAVERS, GENERAL A. Do not use pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discoloration or other defects which might be visible or cause staining in finished work.Acceptable color variation will be established with the use of samples. Pavers with colors outside of acceptable variation will be replaced at no additional cost. B. Examine related work and surfaces before starting work in this Section. Note conditions that require correction.Verify that corrections have been made before starting paver installation. Verify that subgrades are properly sloped. C. Mix pavers from several pallets as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. D. Set pavers in patterns shown and with uniform joints of width indicated. E. When cutting of pavers is required, cut pavers with motor-driven saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut pavers to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining • work neatly. 1. Cut pavers shall not be less than one-half of Double Holland paver. Where cutting a typical Double Holland paver would result in a paver size of less than 3-3/4-inches, use a Grande Holland cut to fit paver in place of a full-size Half Holland paver and the cut paver. F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch paver-to-paver offset from flush, and a tolerance of 1/8- inch in 10-feet, 0-inches from level or slope as indicated, for finished surface of paving. G. Install paver restraint as shown on drawings. Paver restraints shall be installed at all areas where pavers do not abut against structures, concrete paving, steel planter walls, or other site furnishings installed prior to paver installation. Paver restraints to be installed in such a way to prevent sand loss at paver setting bed. H. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before treating joints, roll with power roller after sufficient heat has built up in the surface from several days of hot weather. I. Coordinate paver installation with installation of Site Furnishings and work of other trades. 3.2 SAND SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS A. Place geotextile fabric on top of compacted subgrade or adjacent to concrete curb and wrap up sides a minimum of 1-inch. B. Place sand for leveling course and screed loose that achieves final thickness of 1/4-inch to 1/2- inch as shown on drawings, taking care to ensure it remains loose until paving units are set and compacted. C. Set concrete pavers with straight joint lines, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Do not disturb leveling base. 2. Use stringlines to keep straight lines. Joint lines shall take precedence over joint width. 3. Use hand-tight joints where possible. Adjust joint width as necessary to maintain straight • joint lines. Do not exceed 3/16-inch joint width. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS • D. Vibrate concrete pavers into leveling base with a plate vibrator capable of a 3,500 to 5,000 lb. compaction force. Perform this operation of installed areas of paving at end of each day or before any rain. E. Make sure the top of pavers are dry. Sweep polymeric sand in between the paver joints and then compact. F. Sweep off all the excess and on the paver surface. Insure that the polymeric sand lies below the top of the paver. Repeat Step D if necessary. G. Direct a fine mist of water in the air to dampen all the polymeric sand joints. Dampen until there is some water retention on the paver joints. H. Minimize or avoid walking on the pavers for at least 4 hours after the installation of the polymeric sand. 3.3 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace until pavers which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if pavers do not match adjoining pavers as intended. B. Where pavers show an unacceptable amount of efflorescence, as determined by Landscape Architect, pavers shall be cleaned with a cleaning product approved for the removal of efflorescence. C. Provide new pavers to match adjoining pavers and install in same manner as original pavers, with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of replacement. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to installer,which ensures paver work being without damage or deterioration at times of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 11111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 14 16 PEDESTAL PAVERS 4111 P1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete paving slabs with pedestals. 2. Related Work(Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection). 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 1. A231.1, Precast Concrete Paving Slabs. B. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI) 1. Tech Spec technical bulletins 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures. B. Shop drawings: Indicate perimeter conditions, relationship to adjoining materials and assemblies, expansion and layout, patterns, installation and setting details. C. Four(4) pedestal samples. D. Paving slabs: 1. Four(4) representative full-size samples of each slab type, thickness, color, finish. Select samples to indicate the extremes of color and texture expected in the finished installation. 2. Accepted samples become the standard of acceptance for the work in this Section. 3. Laboratory test reports certifying compliance of the paving slabs with CSA A231.1. 4. Manufacturer's catalog literature and material safety data sheets for the safe handling of the specified materials and products. • 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Paving Subcontractor Qualifications: 1. Utilize an installer having successfully completed concrete paving slab installation similar in design, material, and extent indicated on this project. 2. Utilize an installer holding a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program. B. Mock-Ups: 1. Install an 8 ft. x 8 ft. (2 x 2 m)area. 2. Use this area to determine pedestal height and shimming requirements,joint sizes, lines, laying pattern (s), color(s), and texture of the job. 3. This area will be used as the standard by which the work will be judged. 4. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finished work. 5. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of determine pedestal height and shimming requirements,joint sizes, lines, laying pattern(s), color(s), and texture of the job. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers packaging with identification labels intact. 1. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving. 2. Deliver concrete paving slabs to the site in steel banded, plastic banded or plastic • wrapped packaging capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift. 3. Unload slabs at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 14 16 PEDESTAL PAVERS D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected such that they are kept free from mud, dirt, • and other foreign materials. [Store concrete paving slab cleaners and sealers per manufacturer's instructions.] 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install pedestals and slabs during heavy rain or snowfall. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide ten (10) additional paving slabs and ten (10) additional pedestals for use by owner for maintenance and repair. B. Extra paver slabs shall be the same production run as the installed materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE ARCHITECTURAL SLABS A. Concrete paving slabs: 1. Manufacturer: Mutual Materials, http://www.mutualmaterials.com (Phone (360) 573-5683). 2. Model: Vancouver Bay Slabs 3. Color/Finish: Gray/Shot-blast finish 4. Size: 23 -15/16 inches x 23— 15/16 inches X 1 —3/4 inches. 2.02 PEDESTALS A. Bison Adjustable Deck Support Pedestal System. 1. Manufactured by Bison Inovative Products;www.bisonip.com. 2. Product: Versadjust. PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 VERIFICATION A. Acceptance of Site Verification of Conditions: 1. General Contractor shall inspect, accept and certify in writing to the slab installation subcontractor that roof conditions meet specifications for the following items prior to installation of concrete paving slabs. a. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to drawings and specifications. b. Verify that roof deck materials, thickness, surface tolerances and elevations conform to specified requirements. c. Provide written test results for roof deck materials to the Owner, General Contractor and paving slab installation subcontractor. d. Verify location, type, and elevations of edge restraints, drains, drain holes, holes and inlets. 2. Do not proceed with installation of bedding materials until roof conditions are corrected by the General Contractor or designated subcontractor. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all surfaces, membrane(s), protection board, insulation, drains, are free from dirt, oil, grease or any deleterious substances and debris which may prevent installation, drainage, and stability of the paving slab installation. B. Verify that roof deck has a minimum of 2% slope to drains. C. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected [to the Architect's satisfaction]and are ready to receive leveling materials and paving slabs. 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 14 16 PEDESTAL PAVERS • 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Locate pedestals according to manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on the drawings. B. Place paving slabs on pedestals so they are supported according to pedestal manufacturer's recommendations. C. Align pedestals in all directions and shim elevations of slabs as work progresses and according to the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Trim and remove uncovered portion of pedestals to fit tightly with slabs against parapets, walls, and protrusions in the roof. Cut paving slabs with a masonry saw to fit in these areas. Cut slabs without damage to exposed faces and edges. Cut units should be no smaller than 1/2 of a whole slab. E. Maintain consistent joint widths and joints aligned in all directions as indicated on the drawings. F. Do not install cracked or broken paving slabs. G. Remove cut pieces and other debris from the surface and on the roof deck. Sweep slab surfaces clean. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Check final surface elevations for conformance to drawings. B. Lippage: Maximum 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) height variation between adjacent paving slabs. 3.05 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Clean and Seal concrete slabs in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. 11111 3.06 PROTECTION A. After work in this section is complete, the General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 17 13 PARKING BUMPERS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM C33/C33M-Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. C. ASTM C150/C150M -Standard Specification for Portland Cement. D. ASTM C260/C260M -Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. E. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Provide unit configuration, dimensions. C. Samples: Submit two six inches long concrete bumper units, illustrating configuration and surface finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Parking Bumpers: Recycled rubber, conforming to the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Type I- Normal; white color. • 2. Concrete Materials: ASTM C330/C330M aggregate, water, and sand. 3. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, deformed steel bars; unfinished, strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. 4. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. 5. Concrete Mix: Minimum 5,000 psi compressive strength after 28 days, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent. 6. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish. . Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. 7. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels. 8. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. 9. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing appearance of units is not impaired. B. Dowels: Steel, galvanized finish; 1/2 inch diameter, 18 inch long, pointed tip. C. Adhesive: Epoxy type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units. B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work. C. Fasten units in place with full bed of adhesive. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 17 23 • PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays and curb markings. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. MPI (APL)- Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. B. FHWA MUTCD- Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov; current edition. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Certificates: Submit for each batch of paint and glass beads stating compliance with specified requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint in containers of at least 5 gallons (18 L)accompanied by batch certificate. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated or noted on plans. 1. Parking Lots: Yellow. 2. Handicapped Symbols: Blue. B. Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s) required; Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform satisfactorily during period for which its use is required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. • B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 17 23 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS • unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of marking materials. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Obliteration of existing markings using paint is acceptable in lieu of removal; apply the black paint in as many coats as necessary to completely obliterate the existing markings. D. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods. 2. Completely remove rubber deposits, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering to the pavement, by scraping, wire brushing, sandblasting, mechanical abrasion, or approved chemicals. 3. Sandblasting: Use equipment of size and capacity necessary, providing not less than 150 cfm (0.08 cu m per second) of air at pressure not less than 90 psi (625 kPa)at each nozzle used. E. Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application; after cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. F. Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide templates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals. G. Temporary Pavement Markings: When required or directed by Architect, apply temporary markings of the color(s),width(s)and length(s)as indicated or directed. 1. After temporary marking has served its purpose, remove temporary marking by carefully controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method so that surface to which the marking was applied will not be damaged. 2. At Contractor's option, temporary marking tape may used in lieu of temporary painted marking; remove unsatisfactory tape and replace with painted markings at no additional cost to Owner. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried. B. Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C)or more than 95 degrees F (35 degrees C). C. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts. D. Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov)for details not shown. E. Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve control points until after markings have been accepted. F. Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the 111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 17 23 411 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS drawings true, sharp edges and ends. 1. Apply paint in one coat only. 2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch (0.4 mm), minimum. 3. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). G. Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other markings indicated on drawings. 1. Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces. 2. Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable. H. Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges and ends, of the design and size indicated. 3.4 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT A. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked. B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly painted markings. C. Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not less than that recommended by the manufacturer. D. Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other deficiencies or irregularities. • E. Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied, using carefully controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method. F. Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 31 29 WOOD FENCES • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Landscape structures, including: 1. Fences 1.02 REFERENCES A. Western Red Cedar Lumber Association "Designer's Handbook". B. Western Red Cedar Lumber Association. Specifying Western Red Cedar for Timber Construction and Landscape Structures". C. Western Red Cedar Lumber Association "Guide to Finishing Western Red Cedar". D. NLGA— National Lumber Grades Authority"Grading Standards". E. WCLIB—West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau "Grading Standards". F. WWPA—Western Wood Products Association "Grading Rules". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, tow samples representing actual product with finished color and texture. • 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer shall have five (5)years experience installing cedar fences of the type and size of project specified by this section. 2. Installer shall be licensed, registered or otherwise approved by the local jurisdiction. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. B. Store materials in safe, dry area, away from construction traffic; store under cover and off ground, protected from moisture. C. Keep materials clearly separated and identified with grade marks legible. Keep damaged material identified as damaged and stored separately. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions(temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits B. recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under C. environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.07 SUPPLEMENTAL MATERIALS A. Fasteners, supports, and hangers shall be provided by manufacturers other than member organizations of the WRCLA, and conform to the requirements set forth by this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FENCE SLATS A. Grade A Clear Cedar or better. Select for color consistency and straight grain. B. Surface Texture: Surfaced One Side • C. Moisture Content: Kiln-dried SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 31 29 WOOD FENCES 2.02 FENCE POSTS • A. Architect Knotty B. Surface Texture: Dressed S4S C. Moisture Content: Kiln Dried 2.03 FASTENERS A. Nails: 1. Material: Stainless steel. B. Screws: 1. Material: Stainless steel. C. Anchor Bolts: 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2.04 PROTECTING FINISH A. A. Water repellant, fungus and mildew resistant oil finish that is resistant to Ultra Violet(UV) light. 1. Color: Natural 2. Adhere to coating manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work with related trades; scribe and cope timbers for accurate fit. Allow installation of related work to avoid cutting and patching. B. Discard pieces that are warped, twisted, bowed, crooked or otherwise defective. • 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation will vary based on the project, follow all appropriate building codes and industry best practices. B. Finish materials on all sides and ends. Apply touch up coating on new cuts. C. Install posts plumb on all sides. D. Install post connections to the existing concrete using manufacturer's recommended anchors. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris related to this work. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Explain proper maintenance procedures to owner or owner's representative at project closeout. B. Visually inspect finish condition. Re-apply coating as necessary. C. The of pressure washers is not recommended. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 73 00 CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included in this Section: Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary for the installation of non-stabilized decomposed granite paving. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 93 00—Trees Shrubs and Groundcover. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Geotextile fabric. 2. Decomposed granite including source. 3. Manufacturer's warranty. 4. Test Reports: Decomposed granite paving aggregate sieve analysis. B. Samples: 5 lb. bag of decomposed granite aggregate paving material. • 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Gradation of decomposed granite material shall be in accordance with ASTM C 136— Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer to provide evidence to indicate successful experience in installing stabilized decomposed granite paving in projects of similar size and complexity. C. Mock-ups: Install 5-foot by 10-foot long mockup of decomposed granite paving at location as directed by Architect. 1.4 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install decomposed granite paving during rainy conditions or below 40 degrees Farenheit and falling. 1.5 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE A. Warranty Period: Provide warranty for performance of product for one year from time of completion. B. Provide for a period of 60 days, unconditional maintenance and repairs as required. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 73 00 CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING PART 2 -PRODUCTS 111 2.1 PAVING MATERIALS A. Decomposed Granite Paving: Gold colored decomposed granite, 3/4-inch minus, free from surface coatings and deleterious materials, as available from Instant Landscaping 541- 389-9663, or approved equal. Gradation requirements shall be as follows: U.S. Sieve No. Percent Passing by Weight #3/8" 100 #4 90-100 #8 75-80 #16 55-65 #30 40-50 #50 25-35 #100 15-20 #200 10-15 B. Aggregate Base: 3/4-inch minus natural crushed aggregate, meeting the requirements of ODOT Specification Section 2630, and the geotechnical report. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Geotextile Fabric: "Mirafi 160N" nonwoven permeable geotextile fabric. PART 3 -EXECUTION • 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine site and verify that conditions are suitable to receive work and that no defects or errors are present which would cause defective installation of products or cause latent defects in workmanship and function. B. Subgrade: Review subgrade to verify that it has been graded to the correct grades and compacted as required for correct installation of the aggregate paving. C. Unsuitable Conditions: Before proceeding with work notify the Owner's Representative in writing of unsuitable conditions and conflicts. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Use every possible precaution to prevent damage to existing conditions to remain such as structures, utilities, irrigation systems, plant materials, and paving on or adjacent to the site of the work B. Aggregate Paving Subgrade Preparation: 1. Grade subgrade with uniform slope between points where elevations are given. 2. Use equipment of proper size and appropriate type to achieve grades required. 3. Grade subgrade to within 0.05 foot of finish grade minus aggregate paving thickness. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 73 00 CRUSHED AGGREGATE PAVING • 4. Fill and compact any depressions and remove loose material to finish true to line and grade, presenting a smooth, compacted and unyielding surface, except where indicated otherwise. 5. Install geotextile and aggregate base as detailed. Compact base material meeting the requirements of the Geotechnical Report. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING A. Install and compact decomposed granite paving as detailed over prepared aggregate base material to depth indicated on Drawings. No metal edging is required; design intent is for grass and other plantings to blend in a natural way with edge of decomposed granite paving. B. Fine grade aggregate surface smooth and pitch surface to drain. C. Saturate aggregate paving and compact aggregate to 85% relative compaction by equipment such as: a 2-4 tone double drum roller or a 1,000 lb. single drum roller. Do not use a vibratory plate compactor or vibration function on roller as vacation separates large aggregate particles. Take care in compactiong decomposed granite when adjacent to planting and irrigation systems. Hand tamping with 8-inch or 10-inch hand tamp is recommended in these areas. 3.4 INSPECTION • A. Finished surface of pathway shall be smooth, uniform and solid. There shall be no evidence of chipping or cracking. Cured and compacted pathway shall be firm throughout profile with no spongy areas. Loose material will not be present on the surface after installation, but may appear after use and according to environmental conditions. Pathway should remain stable underneath the loose granite on top. Any significant irregularities in path surface shall be repaired to the uniformity of entire installation. 3.5 MAINTENANCE A. Remove debris, such as paper, grass clippings, leaves or other organic material by mechanically blowing or hand raking the surface as needed. B. If cracking occurs, sweep fines into the cracks, water thoroughly and hand tamp with an 8-inch or 10-inch hand tamp plate. C. If loose aggregate on the surface of paving exceeds %-inch at any time during the 60-day maintenance period, redistribute the material over the entire surface. Water thoroughly to the depth of 1-inch. Compact with power roller of no less than 1000 lbs. Repeat process as needed. 3.6 CLEANUP A. Contractor shall remove all surplus material, debris and rubbish resulting from work from site. • END OF SECTION SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set 1 PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 84 00 • IRRIGATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section Includes: 1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, supervision, and materials to install a complete irrigation system as described by and implied in the Contract Documents. 2. The Contractor shall repair any settling of backfilled trenches that may occur during the guarantee period, and completely restore and repair all plantings, lawn, paving, and other site improvements disturbed by this construction. B. Coordinate work with installation of other site work. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall make all submittals in accordance with Section 01330—Submittal Procedures. B. Product Submittals: 1. Products used shall not deviate from those indicated on Contract Drawings, specified herein or approved through the substitution request process. Product submittals are required for all irrigation items. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Submit copies of manufacturer's installation instructions for irrigation equipment. 2. Submit documentation that the installer is a licensed and bonded landscape or irrigation contracting firm that specializes in and has experience in the successful installation of similar 1111systems that include installation of centralized irrigation systems. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. The Contractor shall submit Record Drawings and shall include all approved variations or changes, indicating all sleeve, main line, lateral line, valve, wire runs, irrigation head, and other irrigation component locations to be located by field dimensions to the nearest permanent landmark, as approved by the Architect. 2. The Contractor shall submit a letter of certification from the controller system manufacturer's representative stating that the controller system has been installed correctly. 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Weather Requirements: 1. Do not solvent weld polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC)when ambient temperature is below 40° F and falling. 2. Do not solvent weld polyvinyl chloride pipe in wet conditions, without adequate cover. B. Schedule for Installing Pipe Sleeves, Conduits and Sprinkler Heads: 1. Coordinate with other trades as required to schedule installation of pipe sleeves and conduits below paving and walks prior to installation of paving and walks. 2. Schedule installation of sprinkler heads after final grading. 1.04 DAMAGES A. Any structures or facilities damaged by work on this project shall be restored to equal or better than original condition at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Architect. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by leaks or breaks in the equipment and materials furnished or installed in this contract for 1 year after the date of final acceptance. • 1.05 EXISTING UTILITIES SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 84 00 A. The Contractor shall verify, locate, and identify, with visible marking, all existing underground • utilities in the areas of work and maintain such markings until all work in those areas is complete. If utilities are to remain in place, the Contractor shall provide adequate means of protection during excavation operations. B. Should uncharted piping or other utilities be encountered during the execution of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Architect immediately and consult with the utility owner for instructions before proceeding with the work. C. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and public or private utility companies in keeping their respective services and facilities in operation. If it becomes necessary to temporarily interrupt existing services or facilities, the Contractor must provide temporary utility services to the satisfaction of the Architect. 1.06 PERMITS AND REGULATIONS A. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and inspections as applicable and required for the project. All work detailed and specified herein shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the applicable local, state, and federal codes and regulations. 1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain a current record of all pipe, wire, and equipment placement, and shall record all variations or changes approved by the Architect. Changes in layout of proposed work shall be recorded on the Record Drawing Set in blue pencil or ink. Additions to the proposed scope of work shall be recorded on the Record Drawing Set in green pencil or ink. Deletions either in the proposed scope of work or by a change in layout shall be recorded on the Record Drawing Set in red pencil or ink. • B. Record Drawings must be submitted to the Architect for review and approval on a weekly basis. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit Substitution Requests prior to bid date in accordance with Division 1 Section "Product Requirements". B. If materials other than those specified in the Contract Documents are proposed, the Architect shall determine whether such materials or methods are a suitable or equal substitute. The irrigation system described in the Contract Documents is based on specific GPM output, static and operating pressures. Approved substitutions may require partial or complete redesign of the system at the Contractor's expense. The Architect's decision will be final. 1.09 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide equipment manufacturer's standard warranty for control valves, and heads. B. Installer's Guarantee: 1. Provide installer's 1-year guarantee for entire system to the Architect at the time of final acceptance, showing the date of completion,which shall be the beginning of the guarantee period. 2. Guarantee shall include repair of trench backfill that settles more than '/2" or of plantings, paving, and walk materials damaged by settlement of trench backfill soils during the guarantee period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE • A. All main line PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic) pipe shall be PVC 1220, Type 1, normal impact, I.P.S., N.S.F. approved and shall conform to ASTM D1784-69, ASTM D1785, and PS22-70. All main line SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 84 00 • pipe size 3"and smaller shall be Schedule 40 PVC. All main line pipe size 4"and larger shall be Class 315 PVC. B. All PVC lateral line pipe shall be Schedule 40 PVC pipe and shall conform to ASTM D1784-69, ASTM D1785, and PS22-70. All PVC pipe shall be new, defect free, and continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, schedule and type of pipe. Minimum pipe size shall be 3/4-inch. 2.02 PVC PIPE FITTINGS A. All PVC fittings shall be PVC 1220, Schedule 40, type 1, normal impact, I.P.S., N.S.F. approved and meeting the requirements of ASTM D-2466. B. All PVC nipples shall be standard weight Schedule 80, with molded threads. C. All PVC fittings for electrical conduits shall be sweep fittings. 2.03 PVC CLEANER AND PRIMER A. "Weld-On P-75". All equals for"Weld-On P-75"shall meet the requirements of ASTM F-656. 2.04 PVC SOLVENT CEMENT A. In all circumstances use"Weld-On 725". All equals for"Weld-On 725"shall meet N.S.F. approval for Type I and II PVC through 3"and meeting requirements of ASTM D-2564. 2.05 PVC SLEEVES AND CONDUITS A. All sleeves for irrigation main and lateral lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC and shall be sized as detailed. • B. All electrical conduit for control wires shall be Schedule 40 PVC, gray in color. 2.06 IRRIGATION HEADS A. As shown on Drawings. 2.07 VALVES A. Automatic Control Valves: For spray zones: Rain Bird PEB automatic remote control valves where indicated. Size as shown on drawings. For Drip Zones: See"Drip Irrigation". B. Gate (Isolation)Valves: Nibco T-113, line size. C. Quick Coupling Valves and Keys: 1. Rain Bird 44RC quick couplers with Rain Bird 44 K keys. D. Air/Vacuum Relief Valve Kit: Rain Bird AR Valve Kit installed per manufacturer's specifications. 2.08 VALVE BOXES AND VALVE BOX COVERS A. Valve Boxes for Isolation and Control Valves, Highline 12-inch standard, Model 170133, with locking top and with 6-inch extensions as needed to facilitate required installation. B. Valve Boxes for Quick Coupling Valves, Highline 10"diameter, Model 181108, with locking top and with 6-inch extensions as needed to facilitate required installation. C. Bolts for Locking Valve Box Lids: Contractor shall provide stainless steel "penta" bolts(5-sided) and stainless steel washers. Bolts shall be of appropriate size and length for the specified valve box lid. • 2.09 SWING JOINT ASSEMBLIES A. Polyethylene Pipe Swing Joint Assemblies: Where"poly-pipe"swing joint assemblies are detailed on plans and in details the"poly-pipe"shall be flexible black tubing constructed of virgin linear low SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 84 00 density polyethylene material. The tubing shall have a wall thickness of 0.090-inch (+/-0.010-inch). • It shall have an inside diameter of 0.490-inch (+/- 0.010-inch)for use with 'spiral barb'fittings without the necessity of glue or clamps. The model number and logo of the manufacturer shall be printed at no less than 12-inch intervals along the length of the pipe. Each section of pipe used shall be capable of pressure testing at the rate of 100 lbs./sq.in. to a minimum burst pressure of 475 lbs./sq.in.. All pipe must have an operating pressure rating of 80 lbs./sq.in. at 110 degrees F. B. Spiral Barb Fittings for Polyethylene Swing Joint Assemblies: All fittings shall be constructed specifically for use in constructing"poly-pipe" swing assemblies. The fittings shall have a maximum operating water pressure of 80 lbs./sq.in.. All fittings shall be constructed of UV resistant, thermoplastic material and be so designed to permit twist-in insertion eliminating the need for glue or clamps. C. Triple swing joints: 1. For quick coupling valves, all threaded nipples to be Sch. 80 PVC and all threaded fittings shall be 40 PVC. 2.10 CONTROLLER AND CONTROLLER ACCESSORIES A. Controller: Rain Bird ESPLXME, size as shown on drawings B. Rain Sensor: Rain Bird RSD-BEx 2.11 WIRE, CABLE AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS A. Control Valve and Tracer Wires: 14 gauge copper wire designed for 24 volts or greater, Type UF, Underwriter's Lab (UL) approved for direct burial in NEC Class II circuits. 1. Remote control valve pilot wires shall be red in color. 2. Remote control ground wires shall be white in color. • 3. Extra remote control valve wires shall be blue in color. 4. Tracer wires shall be yellow in color. B. Electrical Connectors for all irrigation wires: 3-M DBY/DBR, Rain Bird Snap-Tite or Pen-Tite PVC Socket and Sealing Plus. 2.12 DRIP IRRIGATION A. Landscape Dripline, Rainbird XF series, As Shown on Drawings B. Control Zone: Rainbird Low Flow Control Zone Kit with PR Filter C. Fittings for Dripline tubing: Rainbird F. Manual Drain: One per zone 2.13 OTHER MATERIALS A. Pipe Joint Tape: Pipe joint tape shall be a minimum of 1-inch wide Teflon tape intended for use in wrapping threaded PVC pipe fittings and joints, as required. B. Drain Rock:3/4-inch to '/4-inch washed round rock, with no fines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Do not allow any work to be covered or enclosed until it has been inspected, pressure tested, and approved by the Architect. B. Installation of all materials and equipment shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's • written specifications and recommendations and with local and state codes,whether detailed or not. The Contractor is responsible for calling to the immediate attention of the Architect any conflicts between the manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations, local and state, and the SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 84 00 • Contract Documents. The Architect may require the Contractor to correct to the Architect's satisfaction any work installed that results from such conflicts at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The location of pipe, sprinkler heads, valves, and other equipment shall be as detailed and shall be the size and type indicated. No changes shall be made without prior approval by the Architect. Minor changes necessary to conform to ground conditions may be made by the Contractor without the Architect's prior consent in order to ensure the smooth progress of the work. However, all such changes are subject to approval by the Architect and must be recorded on the Record Drawings. D. Permission to shut off any water lines must be obtained in writing from the Architect prior to the beginning of any work. Disruptions in service shall be kept to a minimum. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the system and protecting it from all damage, including damage caused by vandalism or adverse weather conditions, until date of final acceptance. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing such damage at no additional cost to the Owner. F. The Contractor shall maintain at the site a clean copy of the drawings for recording changes to the project. All changes shall be recorded within 24 hours of occurrence. 3.02 TRENCHING A. A minimum depth of cover to the top of irrigation piping shall be as follows: 1. All lateral lines shall have 18-inches minimum and maximum 18-inches depth of cover. 2. All main lines shall have 18-inches minimum and 24- inches maximum depth of cover. 3. Where multiple pipes are laid in common trench, the Contractor must maintain a minimum separation of 2-inches in any direction between all pipe. 4. All sleeves and conduits shall have 24-inches minimum and 30-inches maximum depth of • cover. B. Remove all lumber, rubbish, and rocks from irrigation trenches. Irrigation lines shall have a firm, uniform bearing surface for the entire length of each line. Wedging or blocking of pipe is not permitted. C. Before back-filling trenches, all pipe shall be flushed clear and clean of all dirt and foreign material. D. Backfill trenches in layers of not more than 6-inches in depth and compact each layer. Fill trenches to finish grade with native or imported topsoil keeping the top 12-inches free of rock. Restore surface to original or better than original condition. E. Any materials or equipment damaged or destroyed while back filling shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Backfilling under all paved areas shall conform to minimum density and compaction requirements as described in applicable specification sections. 3.03 PIPE A. Exercise care in handling and storing all pipe and fittings. Store materials under cover before using. Transport materials in a vehicle of adequate size and capacity to prevent bending or the concentration of an external load at any point on the materials. Any materials or portions of materials that show such damage shall be discarded and replaced. B. Remove all foreign matter and dirt from inside pipe or fittings before lowering into the trench. C. Install all pipe and fittings per the manufacturer's specifications. Use the specified primer and cement on all glue joints. Use Teflon tape on all threaded joints. • D. Snake pipe in trenches to allow for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. E. At all installed joints cut pipe ends square and remove all burrs. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 84 00 3.04 VALVES • A. Install within shrub planting areas whenever possible. Install as detailed and as recommended by the manufacturer, complete with valve box and extension(s)and as detailed.All valve boxes shall be installed so that the top of the box is flush with adjacent finish lawn grade or 1-inch above planting area grade, after settling. Valves shall not be manifolded and shall be located no closer than 3' on center apart. Architect shall approve final valve locations prior to commencement of trenching operations. 3.05 CONTROLLER, CONTROLLER ACCESSORIES AND RAIN GAUGE A. Install as shown on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturers. B. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to facilitate complete installation. C. Contractor shall meet on-site with the controller manufacturer's representative, prior to commencement of installation of controller. 3.06 IRRIGATION HEADS A. Install irrigation heads of types, sizes and coverage called for in the Irrigation Legend/Key at the locations as detailed. Minor changes in head location may be necessary to achieve the required coverage at no additional expense. Notify the Architect for approval prior to making any changes. Document all changes on project Record Drawings as they occur. B. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, locate no head closer than 3-inches from any adjacent walk(gravel, concrete or otherwise), and no closer than 6-inches from any adjacent structure, deck or building. 3.07 DRIP IRRIGATION • A. Install all drip components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the drawings. B. Divide total daily recommended drip application time into(4) daily applications of equal length. 3.08 IRRIGATION SLEEVES A. Install sleeves for irrigation lines and/or control wire under pavement prior to placing pavement materials. Extend sleeves beyond pavement edge a minimum of 12-inches. All sleeves shall be installed with a minimum depth of cover to the top of the pipe of 24-inches. If length of required sleeve is greater than the length of the unit of pipe, solvent weld all joints required. Otherwise all sleeves shall be of one continuous length of pipe. B. Tape ends of sleeve closed to keep soil out of the sleeve until irrigation lines and/or control wire are installed. C. Stake both ends of sleeves with a readily visible stake extending 12-inches above grade and below grade to the bottom of the sleeve. Mark the above grade portion of the stake with the words"Irrig. Sleeve". Remove stakes after sleeves are recorded on the Record Drawings and after irrigation lines and/or control wires are installed and inspected. D. In areas of new paving, place a minimum of 4-inches of sand backfill over the top of all sleeves before back-filling with soil or other subgrade materials. E. Where sleeves pass under concrete paving or curbs, concrete shall be marked with a marking tack as described in the concrete section. 3. 09 IRRIGATION WIRING AND CABLES A. Tape control wires and cables in trench under main line or lateral lines whenever they occur in the • same trench. Place control wires in electrical conduits or sleeves under all paving and when not in common trench with main line or lateral lines. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 84 00 SB. Make all wire and splices moisture proof using specified electrical connectors. Splices shall be made in valve boxes only. All splices shall be noted on Record Drawings. Provide a minimum of 1- foot of coiled slack between all wire splices. C. Control wires shall be bundled together and wrapped with electrical tape at intervals of no more than 10-feet. Wires shall be placed below mainline or laterals when in same trench. D. Sharp bends or kinks in wires and cables shall not be permitted. Wires shall be unreeled in place alongside of or in the trench and shall be carefully placed along the bottom of the trench. Wire shall not be unreeled and pulled into trench from one end. E. Install tracer wires with all lateral line pipes and sleeves, taped to top of pipe or sleeve at 10-foot intervals with electrical tape. Where pipes tee off, make wire connections with specified waterproof connectors. F. For control wires, cables and tracer wires, provide 18-inches loop of extra wire in all valve boxes. G. Contractor shall install all remote control valve wires and cables from valves to controller shown at the approximate location on the Drawings. Contractor shall coordinate with other trades as necessary to facilitate this installation. H. Label all installed wires on each end with waterproof tags for all wires including those for future use. 3.10 FLUSHING AND TESTING A. Thoroughly flush all piping before testing and installation of irrigation heads and before back-filling any trenches. B. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any work to be covered before it has been inspected and Sapproved. Work covered before approval shall be uncovered at the Contractor's expense. . Soil may be placed in trenches between fittings to insure the stability of the line under pressure. In all cases, fittings and couplings must be open for visual inspection for full period of test. No testing shall be done until the last solvent welded joint has had a minimum of 24-hours to set and cure. D. Before testing, fill pipe with water and expel all air from pipes. Thrust blocks and all valves shall be in place prior to filling the main line with water for testing. E. Minimum pressure test on mainline, valves,joints and fittings, shall be 100-lbs./sq.in.without losing more than 1-pound per square inch during a period of 1-hour. Lateral lines shall be visually inspected by the Architect at line pressure with swing joints installed and capped. The Contractor shall first perform the tests for himself and repair any leaks or defects. The Contractor shall then notify the Architect at least 24-hours in advance and complete another test in the presence of the Architect for approval.All testing shall be done with a certified pressure gauge supplied by the Contractor. F. The Contractor shall adjust and balance the irrigation system to provide uniform coverage prior to commencement of planting operations. The Contractor shall change or adjust heads and/or nozzles as required to provide uniform coverage and match final grades. Upon completion of all systems and coverage tests performed by and for the Contractor, the Contractor shall notify the Architect at least 24 hours in advance, and perform another coverage test in the presence of the Architect for approval. G. Where inspected work does not comply with specified requirements or if pressure tests fail, replace the rejected work until re-inspected by the Architect and found to be acceptable. The Contractor shall credit the Owner, against the contract amount, at the rate of$75.00/hr. for reinspection of failed tests. • 3.11 CLEAN-UP SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 84 00 A. Upon completion of the work, clean up all boxes,wrappings, excess materials, and other rubbish • resulting for this work and leave the site in original or better condition. 3.12 FINAL SUBMITTAL A. Submit Record Drawings, project manuals, and provide training to Owner as described in Paragraph 1.2 D. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish labor, material and equipment required for soil preparation of areas to receive shrubs and trees, and groundcovers. B. Coordinate Work with installation of other site work including but not limited to irrigation, seeding and planting. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 —Earthwork. 2. Section 32 94 10—Design/Build Irrigation. 3. Section 32 91 13—Site Furnishings 4. Section 32 93 00—Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall make all submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300-Submittal Procedures. B. Submit certificates of inspection as required by County Agricultural Inspector. Submit manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments, fertilizer and other materials. Submit other data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. Such certificates may be tags, labels, and manufacturer's literature, and all submittals shall be reviewed for approval by Architect prior to installation. C. Submit 1/2 cu.ft. sample for each type of aggregate specified. • D. Submit product data for edging. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified by name, brand, type, weight and analysis. B. Store and handle packaged materials to prevent damage and intrusion of foreign matter. 1. Provide erosion control measures for stockpiled topsoil on site to prevent contamination of the soil. C. Submit receipts of all fertilizers and compost to Owner's Representative. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Topsoil placement and soil preparation shall not take place during periods where saturated soil or surface water is present in work areas. B. Work shall not take place when temperature is less than 32° F. or frozen soil is on site. C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before placing topsoil. D. Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Provide adequate measures to protect workers and passersby at the site. Execute all works in an orderly and careful manner with due consideration for any and all surrounding areas, plantings, or structures that are to remain. Protect all adjacent property and improvements from work damage, and replace any portions damaged through this operation. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 IMPORT TOPSOIL A. Definition: Topsoil is defined as ASTM 5268, fertile, friable, natural fine sandy loam, very fine sandy loam, loam or silt loam surface soil with pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4%organic material minimum. Topsoil shall be free of subsoil, stones or hard earth 1-inch or larger, noxious weeds (including quack grass and horsetail), roots, sticks or other extraneous material. B. Import Topsoil: Landscape Blend#2 available from Pro-Gro 503-682-3500. 2.02 ROOFTOP SOIL A. Pro-Gro Semi Intensive Soil, http://pro-gromixes.com/ 2.03 GROWING MEDIA A. A loose and friable material blend of loamy soil, sand and compost that is 30-40%compost(by volume)and meets the following other criteria: 1. Particle Gradation: A sieve analysis of the complete blended material shall be conducted per ASTM C117/C136, AASHTO T11/T27, or ASTM D422/D140 and meet the following gradation criteria: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1_inch 100 #4 75-100 #10 40-100 #40 15-50 #100 5-25 #200 5-15 The blend shall have a coefficient•of uniformity(D60/D10) equal to or greater than 6 to ensure it is well graded. 2. Acidity: pH of the blended material shall be tested and be between 6 to 8. • 3. Compost: The compost shall be derived from plant material and provided by a member of the US Composting Council Seal of Testing Assurance(STA) program. See www.compostingcouncil.orq for a list of local providers. The compost shall be a result of biological degradation and transformation of plant-derived materials under conditions designed to promote aerobic decomposition. The material shall be well composted,free of viable weed seeds, and stable with regard to oxygen consumption and carbon dioxide generation. The compost shall have no visible free water and produce no dust when handled. It shall meet the following criteria, as reported by the US Composting Council STA Compost Technical Data Sheet provided by the vendor. a. 100%of the material must pass through a'/2 inch screen. b. The pH of the material shall be between 6 and 8. c. Manufactured inert material (plastic, concrete, ceramics, metal, etc.)shall be less than 1.0% by weight. d. The organic matter content shall be between 30 and 70% (dry weight basis). e. Soluble salt content shall be less than 6.0 mmhos/cm. f. Maturity indicator shall be greater than 80%for Germination and Vigor. g. Stability shall be 'Stable'to 'Very Stable'. h. Carbon/Nitrogen (C/N) ratio shall be less than 25:1. i. Trace metals test result= 'Pass.' 4. Blend: The material shall be well mixed and homogenous. It shall be free of wood pieces, plastics, and other foreign matter. There shall be no visible free water. 5. Submittals: At least 14 working days in advance of construction, submit the following: a. Documentation for the two analyses described in article 2.1.P.1 of this specification (particle degradation with calculated coefficient of uniformity; and pH)shall be performed by an accredited laboratory with certification maintained current. The date of the analyses shall be no more than 90 calendar days prior to the date of the submittal. The report shall include the following information: • 1) Name and address of the laboratory. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION 4111 2) Phone contact and email address for the laboratory. 3) Test data, including the date and name of the test procedure. b. A compost technical data sheet from the compost vendor. The analysis and report must conform to the sampling and reporting requirements of the US composting Council Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program. The analysis shall be performed and reported by an approved independent STA program laboratory and be no more than 90 calendar days prior to the date of submittal. c. Two gallon-sized bags of the blended material. d. A description of the location, equipment, and method proposed to mix the material. 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS A. Herbicide: TriMec, Round-up, or other herbicides as approved. B. Water: Potable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plantings for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected, including adequacy of preinstalled irrigation system. Verify that subgrades and slopes of planting bed areas are acceptable to Landscape Architect prior to commencing work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare soil at a time when moisture conditions will permit proper cultivation. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of • soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Remove stones over 1-inch diameter, sticks, mortar, concrete, rubbish, debris and all materials harmful to plant life. D. Remove or spray as required to eradicate noxious weed growth and roots. No spraying is allowed in sensitive areas. E. Achieve complete removal or kill of all weeds including horsetails within all areas receiving new plantings. F. Kill achieved by working soil is permissible for annual non-noxious broad leaf type weeds. G. Locate and securely mark or flag irrigation sprinkler heads, area drains, catch basins, cleanouts, manholes, valve boxes, and other site improvements not extending above finish grade. H. Request inspection and allow observation by Architect of prepared soils before planting. 3.03 SOIL PREPARATION—SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER AREAS A. This section pertains to planting beds as shown on the drawings. B. Excavate and remove soil, debris, rock and other material to 18-inches below adjacent flatwork or finish grade. C. Thoroughly till subgrade in planting areas to a 6-inch depth for approval. Remove any rock or debris over 1-inch in diameter within the 6-inch subgrade area. Do not proceed with application of topsoil until subgrade scarification and removal of rock or debris has been approved by the Architect. D. Place 18 inches of topsoil in planting areas. See drawings. Water compact soils to finish grade prior to inspection. E. For Planters, place a total of 18 inches of imported topsoil within containers. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION 3.04 SOIL PREPARATION FOR PLANTING PITS OF TREES AND SHRUBS • A. Thoroughly mix 3 parts approved import topsoil with 1 part yard debris compost and 2 lbs. of Woodburn fertilizer"Pro Ornamental" per cubic yard 14/18/12 slow release. Place in planting pits as specified in Section 32 93 00—Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers. B. Minimum soil depths: 1. 36-inch depth for tree planting pits and areas as shown on the Drawings, including covered soil areas. 2. 18-inch depth for all shrub planting areas. C. Grade smooth to elevations shown on Contract Documents. 3.05 SOIL PREPARATION FOR STORMWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES A. Excavate soil to meet subgrades as indicated on Engineer's Drawings. B. Place drainage fill, drainage fabric and PVC perforated pipe per the Engineer's Drawings. C. Place import topsoil blend indicated in Paragraph 2.2 in 6-inch lifts, watering lightly between lifts, to meet grades as indicated on Engineer's Drawings. Total topsoil depth to be 18-inches minimum. 1. See Section 329300 for placement of mulch in stormwater treatment swales. D. Do not add fertilizer to stormwater treatment swales. E. Fine grade stormwater treatment swales soil to smooth even surface with loose uniformly fine texture. F. Protect stormwater treatment swales from foot or equipment traffic that is unrelated to the construction of the facility. Stormwater facilities shall be kept clean and shall not be used as erosion and sediment control structures during construction. 3.06 FINE GRADING 4111 A. Finish grade after full settlement including mulch, shall be 1-inch below tops of curbs, walks, or existing grades in shrub areas. Contractor may be required to adjust the amount of topsoil to bring the finish soil elevation to grades shown on plans. B. Slope all areas to prevent puddling and drain surface water toward catch basins, drains, curbs, or off site, as detailed. C. Soil in all areas shall be thoroughly settled,with a smooth surface free of humps and hollows, and shall be firm enough to resist undesirable impressions when stepped upon. D. Use levels, screens, drags, or any other equipment necessary to establish and verify grades and surfaces. E. Schedule inspection 48 hours in advance with Architect for review of fine grading operations. 3.07 CLEAN-UP A. Clean up excess materials and debris from project site upon completion of work or sooner if directed. B. Leave in neat and tidy condition daily. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 32 93 00 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Install trees, shrubs and groundcovers as detailed and specified herein. 2. Secure and maintain all plant material to have minimum 1-year acclamation in a similar climate to project site. 3. Establish a coordination schedule for supplying and installing plants and related materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 84 00—Irrigation 2. Section 32 91 13—Soil Preparation. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards: Comply with botanical names, sites, and conditions provided in: 1. Botanical Names: American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature, "Standardized Plant Names"or"Hortus Third". 2. Sizes and Conditions: American National Standards Institute (ANSI)Z60.1, "American Standards for Nursery Stock", latest edition. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful landscape establishment, with 5 years minimum experience. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that landscaping is in progress. Government Inspection: All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of federal, state, and county laws requiring inspection for plant disease and control. Submit certificate of inspection of plant material by State or Federal authorities if required. B. All plant material is to be grown from cuttings or seed. Collected plants are not acceptable. 1. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated, complying with applicable requirements of ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock". 2. Plant sizes indicated shall be the size of the plant at installation. C. Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6-inches above ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12-inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip. D. Pre-installation conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Plants shall be subject to inspection by the Architect at the growing or holding site or on the job site. Plants not conforming to specifications shall be rejected. 2. Approval of material at a growing or holding site is a qualified endorsement of general quality only, and does not certify a compliance with the specifications in all particulars; such approval does not preclude the right of rejection on the job site. B. The presence of noxious weeds in plant balls shall be cause for rejection of any or all plants from that source. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall make all submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300-Submittal Procedures. • B. Submit list of growers for each plant species to be installed within 30 days after the award of Contract. List to include plant sizes and conditions. Certify, in writing, confirmed orders for SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 11066 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 21 AUG 2015 SECTION 32 93 00 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS plants and provide the quantity, location, phone number, and address of the grower who has • agreed to provide any plant material. Verify that the sizes of plants indicated will be available at the time of installation. Each plant species shall be supplied by 1 grower only unless approved by Architect. C. Contractor shall inspect plants at growing or holding area and send letter of confirmation of plant quantities and conditions to Architect 100 days before planting time. D. Submit a 1/2 cu.ft. sample of bark and stone mulch for approval prior to delivery. E. Submit product data for fertilizer tablets. F. Submit planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting. G. With application for final payment, submit duplicate copies of delivery invoices, labels, or other acceptable proof of quantities of materials used. H. Requests for substitutions of plants not available in size, quantity or type specified must be made within 30 days after the award of bid. Submit proof on non-availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of equivalent material. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, fully identified by name, brand, type, weight and analysis. B. Store materials to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. C. Plant Materials: Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed. Protect trunks and branches from damage. Protect root systems from drying out. Label 1 of each tree and shrub species with securely attached waterproof tag bearing botanical name and suppliers name. D. Heel-in plants immediately upon delivery if not planted within 4 hours. E. Store plants in shade and protect from harmful weather until planted. • F. Water, maintain, and protect stored material from drying or other injury or damage. G. Store plants in upright position and allow sufficient ventilation. H. Do not drop plants. I. Do not pick up containerized or balled plants by stems or trunks. 1.07 INSPECTIONS A. Notify Architect 48 hours in advance for the following reviews of work: 1. Review of plant stock upon arrival to site or at nursery as determined by Architect. 2. Review of plant materials located in position for planting, but not yet planted. 3. Schedule inspection to take place during the last weeks of the 60-day establishment period. 1.08 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate planting of trees and shrubs during normal planting seasons for such work in location of Project. 1. Plant frost-tender trees and shrubs only after danger of frost is past or before frost season to allow establishment before first frost. Do not plant in frozen ground. 1.09 WARRANTY A. All trees, shrubs and groundcover shall be warranteed for 1-year from the date of Final Completion. B. Remove and replace trees, shrubs, or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs,which are in doubtful condition, during warranty period; unless requested by Architect. 1.10 MAINTENANCE • A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. SERA DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE, INC. GMP SET PROJECT NO. 11066 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 21 AUG 2015 SECTION 32 93 00 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS • B. Maintain trees, shrubs and groundcover for 3-months after Final Acceptance. If the end of the maintenance period falls after October 1, however, the remaining period will begin the following spring, March 15. C. During the maintenance period, the Contractor is responsible for weeding, watering, spraying, pruning and fertilizing as required and needed for healthy growth of the plant material. Contractor shall provide resources for bed weeding every two weeks through the duration of the maintenance period. Contractor to provide a monthly report stating hours spent maintaining the landscape and activities. For every month that maintenance activities do not occur per these specifications, the maintenance period shall be extended one-month. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TREE, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVER MATERIAL A. Trees, shrubs and groundcover shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Well rooted in the container but not root bound. 2. No encircling, girdling, or potentially binding roots. 3. The top of rootball must be within 3-inches of the top of the container. 4. No weeds may be growing in the container. 5. Single trunked, not headed or topped. 6. No bark in the crotches of any main branches. 7. No branches can be larger than 2/3 the trunk diameter. 8. The trunk of the tree must have a visible taper. No portion of the trunk above 6-inches can be larger than the portion below this point. The bottom of the trunk must be of greater diameter than all other portions of the trunk. 9. Free of insects or diseases at time of acceptance. B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Label at least 1 tree and 1 shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. 1. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting. 2.02 CONTAINER-GROWN STOCK A. Provide healthy, vigorous,well-rooted trees or shrubs established in container. Provide balled and burlapped stock when required trees or shrubs exceed maximum size recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for container-grown stock. 1. Established container stock is defined as a tree or shrub transplanted into container and grown in container long enough to develop new fibrous roots, so that root mass will retain its shape and hold together when removed from container. B. Containers: Rigid containers that will hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping. Provide trees and shrubs established in containers of not less than minimum sizes recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of trees and shrubs required. 2.03 BACKFILL SOIL MIXTURE A. See Section 32 91 13—Soil Preparation. 2.04 FERTILIZER AT PLANTING HOLES A. "Agriform" plant tablets in 5,10, and 21 gram sizes, 20-10-5, by Agriform International Chemicals, Inc., Newark, CA, approved. 2.05 TREE STAKES, TIES AND STAPLES • A. Tree Stakes to be 2-inches diameter by 8-foot Doug Fir stakes. B. Tree ties to be thick plastic chain tie. SERA DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE, INC. GMP SET PROJECT NO. 11066 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 21 AUG 2015 SECTION 32 93 00 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS C. Tree staples shall be Tree Staple TM or approved equal. • 2.06 MULCH A. Mulch: Organic fine ground fir bark,free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees, shrubs, and groundcover areas. B. Mulch for stormwater treatment planters (in treatment area) : 2"-314" river run washed pea gravel, free of fines and sand. 2.07 ANTI-DESICCANT A. Commercially available spray protective coating, designed to reduce plant transpiration loss, which produces a moisture-retarding barrier not removable by rain or snow. 2.08 WATER A. Potable, free from ingredients harmful to plant life. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive trees and shrubs for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Fine grading and Soil Preparation: Verify that fine grading and soil preparation work is complete. 3.02 ANTI-DESICCANT/TRANSPIRATION TREATMENT A. Treat all plants delivered to project site from June 1st through September 15th. Apply anti- desiccant/transpirant immediately prior to or upon delivery to project site. B. Follow manufacturer's recommendations and precautions. Apply in spray form to foliage, • branches, limbs and trunks of plants. 3.03 PLANT PITS A. Stake locations of trees and shrubs for approval prior to digging. Field place trees and shrubs in locations shown on Contract Drawings. Placement must meet approval of Architect prior to backfilling. Architect may request rotation or slight movement of tree to give a better appearance with respect to adjacent plants and structures. B. Size of Tree Pits: Minimum width two times the diameter of ball. C. Scarify bottom and sides of hole with shovel. D. Set trees on unamended native soil where possible. This is not applicable where soil is imported in depths greater than depth of root mass. To prevent settling of trees and large shrubs, soil added to the bottom of hole is to be foot tamped and unamended. 3.04 PLACING A. Set top of deciduous rootballs no less than 1-inch above finish grade and conifers and rhododendrons no less than 3-inches above grade and mound; deep planting not permitted. If hole for trees is too deep, fill hole with native soil only where applicable or prepared soil to correct levels. Use unamended soil and foot tamp to prevent settling. Large rhododendrons and 20 gallon containers or larger shall be 5-inches high. B. Set plants plumb and faced for best appearance. C. Remove wire baskets, burlap, fasteners from rootball completely if rootball will not be damaged. If damage is suspected, notify Architect for concurrence and remove tops and sides of baskets minimum. Use bolt cutters on wire if necessary to remove wire baskets. Bending back is not acceptable. D. Remove metal cans or plastic containers completely from rootball. • SERA DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE, INC. GMP SET PROJECT NO. 11066 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 21 AUG 2015 SECTION 32 93 00 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS • E. Neatly cut off broken, girdling, or frayed roots and any root growth growing in a circular manner conforming to its container. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. Backfill half of plant pit around rootball with prepared planting soil, carefully tamp soil around rootballs. See Specification 32 91 13—Soil Preparation for planting soil mixture. B. Apply fertilizer tablets: 1. Place tablets half way up to 2/3 the way up on rootball, 2-inches away from rootball. For groundcovers, 1-inch away. 2. Space tablets equally around rootball. 3. Install tablets at shrubs and groundcover, excluding irrigated grass. For trees, mix specified fertilizer with backfill. See Section 32 91 13—Soil Preparation. C. Complete backfilling, firming to surface grade. Thoroughly hand-water each plant and entire bed immediately after planting. Adjust rootball and soil as necessary. D. Remove tree tags. E. When area is not to be immediately irrigated and dry conditions exist, holes are to be watered half full and again when backfilling is complete. 3.06 TREE STAKING A. General: 1. Trees shall be able to stand upright without support, and shall return to the vertical after their tops have been deflected horizontally and released. 2. Trees shall remain plumb and straight from installation through the warranty period. B. Installation: As detailed. 3.07 MULCH INSTALLATION • A. Apply an average thickness of 2-inches medium fir bark mulch over tree-watering basins, shrubs, and ground cover areas and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems. Do not place bark mulch in stormwater planters. 1. Stormwater Treatment Swales: Install 2-inch thickness of washed pea gravel in between plants in stormwater treatment planters, but not in areas to be seeded in planters. B. Rake mulch surface smooth. 3.08 PRUNING A. Prune plant material if necessary and as directed by Architect to balance root and top growth. B. Prune all dead and broken limbs after inspection by Architect. 3.09 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During tree and shrub work, keep all work surfaces and pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. Protect surfaces as required to prevent damage from installation activities. Ensure that any damage that occurs as a result of installation is appropriately and immediately repaired. B. Protect trees and shrubs from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. C. Following installation, remove all excess materials and tools from job site. 3.10 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove subbase surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the property. END OF SECTION • SERA DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE, INC. GMP SET PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 • SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work consists of construction of water supply lines, service lines, valves, fire hydrants and other incidental items necessary for complete installation of water supply system. B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be installed by the City of Tigard. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. • 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of the City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. Including backflow prevention and potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. C. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping. D. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire- service-main products. E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression. F. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. 2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING • 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection to water service with City of Tigard Public Works. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: Material types, sizes and classes will be as shown on plans or as specified herein. B. Pipe: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe (4" and Larger) - Main and Service Lines (Private or Public): Class 52, per City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. 2. PVC Pressure Water Pipe (4" and Larger) - Service Lines (Private): PVC pressure water pipe to be of sizes designated on drawings, and to conform to AWWA Standard C 900, Class 150, C.I.-size, rubber ring bell pipe. 3. Copper Tubing - Service Lines (Private or Public): Type "K" copper per City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. 4. PVC Pressure Water Pipe(3" and Smaller)-Schedule 40 PVC. • C. Fittings: 1. Ductile Iron Fittings. Tees, crosses, bends, reducers, combinations thereof to meet the requirements of City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. a. Fittings: Mechanical joint unless specified otherwise. 2. Cast Iron Fittings for PVC Pipe: Tyler Pipe Industries, short-short body or equal, Class 250, manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA specifications C110 for Bell dimensions and cement lined in accordance with AWWA C-104 with bell ends for C-900 pipe. D. Couplings: 1. Flexible Couplings: Meet requirements of City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual, or approved, ductile iron couplings for Ductile Iron Pipe or equivalent. 2. PVC Couplings: Ring-tite, Fluid-Tite, or an approved type with rubber ring gaskets. E. Pipe and fittings in first paragraph and subparagraphs below are available in NPS 3 to NPS 48 (DN 80 to DN 1200). F. Waterline Valves: Meet requirements of City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. G. Fire Hydrants: Meet requirements of City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. • H. Backflow Preventers: Meet the requirements of City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 • SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series. B. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer. C. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. a. Standard: AWWA C219. • 2.4 GATE VALVES A. AVWVA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American AVK Co.; Valves& Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.;American Flow Control Div. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. i. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe Div.; Utilities Div. j. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. k. NIBCO INC. I. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 3. Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze • double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) Standard: AWWA C500. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING • 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. 4. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Gray-or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile- iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AVWVA C550. 5. Nonrising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 3) End Connections: Push on or mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. 6. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves: • a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with cast-iron double disc, bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem. 1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged. 7. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile- iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem. 1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged. B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 • SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. h. NIBCO INC. i. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. j. Or approved equal 3. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged. 4. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged. • C. Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corporation. h. Approved equal. 3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Bronze body and bonnet and bronze stem. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Threaded. 4. Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING • a. Description: Class 125, Type 1, bronze with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable-iron handwheel. 1) Standard: MSS SP-80. 2.5 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. c. Flowserve. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. h. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. i. Approved equal 3. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine. a. Standard: MSS SP-60. b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve. c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange. B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter. 1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut. C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve. 2.6 WATER METERS A. Water meters will be furnished and installed by the City of Tigard Public Works. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 • SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Fire&Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves &Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. g. Approved equal. 3. Standard: AWWA C511. 4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers • offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Fire &Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves &Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. g. Approved equal. 3. Standard: AWWA C510. 4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 CONCRETE VAULTS A. Description: Precast, reinforced-concrete vault, designed for A-16 load designation according to ASTM C 857 and made according to ASTM C 858. 1. Ladder: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps. 2. Manhole: ASTM A 48/A 48M Class No. 35A minimum tensile strength, gray-iron traffic frame and cover. a. Dimension: 24-inch minimum diameter, unless otherwise indicated. • 3. Manhole: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron traffic frame and cover. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING • a. Dimension: 24-inch-minimum diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Drain: ASME A112.6.3, cast-iron floor drain with outlet of size indicated. Include body anchor flange, light-duty cast-iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field-installed bronze ball or dapper-type backwater valve. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Refer to Division 31 Section 20 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. B. Pipe to be laid and maintained to required lines and grades as shown on drawings or staked in field. 1. Fittings, valves, and hydrants to be at required locations and with joints centered, spigots home and valve and hydrant stems plumb. 2. No deviation allowed from required line or grade except with approval of Architect. C. Interior of Pipe and Accessories: Kept free from dirt and foreign matter during installation. D. Installation: Meet requirements of City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. • E. Water/Sewer Line Crossings and Separations: Make in accordance with current requirements of Oregon State Health Department and the Department of Environmental Quality. F. Non-Metallic Main Line Pipes: Install electrical conductor such as "Terra-Tape" installed above and centered on pipe. 1. Tape: Install within 12"to 18" of ground surface. a. Where power, telephone or similar utility cable are installed in main line trenches, additional electrical conductors will not be required. 3.2 THRUST BLOCKING A. Apply at bends crosses, valves, caps, tees, etc., and where changes in pipe diameter occur at reducers or in fittings. 1. Design of concrete thrust blocking is shown in thrust blocking details and requirements on drawings. 2. Concrete for thrust blocking to meet requirements given hereinbefore. Other types of joint restraint or reaction devices to be as shown on drawings. B. Thrust blocking to be placed between solid undisturbed ground and fitting to be anchored. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 9 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 • SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 3.3 VALVE BOXES A. Install on valves as shown on standard details or Drawings. 1. Permanently support independent of pipe. 2. Center and plumb over valve operator with box cover flush with finished surface. 3.4 FIRE HYDRANTS AND BLOWOFFS A. Construct in accordance with standard details and at locations designated on drawings. B. Location: Fire Locate as shown on drawings or designated by Civil Engineer. 3.5 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS A. Standard manufactured plugs or caps to meet requirements of City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. 3.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Verify backflow preventors are in accordance with current standards of Oregon Health Division and City of Tigard. 1. Provide any new backflow preventer device, including valves, piping, supports, vault, vault drain, etc. as required to provide complete, connected and operational system. 2. A State of Oregon Certified Backflow Assembly Tester shall complete an Oregon Health Division standard performance test. 3.7 PRESSURE TESTING OF NEW SYSTEM A. Pressure and leakage tests to be made on newly laid pipe and/or appurtenances. 1. Furnish necessary equipment and material, make taps in pipe as required, and conduct tests. B. Conduct test after trench has been partially backfilled with joints left exposed for inspection, or when completely backfilled, as permitted by the Architect. 1. Where any section of pipe is provided with concrete reaction blocking, test not to be conducted until at least seven days after concrete thrust blocking is installed. 2. For high-early cement time may be cut to two days. • C. Final pressure and leakage tests to be delayed until trench excavation for other utilities included in contract and within limits of test, have been completed. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set • PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 10 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 11 00 SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING • D. Hydrostatic Pressure Test: Perform in accordance with requirements of City of Tigard Engineering Design Manual. 1. When test of pipe laid disclose leakage greater than that allowed, defective joints or pipe to be located, repaired, and retested at no expense to Owner, until leakage is within specified allowance. END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 31 00 • SITE SANITARY SEWERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with the following components: 1. Cleanouts. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. B. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. C. Field quality-control test reports. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS • A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy classes. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 31 00 SITE SANITARY SEWERS • B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 DUCTILE-IRON, GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A 746,for push-on joints. B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints. C. Compact Fittings: AVVWA C153, for push-on joints. D. Gaskets: AVWVA C111, rubber. 2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC): Comply with ASTM D3034 (SDR 35). Drain Waste Vent pipe shall conform to ASTM D2665, schedule 40. 2.6 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining • underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. e. NDS Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc. g. Approved Equal. D. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 31 00 • SITE SANITARY SEWERS 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. b. Dallas Specialty& Mfg. Co. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Approved Equal E. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Fernco Inc. b. Logan Clay Products Company(The). c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Approved equal. 2.7 CLEANOUTS A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. g. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. h. Approved equal. 2. Top-Loading Classification: Light Medium Heavy and Extra-heavy duty. 3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. 2.8 MANHOLES A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral • 4. floor. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 31 00 SITE SANITARY SEWERS • 5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 8. Steps: FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than. 9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch- minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to"SANITARY SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 CONCRETE A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: • 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes. 1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole. 2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. a. Slope: 4 percent. D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 • maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 31 00 • SITE SANITARY SEWERS 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD. c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. B. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range: S1. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Hub-and-spigot, Extra-Heavy Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 3 and NPS 4: NPS 6 ductile-iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile-iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. NPS 3 and NPS 4: NPS 4 PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 4. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Hub-and-spigot, Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 ductile-iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile-iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 7. NPS 8 and NPS 10: Hub-and-spigot, Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 8. NPS 8 and NPS 10: Ductile-iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile-iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 9. NPS 8 and NPS 10: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 10. NPS 12 and NPS 15: Hub-and-spigot, Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 11. NPS 12 to NPS 16: Ductile-iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile-iron standard or compact]fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 12. NPS 12 and NPS 15: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping • layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. It is contractor's responsibility to verify field conditions and coordinate with Engineer if conflicts arise. It is contractor's responsibility to coordinate phasing of connections and abandoning SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 31 00 SITE SANITARY SEWERS • existing to ensure uninterrupted use of the system. It is contractor's responsibility to field verify connection depths prior to construction. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. D. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors. 3. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover. 4. Install piping below frost line. 5. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 6. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. E. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. • Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for compression joints. 2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for lead and oakum calked joints. 3. Join ductile-iron, gravity sewer piping according to AVVWA C600 for push-on joints. 4. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric- gasket joints. 5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings. 3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. • B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 31 00 SITE SANITARY SEWERS • C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet. D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use light-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 2. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. 3. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Use extra-heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. • 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 31 00 SITE SANITARY SEWERS • 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired,for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe, during 24-hour period. b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks. f. Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig. 6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: III a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. b. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924. C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. END OF SECTION III SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 41 00 • STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure storm drainage outside the building, with the following components: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Precast concrete manholes. 3. Catch Basins 4. Stormfilter Manholes 5. Stormfilter Catch Basins 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water(30 kPa). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • B. Shop Drawings: For manholes and catch basins. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and manhole frames and covers and catch basin frames and grates. C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. D. Field quality-control test reports. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS • A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING • 2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy classes. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: AASHTO M 252M, Type S,with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings. 2. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 (DN 250) and Larger: AASHTO M 294M, Type S,with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 3. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings. 2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 (DN 450) and Larger: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall thickness, • with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.6 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. C. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. • e. NDS Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 41 00 • STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING g. Approved Equal D. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Approved Equal E. Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 1. Manufacturers: a. Fernco Inc. b. Logan Clay Products Company (The). c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Approved Equal 2.7 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS • A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 9 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints. 2.8 CLEANOUTS A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 1. Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation. h. Approved Equal • 2. Top-Loading Classification(s): Light, Medium, Heavy and Extra-heavy duty. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING • 3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. 2.9 MANHOLES A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M),. precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4. Riser Sections: 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated. 5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls,for each pipe connection. 8. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel reinforcing • rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12-to 16-inch (300-to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than [60 inches (1500 mm). 9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6-to 9-inch (150-to 225-mm)total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7-to 9-inch (175-to 225- mm) riser with 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum width flange and 26-inch-(660-mm-)diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to"STORM SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. 2.10 CONCRETE A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with • 0.58 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 04 NOV 2015 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 SECTION 33 41 00s: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel. • STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bar 2.11 CATCH BASINS A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints or as specified on plans. 1. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless flat-slab-top type is indicated. 3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural loading. Include 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4-inch (102- mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings or as specified on plans. 1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated. C. Steel Area Drains 1. Construct in accordance with the details shown on the drawings. • D. Stormfilter Catch Basins 1. Construct in accordance with the plans and manufacturer's directions. E. Stormfilter Manholes 1. Construct in accordance with the plans and manufacturer's directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD. c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space • between smaller pipings OD and larger pipings ID permits installation. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING • B. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range: 1. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): Hub-and-spigot, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 3. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 4. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN 200 to DN 375): Hub-and-spigot, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN 200 to DN 375): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 6. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN 200 to DN 375): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 7. NPS 18 to NPS 30 (DN 450 to DN 750): Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 8. NPS 18 to NPS 30 (DN 450 to DN 750): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. It is • contractor's responsibility to verify field conditions and coordinate with Engineer if conflicts arise. It is contractor's responsibility to coordinate phasing of connections and abandoning existing to ensure uninterrupted use of the system. It is contractor's responsibility to field verify connection depths prior to construction. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. D. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors. 3. Install piping with 36-inch (915-mm) minimum cover, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Install piping below frost line. 5. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 6. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 41 00 • STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING E. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. 3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 33 Section "Common Work Results for Utilities." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for compression joints. 2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for lead and oakum calked joints. 3. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric- gasket joints. 4. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings. 3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions • to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use light-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. 2. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. 3. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Use extra-heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm)]deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches (76 mm)above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 8 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING • 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's storm building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. It is Contractor's responsibility to verify existing storm drainage lines and connect existing drains to proposed stormline where necessary. Contractor to coordinate with Owner. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. • b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired,for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Air Tests: Test storm drainage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within • allowances specified. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 9 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 41 00 • STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING END OF SECTION • • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 1 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following: 1. Foundations. 2. Retaining walls. 3. Underslab areas. 4. Stormwater planters B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving". • 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. B. PE: Polyethylene plastic. C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. D. Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. 2. Solid-wall pipe and fittings. 3. Drainage conduits. 4. Drainage panels. 5. Geotextile filter fabrics. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 2 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers • offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: 1. NPS 6 and Smaller: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled joints. 2. NPS 8 and Larger: ASTM F 667; AASHTO M 252, Type CP; or AASHTO M 294, Type CP; corrugated; for coupled joints. 3. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints. 2.4 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, 1111 for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. B. PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell-and-spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2.5 CLEANOUTS A. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 2.6 DRAINAGE CONDUITS A. Single-Pipe Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with perforated corrugated core molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 3350 and wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. 1. Manufacturers: 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 3 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE • a. Advanced Drainage Systems. b. Or Approved Equal. B. Mesh Fabric Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with plastic-filament drainage core wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. Include fittings for bends and connection to drainage piping. 1. Manufacturers: a. Colbond Geosynthetics. b. Or Approved Equal. 2.7' SOIL MATERIALS A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving". 2.8 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament. 2. Style(s): Flat. • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed. B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving". 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. • 2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints. SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 4 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE B. Under slab Subdrainage Piping: • 1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings and loose, bell-and-spigot joints. C. Header Piping: 1. ABS pipe and fittings. 2. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 3. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 3.4 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS A. In underground subdrainage Piping: 1. At grade in earth: PVC cleanouts. 2. At grade in paved areas: Cast-iron cleanouts. 3.5 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide. B. Place impervious fill on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing and compact to dimensions 1111 indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide after concrete footing forms have been removed. C. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. D. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches. E. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3"Piping Installation"Article for foundation subdrainage. F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade. H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. I. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches. J. Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away from building 1111 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 5 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE • 3.6 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted but before drain rock has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. B. Place supporting layer of drain rock over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 2 inches. C. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab subdrainage. D. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side and to top of pipe to perform tests. E. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drain rock compacted as engineered/structural fill to elevation of bottom of slab. 3.7 RETAINING-WALL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. B. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches. • C. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3.07"Piping Installation"Article for retaining-wall subdrainage. D. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. E. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade. F. Place drainage course in layers not exceeding 3 inches in loose depth; compact each layer placed and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. G. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches. H. Fill to Grade: Place satisfactory soil fill material over compacted drainage course . Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade. 3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 6 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE 1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum • slope of 0.5 percent. 2. Under slab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent. 3. Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater piping system, install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 18 inches, unless otherwise indicated. However, when water discharges through wall weep holes, pipe may be installed with a minimum slope of zero percent. 4. Landscaping Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 24 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. D. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. 3.9 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties." B. Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's • "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties"; or according to ASTM D 2321. C. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. D. Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose bell-and-spigot joints. 3.10 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Cleanouts for Foundation, Retaining-wall: 1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. 2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in- place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches in depth. Set top of cleanout flush with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular-traffic areas. 3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch above grade. • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set PROJECT NO. 1503004 BURNHAM &ASH APARTMENTS PAGE 7 04 NOV 2015 SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE • 3.11 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid-wall-piping storm drainage system. 3.12 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving". Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. 1. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. 3.14 CLEANING A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work • progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION • SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set • APPENDIX A - REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES • • • APPENDIX B -SITE SURVEY • \I • - - � , / \ • 4...""' EX STM DI EX 12"CMP- • . TOP GRATE:150.70 OUTFALL IE 149.81 i \ - - - - 0 a - - - - - - I _ _ �" .- - - - 60 TG 49.97 - - - _ - - , -' - - H ! GAS 1°STEEL RATE L i SW ASH AVENUE - - - t END oF�BcTE .-r -E'N 30" • C \ L•+ -._-� SPHACT PATH 1-..--- e _-)„.4),5*) r _-T_- /._ _ - DU _- -`.._- • -sr.,°i - - -- - - ::,,,,,.,,,,,,,,,„.-;, - -1'> i -:�. - rm+- _w� : - RTH,H SH IM STM MH _._---_--- - - - -_.. I. 137.84 \ -t.-._ m _ -\. -- 150-x-= - -w rn : 155.92 -.-._. • s -1-- - _ _ BA 3.42%C), /.) d '. ,,/ ,3f - \\ ,� pN4'0 2' 410 - sem SWAIE _--_ _ _1 - _- _ ="--� STM C0� .� •^I*C WEIR:145.70 � ��� 'YV i�/ - % �„„__ - ,„ I�, ,„ l - ��• "- -'St ADA RAMP N4430'29"E 19' RIM. 15311 SUMP: 141.69(S)i - - TOP TANK.r, , , _ Af 'fit=-rCHAIN 144 00%� ,'�2": VALVW�CARSON(TE E`�OF 0 �,. ((�1W � 79(4°PVC 4212(N)Z ,/i .,,'Q?: />'WARNINGWATER In �'//7 ® ED ®- ®_ --�^ _-- - I i® 9�101040 Wq -R - a'INCE I x50 �'�)i/ Yv; / NOcTFA05 -- -_ 200 DlP r iv.,Q- ! PIP 41JE"t � % i12°CM' 1 /1 8" SUMP: i, n �`Z'. 1� LOCATES PRONDEF IE: 1':.05 / �/47 ' �.. ENDOF _ , l -� �` '� ,,,t . Q / , i BLOCK V LOCATES I I ®I ASPHALT 1 v, _ ® _ _, RIM: 1STM 153 `"P'Y „ i , WALLS _._�- I �M.. i.�/ / ;:", �1� i _F UNABLETO - 68 - -`\ MAN GATEi i _"(544'3029 W 43 GATE� / s �t ,i. , i LOCATE END �r � Ifi OUT: 149.88 12SW}� - - �B��eR `.n , 'EDGE,4F WATER' ,�� EUG ATER %jl, POND . �/ l4. r -__. PUEPERDOC. 545'297.5 I t GATE CCESS KEY p " 6143'q ''r -.,�,SIBMP: 148.18FLOODWAY �� � / N0.2009-10104017 50' 7F1 i E "., 1 9 f -I 01,�29�2014j- .01 X29 '41 /� I ). 13$fig, �' ® EX STM MH' GRAVEL 217CH IM. 155.91 ITOCK , I SENO OF 20218 F�NTAIN (.`;20 AIN LINK ^ RFLOOD ZONE I SpWETLAND BOUNDARY i�, -�1 _ SP LE �/ ASPHALT ' >LOCATES C\ �� `Y FENCEAE -'�3 - FLAGGED BY PACIFlC HABITAT �, r ��� _ II / -,STM � �'- N /�� CATCHBASIN -Ei v ) STE WAI h / YED BY AKS - i1 DOGS , �VE\ 1SERVICES,SUR ',I,: �./ " `;�,: s -" 543 30'SANITARY SEWER ENGINEERING AND FORESTRY I, TIONEASEMENT PER DEEDp�, I /� /P �-€iF "-PVC__ I l•(.j, 1 J'BOOK 868E ON F ~e! �'- /yam ~iFLO ONE •- I1 ORAD N RAD HII I STA �OU LL ' ` I CHAIN LI K C 20288 r�(EXCE ) /,�Q?'� 1 � ASPHALT - TAX MAP 25 X MAP 2S 1 0 FENCE _'A�� E:142.: �, �� " . 1II iBASE FLOOD EL•147.0 %$' /'� �' • r I S43T611 E 13.28' TAX LOT 2900 20259 CLINK --I -- TAX LOT2600 _ #-�APPROXIMATE LOCATION ,�,�i' 0 � _ • _.-„_._.., .._, -1_ I €Q lIIOF 36"METAL POND -- ✓ _ BUILDING =i III `�OUTLET(SUBMERGED) ; /,' ' • - • ..cmhs� I � ^ ;;a � Iou oND �' �'f�y��' - i / PUE PER DOC.' 11 - IE: 137 - "" 009-101040TAX LOT 500s7 �� 2A -/ � TAX--'., _ -y _ �� J Lrii FLOOD ZONE'X' /5 / I, -I LOT DO ,.TAX MAP 2S 1 0208 )� � ;/ - - d" TAX - TAX MAP 2S 1 0 D / / - _ - ,�•� / LOT 3000 /" z a _- _- _ TAX MAP 2S 1 02A' I I I IIEX 18"GONG -� _ - � AREA: 3.16 A6R!`StASPHALT ) II; I7OUTFALL '� _ AIN14 _ I Io I II IE 139.00 -/>"_�_ '1. = --T'�_� LEAtN�TOEX 10°CMP - - �LI %� FLOW THROUGH CURB/B� EX 8'CONC I I'• ^` • OUTFALL V - /OUTFALL APPE9RS TO BE IE: 144.73 1 ,, SHED , ! I g I � I ,.J __. --.. iIE. 144.97 I i A�ANDONED / \ c- - _. s. ........- IAT OPENING OF FLOOD ZONE'X' 4+ f -"."f I I i �--1' - ` CHAIN LINK I I 11 VERTICAL 10"CMP PIPE I,I PER LOCALES - - I I it FEt�,CERIM: 146.79 , . PONDASPHALT �� °� -� / " . I I * OVERHANG I S4470'OD"W 17.00' I i IE: 145.32 .�p i� N43'I6'11"W 308.87- _ sa- 1` ,/r I BUILDING I I iE / s - -‘ I SPHALTI W RADIO `�S43T6'11"E 138.98' I ) I I �� , I�I •� / f -- .-_ / STM MTOWER / I H(FLAT TOP)p7- ON TW I 0 /\ I , ,.., I .,", PER LOCATES J `'"' I 1' RIM:156.81 a -STAIRS END OF IE IN: 1500(12"DI N) IE IN: 150.1 12"DI-SW) I p / / 7 LOCATES • _.S_ �\ I TAX LOT 2400 AD IE IE IN: 144.7 i24°PVC SE) % I �:: S TAX MAP 2S 1 02 OUT' 1447 24"PVC NW)I I '• /' I - .../..,,--- "'"��r� l7" -`� /� STAIRS ^o 1 'II z 1 I / / / L FF EL: 153.02 1 1'w I 6 / / BUILDING BUILDING 1 ,� 0 i N A I'F i 16 EASEMENT FOR ROAD / PLATFORM - WALL EL 155.23 y� - / PURPOSES PER DEEDU ••-• H ' PH _i - - ASPHALT W�D - ,��; �.. BOOK 151 PAGE 153 - _ - -°- DDITION, - - __ --- ------ -- z �, - EXCEPTION I I ..�.. i. �iSHED /�- _ --`- _ - -- D -- �_��� __ - ASPHALT _�� CHFENCENK�t,..., _ _._ _ _-. __ ___ -- --- _._ .....\\\\:\.. \''' ......-........:.-���� Id -.,._ffi� t.�a.r._.�.e/. -m:. _CHAIN 11NIFfEN_„ -- "` _.,,.- .•„$4'36441'hk_ - ��'---16 EASEMENT FOR ROAD IF - n 1 ^.. -;-' - % �•• EX STM CB ._�.__-._-..,...�. PURPOSES PFB-DE€D--- --- �� I I I ���• FLOOD ZONE X ,•_� N > RIM: 152.86 BOOK 151 PAGE 153 I I OUT NE (EXCEPTION E) / BUILDING e APPROXIMATE LOCATION TAX LOT 2200 i I OF CATCH BASIN TAX MAP 2S 1 02AD • II. If I II NOTES: FLOOD ZONE NOTES: 1. UTILITIES SHOWN ARE BASED ON UNDERGROUND UTUTY LOCATE 1. FLOOD ZONE'AE'IS SUBJECT TO INUNDATION BY THE 1%ANNUAL r, LOCATE MARKINGS AS PROVIDED BY OTHERS,PROVIDED PER UTILITY CHANCE FLOOD EVENT AND HAS BASE FLOOD ELEVATIONS / LOCATE TICKET NUMBER 14013293 AND 15039449.THE SURVEYOR DETERMINED. MAKES NO GIIARANIEE THAT THE UNDERGROUND LOCATES N. CURVE TABLE REPRESENT 7HE ONLY UTUTES IN THE AREA.CONTRACTORS ARE 2. FLOOD ZONE'X'ARE AREAS OF 0.2%ANNUAL CHANCE FLOOD AND V RESPONSIBIE FOR VERIFYING ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO AREAS OF THE 1%ANNUAL GLANCE FLOOD WITH AVERAGE DEPTHS CURVE RADIUS DELTA LENGTH CHORD BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. OF LESS IRAN 1 FOOT. Cl 237.50' 1773'20" 71.39' S53T17.09W 71.12' 2. FELD WORK WAS CONDUCTED JANUARY 27-29,2014 AND MARCH C2 21.50' 75'00'00' 28.14' N80'46'11"W 26.18' 2,2015. 3. THE REST OF THE SITE NOT FALLING IN ONE OF TIE 2 SPECIAL FLOOD ZONES USED ABOVE IS IN FLOOD ZONE'X'-AREAS 3. VERTICAL DATUM:ELEVATIONS ARE BASED ON WASHINGTON DETERMINED TO BE OUTSIDE 11€0.2%ANNUAL CHANCE COUNTY BENCHMARK NO.488,A BRASS DISK II THE NORTHWEST FLOODPLAIN. SCALE 1" = 30 FEET CORNER NGVD 29 THE HIGHWAY 6 BRIDGEFOVER FANNO CREEK N1TH NM M 4. THE FLOOD ZONE BOUNDARIES SHOWN ARE CONSIDERED IN . T■ TREENO. SPECIES 09,16) A NGVI)29 ELEVATION OF 166.122 FEET. 20217 DECIDUOUS 9,16 APPROXIMATE AND ARE BASED ON FEMA NFHL(NATIONAL 30 0 12 18 u 30 al 4. THIS MAP DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A PROPERTY BOUNDARY SURVEY. ROODZONE HAZARD LAYER)GIS DATA. 20218 DECIDUOUS 7 20259 DECIDUOUS 4 5. SURVEY IS ONLY VALID WITH SURVEYOR'S STAMP AND SIGNATURE. .d' 20286 DECIDUOUS HALF DEAD 3 6. BUILDING FOOTPRINTS ARE MEASURED TO SIDING UNLESS NOTED LL 20443 DECIDUOUS 6.9 OTHERWISE. a 7. CONTOUR INTERVAL IS I FOOT. MA • APPENDIX C - LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE • SERA DesigS Architecture, Inc. • Cction Set TYPE DESCRIPTION LAMPS BALLAST FINISH REMARKS EF-1 Exhaust Fan F13 DBX White In Bathrooms PANASONIC FV-08VFL3 3000 K or approved G-1 Pole Mounted Luminere 56 watt LED Black On Square Pole. Verify Distribition. Cooper GLEON AE 01 LED El T4W BK 8030 3000 K G-2 Wall Mounted Downlight 8.8 watt LED Black Wall mount above garages Lumiere 303-W1 LEDB1 3000 UNV T4 DIM10 BK 3000 K G-3 Bollard 15.5 w LED Black Mount next to path. Lumiere 303-B1 LEDB2 3000 UNV T2 DIMELV BK 36 3000 K or approved G-4 Steplight 5.6 w LED Black wall mount Bega 2382 3000 K or approved G-5 Linear LED surface mount fixture wet 3.2 w/ft LED Natural Anod. Uplight recessed in deck Winona Lighting WSL105W LLP xx MSL4 100FMC 3000 K Aluminum 100DEG LLP4A 24 NAA MOD or approved G-6 Wall Mounted Downlight 6 w LED Stainless Steel Wall Mounted at Unit patios Lumiere 904 6LED3021 12 NSS 21 deg or approved 3000 K L-1 Lensed LED Striplight 41 w LED White Provide Motion Sensor PROJECT NO. 1503004 Ash Avenue Apartments PAGE 1 04 November 2015 Light Fixture Schedule 26 50 01 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set Metalux 4SNKED LD4 41SL LW UNV LBxx SD2 L830 3000 K with integral occupancy sensor or approved L-2 Undercabinet LED 9.6 watt LED White Reflector Undercabinet at Kitchen HALO HU10 24 830 P 3000 K or approved L-3 Fluorescent Strip with wire guard (1)F32 T8 Electronic White Reflector Back of House Areas • • PROJECT NO. 03004 Ash Aven partments PAGE 2 04 Novemb 5 Light Fi Schedule • 26 50 01 SERA Design Architecture, Inc. 4110 Clikictlon Set METALUX 4'SNF 32 UNV EB8 with AYC and WG/SNF-oft 3000 K Chain Hung or approved (1)F32 T8 White Reflector Stair light with built in occupancy sensor L-4 Stair Light Electronic PRUDENTIAL R1 1 T8 04 WA TMW UNV SUR X3 OC2C 3000 K or approved (1)F32 Ta Electronic White Reflector Stair light with built in occupancy sensor L-4A Same as L-4 except without occupancy sensor PRUDENTIAL R1 1 TO 04 WA TMW UNV SUR X3 3000 K or approved L-5 LED Strip Light 4.95 w/ft LED white At Elevetor Lobby cove and wall slot. Jessco DL-AC-FLEX 30 with DL-ACFLEX-CH channel 3000 K L-6 Linear Direct/Indirect (4)27 GU4 White At office Tech Lighting 700TDMERC48 WS CF 3000 K or approved L-7 2 x 2 LED Light 25 watt LED Dimming White Admin Office METALUX 22SR LD1 29 C UNV L830 CD 1 3000 K Bi-Level or approved L-8 LED wallwash White Winona 105 or approved P-1 Pendant at Commons TBD or approved P-2 Pendant at Lobby TBD or approved PROJECT NO. 1503004 Ash Avenue Apartments PAGE 3 04 November 2015 Light Fixture Schedule 26 50 01 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set P-3 Pendant TBD or approved R-1 LED Downlight(Round) (1)13 w LED Haze Reflector Corridor Capri PR75ASIC-CS Housing+PRL6K-G1-6-30K LED Mod. 3000 K R-2 LED Wallwash (Round) (1)13 w LED Haze Rooftop lounge Capri PR75ASIC-CS Housing+PRL6K-G1-6-30K LED Mod. 3000 K or approved PROJECT NO. 03004 Ash Aven partments • PAGE 4 04 Novembe 5 Light Fi Schedule 26 50 01 SERA Desige Architecture, Inc. • Ciction Set R-3 Narrow Beam LED Downlight (1)9 w LED white At Elevator Head Prima 8732 WH LED W 15 with LED 700 MA adapter and c 3000 K with 700 mA adapter or approved 15 degree R-4 LED Downlight(Exterior) (1)14 w LED Semi Specular Entry Portfolio LD6A10 D010TE ERM6A10 830 6LMO H 3000 K Clear or approved S-1 Surface Mounted LED 12.2 w LED White Corridor Halo SDL 606880 WH 3000 K or approved S-2 Surface Mounted LED 22.4 w KED white Parking Garage Portfolio LSR6A15 D010TE P ERCM6A 15 830 6LMO 3000 K H P836P or approved S-3 Surface Mounted CFL (2)13w D2GX7 Satin Bedrooms TECH Lighting 700FM9OLFS-CF 2-13 watt 3000 K Nickel or approved 5-4 Flush Mounted Fixture(15"dia) (2)F18 DBX Satin Nickel Corridor PROJECT NO. 1503004 Ash Avenue Apartments PAGE 5 04 November 2015 Light Fixture Schedule 26 50 01 SERA Design and Architecture, Inc. Construction Set Phillips F13178 3000 K Vanilla Shade or approved S-5 Flush Mounted Fixture(20"dia.) (2)F26 DBX Satin Nickel Elevator Lobby Phillips F13179 3000 K Vanilla Shade or approved S-6 Surface Mounted LED(Exterior) 18wLED TBD Exterior Canopies Luminis NT640 L1 W18 xx xx K3 CN 3000 K or approved T-1 Track Light 50 MR 16 Stainless Steel In Dining Areas Y Lighting Sportster T Track TTSS-16-08-S single 3000 K or approved W-1 Wall Sconce at Unit Vanities F24 T5HO Electronic Brushed Stainless Bathroom Vanity Forecast F350636U w/lamp 3000K Center on vanity unit. or approved Bi-Pin W-2 Wall Sconce at Public Bath (2)F14 T5 Electronic Natural Aluminum At Public Restroom/Commons Restroom Tech 700BCMETS-CF 24 T5HO(w/lamps) 3000K or approved Bi-Pin Ex-1 Exit Sign -Back of House Areas LED White CHLO VXI3GW with EM or approved Ex-2 Exit Sign -Recessed Edge Lit LED Translucent CHLO ER44RL1G EM or approved PROJECT NO. 03004 Ash Aven partments • PAGE 6 04 Novembe 5 Light Fi Schedule 26 50 01 • APPENDIX A - REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES •• GEODESIGNz 1 • REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES Tigard Development Tigard, Oregon For Capstone Partners, LLC April 15, 2015 GeoDesign Project: Capstone-11-02 \\\\• CRDESIGN� April 15, 2015 Capstone Partners, LLC 1015 NW 11th Avenue Portland, OR 97209 Attention: Mr.Jeff Sackett Report of Geotechnical Engineering Services Tigard Development Tigard, Oregon GeoDesign Project: Capstone-11-02 GeoDesign, Inc. is pleased to submit our report of geotechnical engineering services for the proposed Tigard Development project in Tigard, Oregon. Our services for this project were • conducted in accordance with our proposal dated February 9, 2015. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you. Please call if you have questions regarding this report. Sincerely, Geo es.gn, Inc. eorge S unde , .E., G.E. Principal E gineer cc: Ms. Lauren Golden Jones, Capstone Partners, LLC (via email only) Mr. Chris Nelson, Capstone Partners, LLC(via email only) Mr. David Stephenson, SERA Architects, Inc. (via email only) Mr.Jason Thompson, Catena Consulting Engineers (via email only) NAK:GPS:kt Attachments Two copies submitted • Document ID:Capstone-1 1-02-041515-geor.docx ©2015 GeoDesign,Inc. All rights reserved. 15575 SW Sequoia Pkwy,Suite 100 I Portland,OR 97224 1503.968.8787 www.geodesigninc.com • TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE NO. 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 2.0 BACKGROUND INFORMATION 1 3.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES 2 4.0 SITE CONDITIONS 3 4.1 Surface Conditions 3 4.2 Subsurface Conditions 3 5.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 5 6.0 DESIGN 6 6.1 General 6 6.2 Foundation Support 7 6.3 Floor Slabs 10 6.4 Seismic Design Considerations 11 6.5 Retaining Structures 12 6.6 Pavements 13 7.0 CONSTRUCTION 14 7.1 Site Preparation 14 7.2 Construction Considerations 16 7.3 Permanent Slopes 17 7.4 Excavation 17 7.5 Drainage Considerations 18 • 7.6 Materials 19 7.7 Erosion Control 24 8.0 OBSERVATION OF CONSTRUCTION 24 9.0 LIMITATIONS 24 REFERENCES 26 FIGURES Vicinity Map Figure 1 Site Plan Figure 2 APPENDICES Appendix A Field Exploration A-1 Laboratory Testing A-1 Exploration Key Table A-1 Soil Classification System Table A-2 Boring Logs Figures A-1 -A-6 Atterberg Limits Test Results Figure A-7 Summary of Laboratory Data Figure A-8 SPT Hammer Calibration Appendix B • Cone Penetrometer Probe Explorations B-1 CPT Logs G EO DESIGN= Capstone-11-02:041515 • TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE NO. APPENDICES(continued) Appendix C Previous Explorations C-1 Site Plan and Exploration Logs Appendix D Preliminary Foundation Plan D-1 Plan ACRONYMS • • G EO DES IG N= Capstone-11-02:041515 411 1.0 INTRODUCTION GeoDesign, Inc. is pleased to submit this report of geotechnical engineering services for the proposed Tigard Development project in Tigard, Oregon. The site is located southwest of the intersection of SW Ash Avenue and SW Burnham Street. The site is comprised of three parcels: an approximately 3.3-acre parcel located at 12800 SW Ash Avenue (currently utilized as the City of Tigard's [City] public works yard), an approximately 0.24-acre parcel located at 12770 SW Ash Avenue (currently utilized as a dog park), and an approximately 0.35-acre parcel located at 9020 SW Burnham Street(currently utilized as a dog park). The site location relative to surrounding physical features is shown on Figure 1. The prior features (explained below), existing conditions, and proposed site layout(overlay) are shown on Figure 2. Copies of the boring logs from our recently completed explorations and laboratory test results are provided in Appendix A. Copies of the CPT probes are provided in Appendix B. Acronyms used herein are defined at the end of this document. Background information as well as the conceptual development plans has been provided by Mr.Jeff Sackett of Capstone Partners, LLC(Capstone). The current plan is to construct two wood- framed structures on the site. A four-story"Building 1"and a three-story"Building 2"are to be located at the City's yard and the dog park, respectively. Based on the preliminary foundation loads (for Building 1) provided to us by Mr.Jason Thompson of Catena Consulting Engineers, we understand that the column and continuous footing loads will likely be less than approximately • 75 kips (36 dead/39 live) and 3.75 kips (1.75 dead/2 live) per lineal foot, respectively. We anticipate that the design floor slab loads will be light, likely less than 100 psf. We anticipate that only minor cuts and fills will be required to achieve final grades. 2.0 BACKGROUND INFORMATION Prior environmental work has been completed at the site by AMEC (now called AMEC Foster Sheeler). Copies of these reports have been provided by Capstone and include the following: • May 8, 2012 Phase I Environmental Site Assessment • September 17, 2012 Phase II Environmental Site Assessment • February 10, 2014 Phase III Environmental Site Assessment • December 8, 2014 Data Gap Investigation Work Plan • January 20, 2015 Site Characterization Report Prior explorations and site plans completed by AMEC are provided in Appendix C. Based on prior work by AMEC, we understand that the 12800 SW Ash Avenue parcel was undeveloped and in agricultural use until approximately 1960. A WWTP was constructed on this parcel in the 1960s, eventually expanded by 1973 to include 4 buildings and approximately 10 wastewater treatment tanks or impoundments. The approximate location of the prior WWTP features is included on AMEC's figures (see Appendix C) and depicted on Figure 2. With the exception of a couple buildings on the eastern parcel boundary, by approximately 1990 the WWTP components had • been demolished and the area utilized as the City's public works yard, comprised primarily of a surface parking lot. The reports above do not provide details on the demolition methods. Some G EODESIGN= 1 Capstone-11-02:041515 • demolition debris was encountered in AMEC's explorations (primarily concrete, "rock flour," asphalt, wood, gravel, and cobbles). Moreover, concrete refusal was encountered at two of AMEC's explorations (see Appendix C). We understand that the public works yard included vehicle fueling and maintenance, as well as storage of petroleum products and other chemicals. The reports indicate that two USTs were decommissioned at this parcel in 1992. AMEC's site plan (see Appendix C) specifically identifies the location of one former UST and references a"site feature"that may be the other former UST. Details on the backfilling operations associated with the decommissioning were not provided in the reports. AMEC's reports indicate that based on their review of historical aerial photographs from 1936 through 1973, the Fanno Creek channel crosses at the western and southern site boundaries. By 1980 Fanno Creek had been channelized and straightened, resulting in the Fanno Creek channel intersecting only the site boundary at the southwest site corner. Based on our review of aerial photographs, we believe that fill was likely installed at the southern/southwest site margins near the "old channel" of Fanno Creek. This is evident in our CPT probe CPT-2, where refusal (likely on debris)was encountered at a depth of approximately 5 feet BGS during the first probe push attempt. Also, the CPT-2 exploration log indicates that fill is likely present to a depth of at least 7 feet BGS. AMEC's reports indicate that the 12770 SW Ash Avenue parcel had been occupied by a former residence that had been used as office space by the City until it was demolished and an existing heating oil UST was decommissioned in 1999 prior to property development into a dog parkin 11111 2011. Information was not available regarding excavation and subsequent backfilling. Our review of historical aerial photographs indicates that the 9020 SW Burnham Street parcel had been occupied by a former building and parking lot that was demolished in mid-2010 prior to property development into a dog park. 3.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES The purpose of our geotechnical engineering services was to characterize site subsurface conditions and provide geotechnical engineering recommendations for use in design and construction of the proposed development. Our scope of work included the following: • Reviewed data from the previous environmental studies completed at the site by AMEC as well as readily available geotechnical and geological information in the site area. • Coordinated and managed the geotechnical field investigation, including public and private utility locates and scheduling contractors and GeoDesign staff. • Explored subsurface conditions at the site by completing the following explorations: • Six drilled borings to depths ranging between approximately 16.5 and 51.5 feet BGS • Two CPT probes to a depth of approximately 51 feet BGS • Obtained geotechnical soil samples for laboratory testing, and maintained a log of the subsurface conditions encountered in each exploration. • G EO DESIGN= 2 Capstone-11-02:041515 • • Completed laboratory analyses on disturbed and undisturbed soil samples obtained from the explorations as follows: • Twenty-five moisture content determinations in general accordance with ASTM D 2216 • Five particle-size analyses in general accordance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM D 1 140 • Two Atterberg limits tests in general accordance with ASTM D 4318 • Prepared this report summarizing our findings, conclusions, and recommendations, including information related to the following: • Site preparation, grading and drainage, stripping depths, fill type for imported material, compaction criteria, trench excavation and backfill, dewatering, use of on-site soil, and wet/dry weather earthwork • Shallow foundation and intermediate foundation systems, including allowable design bearing pressure and minimum footing depth and width • Floor slab subgrades • Design criteria for retaining walls, including lateral earth pressures, backfill, compaction, and drainage • Asphalt pavements for on-site access roads and parking areas, including subbase, base course, and asphalt paving thickness • Liquefaction potential of site soil • Recommendations for IBC seismic coefficients 4.0 SITE CONDITIONS 11111 4.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS The site is comprised of three parcels located southwest of the intersection of SW Ash Avenue and SW Burnham Street in Tigard, Oregon. The 12800 SW Ash Avenue parcel is currently utilized as the City's public works yard. This parcel is occupied by three buildings, multiple sheds, concrete pads, and paved parking lot. An approximately 4-foot-deep stormwater detention swale is located at the southwestern parcel corner. A gravel stockpile and broken asphalt pile are present at the central-western margin. Maintenance trucks, construction equipment, and construction materials occupy portions of the site. The 12770 SW Ash Avenue and the 9020 SW Burnham Street parcels are currently utilized as a dog park and covered with wood bark. A concrete patio/walkway and canopy occupy the dog park. The site is fenced and generally slopes gently downward from east to west with elevations ranging between approximately 154 and 149 feet above MSL. Moderate to steep slopes abut the Fanno Creek "old channel." The site is vegetated with trees, shrubs, and landscape planters. During our site reconnaissance we observed multiple utilities and manholes at the site. 4.2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4.2.1 General We explored subsurface conditions at the site by completing six drilled borings (B-1 through B-6) and two CPT probes (CPT-1 and CPT-2). The borings were completed to depths ranging between approximately 16.5 and 51.5 feet BGS, and the CPT probes were completed to a depth of approximately 51 feet BGS. The approximate locations of the explorations are shown on Figure 2. A description of our explorations, logs of the drilled borings, and laboratory test • results are provided in Appendix A. The results of the CPT probes are included in Appendix B. C EODESIGNY 3 Capstone-11-02:041515 • AMEC's site plan and exploration logs (showing their interpretation of fill depths) are provided in Appendix C. We note that AMEC's reports indicate that a total of 44 direct-push or hand auger borings were completed at the site. However, only 42 exploration logs were provided. In general, the subsurface conditions at the site consist of undocumented fill overlying native silt and clay with variable amounts of sand and layers of sand and silty sand to the maximum depth explored. Fill thickness observed in our explorations are shown on Figure 2. The following sections provide a detailed summary of the soil units encountered. 4.2.2 Pavement and Aggregate Base Borings B-3 through 13-6 and CPT probes CPT-1 and CPT-2 were completed through the AC-paved parking lot and encountered approximately 2 to 4.5 inches of AC underlain by approximately 5 to 22 inches of aggregate base. Also, boring B-4 encountered approximately 8 inches of concrete (potentially a slab) below the AC section. AMEC indicated that 24-inch-thick concrete (believed to be a slab)was encountered below the pavement section in exploration(s) completed in close vicinity to our boring B-4. 4.2.3 Undocumented Fill Undocumented fill (associated with demolishing of previous site improvements and past grading activities) was observed in all of our explorations, except for B-4. The fill ranged in thickness from approximately 0.6 foot to 14 feet BGS. Borings B-1 and B-2 were completed through the wood bark-covered dog park and encountered approximately 3 to 6 inches of wood bark underlain by approximately 4 to 18 inches of crushed rock fill. In explorations B-3, B-5, B-6, CPT-1, and CPT-2, the fill generally consists of soft to medium stiff, moist to wet silt with varying amounts of clay, gravel, sand, and organics (wood). In boring 13-6, the silt fill is underlain by very loose to loose, moist to wet, silty sand fill with trace to minor gravel to a depth of approximately 14 feet BGS. AMEC's explorations (see Appendix C) encountered variable amounts of undocumented fill consisting generally of silt and clay with variable amounts of gravel, sand, and organics to depths of up to approximately 16 feet BGS, with some explorations terminated in fill (due to refusal) at depths of up to approximately 15 feet BGS(based on AMEC's interpretation of fill depth encountered in their explorations as shown in Appendix C). We note that AMEC's reports indicated that up to 20 feet of fill was encountered; however, the logs indicate a maximum depth of 16 feet. Some demolition debris was encountered in AMEC's explorations (primarily concrete, "rock flour," asphalt, wood, gravel, and cobbles). AMEC indicated that 24-inch-thick concrete (believed to be a slab)was encountered below the pavement section in exploration(s)completed in close vicinity to our boring B-4, where 8 inches of concrete (potentially a slab)was encountered below the AC section. Moreover, concrete refusal was encountered at two of AMEC's explorations (see Appendix C). The moisture content of the silt/clay and silty sand fill ranged from 23 to 34 percent at the time of our exploration. The thicknesses of undocumented fill observed in the explorations are shown on Figure 2. • G EODESIGN= 4 Capstone-1 1-02:041515 • 4.2.4 UnderlyingSilt theand undocumentedClayDeposits fill.zone is native silt and clay with variable amounts sand. The silt and clay was present beneath the fill/pavement in explorations B-1, B-2, B-4, CPT-1, and CPT-2 and is generally soft to very stiff and moist to wet. Generally, the silt material has low plasticity to non-plastic, and the clay material has high plasticity. Explorations B-1, B-3, B-4, B-6, CPT-1, and CPT-2 were completed in silt and clay at depths ranging between approximately 16.5 and 51.5 feet BGS. The moisture content of the silt and clay ranged from 19 to 37 percent at the time of our exploration. 4.2.5 Sand and Silty Sand Deposits Layers of loose to medium dense, moist to wet sand and silty sand were encountered in all of our explorations as shallow as 9 feet BGS(B-1 and B-4). The sand and silty sand were encountered below the fill in borings B-3, B-5, and B-6. Borings B-2 and B-5 were terminated in sand and silty sand at depths of 16.5 and 19.0 feet BGS, respectively. CPT probe CPT-2 encountered layers of sand and silty sand as deep as approximately 33 feet BGS. The sand is generally fine to medium. The moisture content of the native sand and silty sand ranged from 29 to 33 percent at the time of our exploration. 4.2.6 Groundwater The boring explorations were completed using mud rotary drilling methods, and the presence of drilling fluid did not allow direct measurements of groundwater levels at the site. However, wet soil conditions were observed in the boring explorations at depths of approximately 5 to 10 feet • BGS. AMEC's reports indicate that groundwater was encountered at depths varying between 2 feet(believed to be perched) and 12 feet BGS. Groundwater in the central portion of the site was reportedly encountered at approximately 9 feet BGS. The depth to groundwater is expected to fluctuate in response to seasonal changes and will be strongly influenced by water levels in the adjacent Fanno Creek, and we anticipate that perched groundwater could rise to near the ground surface during the wet winter months. For design, we have assumed a groundwater level at approximately 7 feet BGS. 5.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Based on our review of the proposed preliminary development plan and the results of our explorations, laboratory testing, and analyses, it is our opinion that the proposed development can be constructed at the site. The primary geotechnical considerations for the project are summarized below. Undocumented fill is present over the site. The fill ranged in thickness from approximately 0.6 foot to 14 feet BGS in our explorations. AMEC's explorations encountered fill to depths of up to approximately 16 feet BGS. We note that AMEC's reports indicated that up to 20 feet of fill was encountered. Due to the unknown and variable properties of the undocumented fill material, foundations cannot be supported directly on the undocumented fill. The primary foundation options under consideration are spread foundations supported by native soil (or • granular pads underlain by native soil) or intermediate foundation systems. A brief discussion of G EO DE5lGN= 5 Capstone-11-02:041515 • these options is presented in the "Foundation Support" section of this report. We recommend that we be retained to observe all excavated foundation subgrades and evaluate the compaction of backfill. Due to the extensive site history and presence of undocumented fill material near the surface, we recommend that all pavement and building slab subgrades be scarified to a minimum depth of 12 inches, moisture conditioned, and re-compacted. Because of the moisture-sensitive nature of the on-site soil (silt, clay, and sand), scarification and compaction of the upper 12 inches of subgrade should be completed during the summer dry period. Removal and replacement of the upper 12 inches of material with granular material or cement amendment will likely be necessary if the work is scheduled during wet conditions. Further details regarding our specific recommendations are presented in the "Site Preparation"and "Structural Fill" sections of this report. The site soil is susceptible to liquefaction-induced ground settlement. A detailed discussion is provided in the "Seismic Design Considerations" section of this report. Although not encountered in our explorations, USTs, contaminated soil, or other buried elements from previous site activities may be present beneath the ground surface. The project budget may need to include a contingency for these items and material. The fine-grained soil at the site can be sensitive to small changes in moisture content and • difficult, if not impossible, to adequately compact during wet weather or when the moisture content of the soil is more than a few of percent above the optimum required for compaction. The soil encountered during our explorations will require moisture conditioning to achieve adequate compaction. In our opinion, it would be prudent and cost effective to complete the earthwork portion of the project during the summer months. During wet weather, stabilization of the exposed subgrade will be required. Stabilization can be achieved either by constructing granular staging pads or by cement amending the subgrade. Groundwater was encountered (by AMEC) between depths of approximately 2 feet(believed to be perched) and 12 feet BGS in a majority of the explorations completed at the site. We believe perched groundwater will rise to near the ground surface during the wet winter months. The contractor should be prepared to encounter groundwater in all excavations and be prepared to dewater and shore deeper excavations. As a cost saving measure, we recommend all utility and foundation excavations be completed during the summer months. Our specific recommendations for site development are presented in the following sections of this report. 6.0 DESIGN 6.1 GENERAL The following sections provide our design recommendations for the buildings. All site • preparation and structural fill should be prepared as recommended in the "Construction" section of this report. G EO DES IG N= 6 Capstone-11-02:041515 • 6.2 FOUNDATION SUPPORT 6.2.1 Ge The site isenblanketed by 0.6 foot to 16.0 feet of undocumented fill with varying amounts of debris and organics (wood). Because of the unknown and variable properties of the undocumented fill, undocumented fill is not suitable for support of structural elements. Based on our investigation, analyses, and review, we anticipate the proposed Building 2 can be supported on conventional spread footings founded on native soil (or granular pads underlain by native soil). However, we note that a former heating oil UST was removed from the dog park area, and foundations should not be supported directly on the undocumented fill in this area. We anticipate that the proposed Building 1 can be founded on spread footings that are supported by intermediate foundation system as discussed below. Settlement is the most significant foundation design criteria. As discussed in the "Seismic Hazards" section of this report, the site soil is susceptible to earthquake-induced settlement. We estimate the total post-liquefaction settlement will be less than approximately 0.7 inch during a design-level earthquake and differential settlement is typically expected to range from less than one-half to up to two-thirds of the total liquefaction settlement. Based on the foundation loads anticipated, total post-construction consolidation-induced settlement should be less than 1 inch, with differential settlement approximately one-half of the total predicted settlement between similarly loaded footings. The structures can be supported on spread foundations if these settlements are within acceptable structural tolerances. 6.2.2 Shallow Foundations and Granular Pads 6.2.2.1 General We anticipate that Building 2 can be supported on conventional shallow footings underlain by a minimum 1 foot granular pad underlain by firm, undisturbed native soil, with the exception of in the area of a former heating oil UST where deeper granular pads or intermediate foundations may be required. The exact area of the former heating oil UST is unknown at this time. Since this was a heating oil UST, we anticipate that the depth of the excavation was not as significant and the depth of the undocumented fill was potentially shallow. In this area we recommend that the undocumented fill be removed and the footing supported on granular pads extending to the depth of the excavation or on intermediate foundations. Footings bearing on native soil or granular pads underlain by native soil should be sized based on an allowable bearing pressure of 3,000 psf. This is a net bearing pressure; the weight of the footing and overlying backfill can be ignored in calculating footing sizes. The recommended allowable bearing pressure applies to the total of dead plus long-term live loads and may be doubled for short-term loads such as those resulting from wind or seismic forces. Continuous wall and isolated spread footings should be at least 16 and 20 inches wide, respectively. The bottom of exterior footings should be at least 18 inches below the lowest adjacent exterior grade. The bottom of interior footings should be established at least 12 inches below the base of the slab. III G EODESIGN? 7 Capstone-11-02:041515 • Granular pads should extend 6 inches beyond the margins of the footings for every foot excavated below the footings base grade. The granular pads should consist of imported granular material that meets the requirements provided in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. As discussed in the "Excavation" section of this report, shallow groundwater is present at the site, and shoring as well as a dewatering plan may be required to complete the excavations and construction of the granular pads for the foundations. 6.2.2.2 Resistance to Sliding Lateral loads on footings can be resisted by passive earth pressure on the sides of the structures and by friction on the base of the footings. Our analysis indicates that the available passive earth pressure for footings confined by on-site soil and structural fill is 250 pcf, modeled as an equivalent fluid pressure. Adjacent floor slabs, pavements, or the upper 12-inch depth of adjacent unpaved areas should not be considered when calculating passive resistance. In order to rely on passive resistance, a minimum of 10 feet of horizontal clearance must exist between the face of the footings and adjacent down slopes. For footings in contact with native soil, a coefficient of friction equal to 0.35 may be used when calculating resistance to sliding. For footings in contact with the granular footing pads, a coefficient of friction equal to 0.40 may be used when calculating resistance to sliding. • 6.2.2.3 Construction Considerations All footing and floor subgrades should be evaluated by a representative of GeoDesign to evaluate the bearing conditions. Observations should also confirm that all loose or soft material, organics, unsuitable fill, prior topsoil zones, and softened subgrades (if present) have been removed. Localized deepening of footing excavations may be required to penetrate any deleterious material. 6.2.3 Shallow Foundations and Intermediate Foundations 6.2.3.1 General We anticipate that the proposed Building 1 can be founded on spread footings that are supported by intermediate foundation system as discussed below. 6.2.3.2 Rammed Aggregate Piers Rammed aggregate piers (such as Geopiers®) can be installed to provide support to a conventional spread footing system. Rammed aggregate pier foundation systems consist of compacted aggregate piers that extend through the unsuitable fill and into the native soil. Conventional spread foundations can be constructed over the completed rammed aggregate piers. The allowable bearing pressure for shallow foundations supported on rammed aggregate piers typically is in the range of 4,000 to 6,000 psf. Rammed aggregate piers have been a proprietary design-build foundation system. Moreover, the systems are typically installed open hole (discussed below), which will likely have some substantial means-and-methods considerations. Accordingly, if rammed aggregate piers are used, we recommend that the • design-build contractors be contacted to provide the actual allowable bearing pressures and aggregate pier configurations. G EODESIGN? 8 Capstone-11-02:041515 • Installing the aggregate piers will require drilling through soft and loose soil, which will be prone to raveling, sloughing, and running conditions if groundwater encountered. Geopiers® are typically installed open hole by advancing a bucket auger. Given the site conditions, we anticipate that casing will likely be required to advance the auger excavations for the rammed aggregate piers, which will increase the costs typically seen with Geopiers® projects. A disadvantage of rammed aggregate piers is that spoils are generated during installation, and unless the spoils can be used as fill at the site (pending AMEC and Oregon Department of Environmental Quality discussions), the result is additional and expensive off-site disposal. 6.2.3.3 Lean Concrete Intermediate Piers Intermediate piers can be installed using casing systems such as displacement continuous flight auger or driven gout piles. Both systems can be installed as displacement systems, thereby substantially reducing the spoils associated with Geopiers® or traditional continuous flight auger systems. Both systems are constructed by drilling or driving to the desired tip elevation while maintaining a head of fluid grout in the auger/mandrel to reduce the potential for heave. Grout or concrete is pumped under pressure as the auger/mandrel is withdrawn, resulting in an unreinforced column of fluid grout or concrete. Typically, lean concrete with an unconfined compressive strength of 2,000 psi is used and a reinforcing cage is not necessary. Our preliminary analysis indicates that shallow foundations supported on intermediate piers as described herein can be designed based on an allowable bearing pressure of 4,000 psf. The • footing should be supported on a minimum 12-inch-thick granular pad that extends the full dimension (width and length) of the footing (on and between the intermediate piers). Continuous wall and isolated spread footings should be at least 16 and 20 inches wide, respectively. The bottom of exterior footings should be at least 18 inches below the lowest adjacent exterior grade. The bottom of interior footings should be established at least 12 inches below the base of the slab. Preliminary foundation plans have been developed by Catena Consulting Engineers, with a copy provided in Appendix D. As noted in Appendix D, four foundation types (A through F) are proposed. As noted in Appendix D, foundation types C and D are perimeter continuous footings, A and B are interior continuous footings, and E and F are column footings. Based on our preliminary analysis, and assuming a 24-inch-diameter piers installed to a depth of 16 feet, the preliminary distribution of the lean concrete intermediate piers should be as shown in the Table 1. The recommendations provided below have been developed based on our preliminary analysis and a preliminary foundation plan. Additional analysis will be required to verify the recommendations. • G EO DES IG N‘i 9 Capstone-11-02:041515 • Table 1. Preliminary Distribution of Lean Concrete Intermediate Piers Foundation Element Preliminary Intermediate Pier Spacing A 7 B 6 C 8' D 8' E Note2 F Note2 Note': It may be possible to increase spacing pending further discussions between GeoDesign and Catena Consulting Engineers. Notee: Three intermediate piers are needed at each column E-and F-type footing. 6.3 FLOOR SLABS Satisfactory subgrade support for buildings floor slabs supporting floor loads of up to 100 psf areal loading can be obtained provided the subgrade is prepared in accordance with the "Site Preparation" section of this report. A minimum 6-inch-thick layer of imported granular material should be placed and compacted over the prepared subgrade to assist as a capillary break. The floor slab base rock should be crushed rock or crushed gravel and sand meeting the requirements outlined in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. The imported granular material should be placed in one lift and compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. Floor slab base rock contaminated with excessive ® fines (greater than 5 percent by dry weight passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve) should be replaced. Slabs should be reinforced according to their proposed use and per the structural engineer's recommendations. Load-bearing concrete slabs may be designed assuming a modulus of subgrade reaction, k, of 100 psi per inch, assuming the floor slab is underlain by native soil or at least 1 foot of structural fill/improved undocumented fill subgrade (by the means of scarification and compaction). If encountered, deleterious material and oversized debris, cobbles, and other deleterious material should be removed prior to compaction. If the subgrade is cement amended, the subgrade reaction can be increased to 200 psi per inch. Shallow groundwater has been observed (by others) at the site, and a vapor barrier should be considered in order to reduce the potential for moisture transmission through, and efflorescence growth on, the floor slabs. In addition, flooring manufacturers often require vapor barriers to protect flooring and flooring adhesives and will warrant their product only if a vapor barrier is installed according to their recommendations. If the project includes moisture-sensitive flooring, then we recommend that 10- or 15-mil Stego Wrap be considered for this project. The recommended procedures for installing Stego Wrap are to pour the floor slab concrete directly over the vapor barrier. The mix design for the concrete may need to be modified assuming the above-referenced construction sequence. Actual selection and design of an appropriate vapor barrier, if needed, should be based on discussions among members of the design team. • G EO DES IG N= 10 Capstone-11-02:041515 • We recommend that exterior slabs (e.g., patios, walkways, etc.) be structurally independent from the foundations of the buildings. Expansion joints should be provided between floor slabs and foundations. This will allow minor movement of the slabs to occur as a result of vehicular loading, tree root growth, seasonal soil shifting, and other factors, while reducing the potential for slab cracking around the perimeter. Interior slabs may be tied to the foundation system of the buildings. All floor subgrades should be evaluated by a qualified geotechnical engineer or their representative to confirm suitable bearing conditions. Observations should also confirm that loose or soft material, organics, unsuitable fill, prior topsoil zones, and softened subgrades (if present) have been removed. 6.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 6.4.1 IBC Design Parameters Based on our investigation, the parameters in Table 2 should be used to compute seismic base shear forces if the buildings are designed using the applicable provisions of the 2012 IBC and 2014 SOSSC. We selected the site coefficient"D" based on the results of our explorations. Table 2. IBC Seismic Design Parameters Seismic Design Parameter Short Period 1-Second Period • (TS=0.2 second) (T, = 1.0 second) MCE Spectral Acceleration S =0.94 g S1 = 0.34 g Site Class D Site Coefficient Fa= 1.13 F�= 1.73 Adjusted Spectral Acceleration SM5= 1.05 g SMI =0.58 g Design Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters SD,=0.70 g Spy =0.39 g Design Spectral PGA 0.28 g 6.4.2 Seismic Hazards 6.4.2.1 Liquefaction Liquefaction can be defined as the sudden loss of shear strength in a soil due to an excessive buildup of pore water pressure. Liquefied soil layers generally follow a path of least resistance to dissipate pore pressures, often resulting in sudden surface settlement, sand boils or ejections, and lateral spreading in extreme cases. Clean, loose, uniform or silty, fine-grained sand below the water table is particularly susceptible to liquefaction. Our liquefaction analysis considered seismic events of M =9.0 with a PGA of approximately 0.09 g and MW=6.7 with a PGA of 0.28 g. Our analyses indicate that localized layers of sand and silty sand encountered at the site are susceptible to liquefaction during a design-level 111 earthquake. Based on our liquefaction analysis and laboratory testing, we estimate total post- liquefaction settlement at the existing ground surface will be less than approximately 0.7 inch G EO DESIGN= 11 Capstone-11-02:041515 • during a design-level earthquake. Based on our review of the literature, our current explorations at the site, and our previous explorations in the site vicinity, we anticipate differential settlement at the site will be approximately one-half to up to two-thirds of the total liquefaction settlement. 6.4.2.2 Lateral Spread Lateral spreading is a liquefaction-related seismic hazard. Areas subject to lateral spreading are typically gently sloping or flat sites underlain by liquefiable sediment adjacent to an open face, such as a riverbank. It is our opinion that the potential for lateral spreading to occur at the property is low. 6.5 RETAINING STRUCTURES 6.5.1 Assumptions Our retaining wall design recommendations are based on the following assumptions: (1) the walls consist of conventional, cantilevered retaining walls, (2) the walls are less than 8 feet in height, (3) the backfill is drained, and (4) the backfill has a slope flatter than 4H:1 V. Re- evaluation of our recommendations will be required if the retaining wall design criteria for the project varies from these assumptions. 6.5.2 Wall Design Parameters For unrestrained retaining walls, an active earth pressure of 35 pcf modeled as an equivalent fluid pressure should be used for design. Where retaining walls are restrained from rotation prior to being backfilled, a pressure of 55 pcf should be used for design. For the embedded building walls, a superimposed seismic lateral force should be calculated based on a dynamic force of 6H2 pounds per lineal foot of wall (where H is the height of the wall in feet) and applied at 0.6H from the base of the wall. If surcharges (e.g., retained slopes, building foundations, vehicles, etc.)are located within a horizontal distance from the back of a wall equal to twice the height of the wall, then additional pressures will need to be accounted for in the wall design. Our office should be contacted for appropriate wall surcharges based on the actual magnitude and configuration of the applied loads. The base of wall footing excavations should extend a minimum of 12 inches below the lowest adjacent grade. The wall footings should be designed in accordance with the guidelines provided in the appropriate portion of the "Foundation Support" section of this report. 6.5.3 Wall Drainage and Backfill The above design parameters have been provided assuming that back-of-wall drains will be installed to prevent buildup of hydrostatic pressures behind all walls. If a drainage system is not installed, then our office should be contacted for revised design forces. The backfill material placed behind the walls and extending a horizontal distance of Y2H (where H is the height of the retaining wall) should consist of imported granular material as specified in the "Structural Fill"section of this report. The wall backfill should be placed and compacted as • recommended in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. G EODESIGN= 12 Capstone-11-02:041515 • A minimum 12-inch-wide zone of drain rock, extending from the base of the wall to within 6 inches of finished grade, should be placed against the back of all retaining walls. Perforated collector pipes should be embedded at the base of the drain rock. The drain rock should meet the requirements provided in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. The perforated collector pipes should discharge at an appropriate location away from the base of the wall. The discharge pipe(s) should not be tied directly into stormwater drain systems, unless measures are taken to prevent backflow into the wall's drainage system. Settlement of up to 1 percent of the wall height commonly occurs immediately adjacent to the wall as the wall rotates and develops active lateral earth pressures. Consequently, we recommend that construction of flatwork adjacent to retaining walls be postponed at least four weeks after backfilling of the wall, unless survey data indicates that settlement is complete prior to that time. 6.6 PAVEMENTS New AC pavements will be constructed for drive aisles and car parking at the proposed project. The pavement subgrades should be prepared in accordance with the "Site Preparation," "Construction Considerations," and Structural Fill" sections of this report. This includes improvement of the upper 1 foot of existing fill soil. We have assumed that traffic at the site will consist of passenger cars only, with theexception of periodic service, delivery, and garbage trucks approximately twice a week. Our pavement • recommendations are based on the following assumptions: • A resilient modulus of 20,000 psi was estimated for the aggregate base • Initial and terminal serviceability indices of 4.2 and 2.0, respectively • Reliability and standard deviations of 75 percent and 0.45, respectively • Structural coefficients of 0.42 and 0.10 for the asphalt and aggregate base, respectively • No growth • A resilient modulus of 4,000 psi for site subgrades assuming the surface 12 inches of subgrade is scarified and compacted to at least 92 percent of the maximum dry density, as defined by ASTM D 1557 (modified) If any of these assumptions are incorrect, our office should be contacted with the appropriate information so that the pavement designs can be revised. Based on the traffic assumptions, we recommend the AC pavement sections presented in Table 3. Table 3. Recommended Standard Pavement Sections AC Thickness Aggregate Pavement Use ESALs Base Thickness (inches) (inches) • Drive Aisles 70,000 3.5 10.0 Automobile Parking Stalls 20,000 3.0 8.0 G EO DESIG m 13 Capstone-11-02:041515 • If the subgrade is cement amended to the thicknesses indicated below and the amended soil achieves a seven-day unconfined compressive strength of at least 100 psi, then the pavements can be constructed as recommended in Table 4. Table 4. Recommended Standard Pavement Sections AC Thickness Aggregate Cement Pavement Use ESALs Base Thickness Amendment (inches) (inches) (inches) Drive Aisles 70,000 3.5 6.0 12.0 Automobile Parking 20,000 3.0 4.0 12.0 All thicknesses are intended to be the minimum acceptable. The design of the recommended pavement section is based on the assumption that construction will be completed during an extended period of dry weather. Wet weather construction could require an increased thickness of aggregate base. In addition, to prevent strength loss during curing, cement-amended soil should be allowed to cure for at least four days prior to construction traffic or placing the base rock. Lastly, the amended subgrade should be protected with a minimum of 4 inches of base rock prior to construction traffic access. The AC, aggregate base, and cement amendment should meet the requirements outlined in the "Materials" section of this report. • Construction traffic should be limited to non-structural (buildingand pavement) portions of the site or haul roads. Construction traffic should not be allowed on new pavements. If construction traffic is to be allowed on newly constructed road sections, an allowance for this additional traffic will need to be made in the design pavement section. 7.0 CONSTRUCTION 7.1 SITE PREPARATION 7.1.1 Demolition Our background information indicates that several structures (i.e., buildings and tanks) formerly occupied the site. Currently, portions of the site are surfaced with asphalt and concrete pavements; also, multiple buildings, sheds, underground utilities, and construction material stockpiles are present. We (and AMEC) encountered buried debris and concrete slabs during site explorations. Given the site history, we anticipate that buried elements will likely be present on site. Demolition includes complete removal of former site improvements within 5 feet of areas to receive new pavements, buildings, retaining walls, or engineered fills. Underground vaults, septic tanks, cesspools, water wells, manholes, foundation elements, septic drain lines, utility lines, and other subsurface structures should be removed in areas of new improvements. Soil disturbed during demolition should be removed and replaced in accordance with the recommendations in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. If septic drain fields are • encountered within the buildings envelope, these trenches should be completely excavated to remove all gravel and pipe. The trenches should be sealed outside of the buildings envelope. G EoDESIGN= 14 Capstone-11-02:041515 • Voids resulting from removal of improvements or loose soil in utility lines should be backfilled with compacted structural fill, as discussed in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. The bottom of such excavations should be excavated to expose a firm subgrade before filling and their sides sloped at a minimum of 1 H:1 V to allow for more uniform compaction at the edges of the excavations. Material generated during demolition should be transported off site for disposal or stockpiled in areas designated by the owner. 7.1.2 Grubbing and Stripping Trees and shrubs should be removed from fill areas. In addition, root balls should be grubbed out to the depth of the roots, which could exceed 3 feet BGS. Depending on the methods used to remove the root balls, considerable disturbance and loosening of the subgrade could occur during site grubbing. We recommend that soil disturbed during grubbing operations be removed to expose firm, undisturbed subgrade. The resulting excavations should be backfilled with structural fill. The existing topsoil zone(landscaped areas and swale) and the bark fill (dog park) should be stripped and removed from all fill areas. Based on our explorations, we anticipate topsoil/bark fill stripping depths of up to 3 to 6 inches. However, greater stripping depths (exceeding 12 inches) should be expected in landscaping areas. The actual stripping depth should be based on field observations at the time of construction. Stripped material should be transported off • site for disposal or used in landscaped areas. 7.1.3 Subgrade Preparation As described above, undocumented fill is present over much of the site. Due to the highly variable composition and the unknown methods of placement and compaction of the fill, reliable strength properties of uncontrolled fill are extremely difficult to predict. Accordingly, we recommend that foundations not be supported on undocumented fill material. Building 2 can be supported on conventional spread footings founded on granular pads underlain by firm, undisturbed native soil, and Building 1 can be founded on spread footings that are supported by intermediate foundation system as discussed in the "Foundation Support" section of this report. Pavement performance and floor slab support can also be affected by poor subgrade, such as is possible with undocumented fill material. Accordingly, we recommend all pavement and building subgrades be scarified to a minimum depth of 12 inches, moisture conditioned, and compacted as structural fill. Because of the moisture-sensitive nature of the on-site soil, scarification and compaction of the upper 12 inches of subgrade should be completed during the summer dry period. Removal and replacement of the upper 12 inches of material with granular material will likely be necessary if the work is scheduled during wet conditions. Alternatively, cement amendment(as described in the "Structural Fill" section of this report) can be used to stabilize the upper 12 inches of subgrade. Due to the variable conditions, we recommend GeoDesign observe the exposed subgrade during the process. • In locations where fills are to be placed on slopes steeper than 5H:1 V, level benches should be cut into the existing sloping surfaces. The benches should be a minimum of 10 feet wide or the G Eo DE5lG N= 15 Capstone-11-02:041515 • width of the compaction equipment, whichever is wider. Where groundwater seepage is identified in bench cuts, subsurface drainage improvements (e.g., blanket or chimney drains) may be required. 7.1.4 Subgrade Evaluation In addition to compaction testing, proof rolling should be conducted after site preparation and mass grading activities have been completed. The subgrade should be proof rolled with a fully loaded dump truck or similar heavy, rubber-tired construction equipment to identify soft, loose, or unsuitable areas. A member of our geotechnical staff should observe proof rolling to evaluate yielding of the ground surface. Soft or loose zones identified during proof rolling should be excavated and replaced with compacted structural fill. Areas that appear too wet or soft to support proof rolling equipment should be prepared in accordance with recommendations for wet weather construction provided in the "Construction Considerations" section of this report. 7.2 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS The fine-grained soil present on this site is easily disturbed. If not carefully executed, site preparation, utility trench work, and roadway excavation can create extensive soft areas and significant repair costs can result. Earthwork planning, regardless of the time of year, should include considerations for minimizing subgrade disturbance. If construction occurs during or extends into the wet season, or if the moisture content of the surficial soil is more than a couple percentage points above optimum, site stripping and cutting • may need to be accomplished using track-mounted equipment. Likewise, the use of granular haul roads and staging areas will be necessary for support of construction traffic during the rainy season or when the moisture content of the surficial soil is more than a few percentage points above optimum. The base rock thickness for pavement areas is intended to support post- construction design traffic loads. This design base rock thickness may not support construction traffic or pavement construction when the subgrade soil is wet. Accordingly, if construction is planned for periods when the subgrade soil is wet, staging and haul roads with increased thicknesses of base rock will be required. The amount of staging and haul road areas, as well as the required thickness of granular material, will vary with the contractor's sequencing of a project and type/frequency of construction equipment. Based on our experience, between 12 and 18 inches of imported granular material is generally required in staging areas and between 18 and 24 inches in haul roads areas. Stabilization rock may be used as a substitute provided the top 4 inches of material consists of imported granular material. The actual thickness will depend on the contractor's means and methods and, accordingly, should be the contractor's responsibility. In addition, a geotextile fabric should be placed as a barrier between the subgrade and imported granular material in areas of repeated construction traffic. The imported granular material, stabilization rock, and geotextile fabric should meet the specifications in the "Materials" section of this report. As an alternative to thickened crushed rock sections, haul roads and utility work zones may be constructed using cement-amended subgrades overlain by a crushed rock wearing surface. If this approach is used, the thickness of granular material in staging areas and along haul roads • can typically be reduced to between 6 and 9 inches. This recommendation is based on an assumed minimum unconfined compressive strength of 100 psi for subgrade amended to a CEO DESIG N= 16 Capstone-11-02:041515 • depth of 12 to 16 inches. The actual thickness of the amended material and imported granular material will depend on the contractor's means and methods and, accordingly, should be the contractor's responsibility. Cement amendment is discussed in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. 7.3 PERMANENT SLOPES Permanent cut and fill slopes should not exceed 2H:1 V. Fill slopes should be over-built by at least 12 inches and trimmed back to the required slope to maintain a firm face. Slopes that will be maintained by mowing should not be constructed steeper than 3H:1 V. Access roads and pavements should be located at least 5 feet from the top of cut and fill slopes. The setback should be increased to 10 feet for buildings. The slopes should be planted with appropriate vegetation to provide protection against erosion as soon as possible after grading. Surface water runoff should be collected and directed away from slopes to prevent water from running down the face of the slope. 7.4 EXCAVATION 7.4.1 Trench Cuts and Shoring The near-surface site soil typically consists of silt and clay(native or fill)with variable sand and gravel underlain by sand and silty sand. Groundwater was observed (by others) between depths of 2 feet(believed to be perched) and 12 feet BGS. We anticipate that perched groundwater could rise to near the ground surface during the wet winter months. Excavations into the site 41) soil should be readily accomplished with conventional earthwork equipment; however, minor to severe sloughing and caving of the sidewalls should be expected with depth, and "running" conditions are possible where the groundwater seepage is present. We anticipate that concrete slabs, and construction debris from demolition of prior on-site structures, may be present beneath the ground surface. If encountered, these materials will result in difficult trench excavations and may require additional effort or special equipment. If difficult excavations are encountered, trenches may also be wider than anticipated, increasing the amount of backfill material required. Due to the presence of fill with varying amounts of debris and cobbles, and the presence of shallow groundwater seepage at the site, we anticipate that even shallow excavations may not stand vertically. Open excavation techniques may be used to excavate trenches with depths between 4 and 8 feet provided the walls of the excavation are cut at a slope of 1 H:1 V, groundwater seepage is not present, and with the understanding that some sloughing may occur. The trenches should be flattened to 1 Y2H:1 V if excessive sloughing occurs. Temporary shoring is recommended for cuts that extend below groundwater seepage or if vertical walls are desired for cuts deeper than 4 feet. Use of approved temporary shoring is recommended where the slopes cannot be cut back, within the influence area of structural elements, and for cuts below the water table. The influence area can be defined as a 1 H:1 V slope extending down from a 5-foot setback from the edge of a foundation element. If shoring is used, we recommend that the type and design of the shoring system be the responsibility of the contractor, who is in the best position to choose a system that fits the overall plan of • operation. All excavations should be made in accordance with applicable OSHA and state regulations. CEO DESIGN? 17 Capstone-11-02:041515 • 7.4.2 Temporary Dewatering Shallow groundwater seepage might be encountered at the site. The contractor should anticipate the presence of shallow water at the site regardless of the time of year of construction. Where groundwater is encountered, dewatering of excavations will likely be required. If groundwater is present at the base of the utility trench excavations, we recommend placing stabilization rock at the base of the excavation. Stabilization rock should meet the requirements for stabilization rock, as outlined in the "Structural Fill" section of this report, and should be placed in one lift and compacted until it is firm and unyielding. Construction of subsurface utilities that extend below groundwater levels will require dewatering and shoring programs capable of adapting to varied soil and groundwater conditions. Sloughing, caving, and the potential for"running conditions"will likely occur if the excavation extends below the groundwater table. In addition to safety considerations, running soil, caving, or other loss of ground will increase backfill volumes and can result in damage to adjacent structures or utilities. The proposed dewatering plan should be capable of maintaining groundwater levels at least 2 feet below the base of the trench excavation (including the depth required for trench bedding and stabilization materials). The contractor should be made responsible for temporary drainage of surface water and groundwater as necessary to prevent standing water and/or erosion at the working surface. The installation of temporary and/or permanent subdrains may be required in cut slope areas. Refer to the "Drainage Considerations" section of this report for further discussion regarding these • drains. 7.4.3 Safety All excavations should be made in accordance with applicable OSHA requirements and regulations of the state, county, and local jurisdiction. While this report describes certain approaches to excavation and dewatering, the contract documents should specify that the contractor is responsible for selecting excavation and dewatering methods, monitoring the excavations for safety, and providing shoring (as required) to protect personnel and adjacent structural elements. 7.5 DRAINAGE CONSIDERATIONS 7.5.1 Temporary During mass grading at the site, the contractor should be made responsible for temporary drainage of surface water as necessary to prevent standing water and/or erosion at the working surface. During rough and finished grading of the site, the contractor should keep all pads and subgrade free of ponding water. 7.5.2 Surface The ground surface at finished pads should be sloped away from their edges at a minimum 2 percent gradient for a distance of at least 5 feet. Roof drainage from the buildings should be directed into solid, smooth-wall drainage pipes that carry the collected water to the storm drain system. Trapped planter areas should not be created adjacent to roadways and structures 111 without providing means for positive drainage (e.g., swales or catch basins). G EODESIGM 18 Capstone-11-02:041515 • 7.5.3 Subsurface Based on presence of shallow groundwater at the site, we recommend that perimeter footing drains be installed around the proposed buildings. The footing drains should consist of a filter fabric-wrapped, drain rock-filled trench that extends at least 16 inches below the lowest adjacent grade (i.e., slab subgrade elevation). A perforated pipe should be placed at the base to collect water that gathers in the drain rock. The drain rock and filter fabric should meet specifications outlined in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. The discharge for the footing drain should not be tied directly into the stormwater drainage system, unless mechanisms are installed to prevent backflow. 7.6 MATERIALS 7.6.1 Structural Fill 7.6.1.1 General Fill should be placed on subgrade that has been prepared in conformance with the "Site Preparation" section of this report. A variety of material may be used as structural fill at the site. However, all material used as structural fill should be free of organic matter or other unsuitable material and should meet the specifications provided in OSSC 00330 - Earthwork, OSSC 00400 - Drainage and Sewers, and OSSC 02600 -Aggregates, depending on the application. A brief characterization of some of the acceptable materials and our recommendations for their use as structural fill is provided below. 7.6.1.2 Select Structural Fill • The material at the site should be suitable for use as general structural fill, provided it is properly moisture conditioned; free of debris, organic material, and particles over 4 inches in diameter; and meets the specifications provided in OSSC 00330.12 - Borrow Material. Based on laboratory test results, the moisture content of the on-site soil generally varied from 19 to 37 percent. We estimate the optimum moisture content for compaction to be approximately 16 to 18 percent for the on-site soil. Moisture conditioning (drying)will be required to use on- site soil for structural fill. Accordingly, extended dry weather will be required to adequately condition and place the soil as structural fill. It will be difficult, if not impossible, to adequately compact on-site soil during the rainy season or during prolonged periods of rainfall. Cement amendment might be required to use the on-site material as structural fill. When used as structural fill, native soil should be placed in lifts with a maximum uncompacted thickness of 6 to 8 inches and compacted to not less than 92 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557. 7.6.1.3 Imported Granular Material Imported granular material used as structural fill should be pit-or quarry-run rock, crushed rock, or crushed gravel and sand and should meet the specifications provided in OSSC 00330.14 - Selected Granular Backfill or OSSC 00330.15 - Selected Stone Backfill. The imported granular material should also be angular, fairly well graded between coarse and fine material, have less than 5 percent by dry weight passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve, and have at least two • mechanically fractured faces. G EODESIGN? 19 Capstone-11-02:041515 • Imported granular material should be placed in lifts with a maximum uncompacted thickness of 12 inches and compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. During the wet season or when wet subgrade conditions exists, the initial lift should be approximately 18 inches in uncompacted thickness and should be compacted by rolling with a smooth-drum roller without using vibratory action. 7.6.1.4 Stabilization Rock Stabilization rock should consist of pit-or quarry-run rock, crushed rock, or crushed gravel and should meet the specifications provided in OSSC 00330.16 -Stone Embankment Material. In addition, the material should have a maximum particle size of 6 inches, have less than 5 percent by dry weight passing the U.S. Standard No. 4 Sieve, and have at least two mechanically fractured faces. The material should be free of organic matter and other deleterious material. Stabilization material should be placed in lifts between 12 and 18 inches thick and compacted to a firm condition. Where the stabilization rock is used to stabilize soft subgrade beneath pavements or construction haul roads, a geotextile should be placed as a barrier between the soil subgrade and the imported granular material. The placement of the imported granular fill should be done in conformance with the specifications provided in OSSC 00331 -Subgrade Stabilization. The geotextile fabric should meet the specifications provided below for subgrade geotextiles. Geotextile is not required where stabilization rock is used at the base of utility trenches. . 7.6.1.5 Trench Backfill Trench backfill placed beneath, adjacent to, and for at least 12 inches above utility lines (i.e., the pipe zone) should consist of well-graded granular material, with a maximum particle size of 1Y2 inches and less than 10 percent by dry weight passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve, and should meet the specifications provided in OSSC 00405.13 - Pipe Zone Material. The pipe zone backfill should be compacted to at least 90 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, or as required by the pipe manufacturer or local building department. Within roadway alignments, the remainder of the trench backfill up to the subgrade elevation should consist of well-graded granular material, with a maximum particle size of 21/2 inches and less than 7 percent by dry weight passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve, and should meet the specifications provided in OSSC 00405.14 -Trench Backfill; Class B, C, or D. This material should be compacted to at least 92 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, or as required by the pipe manufacturer or local building department. The upper 3 feet of the trench backfill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. Outside of structural improvement areas (e.g., roadway alignments or building pads) trench backfill placed above the pipe zone may consist of general fill material that is free of organics and material over 6 inches in diameter and meets the specifications provided in OSSC 00405.14 - Trench Backfill; Class A, B, C, or D. This general trench backfill should be compacted to at least 90 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, or as required by the pipe manufacturer or local building department. • G EODESIGN= 20 Capstone-11-02:041515 • 7.6.1.6 Aggregate Base Rock Imported granular material used as base rock for building floor slabs and pavements should consist of%-or 11/2-inch-minus material (depending on the application) and meet the requirements in OSSC 00641 -Aggregate Subbase, Base, and Shoulders. In addition, the aggregate should have less than 5 percent by dry weight passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve. The base aggregate should be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. 7.6.1.7 Retaining Wall Select Backfill Backfill material placed behind retaining walls and extending a horizontal distance of Y2H (where H is the height of the retaining wall) should consist of select granular material that meets the requirements provided in OSSC 00510.12 - Granular Wall Backfill. We recommend the select granular wall backfill be separated from general fill, native soil, and/or topsoil using a geotextile fabric that meets the specifications provided below for drainage geotextiles. The wall backfill should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. However, backfill located within a horizontal distance of 3 feet from a retaining wall should only be compacted to approximately 90 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. Backfill placed within 3 feet of the wall should be compacted in lifts less than 6 inches thick using hand-operated tamping equipment(such as a jumping jack or vibratory plate compactor). If flatwork(sidewalks or pavements)will be placed atop the wall backfill, we recommend that the upper 2 feet of material be compacted to • 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. 7.6.1.8 Drain Rock Material Drain rock should consist of angular, granular material that meets the specifications provided in OSSC 00430.11 - Granular Drain Backfill Material. The drain rock should be wrapped in a drainage geotextile that meets the specifications provided below for drainage geotextiles. 7.6.1.9 Retaining Wall Leveling Pad Imported granular material placed at the base of retaining wall footings should consist of select granular material that meets the specifications provided in OSSC 00510.13 - Granular Structure Backfill. The granular material should meet either the 1"-0 or%"-0 aggregate size listed in OSSC Table 02630-1 -Grading Requirements for Dense-Graded Aggregate and have at least two mechanically fractured faces. The leveling pad material should be placed in a 6-to 12-inch lift and compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. 7.6.1.10 Existing Asphalt Pavement, Concrete, and Aggregate Base Asphalt pavement, concrete, and aggregate base from the existing roadways and improvements can be used in general structural fill, provided no particles greater than 4 inches are present and it is thoroughly mixed with soil so that there are no voids between the fragments. This material should only be used at depths greater than 2 feet below the finished subgrade in general fill areas and at least 3 feet above the pipe zone in trenches. The recycled material should meet the • specifications provided in OSSC 00330.12 - Borrow Material and other appropriate specifications. G EO DES IG N= 21 Capstone-11-02:041515 • 7.6.2 Geotextile Fabric 7.6.2,1 Subgrade Geotextile The subgrade geotextile should meet the specifications provided in OSSC Table 02320-4 - Geotextile Property Values for Subgrade Geotextile (Separation). The geotextile should be installed in conformance with OSSC 00350 -Geosynthetic Installation. A minimum initial aggregate base lift of 6 inches is required over geotextiles. All drainage aggregate and stabilization material should be underlain by a subgrade geotextile. 7.6.2.2 Drainage Geotextile Drainage geotextile should meet the specifications provided in OSSC Table 02320-1 -Geotextile Property Values for Drainage Geotextile. The geotextile should be installed in conformance with OSSC 00350 - Geosynthetic Installation. A minimum initial aggregate base lift of 6 inches is required over geotextiles. 7.6.3 Soil Amendment with Cement 7.6.3.1 General As an alternative to the use of imported granular material for wet weather structural fill, an experienced contractor may be able to amend the on-site soil with portland cement to obtain suitable support properties. Successful use of soil amendment depends on the use of correct mixing techniques, soil moisture content, and amendment quantities. Soil amending should be conducted in accordance with the specifications provided in OSSC 00344 -Treated Subgrade. The amount of cement used during treatment should be based on an assumed soil dry unit • weight of 100 pcf. 7.6.3.2 Subbase Stabilization Specific recommendations based on exposed site conditions for soil amending can be provided if necessary. However, for preliminary design purposes, we recommend a target strength for cement-amended subgrade for building and pavement subbase (below base aggregate) soil of 100 psi. The amount of cement used to achieve this target generally varies with moisture content and soil type. It is difficult to predict field performance of soil to cement amendment due to variability in soil response, and we recommend laboratory testing to confirm expectations. Generally, 5 percent cement by weight of dry soil can be used when the soil moisture content does not exceed approximately 20 percent. If the soil moisture content is in the range of 20 to 35 percent, 6 to 8 percent by weight of dry soil is recommended. The amount of cement added to the soil may need to be adjusted based on field observations and performance. Moreover, depending on the time of year and moisture content levels during amendment, water may need to be applied during tilling to appropriately condition the soil moisture content. Based on the clay-like nature of some of the site soils (dog park), we anticipate that at least two tilling passes will likely be required in some areas in order to achieve appropriate soil-cement mix prior to compaction. For building and pavement subbase, we recommend assuming a minimum cement ratio of 6 percent(by dry weight). If the soil moistures are in excess of 30 percent, a cement ratio of 7 percent may be needed. • G EO DESIGN= 22 Capstone-11-02:041515 • We recommend cement amending equipment be equipped with balloon tires to reduce rutting and disturbance of the fine-grained soil. A static, sheepsfoot or segmented pad roller with a minimum static weight of 40,000 pounds should be used for initial compaction of the fine- grained soil. A smooth-drum roller with a minimum applied linear force of 700 pounds per inch should be used for final compaction. The amended soil should be compacted to at least 92 percent of the achievable dry density at the moisture content of the material, as defined in ASTM D 1557. A minimum curing of four days is required between treatment and construction traffic access. Construction traffic should not be allowed on unprotected, cement-amended subgrade. To protect the cement-treated surfaces from abrasion or damage, the finished surface should be covered with 4 to 6 inches of imported granular material. Treatment depths for building/pavement, haul roads, and staging areas are typically on the order of 12, 16, and 12 inches, respectively. The crushed rock typically becomes contaminated with soil during construction. Contaminated base rock should be removed and replaced with clean rock in pavement areas. The actual thickness of the amended material and imported granular material for haul roads and staging areas will depend on the anticipated traffic, as well as the contractor's means and methods and, accordingly, should be the contractor's responsibility. Cement amending should not be attempted when air temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit or during moderate to heavy precipitation. Cement should not be placed when the • ground surface is saturated or standing water exists. 7.6.3.3 Cement-Amended Structural Fill On-site soil that would not otherwise be suitable for structural fill may be amended and placed as fill over a subgrade prepared in conformance with the "Site Preparation" section of this report. The cement ratio for general cement-amended fill can generally be reduced by 1 percent(by dry weight). Typically, a minimum curing of four days is required between treatment and construction traffic access. Consecutive lifts of fill may be treated immediately after the previous lift has been amended and compacted (e.g., the four-day wait period does not apply). However, where the final lift of fill is a building or roadway subgrade, then the four-day wait period is in effect for the final lift of cement-amended soil. 7.6.3.4 Other Considerations Portland cement-amended soil is hard and has low permeability. This soil does not drain well, nor is it suitable for planting. Future planted areas should not be cement amended, if practical, or accommodations should be made for drainage and planting. Moreover, cement amending soil within building areas must be done carefully to avoid trapping water under floor slabs. We should be contacted if this approach is considered. Cement amendment should not be used if runoff during construction cannot be directed away from adjacent wetlands (if any). 7.6.4 AC The AC should be Level 2, Y2-inch, dense ACP according to OSSC 00744 -Asphalt Concrete • Pavement and compacted to 91 percent of the theoretical maximum density of the mix, as determined by AASHTO T 209. We recommend lift thicknesses between 2.0 and 3.0 for Yz-inch G EO DESIG N? 23 Capstone-11-02:041515 • ACP. Lift thicknesses outside 2.0 and 3.0 inches can be used in specific instances depending on time of year and proposed mix gradation. Asphalt binder should be performance graded and conform to PG 64-22 or better. 7.7 EROSION CONTROL IIIThe site soil is susceptible to erosion; therefore, erosion control measures should be carefully planned and in place before construction begins. Surface water runoff should be collected and directed away from slopes to prevent water from running down the slope face. Erosion control measures (such as straw bales, sediment fences, and temporary detention and settling basins) should be used in accordance with local and state ordinances. 8.0 OBSERVATION OF CONSTRUCTION Satisfactory pavement, earthwork, and foundation performance depends to a large degree on the quality of construction. Sufficient observation of the contractor's activities is a key part of determining that the work is completed in accordance with the construction drawings and specifications. We recommend that GeoDesign be retained to observe subgrade preparation, fill placement, foundation excavations and installation, drainage system installation, building and pavement subgrades, and pavement installation and to review laboratory compaction and field moisture density information. Subsurface conditions observed during construction should be compared with those encountered during the subsurface explorations. Recognition of changed conditions requires experience; therefore, qualified personnel should visit the site with sufficient frequency to detect whether subsurface conditions change significantly from those anticipated. 9.0 LIMITATIONS We have prepared this report for use by Capstone Partners, LLC and the design and construction team for the proposed project. The data and report can be used for preliminary bidding or estimating purposes, but our report, conclusions, and interpretations should not be construed as warranty of the subsurface conditions and are not applicable to other sites. Exploration observations indicate soil conditions only at specific locations and only to the depths penetrated. They do not necessarily reflect soil strata or water level variations that may exist between exploration locations. If subsurface conditions differing from those described are noted during the course of excavation and construction, re-evaluation will be necessary. The site development was conceptual at the time this report was prepared. When the design has been finalized and if there are changes in the site grades, design traffic, or type of construction, the conclusions and recommendations presented may not be applicable. If design changes are made, we request that we be retained to review our conclusions and recommendations and to provide a written modification or verification. II/ G Eo DESIG N= 24 Capstone-11-02:041515 • The scope of our services does not include services related to construction safety precautions, and our recommendations are not intended to direct the contractor's methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, except as specifically described in our report for consideration in design. Within the limitations of scope, schedule, and budget, our services have been executed in accordance with generally accepted practices in this area at the time the report was prepared. No warranty, express or implied, should be understood. ♦ ♦ ♦ We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you. Please call if you have questions concerning this report or if we can provide additional services. Sincerely, GeoDesign, Inc. sy. Q PR oFF ��??��'���G i NEF s`Po AONajib A. Kalas, P.E. (Washington) 1'025 Pro' ct EngineerroRE 0 .1". �� 25 Ng �4 SPvr eorge S un . ., G.E. I EXPIRES: 6/30/16 I Principal gineer • GEODESIGN= 25 ' Capstone-11-02:041515 • REFERENCES ODOT, 2015. Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction, Oregon Department of Transportation, 2015 Edition. International Building Code, 2012. • • G EO DES IG N= 26 Capstone-11-02:041515 H W W M L U- . • 0 • APPENDIX A FIELD EXPLORATIONS GENERAL We explored subsurface conditions at the site by drilling six boring explorations (B-1 through B-6)to depths ranging between approximately 16.5 and 51.5 feet BGS and advancing two CPT probes (CPT-1 and CPT-2)to a depth of approximately 51 feet BGS. The soil boring explorations were completed on February 13, 2015 using a drill rig owned and operated by Western States Soil Conservation, Inc. of Aurora, Oregon, using mud rotary methods. The CPT probes were completed by Oregon Geotechnical Explorations, Inc. of Keizer, Oregon, on February 16, 2015. The approximate locations of the explorations are shown on Figure 2. Boring logs are included in this appendix. The results of the CPT probes are included in Appendix B. The explorations were located in the field relative to existing site features and should be considered approximate. Longitudes/latitudes were determined by overlaying these locations on Google Earth. Our estimates of the longitudes/latitudes are included on the exploration logs. A member of our geotechnical staff observed the explorations. SOIL SAMPLING Samples were obtained from the boring explorations using a 1Y2-inch-inner diameter SPT sampler in general accordance with ASTM D1586. The SPT sampler was driven into the soil with a • 140-pound hammer free-falling 30 inches. The SPT sampler was driven a total distance of 18 inches. The number of blows required to drive the sampler the final 12 inches is recorded on the exploration logs, unless otherwise noted. In addition, relatively undisturbed samples were obtained by pushing a thin-walled standard Shelby tube into the base of the boring in general accordance with ASTM D 1587. Soil classifications, sampler type, and sampling intervals are presented on the exploration logs included in this appendix. The calibration factor for the SPT hammer used by Western States Soil Conservation was 85 percent. A copy of the calibration testing presented at the end of this appendix. SOIL CLASSIFICATION The soil samples were classified in accordance with the "Explorations Key" (Table A-1) and "Soil Classification System"(Table A-2), which are included in this appendix. The exploration logs indicate the depths at which the soils or their characteristics change, although the change actually could be gradual. If the change occurred between sample locations, the depth was interpreted. Classifications and sampling intervals are presented on the exploration logs in this appendix. LABORATORY TESTING CLASSIFICATION The soil samples were classified in the laboratory to confirm field classifications. The laboratory • classifications are presented on the exploration logs if those classifications differed from the field classifications. G EO DESIGN= A-1 Capstone-I 1-02:041515 • ATTERBERG LIMITS The plastic limit and liquid limit(Atterberg limits) of two soil samples were determined in accordance with ASTM D 4318. The Atterberg limits and the plasticity index were completed to aid in the classification of the soil. The test results are presented in this appendix. GRAIN-SIZE TESTING Grain-size testing was completed on five selected samples. Testing included five percent fines determinations in general accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM D 1140. The test results are presented in this appendix. MOISTURE CONTENT We tested the natural moisture content of 25 soil samples in general accordance with ASTM D 2216. The natural moisture content is a ratio of the weight of the water to the dry weight of soil in a test sample and is expressed as a percentage. The test results are presented in this appendix. • • CEO DESIGN= A-2 Capstone-11-02:041515 SYMBOL SAMPLING DESCRIPTION ill Location of sample obtained in general accordance with ASTM D 1586 Standard Penetration Test • with recovery I Location of sample obtained using thin-wall Shelby tube or Geoprobe® sampler in general accordance with ASTM D 1587 with recovery Location of sample obtained using Dames &Moore sampler and 300-pound hammer or pushed with recovery 1 Location of sample obtained using Dames & Moore and 140-pound hammer or pushed with recovery NLocation of sample obtained using 3-inch-O.D. California split-spoon sampler and 140-pound hammer El Location of grab sample Graphic Log of Soil and Rock Types .:`.;.'' Observed contact between soil or 1 Rock coring interval .?; AV rock units(at depth indicated) E Water level during drilling Inferred contact between soil or rock units(at approximate 4/ depths indicated) Y Water level taken on date shown - ,t. _o III GEOTECHNICAL TESTING EXPLANATIONS ATT Atterberg Limits PP Pocket Penetrometer CBR California Bearing Ratio P200 Percent Passing U.S. Standard No. 200 CON Consolidation Sieve DD Dry Density RES Resilient Modulus DS Direct Shear SIEV Sieve Gradation HYD Hydrometer Gradation TOR Torvane MC Moisture Content UC Unconfined Compressive Strength MD Moisture-Density Relationship VS Vane Shear OC Organic Content kPa Kilopascal P Pushed Sample ENVIRONMENTAL TESTING EXPLANATIONS CA Sample Submitted for Chemical Analysis ND Not Detected P Pushed Sample NS No Visible Sheen PID Photoionization Detector Headspace SS Slight Sheen Analysis MS Moderate Sheen Illppm Parts per Million HS Heavy Sheen EoDESIGN= EXPLORATION KEY TABLE A-1 1555 75 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 Portland OR 97224 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 RELATIVE DENSITY-COARSE-GRAINED SOILS Relative Density Standard Penetration Dames& Moore Sampler Dames&Moore Sampler Resistance (140-pound hammer) (300-pound hammer) • Very Loose 0-4 0- 11 Loose 4- 10 0-4 11 26 4- 10 Medium Dense 10-30 26-74 10- 30 Dense 30- 50 74- 120 30-47 Very Dense More than 50 More than 120 More than 47 CONSISTENCY- FINE-GRAINED SOILS Consistency Standard Penetration Dames&Moore Sampler Dames&Moore Sampler Unconfined Compressive Resistance (140-pound hammer) (300-pound hammer) Strength(tsf) Very Soft Less than 2 Less than 3 Less than 2 Less than 0.25 Soft 2-4 3-6 2- 5 0.25-0.50 Medium Stiff 4-8 6- 12 5-9 0.50- 1.0 Stiff 8- 15 12 -25 9- 19 1.0-2.0 Very Stiff 15-30 25 -65 19- 31 2.0-4.0 Hard More than 30 More than 65 More than 31 More than 4.0 PRIMARY SOIL DIVISIONS GROUP SYMBOL GROUP NAME CLEAN GRAVELS GW or GP GRAVEL GRAVEL (< 5%fines) (more than 50%of GRAVEL WITH FINES GW-GM or GP-GM GRAVEL with silt coarse fraction (� 5%and 5 12%fines) GW-GC or GP-GC GRAVEL with clay COARSE-GRAINED retained on GM silty GRAVEL SOILS No.4 sieve) GRAVELS WITH FINES (> 12%fines) GC clayey GRAVEL (more than 50% GC-GM silty, clayey GRAVEL retained on CLEAN SANDS • SW or SP SAND No. 200 sieve) SAND (<5%fines) (50%or more of SANDS WITH FINES SW SM or SP SM SAND with silt coarse fraction (� 5%and 5 12%fines) SW-SC or SP-SC SAND with clay passing SANDS WITH FINES No. 4 sieve) SM silty SAND (> 12%fines) SC clayey SAND SC-SM silty, clayey SAND ML SILT FINE-GRAINED CL CLAY SOILS Liquid limit less than 50 CL ML silty CLAY (50%or more SILT AND CLAY OL ORGANIC SILT or ORGANIC CLAY passing Liquid limit 50 or MH SILT No. 200 sieve) CH CLAY greater OH ORGANIC SILT or ORGANIC CLAY HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS PT PEAT MOISTURE ADDITIONAL CONSTITUENTS CLASSIFICATION Secondary granular components or other materials Term Field Test such as organics, man-made debris,etc. Silt and Clay In: Sand and Gravel In: d very low moisture, Percent Fine-Grained Coarse- Percent Fine-Grained Coarse- ry dry to touch Soils Grained Soils Soils Grained Soils moist damp,without < 5 trace trace < 5 trace trace visible moisture 5- 12 minor with 5- 15 minor minor • wet visible free water, > 12 some silty/clayey 15- 30 with with usually saturated > 30 sandy/gravelly Indicate% 55 EODESIGN? SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 TABLE A-2 Portland OR 97224 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503 968.3068 u —= u w BLOW COUNT INSTALLATION AND DEPTH = MATERIAL DESCRIPTION >w - °- ••MOISTURE CONTENT% COMMENTS FEET w 0 H N a MT] RQpg6 CORE REC% • —0.0 uv - 153.0 0 50 100 -,Wood chips (6.0 inches)- FILL. 152.5 =ob Crushed rock(18.0 inches)- FILL. o.s _ls1.o 2.5—7—Soft to medium stiff, gray CLAY (CH), 2.0 trace organics (rootlets); moist. 4 — A LL=64% 5.0- //, ATT P • PL=20% �� 147.5 Stiff, brown-gray with dark brown - 5.5 - mottled, sandy SILT(ML); moist to wet, 10 sand is fine, interbeds of dense to A • 7.5— medium dense silty sand. _ 1440 Loose, brown-gray with brown mottled, 9.0 lo.o silty SAND (SM); wet, fine. lil9 A 12.5 - - _ 1390 - Medium stiff, gray SILT(ML), minor clay, 14.0 ls.o— trace to minor sand, trace organics (fine III - wood fiber); moist to wet, sand is fine. - 1365 E A • Exploration completed at a depth of 16.5 17.5— 16.5 feet. - _ Hammer efficiency factor is 85 percent. Latitude: 45.42 7842 Longitude: -122.769704 20.0— (determined from Google Earth) 22.5— -17, st w }- <Q 0 1- z Z Are 25.0— H - O LI – z LI 0 ::i.73 Q 0 50 100 Z O DRILLED BY:Western States Soil Conservation,Inc. LOGGED BY:NAK COMPLETED:02/13/15 • BORING METHOD:mud rotary(see document text) BORING BIT DIAMETER:4718-inch oG EODESIGN? CAPSTONE-11-02 BORING B-1 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 Portland OR 97224 APRIL 2015 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT FIGURE A-1 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR u = 0 w BLOW COUNT INSTALLATION AND DEPTH = MATERIAL DESCRIPTION >E z a •MOISTURE CONTENT% COMMENTS FEET J 0 10 N RQD% COREREC% • —o.o—,u u 0 50 100 , \Wood chips (3.0 inches)- FILL. Is20 �n� .__,1-` -0.3 - Crushed rock(4.0 inches)- FILL. / 152 4 - Medium stiff, brown with black mottled 0.6 - SILT(ML), minor sand, trace organics 2.5— (rootlets); moist, sand is fine. — E 1 • s.0— stiff, gray, with sand; moist to wet at 5.0 feet 111 A2 - 7.5 soft; wet at 7.5 feet 3 LL=NP ATT A • PL=NP 10.0— P - _ 142 5 Loose, brown-dark brown SAND with silt 10.5 (SP-SM), trace organics; wet,fine to medium. poo A • 12.5 1395, _ Medium dense, gray, silty SAND (SM), - 13.5 trace organics (fine fiber); wet, fine, 15.0— interbeds of sand with silt(3 inches thick). - III II `9 136.5. Exploration completed at a depth of 16.5 17.5— 16.5 feet. - _ Hammer efficiency factor is 85 percent. Latitude: 45.427597 Longitude: -122.770162 20.0— (determined from Google Earth) 1 22.5— - V' Li - F- Q - 0 i- - Z li 25.0— — H - o u - Z u - T, w 27.5— o 0 — W L., a u - CO _ w 30.0 4 0 50 100 z DRILLED BY:Western States Soil Conservation,Inc. LOGGED BY:NAK COMPLETED:02/13/15 , 411 o LiLi BORING METHOD:mud rotary(see document text) BORING BIT DIAMETER:4 7/8-inch LI G EODESIGN? CAPSTONE-11-02 BORING B-2 Z E2 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 m Portland OR97224 APRIL 2015 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT FIGURE A-2 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR u 2 w A BLOW COUNT INSTALLATION AND DEPTH u Q a Z 0- •MOISTURE CONTENT% COMMENTS FEET a MATERIAL DESCRIPTION >w I— w 0 Lia H N M 1 RQD% 1771 CORE REC% al —0.0 u 152.0 0 50 100 ASPHALT CONCRETE(2.3 inches). "' o �C / 0.2 ,op AGGREGATE BASE(1 5.7 inches). _ 1505 Medium stiff, gray SILT(ML), minor 1.5 2.5— sand, trace clay; moist, sand is fine - _ FILL. - s.o— very stiff, sandy; interbeds of silty sand _ at 5.0 feet E =6 7.5 soft to medium stiff, brown gray; _ interbeds of silty sand (6 inches thick) 111 A • at 7.5 feet trace gravel; gravel is subrounded at 142 s 10.0— .18.0feet 9.5 \moist to wet at 8.5 feet 7 - -=. Loose, brown-gray with orange mottled, II A r. 1 silty SAND (SM); wet, fine, interbeds of ` 1110. - • \sandy silt(up to 4 inches thick). / 12.5— . Medium dense, gray-brown SAND with - - silt(SP-SM); wet, fine, interbeds of silty - sand (2 inches thick). 15.0— _ . 1111 - _w.. ith orange staining at 15.5 feet !li �5 • 17.5— _ 1340 - Medium stiff, gray SILT(ML), trace clay, 18.0 - sand, and organics (fine wood); moist, _ sand is fine. 20.0— - 7 F interbeds of clay at 21.0 feet I] A 22.5— — I E2 25.0— stiff, some clay, trace to minor sand, 11 — o _ none to trace organics at 25.0 feet A • u - z u — O 27.5— 9 _ W u _ S. u - , 30.0 0 0 50 100 z DRILLED BY:Western States Soil Conservation,Inc. LOGGED BY:NAK COMPLETED:02/13/15 III 0 BORING METHOD:mud rotary(see document text) BORING BIT DIAMETER:4 7/8 inch V LI z G EODESIGNZ CAPSTONE-11-02 BORING B-3 s 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 m Portland OR 97224 APRIL 2015 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT FIGURE A-3 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR = v w BLOW COUNT INSTALLATION AND DEPTH = MATERIAL DESCRIPTION w p - •MOISTURE CONTENT% COMMENTS FEET w N MTI RQO% CORE REC% I—• —30.0 - 0 50 100 very stiff at 30.0 feet 1 t8 interbeds of sandy silt and silty sand at 31.0 feet 32.5— 35.0- - none to trace sand at 35.0 feet =8. 37.5— ao.o— stiff; interbeds of clay at 40.0 feet 0 A 1100 42.5 Stiff, gray CLAY(CH); moist. 42.0 45.0 4 • 47.5 50.0— / gray-brown, trace sand at 50.0 feet 10 100.5 Exploration completed at a depth of 51.5 52.5— 51.5 feet. 7-1 Hammer efficiency factor is 85 percent. Latitude: 45.427219 Longitude: -122.770345 255.0— (determined from Google Earth) �_ 0 0 U – Z U – t' 57.5— O _ w a U – m 60.0 rsi 0 50 100 z DRILLED BY:Western States Soil Conservation,Inc. LOGGED BY:NAK COMPLETED:02/13/15 • O 1 UBORING METHOD:mud rotary(see document text) BORING BIT DIAMETER:4 7/8 inch U G EODESIGN? CAPSTONE-11-02 BORING B-3 Z (continued) 2 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 Portland OR 97224 APRIL 2015 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT FIGURE A-3 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR ° w BLOW COUNT INSTALLATION AND DEPTH =MATERIAL DESCRIPTION ~ - a •MOISTURE CONTENT% COMMENTS FEET a o N g V) 1MRQD% 1771 CORE REC% • u 152.0 0 50 100 o�\ASPHALT CONCRETE(3.0 inches). 151 r 0.3 7 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE(8.0 1511 - D' `inches) Lost mud circulation at 1.0 . 0.9 150.7 'AGGREGATE BASE(5.0 inches). 1.3 foot. 2.5- Medium stiff, brown SILT(ML),trace - = sand and black carbonized organics; A • moist, sand is fine. s.o- stiff, minor sand at 5.0 feet _ with sand at 6.0 feet 9 A 7.s with orange mottles, sandy at 7.5 feet _ interbeds of silty sand (2 inches thick) 143 0 9 • at 8.5 feet 9.0 10.0- Medium dense, brown with orange - stained, silty SAND (SM); wet, fine, 11 P200=44% interbeds of sandy silt(1 inch thick). 8200 E A • 12.5- : 15.0- �` - 136.5 • Medium stiff, brown gray with orange 15.5 6 • stained, sandy SILT(ML)to dense, silty 135 5 _ SAND (SM); wet, sand is fine. / 16.5 17.5- Exploration completed at a depth of - 16.5 feet. - Hammer efficiency factor is 85 percent. - Latitude: 45.427041 20.0- Longitude: -122.770320 - (determined from Google Earth) I- Y Ln 22.5- 0 0 F- - z Fe 25.0- 0 u _ z u - 2 O 27.5- 0 _ W u _ a u - uri m 30.0 9 0 50 100 z DRILLED BY:Western States Soil Conservation,Inc. LOGGED BY:NAK COMPLETED:02/13/15 • O v, UBORING METHOD:mud rotary(see document text) BORING BIT DIAMETER:4 7/8inch 00 g G EODESIGN? CAPSTONE-11-02 BORING B-4 z 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 m Portland OR 97224 APRIL 201 5 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT FIGURE A-4 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR = U w BLOW COUNT INSTALLATION AND DEPTH u Q Z •MOISTURE CONTENT% COMMENTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION >w I- LI) N 150.0l�RQD% 11771 % CORE REC • • � 0 50 too —0.0 u ASPHALT CONCRETE (2.0 inches). .2 °00b'C AGGREGATE BASE(22.0 inches). o z -12s1,;5 - las.o 2.5— Medium stiff, gray SILT(ML), some 2.0 clay, minor gravel and sand; moist, r 7 gravel is angular- FILL. A • s.0— soft, with sand, trace gravel and organics (wood fragments); sand is fine t • to to coarse and angular at 5.0 feet 7.5— • 10.0— moist to wet at 9.5 feet - Gravel at Shelby tip at 9.5 _ medium stiff at 10.0 feet 5 feet. A -- _ 138.0 12.5 Medium dense, brown-gray with dark 12.0 _ •-. brown and black stained, silty SAND _ (SM); wet, fine. P200 A2 • P200=19% interbeds of sand with silt(1 inch thick) at 13.8 feet 15.0 17.5 gray; interbeds of sand with silt(up to 4 17 — inches thick) at 17.5 feet A 131 0 _ Exploration completed at a depth of 19.0 20.0— 19.0 feet. Hammer efficiency factor is 85 percent. Latitude: 45.42 7069 Longitude: -122.770769 22.5 (determined from Google Earth) a 0 i— z ii 25.0— I- 0 V — Z ::i 0 50 100 DRILLED BY:Western States Soil Conservation,Inc. LOGGED BY:NAK COMPLETED:02/13/15 • O BORING METHOD:mud rotary(see document text) BORING BIT DIAMETER:4 7/8 inch GEODESIGN? CAPSTONE-11-02 BORING B-5 E2 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 Portland OR 97224 APRIL 2015 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT FIGURE A-5 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR u Z 9 I-= Z w A BLOW COUNT INSTALLATION AND DEPTH u Q a •MOISTURE CONTENT% COMMENTS FEET a MATERIAL DESCRIPTION w 1-- 2 w 0 H N M 1 RQD% l�CORE REC% • u 150.0 0 50 100 o �ASPHALT CONCRETE (4.5 inches). 10. 6 �� � 0.4 oc�AGGREGATE BASE(11.5 inches). _ 148 7 - Medium stiff, dark brown SILT(ML), 1.3 - some clay, trace gravel, sand, and 2.5- organics (wood); moist, gravel and - sand are coarse and angular- FILL. E 1 • 5.0- 11_., _ with gravel at 6.5 feet 143 0 Shelby tip is dented at 6.5 7.5 Loose, gray, silty SAND (SM); moist, 7,0 �_ feet;gravel atShelby tip. - fine - FILL. 11 10.0--' ., very loose; wet at 10.0 feet 3 Lost 100 gallons of mud at P200 • 10.0 feet. P200=33% _ trace to minor gravel; gravel is coarse at 11.0 feet 12.5- -. 136 0 _ Medium dense, gray, silty SAND (SM); - 14.0 15.0- wet, fine. interbeds of sand and sandy silt (up to A - _ 2 inches thick) at 1 5.0 feet • 12 - with orange staining at 16.0 feet _ '33 7 / 16.3 - Medium dense, gray SAND with silt(SP- 17.5- SM); wet, fine. - 20.0- 12 Still losing mud at 20.0 feet. - - 129 0 P200 A • P200=16% _ Medium dense, gray, silty SAND (SM); 21.0 wet, fine. _ 1280 22.5-tiff, gray CLAY(CH),trace sand; moist, 22.0 - sand is fine. sr W a C) o. 25.0-j - 10 o -/ A • Exploration completed at a depth of 2e 5 W 27 5- 26.5 feet. 0 o _ _ Hammer efficiency factor is 85 percent. _ Latitude: 45.426737 ,zi _ Longitude: -122.770673 N so 0 (determined from Google Earth) 0 50 100 z DRILLED BY:Western States Soil Conservation,Inc. LOGGED BY:NAK COMPLETED:02/13/15 • O a BORING METHOD:mud rotary(see document text) BORING BIT DIAMETER:4 7/8-inch G EODESIGN2 CAPSTONE-11-02 BORING B-6 Z E2 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 m Portland OR97224 APRIL 2015 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT FIGURE A-6 Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR • 60 50 CH or OH • "A"LINE X 40 W } I— u 30 CL or OL 20 10 MH or OH • CL-ML ML or OL 0,; 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT vi m o KEY EXPLORATION SAMPLE DEPTH MOISTURE CONTENT LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX NUMBER (FEET) (PERCENT) i- • B-1 4.0 37 64 20 44 m B-2 7.5 37 NP NP NP 0 Z V Lu W O W U V ui 9 0 • a G EODESIGN? CAPSTONE-11-02 ATTERBERG LIMITS TEST RESULTS W m 15575 SW Sequoia Parkway-Suite 100 Portland OR 97224 APRIL 201 5 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT FIGURE A-7 Q Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR SAMPLE INFORMATION SIEVE ATTERBERG LIMITS MOISTURE DRY • SAMPLE CONTENT DENSITY EXPLORATION DEPTH ELEVATION GRAVEL SAND P200 LIQUID PLASTIC PLASTICITY NUMBER (FEET) (FEET) (PERCENT) (PCF) (PERCENT) (PERCENT) (PERCENT) LIMIT LIMIT INDEX B-1 4.0 149.0 19 64 20 44 B-1 6.0 147.0 30 B-1 15.0 138.0 32 B-2 2.5 150.5 36 B-2 7.5 145.5 37 NP NP NP B-2 11.0 142.0 32 10 B-3 2.5 149.5 32 B-3 7.5 144.5 34 13-3 15.0 137.0 29 B-3 25.0 127.0 30 B-3 35.0 117.0 28 B-3 45.0 107.0 28 B-4 2.5 149.5 33 III B-4 7.5 144.5 31 B-4 10.0 142.0 32 44 B-4 15.0 137.0 31 B-5 2.5 147.5 26 B-5 5.0 145.0 27 Y B-5 7.5 142.5 29 m B-5 12.5 137.5 29 19 Lir F- o B-6 2.5 147.5 23 F- z Ea- a. B-6 6.7 143.3 32 F- 0 B-6 10.0 140.0 33 33 V z U o 13-6 20.0 130.0 33 16 0 W U a B-6 25.0 125.0 31 U u6 Fo 0 W • Z 0 U cl G EODESIGNu CAPSTONE-11-02 SUMMARY OF LABORATORY DATA m m 15575.SWSequodOR972ia 24Suite 100 APRIL 2015 TIGARD DEVELOPMENT Sa Off 503.968.8787 Fax 503.968.3068 TIGARD,OR FIGURE A-8 GeoDesign,Inc. Page 1 of 1 Case Method&iCAP®Results PDIPLOT Ver.2012.2-Printed:7-Apr-2013 WSSC DRILL CAL-DRILL RIG 5 CME 75 OP Adonis Pablo OP:ECM Test date:17-Mar-2013 AR: 1.50 inA2 SP: 0.492 k/ft3 LE: 7.30 ft EM:30,000 ksl • WS:16,807.9 f/s JC: 0.35 FMX: Maximum Force CSX: Max Measured Compr.Stress VMX: Maximum Velocity EMX: Max Transferred Energy BPM: Blows per Minute ETR: Enerpy Transfer Ratio BL# depth BLC FMX VMX BPM CSX EMX ETR ft bl/ft kips f/s "' ksi k-ft (%) 1 5.25 4 49 17.6 1.9 32.8 0.289 82.4 2 5.50 4 48 17.8 39.0 32.1 0.301 85.9 3 5.63 8 49 17.3 39.3 32.7 0.299 85.5 4 5.75 8 49 16.5 39.4 32.4 0.289 82.5 5 5.88 8 48 17.1 39.3 31.8 0.287 82.0 6 6.00 8 48 17.5 39.3 32.3 0.288 82.3 7 6.10 10 49 17.4 39.3 32.4 0.288 82.4 8 6.20 10 50 16.7 39.3 33.4 0.316 90.3 9 6.30 10 49 17.1 39.3 32.4 0.293 83.7 10 6.40 10 47 17.3 39.2 31.6 0.281 80.3 11 6.50 10 48 17.1 39.4 32.3 0.296 84.7 12 8.25 8 47 17.2 1.9 31.5 0.284 81.0 13 8.38 8 47 16.8 43.2 31.2 0.278 79.6 14 8.50 8 48 16.9 43.5 32.1 0.291 83.1 15 8.60 10 48 16.4 43.6 32.1 0.294 83.9 16 8.70 10 49 16.5 43.6 32.4 0.294 83.9 17 8.80 10 47 16.0 43.6 31.6 0.289 82.5 188.90 10 47 15.8 43.5 31.6 0.288 82.2 19 9.00 10 45 16.3 43.5 30.1 0.285 81.3 20 10.25 4 47 17.3 1.9 31.6 0.287 81.9 21 10.50 4 48 16.4 43.3 31.8 0.284 81.2 22 10.75 4 47 17.6 43.4 31.5 0.288 82.3 23 11.00 4 48 17.1 43.5 32.0 0.304 86.8 24 11.17 6 49 16.7 43.5 32.6 0.317 90.5 25 11.33 6 47 16.5 43.5 31.6 0.309 88.3 26 11.50 6 47 16.9 43.5 31.6 0.304 87.0 28 13.13 8 48 17.0 38.6 32.3 0.302 86.3 29 13.25 8 47 16.9 39.1 31.7 0.292 83.3 III 30 13.38 8 49 16.2 39.1 32.4 0.299 85.5 31 13.50 8 49 15.9 39.2 32.4 0.302 86.4 32 13.67 6 48 16.1 39.2 32.2 0.304 86.8 33 13.83 6 49 15.5 39.2 32.8 0.310 88.7 34 14.00 6 48 16.2 39.1 31.8 0.305 87.2 35 15.50 2 47 16.1 1.9 31.1 0.316 90.3 36 15.75 4 50 15.9 25.9 33.4 0.321 91.8 37 16.00 4 50 16.1 43.1 33.2 0.313 89.5 38 16.17 6 48 15.6 43.4 32.0 0.302 86.3 39 16.33 6 49 16.0 43.4 32.9 0.310 88.6 40 16.50 6 48 16.3 43.5 31.9 0.307 87.6 Average 48 16.7 36.9 32.1 0.298 85.0 Std.Dev. 1 0.6 12.2 0.6 0.011 3.2 Maximum 50 17.8 43.6 33.4 0.321 91.8 Blow# 36 2 15 36 36 36 Total number of blows analyzed: 39 III Z W • • • • APPENDIX B CONE PENETROMETER PROBE EXPLORATIONS Our subsurface exploration program included two CPT probes (CPT-1 and CPT-2) to a depth of approximately 51 feet BGS. Figure 2 shows the locations of the CPT probes relative to existing and proposed site improvements. The CPT probes were performed in general accordance with ASTM D 5778 by Oregon Geotechnical Explorations, Inc. of Keizer, Oregon. The CPT is an in situ test that provides characterizes subsurface stratigraphy. The testing includes advancing a 35.6-millimeter-diameter cone equipped with a load cell and a friction sleeve through the soil profile. The cone is advanced at a rate of approximately 2 centimeters per second. Tip resistance, sleeve friction, and pore pressure at are typically recorded at 0.1 meter intervals. This appendix presents the results of the CPT probes completed for this project. • • CEO DESIGN= B-1 Capstone-11-02:041515 GeoDesign / CPT-1 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Operator: OGE TAJ CPT Date/me: 2/16/2015 8:44:44 AM Sounding: CPT-1 Location: GeoDesign/CPT-1/12800 SWAsh Tigard Cone Used: DPG1211 Job Number: 15017/GeoDesign /CPT-1/12800 SWAsh Tigard • SPT N* Soil Behavior Type* Tip Resistance Local Friction Friction Ratio Pore Pressure 60%Hammer Zone:UBC-1983 Qt TSF Fs TSF Fs/Qt(%) Pw PSI 0 0 80 0 12 0 300 0 8 0 12 -10 70 1 1 1 1 1 1/1111111 I 1 1 1 1 I I I I I 1 1' ,I 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 10 T11-1--- 1r11 _ 1 —r r — TT 11__— — � T , -- — T 'l—I——— Vis. ''2' /11 1 1 II - i.. rl ,-----,_ --- IV Y 4 1-- r • I rrf r .r..^ I I :_l— 1111 =� 11 H I�— I II 1 30 �—, ft) l I — Fr:___ a I 1 ' 1 I 40 1 1 J JJ 1 L 1 1 1 —L L — 11 JJ__— J LJ_L1— 11JJ__— ` 1 1I I I I 1 , I I 1 M I I I I I I I 1 50 ++�4--- +I—+ •60 Maximum Depth=51.02 feet Depth Increment=0.164 feet 1 sensitive fine grained IIS 4 silty clay to clay 17 silty sand to sandy silt 1110 gravelly sand to sand 12 organic material 15 clayey silt to silty clay 1 8 sand to silty sand III 11 very stiff fine grained(*) •3 clay MI 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 1 9 sand 112 sand to clayey sand(*) it hahavinr tvnP and SPT haceri nn Hata frnm I JRr-14RA GeoDesign / CPT-1 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Operator: OGE TAJ CPT Date/me: 2/16/2015 8:44:44 AM Sounding: CPT-1 Location: GeoDesign/CPT-1 /12800 SWAsh Tigard Cone Used: DPG1211 Job Number: 15017/GeoDesign /CPT-1/12800 SWAsh Tigard III Classification Data: Soil Behavior Type* Robertson and Campanella UBC-1983 Zone:UBC-1983 12 J I L 1000 0 ■m■■■� i■■ 1 L 1 1 J 0 7 ___ T1 r- T r 1 1T r 1 t 1 -_1-0 I T r1 r 1 - I 1 1 12 11 II I 1 10 Y r r y 9I 1 J y 1 1 I L J J 1 1 1 . 1 • 1 V. ( 1 I 1 100 -7--.- =-rte- T r 7 20 -r _J__ L_._ 1 L • J 1 1 L J 'I .__- (-� TY 7 I I I f r - 1 • 4111 • . .• -6 . . . . . . T-11)-(Qt) Depth 30 (Bars) .{rte) •,�/ I. • (ft) 1 1 1 1 J • ' ,I_ / 4 . L .. _, • , L J 1 . 1 1 1 1 _ 10 1 r -r r , 40 -,a--��-- 3 1 L F- 4 * --'- _1_ T r 1 1 ~- - 1 I 1 1 1 1 T 1 7 • 1 \ 1 1 I 1 ` r r 1 r 1 50 - --}-+-- 1 1 1 1 J 1 L 1 L J 2 1 u-( iiiliiiiiialI„ii„„,1II II IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIil11111 III III aiii iii,aiii 60 III 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Fs/Qt(%) 1 sensitive fine grained 14 silty clay to clay 17 silty sand to sandy silt II 10 gravelly sand to sand ■2 organic material ■5 clayey silt to silty clay -.-1 8 sand to silty sand 13 clay 16 sandy silt to clayey silt 1 12 sandd9 sand I 11 very stiff fine grained s (*) to clayeyysand(*) GeoDesign / CPT-1 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Operator OGE TAJ CPT Date/Time: 2/16/2015 8:44:44 AM Sounding: CPT-1 Location: GeoDesign/CPT-1/12800 SW Ash Tigard ID Cone Used: DPG1211 Job Number: 15017/GeoDesign /CPT-1/12800 SW Ash Tigard Selected Depth(s) (feet) 4 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII —14.764 I r I 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 I I I 1 I I 1 1 1 I I I II1 T 1 I 1 1 I I r I T 1 1 I I I 1 r 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I. --1-,---r- ---i-r--,-r-I-i---1,-r---1-r---1-r---1-L---1-1---4-r--Y-r--r-r-1-r-1--1-t---1— I I I I I I I I I I 1 I -1_L__1_!__1_L__!_L__1___1_L__J_1__J_1__1_!__1_L__!_L__1_L__1_I___1__J_L__J— I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I -l_i__T_i__T_r__i_r 1_T__y_T__1_T__1_T__l_}I __l_T__-tI_r__T_r__T_r 1_T_F 1_T__1— I I I I I I I I 1 I -4-I,- I I 1--4-LI I--1-L-- -I L__1 1 _L_II_ -_ _. -- - --4- --J_ --1I 1-L-- -L-- - _1--4- _-4— I 11 1J 1I 11I 1I I L11 I 1IIL J I 11 I I I I I I I I I 1 1 I I 1 I 1 I I 1 I I I I r 1 1 T I 1 1 1 I I r I l I I I I I I I I — I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I --I-F--,-1'--r-i--;-i--r-F-1-r--y-}--y-t--1-L--1-r--L-F--+_F-I-+-I--1-t-I- -r--y- 1 I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I 1_L 1 1 L I 1 IL J L IL J 1 1 L I L 1 I 1 I 1 L J I I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 1 I I I 1 I 1 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 I 1 1 I I I 1 I 1 1 I I I 3 —_4-1-1-1-1-_/-1_--1_1-_-4_1--1_4-1-__I-1---4-1.-_-1_1--1-L.-I-1- _LJ_1_LJ_1__-1_L__J_L_1_J_L__J_L__1_L__1_L__1_L_I_1_ J_1__J_L__J____1_L__1 I I I 1 I I 1 I i I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 I I I I I 1 1 I 1 I I I I1 I I I I I I I I I 1 r I T 1 I 1 I I I r 1 I I I I I 1 r I 1 I 1 1 I 1 I I 1 I 1 I -4-F__+_L__+_F_-1_F-,_+--J_ 1 I 1 I I I II I I I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 1 I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I 1 1 I 1 I I I 1 1 I I 1 1 I I 1 I I I 1 I I I I 1 1 1 I I I I I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I I I -.1-1,__-1 LI __1 1._1_-_1, _L__1I 1_- __. .J -__I-L__J_1__J ___1_ -__1- __-_f_1L__1_L__1_1_-J_1, -_J_LI _-J— I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I I 1 I I I I I I r 1 1 T 1 I 1 I I I r 1 T I I I I I 1 r I I I I I I i 1 I I -y_F__+_L_-+_F__ } J I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1_F__ __ 1_+ 1-__y_I __y_L__.y_F__1_F__+_F__+-F y-+_L y_4,--_y— I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I _ 1 I I I I I 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 I 1 I I 1 1 I 1 I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 _1_L J_1_L J_1___1_L__J L_I_J_L__J____1_L__1_L__1_L_I_1_L J_L__J_L__J____1_L__ I I I I I I , Ore 2 - I 1 1 I I I 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I I I I I 1 1 I 1 I I 1 1 I 1 I I I I Ir 1 I I 1 1 "Y I 1 r T 1 I I I I r 1 — I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I I I 1 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _ I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 –l-r--T-1- -T-r--+-I--1-T---I-r--l-r--1-r--/-4---T-r--4-r--T-r'--r-I--1-T--1-T--/— I 1 I I I 1 I 1 1 1 I I I I '1 1 I I 1 I I I I 1 I I I 1 1 I I I 1 I 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I I I I I I 1 I 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 I I 1 I I -7-,---7-r--7-r--T-r--7---1-T 1 1 1 1 r---1-1'--Y 1/ 1 I I 1 I 1 1 I1 I I I I I I I I 1 7 1 1 1 r I --I-A -_4,-L--+-F__1_F--+__J- I 1 I I I I 1 I 1 I 1 I I 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 /, , r I 1 T I I I 1 I I 1 I I I 1 I I /L) I I I I I r I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I 1 I :- I I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 I I -7 F--Y_1'--Y-F--+-F--t---I-r--7-t--7-t--7-L--T-F--+-F--T_I-__.P_F-I_T_I--I_r__7— I I I 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 I I 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1_L_1_!-L J_L___I_1__J_L_I_1_L__1____1_L__!_L__1_L_I_1__J_L__J_L__J____1_L__ 1 I 1 I I I 11 I 11 I I I I 11 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I i I I I I 1 I II -Ir---1-IF--T- --+I I r--- tiI-rI —i-r---,-r, --1- -- -r1,I Ir--- TI I r- --T-Ir-- -1-r1 --1— I I I rIT-- IrI 1 I -- TI -- I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I I 1 1 I I I I 1 1 1 1 I I 1 I I I I 1 I 1 1 I r I 1 T 1 1 1 1 I 1 r 1 l i I 1 1 I I — 1 1 I 1 I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 1 I 71-F--r-LI --+-F 1-- -F--t-F J-r---1-t---1-t---1-+--1-F--4-F----1-1---1--F-1-1.---1-1.---1— 1 I I 1 1 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I JI_L,I __1_ __1I_ILI__ -I IL__ ___- __J_ __J_LI J__ _ __1_L__!_ __ _IL__1_I_ _1__J_ __J— I I! ! 1I I11I I! I LI1I IJ1 LI I 1 I I I I I 1 1 I I I I I I I 1 tI l_�__T_F__T_I I I__i_r__T__j_T__1-T__1-T__,I_ t__,_r__y_r__T_Ir__T_1r.�_T_F1_TI __1— I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 I -J_L_-4_L__1_L__1_L J_1_L_I_1--4-1__J_1--1-L-_J-L_-1-LI IJ--1_L_-1_L _ _-J- -_J— I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I 11I I I I I I 1 1 1 I 1 I I I I I I 1 1 I I I I I r 1 I T I 1 1 1 1 1 r — 1 I I I 1 I I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I 117 I I I I -y_F__+_L__r_F__1_F__+_F J-}__y-t.--y—I-__y_L__r_F__1-I I I I I I I II I I II , 1 r T-i--T-F y-i--y-i--y— O I 1 I I I I II I I I I I 1 I 1 1 I I I 1 I 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 II/ Time:(minutes) Maximum Pressure=3.432 psi GeoDesian/CPT-1/12800 SW Ash Tigard GeoDesign / CPT-1 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Operator OGE TAJ CPT Date/Time: 2/16/2015 8:44:44 AM Sounding: CPT-1 Location: GeoDesign/CPT-1/12800 SWAsh Tigard • Cone Used: DPG1211 Job Number: 15017/GeoDesign /CPT-1/12800 SWAsh Tigard Selected(feet)Depth(s) 3 I I I I I I I 17.552 1 - ___' r1 !`"� - I r Y I rt — I 1 I I L L I J r 7 r 7 1 r * r + -I _ 1 I L 1 L I J 2 r 7 r T -1 — 1 I 1 L 1 L 1 J re (p r -r r7 -1 _f - 1 L 1 L I J _ I 1 71- 1 1 71 71 - I tl" I r -rr t -i - 1 I- 4 H + - I - I L 1 L I J r 7 r1 - T 1 r 1 r 7 -I - 1 1 - L 4 44 J I 1 L 1 L I J - 0 i 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 III Time:(minutes) Maximum Pressure=2.945 psi GeoDesian/CPT-1/12800 SW Ash Tiaard GeoDesign / CPT-1 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard th 3.281ft �* +_ I I I I I I I I Delay 6.29ms Velocity* I I I I I I I I I I I I Depth 6.562ft I I I I I I I I Delay8.87ms Ref 3.281ft ___ Velocity Velocity 948.44ft/s Depth 9.843ft I_+ { I i Delay 12.07ms Ref 6.562ft ____ Velocity 905.69ft/s Depth 13.123ft I +I I I I I Ref 9.843ft i Delay 17.97ms Velocity 520.87ft/s I I I I I I I I I Depth 16.404ft I + I I I I I I I Ref 13.123ft i Delay 22.62ms -- Velocity 677.81ft/s I I I Depth 19.685ft I I + I I { I I Ref 16.404ft i ' 1 Delay 27.81ms Velocity 614.48ft/s Depth 22.966ft . I I I I I I Ref 19.685ft - ___-_ i_ ; i I I Delay 32.62ms . 1 I r_ Velocity 669.55ft/s Depth 26.247ft I I I + I I I I I Ref 22.966ft i Delay 36.68ms - _ , Velocity 795.73ft/s Depth 29.528ft I I I i i I i Delay 40.00ms Ref 26.247ft Velocity 976.78ft/s Depth 32.808ft Delay 43.51ms Ref 29.528ft Velocity 924.64ft/s h 36.089ftIll I I I I I I f k 32.808ft i i i 7h ' I � Delay 47.07ms Velocity 916.01ft/s Depth 39.370ft . I I I I I I I I I I I Dela 50.70ms Ref 36.089ft - i Y "I `--- , _ Velocity 897.44ft/s Depth 42.815ft I I I I I I I I I Ref 39.370ft r Delay 54.57ms Velocity 886.09ft/s Depth 45.932ft I I I I I I I I I Delay57.81ms Ref 42.815ft r r __ Velocity 956.97ft/s Depth 49.213ft I I I I Ref 45.932ft , ; Delay 61.13ms 1 , Velocity 984.22ft/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 170 80 90 100 Time (ms) Hammer to Rod String Distance 1.3 (m) * = Not Determined • GeoDesian/CPT-1/12800 SW Ash Tiaard GeoDesign / CPT-1 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Operator: OGE TAJ CPT Date/Time: 2/16/2015 8:44:44 AM Sounding: CPT-1 Location: GeoDesign I CPT-1/12800 SWAsh Tigard Cone Used: DPG1211 Job Number: 15017/GeoDesign /CPT-1 /12800 SWAsh Tigard • SPT N* Soil Behavior Type* Seismic Velocity Tip Resistance 60%Hammer Zone:UBC-1983 (ft/s) Qt TSF 0 0 160 0 12 0 1000 0 300 I•■■■■III•I•■ I I I I ' 948.458 1 1 5.7087 I 1 1 777-1-1-1 ---r7520866IT 7 7 - _ 1 11 , 1 1 1 p71j.4215 1 l H 1 I I I I I I ��- Nr 20 — – % ._a ____LTh I I 1 I 795.7349 III I 1 1 1 1 ---�-- 76.7717 i _=P :41 _ Depth 30 — - ,4 6391 _ (f) I 1 9 6.0106 ice' -- I S� 897.441 —,. C - , /T " ( 1 1 \/ I 40 - --1-"-L- 1 1 J J_I_I _1-__L 1___L 86.0892 _( J. J - I 56.9882 984.2191 50 - --4-1--I-I-- -I-4-1-1-1 • 60 Maximum Depth=51.02 feet Depth Increment=0.164 feet 1 sensitive fine grained 14 silty clay to clay 17 silty sand to sandy silt 110 gravelly sand to sand 12 organic material 15 clayey silt to silty clay 53 8 sand to silty sand I 11 very stiff fine grained(*) 13 clay 16 sandy silt to clayey silt El 9 sand 112 sand to clayey sand(*) it hPhavinr tvne and SPT hacari nn riafa frnm I IRC-19R3 L/CI LCI 111G.VL1 1 L/ 1V/ LV1J V.'tZYZ !L,-1 Operator:OGE TAJ Location:GeoDesign / CPT-1 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Cone ID:DPG1211 Job Number:15017 / GeoDesign / CPT-1 / 12800 SW Ash Tigar, Customer: Units:English Depth Qt Fs Fs/Qt Pw SPT N* Soil Behavior Type (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 2 241.4 2. 110 0.874 0. 93 32 9 sand . 98 252.2 2.100 0.833 1.37 42 9 sand 1.15 161.0 1.851 1. 150 1.50 34 9 sand 1.31 115.9 1.789 1.543 2.20 29 8 sand to silty sand 1.48 84 .6 1.868 2.208 2.06 27 7 silty sand to sandy silt 1.64 49.3 1.541 3. 124 2.44 21 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 1.80 27.5 1.220 4.438 2.36 17 5 clayey silt to silty clay 1. 97 28.3 0.922 3.260 2.22 13 5 clayey silt to silty clay 2.13 24.2 0.789 3.266 2.01 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 2.30 22.9 0. 680 2. 969 1.83 11 5 clayey silt to silty clay 2.46 20.2 0.583 2. 880 1.70 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 2.62 16.2 0.652 4.015 3.01 11 4 silty clay to clay 2.79 16. 9 0.675 3. 998 4.01 12 4 silty clay to clay 2. 95 24 .7 0.859 3. 472 4. 65 15 4 silty clay to clay 3.12 26.8 1.419 5.293 5.11 25 3 clay 3.28 26.5 1.451 5.468 5.47 26 3 clay 3.44 29.6 1.386 4. 678 7.56 27 3 clay 3. 61 28.4 1.343 4.736 8.35 27 3 clay 3.77 26.2 1.209 4. 609 8.56 24 3 clay 3.94 20.1 1.168 5.797 9.33 21 3 clay 4.10 18.8 1.173 6.226 10. 14 18 3 clay 4 .27 17.3 1.422 8.221 10.83 18 3 clay 4 .43 20.3 1.277 6.284 11.84 18 3 clay 4.59 19.2 0.992 5. 158 13. 03 18 3 clay 4.76 18.3 0.792 4.324 12. 95 19 3 clay 4.92 21.8 1.419 6.510 14.07 26 3 clay 5.09 40.1 1.955 4. 878 16. 90 34 3 clay 5.25 45.6 2.260 4. 954 19. 97 28 4 silty clay to clay 41 1 48.1 2.020 4.200 22. 92 30 4 silty clay to clay 8 46.2 1.780 3.853 25.23 30 4 silty clay to clay 5.74 48.4 2.353 4.866 33. 61 31 4 silty clay to clay 5. 91 53.0 2.698 5.093 43.23 31 4 silty clay to clay 6.07 46.3 2.318 5.010 47.07 30 4 silty clay to clay 6.23 40.2 1.762 4.386 48. 42 41 3 clay 6.40 40.6 2.759 6.802 52.28 38 3 clay 6.56 38.0 2.559 6.733 60.46 38 3 clay 6.73 41.6 1.985 4.777 31. 62 37 3 clay 6.89 35.5 1.297 3. 654 34.54 18 5 clayey silt to silty clay 7.05 36.8 1.080 2. 933 38.81 17 5 clayey silt to silty clay 7.22 32.9 1.481 4. 497 43. 16 24 4 silty clay to clay 7.38 44 .2 2.197 4. 968 49.13 40 3 clay 7.55 49.1 2.711 5.517 49. 13 44 3 clay 7.71 44 .5 2.462 5.531 46. 08 44 3 clay 7.87 43.9 2.302 5.241 42. 97 31 4 silty clay to clay 8.04 58.3 2.168 3.719 39. 16 27 5 clayey silt to silty clay 8.20 66.5 1.668 2.508 27.31 24 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 8.37 65.7 1.625 2.474 21.30 24 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 8.53 58.5 1.595 2.727 17.85 23 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 8.69 55.1 0. 613 1. 112 16.22 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 8.86 51.5 1.091 2. 119 14.73 18 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 9.02 35. 6 1.180 3.314 13.76 17 5 clayey silt to silty clay 9.19 18.3 0.796 4.356 12.79 14 4 silty clay to clay 9.35 13.0 0.691 5.331 12.84 14 3 clay 9.51 13.2 0.594 4.500 14. 03 12 3 clay 9.68 12.9 0.774 6.008 14.32 12 3 clay 9.84 10. 9 0.690 6.355 14. 97 12 3 clay 1Elli13.4 0.471 3.502 23. 94 13 3 clay 7 15.3 0.520 3.395 23.42 7 5 clayey silt to silty clay oil behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 J./Cpl-ll L/l.. LJ LJ/' L LW JLL LV JV11 LJG 11Q V1V1 1 G (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60%% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 10.33 18.1 0.467 2.584 22.79 10 5 clayey silt to silty clay 10.50 30.6 0.526 1.718 20.00 10 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 10. 66 27.4 0.554 2.025 15. 65 10 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 10.83 22.3 0.863 3.873 13. 89 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 09 25.1 0. 606 2.410 13.78 13 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 5 52.5 0.496 0. 945 13. 14 15 7 silty sand to sandy silt 2 62.8 0.630 1.004 10.72 19 7 silty sand to sandy silt 11.48 63. 6 0.610 0. 958 8.58 16 8 sand to silty sand 11. 65 69.0 0.624 0. 905 7. 43 17 8 sand to silty sand 11.81 74.4 0.634 0.851 6.32 17 8 sand to silty sand 11.98 73.4 0.856 1. 166 5.47 23 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.14 65.7 1.280 1.948 4.42 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.30 53.0 1.518 2.864 4.50 22 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 12.47 50.7 1.413 2.786 4.25 22 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 12.63 65.6 1.069 1. 630 4. 13 19 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.80 63.6 0.897 1.411 3. 92 21 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.96 68.6 0.570 0.831 3.31 21 7 silty sand to sandy silt 13.12 64 .3 0.962 1.495 2.85 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 13.29 54.1 1.460 2. 697 2. 15 22 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13.45 50.4 1.067 2. 115 2. 13 19 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13. 62 43.4 0.994 2.288 2. 08 17 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13.78 41.2 0.765 1.859 1.81 16 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13.94 43. 1 1.277 2. 963 1.55 16 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 14 . 11 38.2 1.611 4.215 1.39 22 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 14 .27 88.7 1.599 1. 803 1.46 30 7 silty sand to sandy silt 14 .44 152. 9 2.028 1.326 1.03 31 8 sand to silty sand 14 . 60 146.9 1.809 1.232 0.75 32 8 sand to silty sand 14 .76 106.6 1.562 1. 465 0. 60 27 8 sand to silty sand 14.93 85.3 1.269 1.488 2.52 22 8 sand to silty sand 15.09 79.7 0.535 0. 671 1. 87 19 8 sand to silty sand 15.26 77.9 0.745 0.956 1.42 19 8 sand to silty sand 15.42 75. 6 0.760 1.005 0.75 18 8 sand to silty sand 613 67.0 0.874 1.304 0.54 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 65.7 1.190 1.810 0.53 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 72.5 1.307 1.804 0.45 21 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.08 56.3 1.292 2.296 0.42 19 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.24 47.6 0.905 1.899 0.41 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.40 63.3 0.749 1. 184 0.40 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.57 77.2 0.997 1.291 0. 80 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.73 66.0 1.660 2.516 0. 68 23 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 16.90 37.0 1.690 4.572 0.74 23 5 clayey silt to silty clay 17.06 41.5 1.343 3.234 0. 90 25 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 17.22 114 .7 1.405 1.225 1.37 24 8 sand to silty sand 17.39 145.7 1.277 0.877 0. 91 32 8 sand to silty sand 17.55 135. 6 1.313 0. 968 0.71 28 8 sand to silty sand 17.72 64.7 1.385 2. 140 2. 64 25 7 silty sand to sandy silt 17.88 33.2 1.229 3.702 2.72 18 5 clayey silt to silty clay 18.04 17.5 0.881 5.044 2.88 21 3 clay 18.21 15.4 0.850 5.529 4.48 17 3 clay 18.37 21.5 0.800 3.717 6. 88 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 18.54 40.1 0.760 1.896 6.73 13 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 18.70 39.9 0.859 2.156 9.80 19 7 silty sand to sandy silt 18.86 101.7 0.843 0.829 7.74 19 8 sand to silty sand 19.03 100.9 1.192 1. 181 5.85 24 8 sand to silty sand 19.19 99.2 1.377 1.388 5. 64 26 8 sand to silty sand 19.36 131.0 1.670 1.275 5.05 31 8 sand to silty sand 19.52 156.8 1.521 0. 970 3. 45 37 8 sand to silty sand 19.69 171.7 1.496 0.872 2. 98 36 8 sand to silty sand 19.85 122.5 1.541 1.258 2.50 30 8 sand to silty sand 20.01 78.8 1.699 2. 155 2.48 28 7 silty sand to sandy silt 20.18 58.4 1. 643 2.814 2.51 27 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 4104 72.0 1.417 1. 970 2.53 26 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 1 73.5 1.566 2. 132 2.09 23 7 silty sand to sandy silt oil behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 L/Ge Lll 4L LJ 1J/VL LW JL 1 1V JV11 IJC11C1 VSV1 ,y.pc (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 20.67 73.8 1.394 1.890 1. 90 25 7 silty sand to sandy silt 20.83 85.6 1.657 1. 937 1. 63 24 7 silty sand to sandy silt 21.00 69.0 1.982 2.874 1.42 26 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 21.16 46.9 2.060 4.389 1.37 24 5 clayey silt to silty clay 103 34 .5 1.693 4.902 1.48 25 4 silty clay to clay 9 37.0 1.730 4. 672 1.77 33 3 clay 65 30.6 1.793 5.868 2.36 30 3 clay 21.82 26.0 1.616 6.219 3. 03 30 3 clay 21.98 38.0 1.679 4.414 3.52 30 3 clay 22.15 30.1 1.797 5. 971 4.01 30 3 clay 22.31 26.5 1.366 5. 160 5.36 27 3 clay 22.47 27.7 1.726 6.237 6.59 32 3 clay 22.64 45.0 1. 947 4.323 7.78 21 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 22.80 92.1 1.648 1.789 5.51 26 7 silty sand to sandy silt 22.97 111.2 1.986 1.786 3.22 34 7 silty sand to sandy silt 23.13 119.9 2.086 1.740 2.83 37 7 silty sand to sandy silt 23.29 120.0 2.094 1.745 2.15 38 7 silty sand to sandy silt 23.46 115.8 2.340 2.022 1. 65 36 7 silty sand to sandy silt 23. 62 100.9 2.499 2.477 1.38 32 7 silty sand to sandy silt 23.79 88.8 2.378 2. 678 1.23 33 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 23.95 67.0 2.418 3.611 1.14 33 5 clayey silt to silty clay 24.11 53.2 2.456 4. 617 1. 10 29 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 24 .28 103.6 2.808 2.710 1. 06 41 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 24 .44 167.5 3.999 2.388 0.88 50 7 silty sand to sandy silt 24.61 203.4 4.568 2.246 0. 66 62 7 silty sand to sandy silt 24 .77 208.3 4 .939 2.371 0.47 66 7 silty sand to sandy silt 24 .93 206.1 4 .595 2.230 0.27 64 7 silty sand to sandy silt 25.10 187.5 4.228 2.255 -0.72 59 7 silty sand to sandy silt 25.26 165.2 3.219 1. 949 -0. 91 52 7 silty sand to sandy silt 25.43 135.2 2.707 2.003 -0. 96 41 7 silty sand to sandy silt 25.59 83.9 2.564 3.054 -0. 94 34 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 25.75 45.7 2.442 5.338 -1.05 26 5 clayey silt to silty clay 25.92 34.1 1.973 5.783 -1.07 34 3 clay 8 27.5 2.780 10.109 -1.00 31 3 clay 5 36.1 3.397 9.413 -0. 63 45 3 clay 26.41 77.2 3.756 4.864 2.03 80 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 26.57 138.8 4 .101 2.954 1.51 48 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 26.74 161.3 3.995 2.477 0. 16 47 7 silty sand to sandy silt 26. 90 143.8 4 .140 2.880 -0.34 54 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 27.07 115.8 4 .561 3.940 -0.80 55 5 clayey silt to silty clay 27.23 86.8 4.763 5.487 -0.89 82 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 27.40 54 .9 3.704 6.746 -0. 95 70 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 27.56 78.6 2.728 3.470 -1.03 39 4 silty clay to clay 27.72 51.0 2.741 5.377 -1.02 36 4 silty clay to clay 27.89 37.6 2.009 5.342 -1. 07 31 4 silty clay to clay 28.05 56.2 1.781 3. 171 -0. 99 26 5 clayey silt to silty clay 28.22 69.1 1.613 2.335 -0. 96 27 5 clayey silt to silty clay 28.38 43.2 2.221 5. 142 -0. 96 31 4 silty clay to clay 28.54 34.2 2.511 7.350 -0. 96 48 3 clay 28.71 73.1 3.798 5. 194 -0. 93 55 3 clay 28.87 66.0 4 .347 6.583 -0.78 69 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 29.04 77.9 3.889 4. 992 -0.79 83 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 29.20 116.4 3.660 3.145 -0.50 41 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 29.36 128.1 2.833 2.212 -0.76 40 7 silty sand to sandy silt 29.53 128.2 2.836 2.213 -0. 92 40 7 silty sand to sandy silt 29. 69 118.1 2.594 2. 197 0. 93 38 7 silty sand to sandy silt 29.86 106.4 2.308 2.168 -0.04 34 7 silty sand to sandy silt 30.02 92.8 2.122 2.287 -0.30 30 7 silty sand to sandy silt 30.18 82.9 2.008 2.422 -0.51 32 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 30.35 74 .9 1.978 2. 640 -0. 68 29 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 30.51 68.4 2.048 2. 995 -0. 81 26 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 468 59.7 1.499 2.512 -0. 92 23 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 4 48.8 2.021 4. 143 -1.01 31 4 silty clay to clay oil behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 L/C rl LI I VL £0 £0I v,- L VV C L L 1V (ft) TSF TSF (%) JVll liciiavlvl. iyyc PSI 60% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 31.00 37.7 2.767 7.334 -1.04 48 3 clay 31.17 62.8 4.484 7. 138 -0. 98 83 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 31.33 160.4 5.748 3.583 -1.06 73 12 sand to clayey sand (*) 31.50 235.8 6.769 2.871 -1.28 69 7 silty sand to sandy silt 46 252.2 7.668 3.041 -1.41 77 7 silty sand to sandy silt 2 233.4 6.702 2. 871 -1.49 71 7 silty sand to sandy silt 3 .99 181.2 6.086 3.358 -1.75 65 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 32.15 95.4 3.275 3. 434 -1.53 43 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 32.32 63.0 3.197 5.072 -1.48 68 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 32.48 53.7 3. 651 6.798 -1.42 57 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 32.64 60.7 4 .204 6. 929 -1.43 58 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 32.81 67.7 5.403 7. 982 -1. 16 72 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 32.97 98.4 5.934 6.028 -0.47 104 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 33.14 161.3 6.426 3. 983 -0.82 136 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 33.30 167.5 7.125 4.255 -1.43 150 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 33.46 142.5 7.292 5. 116 -1.81 130 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 33.63 96.0 5.198 5.413 -1.80 92 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 33.79 50.9 2.555 5.021 -2. 01 59 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 33.96 37.5 2.439 6.504 -2. 04 50 3 clay 34.12 67.0 3.242 4.837 -2. 09 34 5 clayey silt to silty clay 34.28 110.5 3.474 3. 144 -2.20 46 5 clayey silt to silty clay 34.45 107.8 4 .059 3.767 -2.24 50 5 clayey silt to silty clay 34.61 96.6 4 .382 4.534 -2.25 47 5 clayey silt to silty clay 34 .78 88.3 3.848 4.358 -2.35 78 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 34 . 94 59.9 3.033 5. 067 -2.55 39 4 silty clay to clay 35.10 36.9 2.330 6.318 -2.50 43 3 clay 35.27 37.9 2.079 5. 482 -2. 49 39 3 clay 35.43 46.0 2.354 5. 117 -2. 10 39 3 clay 35.60 39.3 1.812 4. 615 -2.09 37 3 clay 35.76 29.6 2.187 7.383 -2. 05 46 3 clay 35.93 75.1 3.480 4. 632 -1. 97 60 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 36.09 83.2 4.009 4.816 -2.03 71 11 very stiff fine grained (*) ill 25 63.1 3.198 5. 068 -1.20 61 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 2 46.3 2. 916 6.292 -1.33 55 3 clay 8 63.0 3.068 4. 873 -1.36 36 4 silty clay to clay 36.75 59.3 2.643 4.457 -1.39 33 4 silty clay to clay 36.91 33.3 2.136 6.409 -1. 43 39 3 clay 37.07 30.7 2.086 6.798 -1.39 37 3 clay 37.24 51.7 2.702 5.228 -1.24 43 3 clay 37.40 53.8 2.641 4. 913 -1.24 33 4 silty clay to clay 37.57 48.2 2.420 5.018 -1.34 45 3 clay 37.73 37.7 2.127 5. 641 -1.36 36 3 clay 37.89 25.8 1.536 5. 955 -1.34 26 3 clay 38.06 17.5 0.899 5. 141 -1.24 19 3 clay 38.22 14 .7 0. 678 4.599 -1. 04 15 3 clay 38.39 16.3 0.834 5. 102 -0.80 17 3 clay 38.55 23.2 1.068 4. 605 0.34 15 4 silty clay to clay 38.71 32.0 1.204 3.762 0. 62 15 5 clayey silt to silty clay 38.88 38. 9 1.222 3. 144 0.73 18 5 clayey silt to silty clay 39.04 39. 1 1.452 3.713 0.72 18 5 clayey silt to silty clay 39.21 37.3 1.680 4.507 0.72 24 4 silty clay to clay 39.37 36.7 1.480 4. 033 0.76 21 4 silty clay to clay 39.53 25.2 0.918 3. 647 1. 98 13 5 clayey silt to silty clay 39.70 19.9 0.566 2. 847 2.03 10 5 clayey silt to silty clay 39.86 17.6 0.543 3. 082 2.27 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 40.03 16.9 0.520 3. 081 2.82 8 5 clayey silt to silty clay 40.19 15.8 0.446 2.816 3.15 8 5 clayey silt to silty clay 40.35 17.1 0.433 2.541 3.43 8 5 clayey silt to silty clay 40.52 15.4 0.423 2.747 3.74 7 5 clayey silt to silty clay 40.68 14 .5 0.348 2. 404 3. 96 7 5 clayey silt to silty clay 40.85 14 .2 0.325 2.290 4.21 7 5 clayey silt to silty clay 41,1 14 .2 0.439 3.096 4.46 10 4 silty clay to clay 7 17.0 0.665 3. 912 4. 65 11 4 silty clay to clay oil behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 LIG&L11 V/l. LJ 10/ Wu LW JLJ. LV JV11 LGi1CIV1V1. lypc (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 41.34 20. 9 0.887 4.251 4.79 19 3 clay 41.50 22.5 1.027 4.560 4.86 21 3 clay 41.67 23.8 1.182 4. 973 4. 92 23 3 clay 41.83 24 . 9 1.290 5. 177 5.04 24 3 clay 1109 26.5 1.309 4. 934 5.41 25 3 clay 6 27.0 1.280 4.736 5.57 26 3 clay 2 27.3 1. 122 4. 110 5.75 18 4 silty clay to clay 42.49 28.4 1.111 3. 912 5. 93 17 4 silty clay to clay 42.65 26.5 1.474 5.562 6.00 26 3 clay 42.81 26.3 1.476 5. 609 6.00 27 3 clay 42. 98 31.2 1.618 5. 186 7.65 28 3 clay 43.14 31.4 1.712 5.460 7. 94 30 3 clay 43.31 31.4 1. 672 5.323 8.15 30 3 clay 43.47 30.1 1.476 4. 911 8.43 29 3 clay 43.64 29.6 1.315 4.437 8. 60 19 4 silty clay to clay 43.80 31.6 1.380 4.368 9.06 20 4 silty clay to clay 43.96 34 .7 1.565 4.511 9.31 22 4 silty clay to clay 44.13 36.1 1.661 4.597 9.29 22 4 silty clay to clay 44.29 34.8 1.472 4.225 9.54 22 4 silty clay to clay 44.46 33.5 1.362 4.063 9. 85 22 4 silty clay to clay 44 .62 34 .9 1.537 4.400 9. 97 22 4 silty clay to clay 44 .78 37.1 1.960 5.284 9. 93 35 3 clay 44.95 36.7 1. 990 5.423 9.87 35 3 clay 45.11 36. 1 1.880 5.212 10.09 34 3 clay 45.28 34 .5 1.950 5. 648 10.07 33 3 clay 45.44 32.0 1.855 5.792 10.00 31 3 clay 45.60 31.3 1.551 4. 952 10.08 30 3 clay 45.77 29.1 1.412 4. 852 10. 14 28 3 clay 45.93 27.7 1.376 4. 964 10.20 27 3 clay 46.10 27.2 1.340 4. 919 10.51 26 3 clay 46.26 28.1 1.321 4 .709 10. 65 26 3 clay 46.42 27.1 1.316 4.853 10.77 26 3 clay 46.59 26.5 1.284 4.842 10. 85 26 3 clay 411,526.5 1.202 4.543 10. 90 25 3 clay 2 26.1 1.089 4. 176 11.04 17 4 silty clay to clay 47.08 27.7 1.109 4.006 11. 49 18 4 silty clay to clay 47.24 29.4 1.183 4.028 11.53 18 4 silty clay to clay 47.41 29.1 1.178 4 . 053 11. 68 18 4 silty clay to clay 47.57 28.0 1.137 4.063 11. 96 18 4 silty clay to clay 47.74 27.6 1.122 4.066 11. 94 17 4 silty clay to clay 47.90 26.1 0.943 3.619 12.02 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 48.06 24.2 0.766 3.168 12. 18 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 48.23 22.5 0.581 2.585 12.37 11 5 clayey silt to silty clay 48.39 22.0 0.610 2.771 12.53 10 5 clayey silt to silty clay 48.56 20.7 0.605 2. 924 13.37 10 5 clayey silt to silty clay 48.72 20.3 0. 612 3.011 13.71 10 5 clayey silt to silty clay 48.88 20.3 0.572 2. 818 14.12 10 5 clayey silt to silty clay 49.05 19.4 0.489 2.525 14.43 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 49.21 18.4 0.515 2.791 14.75 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 49.38 18.8 0.474 2.518 19. 95 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 49.54 19.4 0.357 1. 840 20.86 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 49.70 17.9 0.319 1.785 21.56 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 49.87 18.5 0.420 2.269 22.29 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 50.03 20.5 0.479 2.334 23.04 8 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 50.20 24 .8 0.373 1.503 23.50 9 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 50.36 21.7 0.333 1.534 24.09 8 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 50.52 19.9 0.325 1. 633 25.53 8 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 50.69 23.5 0.642 2.740 26.58 14 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 50.85 34 .3 1.437 4. 189 29.77 20 5 clayey silt to silty clay 51.02 50.7 -32768 -32768 31. 60 0 0 <out of range> 1111 behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 GeoDesign / CPT-2 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Operator: OGE TAJ CPT Date/me: 2/16/2015 11:45:41 AM Sounding: CPT-2 Location: GeoDesign/CPT-2/12800 SWAsh Tigard Cone Used: DPG1211 Job Number: 15017/GeoDesign /CPT-2/12800 SWAsh Tigard IIISPT N* Soil Behavior Type* Tip Resistance Local Friction Friction Ratio Pore Pressure 60%Hammer Zone:UBC-1983 Qt TSF Fs TSF Fs/Qt(%) Pw PSI 0 0 80 0 12 0 300 0 8 0 12 -10 70 II I I I _ I � III II r: III - 1 1 1 1 I } I 10 1 I ■ 1 6,.-1,1-°uffi`E I I 20 I , H Ewa, > , „ I, „ r� 1/ • „,. .d ,,_ --_, J :pth 30 — - - — - - - k) ' III , , I 40 11 JJ__- J1L1L L L J _III__ -J_ J_1-1- 4 I J...1_- � I I I I I I , -R I I , _ I ff I I I t--'u I I - I I , +} -+-- •60 Maximum Depth=51.18 feet Depth Increment=0.164 feet 1 sensitive fine grained n4 silty clay to clay MI 7 silty sand to sandy silt 110 gravelly sand to sand 12 organic material IIIc 5 clayey silt to silty clay 1 8 sand to silty sand ■11 very stiff fine grained(*) 13 clay II sandy silt to clayey silt 19 sand 112 sand to clayey sand(*) it hahavinr tuna and SPT haceri nn data frnm I IR(:_1 RR3 GeoDesign / CPT-2 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Operator: OGE TAJ CPT Date/Time: 2/16/2015 11:45:41 AM Sounding: CPT-2 Location: GeoDesign/CPT-2/12800 SWAsh Tigard Cone Used: DPG1211 Job Number: 15017/GeoDesign /CPT-2/12800 SWAsh Tigard III Classification Data: Soil Behavior Type* Robertson and Campanella UBC-1983 0 Zone:UBC-1983 12 0 1000 1 1 ■I♦I♦■IIMMII♦■ JI 1 L 4 L J , \_ I/ 1 i -r Ir r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -- 1 I T r 7 r 1 — I I I I I — 1 /_� 1 _ -I- r I I I lir r 7 1 1 1 I 1- / i 1 IL`{M 110 I I _, 1 L J • ' ra tr7z a1.sa ,?. I ' 100 — - 1 r T, r T , I / ..1 L -r L J 20 -_,,:,..„.. „.„2„...,,."13,1-,--,-- I ----•.1 T r T r 1 I ___ I • •. ., . 1 (Bars) P(T.iQ� Depth 307_97-'1-4--4-- • (fi) • I I 4i J • 1 L 1 • L J . . .4 .. I I 10 — `_ IEII (/( 40 r ir ti_, \ 1 I I 1 I I I I I 1 7 i- 1 11 I 1 T r , 50 I a 1 I J 1 L 1 L J 2 1 �l-l-�-t"tTl� ����ij III IIIIpIIH IIIIIIH1 IIHHIII 111111111 I�IIIIIII X11111111 IHHHII HIHIHI 60 110 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Fs/Qt(%) 1 sensitive fine grained 14 silty clay to clay 117 silty sand to sandy silt 1 10 gravelly sand to sand II 2 organic material 1 5 clayey silt to silty clay gi 8 sand to silty sand 111 very stiff fine grained(*) 13 clay •6 sandy silt to clayey silt 19 sand 112 sand to clayey sand(*) GeoDesign / CPT-2 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Operator OGE TAJ CPT Date/Time: 2/16/2015 11:45:41 AM Sounding: CPT-2 Location: GeoDesign/CPT-2/12800 SWAsh Tigard ID Cone Used: DPG1211 Job Number. 15017/GeoDesign /CPT-2/12800 SWAsh Tigard Selected Depth(s) (feet) 5 - I I I I — 1 , —20.341 I I , r r 7 - L -I, L 1 - I 1 I' ~ I I - , I - r r — 4 1 1 1 L , + Y r Y _ I I I I — L L 1 _ I r , r — I 1 1 — + i r y I I I I I — 1 J L 1 _ I- r '71 - ' I I 3 I , , 1 – t 1 r rt ' I I I — L ,- 1 r , r I 1 I 1 — _ i 1 F y _ } 1 1 1 , — I L J L 1 - rr I I I 1re 2 f I , , I I I 1 1_ J L 1 , I I I r -y r 1 — , 1 1 1 L ' I 1 I - T I I 7 _ LJ L 1 - , I - r 7 r -r, _ I I ' r I I 7 1 J L 1 _ — L r -, Y 1 ' 1 1 1 1 I T 1 r 7 — 1 -J, L 1 — t r Y 1 1 0 1 1 1 I , - r I r 7 — 1 1 L 1 1 I I I — I- ~ — r Y 1 1 1 — a I- + 1 , 1 — r , r 7 — 1 L 1 1 11 1 - I 7 r 1 - 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 IDTime:(minutes) Maximum Pressure=4.795 psi GeoDesian/CPT-2/12800 SW Ash Tiaard LQ LQ 1.1.1=.,..E1 L L/ 1 V/ LV1J £1.YJ.Za 1 1"1 Operator:OGE TAJ Location:GeoDesign / CPT-2 / 12800 SW Ash Tigard Cone ID:DPG1211 Job Number:15017 / GeoDesign / CPT-2 / 12800 SW Ash Tigar, Customer: Units:English Depth Qt Fs Fs/Qt Pw SPT N* Soil Behavior Type (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60%% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 Ili2 343.8 1.569 0.456 0.18 33 9 sand 8 175.3 3.517 2.006 0. 14 42 9 sand 1.15 142.5 3.455 2.424 -0.29 48 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 1.31 56.0 3.271 5.845 0. 93 32 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 1.48 52.2 2.102 4.026 1.00 33 4 silty clay to clay 1.64 48.6 1.786 3. 677 1. 14 21 5 clayey silt to silty clay 1.80 29.9 1.348 4.514 1.09 16 5 clayey silt to silty clay 1.97 23.5 0.685 2. 917 1.04 16 4 silty clay to clay 2.13 24.2 0.869 3.590 0. 96 11 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 2.30 35.5 0.110 0.310 0.76 10 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 2.46 15.4 0.163 1. 062 0. 90 9 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 2.62 19.1 0.356 1.857 0.72 8 5 clayey silt to silty clay 2.79 18.6 0.472 2.540 0. 67 8 5 clayey silt to silty clay 2. 95 13.1 0.580 4. 441 0. 66 9 4 silty clay to clay 3.12 11.4 0.430 3.771 0. 66 11 3 clay 3.28 10.7 0.381 3.563 0. 64 7 4 silty clay to clay 3.44 10.0 0.299 2. 994 0. 66 10 3 clay 3. 61 9.2 0.369 4. 026 0. 67 6 4 silty clay to clay 3.77 11.0 0.298 2.708 0. 64 8 3 clay 3.94 5.5 0.169 3.074 0.56 5 4 silty clay to clay 4.10 7. 6 0.050 0. 662 0. 48 4 5 clayey silt to silty clay 4 .27 11.0 0.060 0.545 0.46 4 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 4 .43 13.0 0.080 0. 618 0.43 5 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 4.59 15.0 0.207 1.380 0.39 16 3 clay 4.76 21.4 4 .025 18.788 0.27 20 3 clay 4 . 92 24.8 0.151 0. 609 0.25 44 8 sand to silty sand 5.09 510.9 2.440 0.478 0.25 63 9 sand 5.25 450.2 4 .742 1.053 -0. 63 75 9 sand 01 212.8 2.520 1. 184 0. 66 44 9 sand 8 31.3 1.410 4.502 0.76 24 8 sand to silty sand 5.74 60.0 0.300 0.500 0. 11 19 7 silty sand to sandy silt 5.91 89.0 0.159 0. 179 -0.32 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 6.07 6.7 0.616 9.251 0.41 16 7 silty sand to sandy silt 6.23 52.8 0.611 1.158 -0. 10 15 4 silty clay to clay 6.40 13.3 1.772 13.281 0. 80 18 5 clayey silt to silty clay 6.56 46.2 1.449 3. 137 0.52 20 3 clay 6.73 3.9 1.393 35.414 0.36 19 3 clay 6.89 7.9 0.255 3.239 0. 99 7 3 clay 7.05 11.3 0.380 3.368 1. 65 7 4 silty clay to clay 7.22 13.2 0.449 3. 407 2.47 8 4 silty clay to clay 7.38 13.5 0.539 3. 988 2.72 9 4 silty clay to clay 7.55 16.0 0.544 3.397 3.23 10 4 silty clay to clay 7.71 18.0 0.541 3. 008 3.87 8 5 clayey silt to silty clay 7.87 18.6 0.539 2. 896 4.48 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 8.04 18.6 0.552 2. 972 4.52 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 8.20 18.2 0.559 3.078 4.59 9 5 clayey silt to silty clay 8.37 18.1 0.694 3. 840 4. 60 12 4 silty clay to clay 8.53 18.2 0.777 4.279 4. 61 18 3 clay 8. 69 19.8 0. 999 5.047 4. 65 19 3 clay 8.86 21.8 0. 914 4. 189 4.80 21 3 clay 9.02 25.6 1.110 4.341 5.46 17 4 silty clay to clay 9.19 31.8 1.267 3. 983 7.00 15 5 clayey silt to silty clay 9.35 36.5 1.204 3.297 13.78 16 5 clayey silt to silty clay 9.51 30.1 1.056 3.510 13.87 15 5 clayey silt to silty clay 9. 68 30.2 0.894 2. 955 14.08 14 5 clayey silt to silty clay 9.84 29.1 0.906 3. 114 14.14 14 5 clayey silt to silty clay 1010 28.4 1.098 3.867 14.44 19 4 silty clay to clay 7 33.8 1.611 4.763 15.25 21 4 silty clay to clay oil behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 1,Gp1.1l )LL 10 10/'[1. LW r.JL 1 IA JVl1 LG1tGtV1Vl 1yNc (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60% Hammer Zone. UBC-1983 10.33 37.5 1.731 4. 620 15.74 26 4 silty clay to clay 10.50 49.9 1.661 3.332 13.74 19 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 10. 66 60. 1 1.101 1.831 11.05 23 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 10.83 67.0 1.174 1.753 8.72 21 7 silty sand to sandy silt 09 66.0 1.504 2.278 8.00 23 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 5 49.4 1.468 2. 970 7.54 19 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 2 2 34 .5 1.462 4.237 7.28 17 5 clayey silt to silty clay 11.48 24.3 1.262 5. 198 7.59 15 5 clayey silt to silty clay 11. 65 36.9 0.944 2.563 8. 17 16 5 clayey silt to silty clay 11.81 41.6 0.769 1.849 6.72 15 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 11.98 40.7 0.597 1.467 5.85 13 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.14 41.5 0.710 1.713 5.20 13 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.30 38.1 0.656 1.720 5.01 13 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.47 42.3 0.585 1.381 4. 93 14 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.63 52.6 0.756 1. 438 4 . 15 16 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.80 52.5 0.965 1.839 3.71 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 12.96 53.0 1.051 1. 984 3. 65 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 13.12 51.4 1.046 2.033 3.62 19 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13.29 47.0 1.045 2.222 3.58 18 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13.45 40.5 1.071 2. 643 3.57 15 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13. 62 33.3 1.007 3.029 3.59 13 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13.78 29.2 0.725 2.485 3. 63 12 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 13.94 29.6 0.563 1. 901 3.42 12 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 14. 11 35. 9 0.453 1.265 3. 10 14 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 14 .27 43. 6 0.714 1. 640 2.85 13 7 silty sand to sandy silt 14 .44 46.6 0.961 2.062 2.84 16 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 14.60 37.3 0.922 2.468 2. 97 14 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 14 .76 23.8 0.920 3.871 3. 09 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 14 .93 16.6 0.640 3.845 3.45 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 15.09 31.9 0.424 1.329 4. 17 11 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 15.26 39.7 0.449 1.132 3.75 14 7 silty sand to sandy silt 15.42 56.6 0.583 1.029 3.25 19 7 silty sand to sandy silt 15.58 80.3 0.503 0.627 2. 89 18 8 sand to silty sand 1110 5 86.2 0.905 1.049 2. 48 20 8 sand to silty sand 1 85.0 1.198 1.410 2.49 27 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.08 83.1 1.384 1. 664 2.47 26 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.24 77.5 1.442 1.860 2.57 25 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.40 . 76.7 1.267 1. 653 2. 67 26 7 silty sand to sandy silt 16.57 90.0 0.839 0. 933 2. 66 20 8 sand to silty sand 16.73 90.2 0.830 0. 920 2.27 20 8 sand to silty sand 16. 90 73.8 0. 933 1.264 2.16 24 7 silty sand to sandy silt 17.06 62.9 1.025 1. 629 2. 16 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 17.22 55.2 1.047 1.896 2.11 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 17.39 54 .6 0.834 1.527 2.06 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 17.55 51.9 0.644 1.241 1. 94 16 7 silty sand to sandy silt 17.72 39. 9 0.816 2.045 1.84 16 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 17.88 33.1 0.865 2. 616 1.56 14 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 18.04 39.0 0.756 1. 936 1.50 15 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 18.21 44.2 0.511 1.157 1.50 14 7 silty sand to sandy silt 18.37 52.5 0.568 1.082 0.82 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 18.54 58.6 0.568 0. 968 0.03 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 18.70 60.3 0.592 0. 982 -0.32 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 18.86 51.7 0.403 0.779 -0. 63 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 19.03 46.1 0.347 0.752 -0. 67 15 7 silty sand to sandy silt 19.19 44 .2 0.328 0.744 0.22 14 7 silty sand to sandy silt 19.36 45.4 0.382 0. 842 -0. 09 15 7 silty sand to sandy silt 19.52 47.6 0.535 1.124 -0.20 15 7 silty sand to sandy silt 19.69 50.3 0.756 1.502 -0.26 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 19.85 67.2 0.621 0. 924 -0.33 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 20.01 74 .9 0.713 0. 952 -0.43 17 8 sand to silty sand 20.18 70.5 0.565 0.803 -0.51 17 8 sand to silty sand Olii70.8 0.602 0.849 -0. 62 16 8 sand to silty sand 1 61.7 0.715 1. 159 4. 11 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt oil behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 L c rl 1.l l V L. r o r o i Vu rw o r S av J1J1.1 c11Q v llJl J.y.pc (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 20. 67 58.3 0.723 1.240 1.90 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 20.83 70.5 0.670 0. 950 0. 69 17 8 sand to silty sand 21.00 81.7 0.825 1.010 -0.33 18 8 sand to silty sand 21.16 78.2 0.823 1.053 -0.40 18 8 sand to silty sand 10370.6 0.770 1.091 -0.25 18 8 sand to silty sand 9 71.0 0.755 1.064 -0.05 18 8 sand to silty sand 65 83.9 0.705 0.840 0.23 19 8 sand to silty sand 21.82 80.3 0.779 0. 969 0.05 18 8 sand to silty sand 21.98 61.9 0.899 1.453 -0. 15 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 22.15 41.6 0.929 2.231 0.05 16 7 silty sand to sandy silt 22.31 43.9 0.357 0.811 0.29 14 7 silty sand to sandy silt 22.47 48.7 0.303 0. 622 0.36 15 7 silty sand to sandy silt 22.64 49.4 0.542 1.096 -0. 10 15 7 silty sand to sandy silt 22.80 39.0 0.825 2. 116 -0.04 14 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 22.97 24.2 0.969 4.010 0.39 13 5 clayey silt to silty clay 23.13 19.0 0.834 4.397 1.46 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 23.29 33.9 0.653 1. 925 2.82 12 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 23.46 38.4 0.920 2.397 3.49 13 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 23.62 30.8 1.064 3.459 3.21 15 5 clayey silt to silty clay 23.79 25.4 0.942 3.715 3. 64 13 5 clayey silt to silty clay 23. 95 22.6 0.668 2. 962 4.05 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 24 .11 26.6 0.609 2.293 4. 67 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 24 .28 24 .0 0.878 3. 661 4.50 11 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 24.44 38.0 0.578 1.520 5. 11 16 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 24. 61 62.4 0.714 1. 145 2.54 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 24 .77 56.8 1.452 2.558 1.33 21 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 24 .93 45.0 1.935 4.301 1.50 24 5 clayey silt to silty clay 25.10 48.0 2.107 4.388 2.19 30 4 silty clay to clay 25.26 46.3 1.989 4.293 2.39 30 4 silty clay to clay 25.43 47.8 2.030 4.245 2. 40 31 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 25.59 149.2 2.117 1.419 0. 68 37 7 silty sand to sandy silt 25.75 147.5 2.214 1.501 -0.28 34 8 sand to silty sand 25.92 130.9 2.416 1.845 -0.38 40 7 silty sand to sandy silt 8 98.8 3.082 3. 120 -0.26 37 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 5 60.2 2.768 4.598 -0.12 37 5 clayey silt to silty clay 26.41 71.7 2.961 4 .128 0.01 32 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 26.57 120.1 3.185 2. 652 0. 04 41 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 26.74 131.2 2.671 2.035 -0.32 41 7 silty sand to sandy silt 26. 90 136.7 2.144 1.568 -0.40 32 8 sand to silty sand 27.07 130.6 1.836 1. 406 -0.44 31 8 sand to silty sand 27.23 120.9 1.499 1.239 -0.45 28 8 sand to silty sand 27.40 105.2 1.278 1.214 -0.44 25 8 sand to silty sand 27.56 89.4 1.119 1.252 -0.43 22 8 sand to silty sand 27.72 76.3 1.006 1.317 -0.42 25 7 silty sand to sandy silt 27.89 66.3 0.960 1.448 -0.43 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 28.05 62.0 1.009 1. 627 -0.46 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 28.22 56.6 1.064 1.878 -0. 46 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 28.38 52.8 0.963 1.823 -0.48 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 28.54 51.6 1.171 2.269 -0.49 19 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 28.71 43.0 1.198 2.789 -0.52 16 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 28.87 31.4 1.208 3.844 -0. 44 15 5 clayey silt to silty clay 29.04 22.3 0.794 3.559 -0.34 14 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 29.20 53.7 0.607 1. 132 0.24 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 29.36 84.4 0.840 0. 994 -0. 04 19 8 sand to silty sand 29.53 99.9 1.073 1.073 -0.24 23 8 sand to silty sand 29.69 105.4 1.218 1. 155 -0.49 25 8 sand to silty sand 29.86 105.3 1.222 1. 160 -0. 60 25 8 sand to silty sand 30.02 101.1 1.254 1.240 -0. 66 24 8 sand to silty sand 30.18 97.7 1.316 1.347 -0.76 24 8 sand to silty sand 30.35 96.2 1.362 1.415 -0. 83 23 8 sand to silty sand 30.51 94.0 1.416 1.505 -0.85 30 7 silty sand to sandy silt 0108 88.3 1.460 1. 652 -0.85 28 7 silty sand to sandy silt 4 84 .6 1.508 1.783 -0.84 27 7 silty sand to sandy silt oil behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 LCrl l.11 l. L'J 1J/,dl. LVV JL1 1V ..)Vl1 LC11CVllll l/1_, (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 31.00 80.8 1.384 1.713 -0.83 26 7 silty sand to sandy silt 31.17 77.8 1.182 1.519 -0.84 24 7 silty sand to sandy silt 31.33 71.6 1.082 1.510 -0. 82 23 7 silty sand to sandy silt 31.50 63. 6 1.031 1.621 -0.80 21 7 silty sand to sandy silt 6 57.8 0.592 1.023 -0.79 19 7 silty sand to sandy silt 2 53.1 0.750 1. 411 -0.79 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt . 99 49.5 1.015 2.048 -0. 68 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 32.15 58.1 1.376 2.368 -0.68 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 32.32 103.5 1.105 1.067 -0. 91 24 8 sand to silty sand 32.48 138.4 1.650 1. 192 -1.12 32 8 sand to silty sand 32.64 153.7 2.070 1.346 -1.22 36 8 sand to silty sand 32.81 164 .6 2.505 1.522 -1.21 40 8 sand to silty sand 32.97 180.0 2.798 1.555 -1.26 42 8 sand to silty sand 33.14 180.1 2.737 1.520 -1.25 42 8 sand to silty sand 33.30 171.6 3.555 2.072 -1.23 53 7 silty sand to sandy silt 33.46 144 .0 4 .652 3.230 -1.06 52 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 33.63 93.4 4 .996 5.352 -0. 88 98 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 33.79 68.9 4.489 6.514 -0.75 86 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 33. 96 108.3 2.780 2.567 -0. 96 38 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 34 .12 124.1 1.905 1.535 -0. 92 39 7 silty sand to sandy silt 34 .28 130.4 1.755 1.345 -0. 94 30 8 sand to silty sand 34.45 126.2 1.870 1.481 -0. 91 30 8 sand to silty sand 34 .61 114.0 1.897 1. 665 -0. 84 36 7 silty sand to sandy silt 34.78 98.2 1. 673 1.705 -0.79 31 7 silty sand to sandy silt 34 . 94 75.6 1.884 2.492 -0. 65 28 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 35.10 48.4 1.804 3.728 -0.58 26 5 clayey silt to silty clay 35.27 38.9 2.158 5.544 -0.59 30 4 silty clay to clay 35.43 54.3 2.505 4. 610 0.51 47 3 clay 35.60 54 .5 2.841 5.217 0. 69 37 4 silty clay to clay 35.76 62.9 2.804 4.457 1.09 35 5 clayey silt to silty clay 35.93 104.5 2.227 2. 131 1.21 29 7 silty sand to sandy silt 36.09 102.4 1.545 1.508 0. 13 31 7 silty sand to sandy silt 36.25 82.5 0.799 0. 969 0. 06 20 8 sand to silty sand 2 68.9 0.774 1. 123 -0.03 23 7 silty sand to sandy silt 8 66.6 0.963 1.446 -0.27 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 36.75 69.8 0.974 1.396 -0.44 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 36.91 67.3 1.564 2.324 -0.46 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 37.07 67.2 1.828 2.720 -0.52 26 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 37.24 69.2 1.584 2.288 -0.58 26 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 37.40 68.3 1.389 2.033 -0. 62 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 37.57 68.4 1.306 1. 910 -0. 66 22 7 silty sand to sandy silt 37.73 65.5 1.128 1.722 -0. 68 21 7 silty sand to sandy silt 37.89 59.2 0.952 1. 608 -0. 68 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 38.06 47.1 1.037 2.204 -0. 67 18 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 38.22 34 . 9 0.963 2.761 -0. 63 15 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 38.39 34.0 0.979 2. 875 -0. 65 15 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 38.55 49.3 0. 945 1. 917 -0. 93 18 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 38.71 59.1 0.889 1.503 -0. 97 18 7 silty sand to sandy silt 38.88 62.8 0.735 1.171 -0. 99 19 7 silty sand to sandy silt 39.04 57.6 0.945 1. 639 -0. 97 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt 39.21 39.1 1.287 3.296 -0. 87 16 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 39.37 30.3 1.427 4.709 -0.81 22 4 silty clay to clay 39.53 34 .2 1.543 4.517 -0. 67 30 3 clay 39.70 30.5 1.578 5. 173 -0.25 31 3 clay 39.86 31.7 1.458 4. 605 0.08 32 3 clay 40.03 39.0 1.804 4. 627 0.56 27 4 silty clay to clay 40.19 54.6 2.392 4.381 0. 91 31 4 silty clay to clay 40.35 54.1 2. 910 5.375 0. 99 50 3 clay 40.52 47.0 2. 673 5. 685 1. 10 34 4 silty clay to clay 40.68 59.2 2.276 3.843 1. 04 30 5 clayey silt to silty clay 40.85 83.8 1.855 2.214 0.46 29 6 sandy silt to clayey silt Ili1 86.8 1.351 1.555 -0.57 27 7 silty sand to sandy silt 7 82.9 1.430 1.724 -0. 69 26 7 silty sand to sandy silt oil behavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 LCj.J l.11 LII. LO LJ/VL LW JLL 1V ....../.1.1 L)C11QV1V1 1Y.lc (ft) TSF TSF (%) PSI 60% Hammer Zone UBC-1983 41.34 75.8 0. 930 1.228 -0.72 25 7 silty sand to sandy silt 41.50 74.3 0.937 1.261 -0.77 23 7 silty sand to sandy silt 41.67 61.7 0.815 1.322 -0. 11 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 41.83 51.6 0.712 1.380 -0.21 17 7 silty sand to sandy silt illi950.2 1.382 2.752 -0.14 22 6 sandy silt to clayey silt TIP!6 70.6 2.133 3.022 -0.08 28 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 2 98.4 2.808 2.854 -0. 05 36 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 42.49 111.3 3.210 2.883 -0.52 40 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 42. 65 100.0 3.086 3.087 -0. 64 41 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 42.81 108.4 3.596 3.316 -0.88 46 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 42.98 152.4 5.150 3.379 -1.07 60 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 43.14 208.0 6.656 3.200 -1.21 73 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 43.31 211.0 6.578 3.118 -1.47 70 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 43.47 131.7 4 .754 3. 611 -1. 19 57 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 43.64 103.4 3.210 3. 106 -1.14 46 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 43.80 123.4 2.764 2.239 -1.21 37 7 silty sand to sandy silt 43.96 118.5 1.717 1.448 -1. 19 36 7 silty sand to sandy silt 44.13 100.5 1.081 1.075 -1. 11 22 8 sand to silty sand 44.29 59.4 0.743 1.250 -0. 96 20 7 silty sand to sandy silt 44 .46 26.5 0.591 2.226 -0.87 13 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 44 .62 15.5 0.584 3.773 -0.84 10 5 clayey silt to silty clay 44 .78 22.3 0.566 2.541 0.49 10 5 clayey silt to silty clay 44.95 22.6 0.635 2.809 0.57 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 45. 11 31.2 1.526 4 .895 0. 91 18 5 clayey silt to silty clay 45.28 58.5 2.271 3.880 1.23 31 4 silty clay to clay 45.44 57. 9 2.803 4.841 0. 90 36 4 silty clay to clay 45.60 54.0 2.410 4.464 0.03 31 4 silty clay to clay 45.77 34.0 1.225 3. 607 -0.44 18 5 clayey silt to silty clay 45.93 23. 9 0.693 2.896 -0.39 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 46.10 20.1 0.624 3. 107 -0.20 14 4 silty clay to clay 46.26 20.2 1.364 6.740 0.07 19 4 silty clay to clay 46.42 48.5 1.738 3.583 0.25 26 4 silty clay to clay 0 46.59 53.8 2.117 3. 933 -0. 10 25 5 clayey silt to silty clay 5 56.8 1.910 3.362 -0.02 25 5 clayey silt to silty clay 2 43.2 1.420 3.290 0.00 20 5 clayey silt to silty clay 47.08 28.4 1.053 3.715 0. 11 15 5 clayey silt to silty clay 47.24 25. 6 0.643 2.515 0.50 12 5 clayey silt to silty clay 47.41 22.7 0.462 2.041 0.74 11 5 clayey silt to silty clay 47.57 20.7 0.714 3. 442 0. 96 23 3 clay 47.74 28.6 2.213 7.735 1. 17 40 3 clay 47.90 74 . 6 3.836 5. 144 1. 65 60 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 48.06 85.2 4.739 5.565 -0.09 79 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 48.23 87.5 4 .027 4. 602 -0. 62 71 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 48.39 48.6 3.807 7.837 -0. 67 58 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 48.56 44 .7 3.138 7.016 -0.84 40 3 clay 48.72 31.2 2.116 6.782 -0.88 34 3 clay 48.88 29.9 1. 986 6. 644 -0.75 31 3 clay 49.05 36.5 1.807 4. 946 -0. 64 33 3 clay 49.21 37.4 2.220 5. 935 -0. 61 37 3 clay 49.38 42.1 3.147 7. 470 -0.46 47 3 clay 49.54 66.5 3.948 5. 934 -0. 17 62 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 49.70 86.0 4 .256 4. 950 0.27 84 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 49.87 110.5 4.298 3.888 0. 16 91 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 50.03 88.1 3.685 4. 180 -0.24 78 11 very stiff fine grained (*) 50.20 46.7 3.170 6.788 -0. 19 53 3 clay 50.36 32.6 2.087 6. 403 -0. 09 36 3 clay 50.52 34.3 1.947 5. 676 0.09 32 3 clay 50.69 33. 9 2.196 6.483 0. 16 25 6 sandy silt to clayey silt 50.85 129.6 1.825 1.409 -0. 14 30 8 sand to silty sand 51.02 164 .0 2.184 1.332 -0.55 39 7 silty sand to sandy silt 51.18 79.6 -32768 -32768 -0.46 0 0 <out of range> Obehavior type and SPT based on data from UBC-1983 u X c z W a • • • • APPENDIX C PREVIOUS EXPLORATIONS AMEC's site plans and a total of 42 exploration logs (showing AMEC's interpretation of fill depths) are provided in this appendix. III • G EO DESIGNS C-1 Capstone-11-02:041515 E o Z • a m $ C F F S g } SOIL DESCRIPTION ;v o ua a TESTING AND �y � � '� R� z °�� F LABORATORY DATA c2 cs 0 `ML Modfum miff.brawn SILT wilt few arganks:dty. - 0.0 4 14, r tm um+.nee,.own. s lyrl i ,tree'-Tagraeel:rly.-_' � Q.0 ' ro bell541 I `. —10'x::. .._4. 0.0 N -'' SSP—Loose,gray,line SAND:moist --, . ' r`- �3P�Loose,brown with ion staining,fine SANO:mots4 _21 ...15...,...,.,....:•:;.... Becomes wet. 0.0 8 A-GW PAHs,RCRA 8 Metals,TPH-Gx, -4f.:..... \ TPH-Dx,VOCs,OCIs • • :', + -.l S`rC Medium dense,gray,fine SAND with interbedded clay lenses(1 to 3 inches thick);moist to dry. End of boring at 20 feet bgs. -25- N - 2r Ii. 1 BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Macrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA n BOREHOLE DIAMETER: 2.25(In) REMARKS: R Hand sugared to 5 feet bgs. DRILL RIG: Geoprobe 600 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Pacific Soil&Water START CARO/TAG ID: NA Z LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 817/2012-8/7/2012 • g• • • City of Tigard 7376 SW Environment Roadlntrastructure,Inc. 9) LOG OF BORING 410 Public Works Yard Portland,Oregon ��� A 12800 SW Ash Avenue USA 97224 2-61 M-125841 Tel (503)639-3400 s* Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 .. • v 0 a h W Z a m m a. 3 A l= TESTING AND 6 g 1 SOIL DESCRIPTION 5 l Z g 1 i i LABORATORY DATA -0� Asehalt LB inches), Q _ ME—'tftedium stiff,gray,gravelly SILT,subangular coarse gravel; moist. y 12 . B-2.5-3.0 ' TPH-Dx,TPH-Gx,BTEX -g_ - - Rock flour(<1 inch thick). With trace clay. \ 0.8 - -10- - a Rock flour('c i Inch Thick). SM Medium dense,gray,fine SAND,trace silt;moist. _ -1 SA Medium dense,gray with iron staining,medium SAND;wet. \ _ TPH Gx,BTEX,Lead . - - SM Becomes gray. 0.0 Medium dense,gray,fine SAND with Interbedded clay lenses(1 '•.. to 3 inches thick);moist to dry. -20- End of boring at 19.5 feet bgs. . -25- N - 6 Q. 30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Macrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA a 1.2 BOREHOLE DIAMETER: 2.25(In) REMARKS: Hand sugared to 4 feet bgs. DRILL RIG: Geoprobe 6600 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Pacific Soil&Water START CARDfMAG ID: NA II; LOGGED BY:- G.Taylor DRILLING DATES:817/2012-8/7/2012 AMEC Environment&Infrastructise,Inc. ' • LOG OF City of Tigard 7376 SW Durham Road ( BORING Public Works Yard Portland,Oregon 12800 SW Ash Avenue USA 97224 B 2-61M-125841 Tel 639-3400 Fax(603)620.7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 r a. C3 J r-- ur • g Z O s 4 2 SOIL DESCRIPTIONm 5 g i E TESTING AND LABORATORYATA a m 13 CS 7 g >CC cm3 gt 0 _ As halt B inches GM'-Subangular fine GRAVEL with silt(base rock). i1 �► %" Cl. Stiff,gray with Iron mottling CLAY,trace gravel;moist. D-2.5-3.0 0.0 SM MedAmm dense.brown,tine silly SAND;dry. • _5_ Becomes gray. 1 D-7.5-8.0 2.0 D-9.0.10.0 SP Medium dense,gray,fine SAND;moist. Solvent-like odor from , 70 TPH-HCID,VOCs,PAHs •" 9 to 11 feet bgs. S-ALoose,brown with Iron staining,fine silty SAND,trace clay;wet. Plasticity increases with depth. 0.5 SPMed um dense,light brown,fine SAND;wet. , D-12.5-13.0 Becomes loose,black. ML Soft,gray,silty CLAY,trace sand;moist. -15 - End of boring at 15 feet bgs. • -20- -25- (., _ 5 -3a BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Macrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA g BOREHOLE DIAMETER: 2.25(in) REMARKS: $ DRILL RIG: Geoprobe 8O0 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA Hand angered to 5 feet bgs CONTRACTOR: Pacific Soil&Water START CARD/TAG ID: NA LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 8/812012.8/8/2012 3. s AMEC Environment&Infrastructtrre,inc. LOG OF BORING City of Tigard 7376 SW Durham Road ca • Public Works Yard Porttand22 Oregon 12800 SW Ash Avenue 97 2-61M-125841 Tel SFax(503)639-3400 620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 5. N 0 h � Z w t7 p n ,; m SOIL DESCRIPTION R TESTING AND -I F i z u k LABORATORY DATA 0 Asphalt and base rock. _!% CL—'gill,gray,CLAY,trace gravel,moist. • — D1 2-3 li 1 J 5 %f{ Mt. Brown,sandy SILT,tine sand,dry. 1.6 }, S 1 gedlum dense,brown,silty fine SAND,moist. u I Becomes gray,solvent odor at 8 feet bgs. 210 D1 8-10 TPH-Gx,VOCs —10— '' a SP Gray,fine SAND,some sift,wet. Becomes brown. 113 :..4''` No odor detected at 12.5 feet bgs. 1 01 13-14 _15 ;,7 i_ CLSoII gray silty CLAY moist End of boring at 15 feet bgs. • .... t-20_ —25— a q 1 3fl , 1 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA 2 BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: M I DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling eiiLOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/3/2013-1 2/3/2013 (5s f• MEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. 1 City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham Road �� LOG OF BORING Portland,0 I 2 nUSA ame Dl 3-61M-125842 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503)620-7692 PAGE 1 OF 1 0 4 e, 0 1 8 0 J SOIL DESCRIPTION W '�' t� c TESTING AND w , gig z a LABORATORY DATA p, o o Y3 � 3 � r� Asphalt and baso rock. Oil—Stiff,gray,C�.AY,trace gravel,moist. _ _ ___ ___ D2 2-3 0.0 5 .�-'�I. SM Medium dense,gray and brown,silly line SAND. - ` r Becomes brown. 0.3 D2 8-10 _ a TPH-Gx,VOCs - _—____ SP -Medium dense,brown,firm SAND,wet. a, D2 GW TPH Dx TPH-Gx,VOC,PCBs, ;;,)/5.V, CL Soft,gray,silty CLAY,trace sand,moist. RCRA 8 Metals 5- _1 0.1 End of boring at 15 feet bgs. —• -20- -25- a is _ 4 R:30 ✓ BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA Li BOREHOLE DIAMETER; REMARKS: • DRILL RIG:Track Mounted Gsoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling : LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/3/2013-12/3/201 3 o AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. • City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham Road � � LOG OF BORING • i Portland,Oregon D2 ° USA 97224 3-61M-125842 Tel (503)6393400 Fax(503)520-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 I. Q I C $ I C W i • z 0 SOIL DESCRIPTION s F g Z cc} 1 TESTING AND LABORATORY DATA g2 o H Asphalt and base rock. . %� Stiff,gray,CLAY,trace subangular fine gravel,moist. g %// ti4 0.0 1 D32-3 6 r s-;*.1k1 Brown,sandy SILT,fine sand,moist. Mediumaense,brown,silty fine to medum SAND,moist. 19 NI I D3 8-10 TPH-Gx,VOCs -1f III N Becomes wet. \ S Loose,brown,fine to medium SAND,wet. tik. 5 -1 .. End of boring at 15 feet bgs. III _ , ....p. F 4 a i_30 _30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA g BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: iDRILL RIG:Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/3/2013-1213/2013 • I City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham C Roadnfrastructure,Inc. ,i' LOG OF BORING • Portland,Oregon eine D3 4 USA 97224 M' 3-61M-125842 Tel (503)639-3400 3, Fax(503)620-7692 y PAGE 1 OF 1 cc J o • Q G s W Z SOIL DESCRIPTION j� m W TESTING AND _ _ "' F? > LABORATORY DATA 4 9 F.... t7 . I >1 § ;? W -0- it .,fr' _ Asphalt and base rock. " ML Brown,sandy STnfine sand,dry, - 1,3 - -5- • SM Medium dense,gray,silty fine SAND,trace clay,moist. - Solvent odor at 8 feet bgs. 04 8-10 -' 810 = TPH-Gx,BTEX Zti -10• • • 5M Loose,brown,silty fine SAND,wet 1.0 No odor detected at 12.5 feet bgs. E D4 GW TPH-Gx,BTEX SM Medium dense,gray,silty fine SAND,trace clay,moist. 1.1 -15 __ .\ End of boring at 15 feet bgs. III - -20- -25- g o ci z _ i U -30 < BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: a. S DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA .a i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling I LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12117/2014-1211712014 °`• AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • gSite Characterization Report Portland,Oregon USA 97224 of eco D4 3-61M-125842.07 Tel (503)639-3400 g Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 W o ¢ TESTING AND = x SOIL DESCRIPTION zz r LABORATORY DATA t9 N -0 Asphalt and base rock. ►�-'drawn,seRy itT,fine sand,dry, -a- — 0.0 SM Medium dense,gray,silty fine SAND,trace clay,moist. 0,4 Solvent odor at 8 feet bgs. 1 TPH Gx,BTEX — 289 r10 N STM Loose,brown,sTtyyine AND,STwet 8.7 8DSGW TPH-Gx,BTEX —T-8—M Medium dense,gray,silty fine SAND,trace Tay,moist. 0.0 -1• v End of boring at 15 feet bgs. • —20- -25- - ti 34 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA g BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling '+ LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 1211712014.12117/2014 z, AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon USA 97224 a 4 os LY, 3-61M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 8� Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 b ,p o E 0 B z • '' a h H SOIL DESCRIPTION w m a y a F c zg w LABORATORY DATA 0 oL ir.. .. at: ace. Olive-gray,gravelly SILT(base roc .. "'IAL'` Light brown,tine sandy SILT,uace day,dry. 4 - 's'`II 0.0 5- - 0,0 D6 8-10 TPH-Gx,BTEX - 10- S-ki Gghtbrown,silty finetomedium �1D,wet-- ---- 0.0 T ril 0,0 n 06 GW - Intermixed dark gray,medium SAND. TPH-Gx,BTEX - 11 is_ \ End s_ End of boring at 15 feet bgs. III a .... 20- H 25- iD9 v W 30 i BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA g BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: a DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling x LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12117/2014-12/17/2014 • AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. 2 City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7378 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING faSite Characterization Report Portland,Oregon • D6 i 3-61M-126842.01 T TelSA 839-3400 ei Fax(503)820.7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 a • a c o°a 8`A' -g a SOIL DESCRIPTION c, -_ w a� O � WELL SCHEMATIC pZ z Z I Nzg 1QU g n 4m= -0-MI- Asphalt(8 inches). ML Brown,sandy SILT;dry. 11 E-2.5-3,0 TPH-HCIO, RCRA 8 Metals SM Medium dense,brown,fine silty SAND;dry. 0.2 E-5.0-6.0 Iron staining. 10 End of boring at 10 feet bgs. -15- • -20- -25- -310---- ,9 20- -25—w BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Mecrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: 2.25(in) GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA REMARKS: Hand augered to 5 teat bgs. DRILL RIG: Geoprobe 6600 CASING ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Pacific Soil&Water START CARD/TAG ID: NA N LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 8/8/2012-818/2012 City of Tigard 7376 SW Durham RoaInfrastructure,Inc. LOG OF BORING • Public Works Yard Portland,Oregon ame 12800 SW Ash Avenue USA 97224 2-61M-125841 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503)620.7692 PAGE 1 OF 1 _ pp • ,T,g E. LI SOIL DESCRIPTION w m cs o s TESTING AND � °- �o � a � LABORATORY DATA 549 8 ow o 12 Asphalt(6 inches). ML--Olive-gray,sandy SILT with subangular fine gravel and asphalt pieces,fine to coarse sand;dry. — ---X111"' 10 F-1,5-2.0 TPH-HCID,VOCs _5 CL Soft,olive-gray and brown,silty CLAY,trace fine gravel;moist. Free water in gravel seam. Petroleum-lice or organic-like odor. 1.8 t F-t3.PH0-721D,TD,PCBs.OCIs —1 4/1 Soft,olive-gray,gravelly CLAY with sand,fine subangular gravel;moist. End of boring at 11 feet bgs. Concrete refusal. -15- • -25- N a - _ —30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Macrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: 2.25(In) REMARKS: Hand augered to 5 feet bgs. DRILL RIG: Geoprobe 6600 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA I CONTRACTOR: Pacific Soil&Water START CARD/TAG ID: NA fv LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 8/712012-8/7/2012 • AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc.• xLOG OF BORING City of Tigard 7376 SW Durham Road 1 3 Public Works Yard Portland,Oregon 1 2-61M-125841h Avenue USA 97224 Tel 503)639-3400 ��� Q. Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 °G a cs • rJ O W Z 0 I SOIL DESCRIPTION ON IABTESTING ORY DATA C3 C3 in >C 0 M -13 -_ ASPI1ail. ML dilvo•gray and brown,SILT with fine to coarse sand and ML \subentgar Le OJravel „base rods)dry. / Olive,clayey SILT,truce fine sand,dry. F1 2-3 7PH-Dx,VOCs,RCRA 8 Metals 0.0 6 r End of boring at 5 feet bgs. —10- _y5— • - -20- -25— n �? — x >—3Q BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA a BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: t9 DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA iv CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/2/2013-12/2/2013 tzr ANEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham Road OF BORING • Portland,OregonceS0 USA 97224 ame LOG F1 Tel (503)639-3400 3-61 M•125842 Fax(503620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 •• r E W Z -i. ,J m 0. W `l, 1= V. U I SOIL DESCRIPTION W J Ci b W 4 TESTING AND ,i, i i _.. F.z ¢ LABORATORY DATA ,-,id N },c g O R Asphalt. Olive—grayand brown,sandy SILT,with tine 10 coarse sand, subangular line gravel and asphalt pieces,dry. Slack staining(-1 Inch thick),no odor. 0.1 I F2 1.5-2 TPH-Dx,VOCs Trace clay. —5 Light brown,sandy SILT,tine sand,trace clay,dry. 0.0 Y _1 r •• Reddish-brown to light brown,fine to medium SAND,trace silt, 0 0 1 F2 9.510.5 moist. Becomes wet at 10 feet bgs. 1 • _ / F2 GW VS TPH-Dx,VOCs,RCRA 8 Metals —1 _. 2.21 a End of boring at 15 feet bgs. ID —2r —2 .4 a Is L9 tea —30 1 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: o isi DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA i, CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling cti LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/212013-12/2/2013 AMEC Environment& • m City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham R adnfrastrttcture,Incie c. LOG OF BORING Portland,Oregon 3-61M-125842 Tel(503) 639-3400 ame97224 �2 0, Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 • J E w c 2 r o SOIL DESCRIPTION w o o 114 i TESTING AND x ==e N a 0 z z iz> ]w� LABORATORY DATA < > O a M —0 INC-- Asphalt and base rock. _ M_L__Brown,SILT with fine to coarse sand and subangular fine to MlJ \coarse gravel,dry. f k Olive,clayey SILT,trace fine sand,dry. *. 0.0 TPH-Dx,VOCs —5 — End of boring at 5 feet bgs. -10- -15-- • - -20 -25- g r2-30 , BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA ii BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: i DRILL MG:Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA i CONTRACTOR:Cascade Drilling ALOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 1212!2013.12/2/2013 City of Tigard-Phase Ill ESA 736 SEnvironment 1 rham Road structure,Inc. �0 LOG OF BORING • USA 9 2 Oregon ame F3 3-81M-125842 Tel (503)639-3400 d` Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 0 dO E w @ O • t. g 03 c F . r SOIL DESCRIPTION m t, o W H TESTING AND ia U -4 g? o u> 9 LABORATORY DATA 0 2 I R& g gz a MN AsphalL 011ve-gray ardbrown,sandy SILT,with fine to coarse sart3,— subangular fine gravel,dry. Trace clay. 5 ""4 Light tNpw+f,sandy SILT,fine sand,trace clay,dry. I 1 N. _1 Reddish-brown to If ht brown,fine to medium SAND,trace silt, moist, �� `.•• Becomes wet at 10 feet bgs. ;•;• Il F4 GW PAHs Becomes dark brown at 14 feet bgs. \ 0.0 1-1• _.. End of borig at 15 feet bgs. • —24 —2 te a C d 2 i 2 v 30 _ BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA F BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: 0 DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA I. i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling i`LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/17/2014-12117/2014 AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • c Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon ► USA 97224 F4 ame 3-61M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 1 re t9 0 • rn C Jw� TESTING AND > SOIL DESCRIPTION w -�O C ii z PZ LABORATORY DATA ' 5 ow Lom !'/}^ _ Asphalt M- -Olive-gray and brown,SILT with tine to coarse sand and �ML'\suban9utar fine gravel(base rock),&L.. FS 1.5-2,5 - tiifve,clayey SILT,trace fine sang,dry. 0.0 PAHs 6 End of boring at 5 feet bgs. )1/ —10- -15-- • -20- -25- N - r¢vJ - -30 4 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA a CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/17/2014-12/1712014 • AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. g City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7378 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • a Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon a usA 97224 +�me F5 3-81M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 Q Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 r _ E 8 a Q Z • tSOIL g m 2 DESCRIPTION w 'ya c TESTING AND saFS z LABORATORY DATA o � Oir W ¢ �W W _0 As halt 6 inches). ti Bro n,graver3SiiLTwith asphalt pieces,subangular gravel. \\� p –5–� . G-4.5-5.0 Brown SILT with trace clay and trace fine gravel;dry. TPH-HCID,RCRA 8 Metals Moist. -10-- 7"7 Sis Wm dense,grayish broom,tine gravelly SAND vrillt trace. \ Z — , clay and subangular,fine gravel;wet. _ G-GW TPH-HCID,VOCs,RCRA8 Metals End of boring at 15 feet bgs. –20-- 25– N i Q _ et --1 z A o it _30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Mecrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA Ci BOREHOLE DIAMETER: 2.25(in) REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Geoprobe 6600 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA Hand angered to 4 feet bgs. CONTRACTOR: Pacific Soli&Water START CARD/TAG ID: NA LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 8/7/2012-8/7/2012 AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard 7376 SW Durham Road * LOG OF BORING • Public Works Yard Portland,Oregon ��� 2-61M-125841 0 h Avenue USTel(97224 503)639-3400 Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 n, J R • 2 °I f m o. 1 H SOIL DESCRIPTION ,a v c a TESTING AND I. F z � iLABORATORY DATA ^0 1111__ Asphalt(6 inches). ML Dark gray,gravelly SILT with subangular,fine gravel;dry. 1 1 IC H-2.5-3.0 Trace clay and trace subangular fine gravel. 0.0 IITPH-HCID — B i $M Loose,gray,silty fine SAND;dry. .,-. SP~Medium dense,mottled light brown and gray,fine SAND;dry. 1 *::`• 0.0 0-10—•:;',,•c • Becomes loose,brown;wet. v Z 8H-GW j. 0.0 TPH-HCID,ROM B Metals —15 . Becomes dark brown;moist. End of boring at 15 feet bgs. • — -2o- -25- N _ a r _ 301 g—30- 1 BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Macrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA g BOREHOLE DIAMETER: 2.25(In) REMARKS: iDRILL RIG: Geoprobe 6600 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA Hand angered to 5 feet bgs. 1 CONTRACTOR: PacUlc Soil&Water START CARD/TAG ID: NA f LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES:6!7/2012-6/7/2012 14 s Cityfl of Tigard AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. LOG OF BORING 9 7376 SW Durham Road el, • g Public Works Yard Portland,Oregon 2-61M-125841 00 SW Ash Avenue USA 97224 503)639-3400 ame H Fax(303)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 • I S RI 3 ` 1.J 1 TESTING AND r. w Z a ? SOIL DESCRIPTION a 02 _ > LABORATORY DATA i J —Ca of 0 >CC 0 gg t `_hit - ML Gray,gravelly S!LT7subangular line gravel;dry- . —` \ 1.1 ® 1-2.5-3.0 - 6- 7 "Oa Y Loose,olive.gray,tine 9Ty SAND vrith trace fine gravel;dry- 1... -7,7,77.--615-- —_. ---__— Olive SAND;dry. --i:-..-:.:::'. 0.8 —10—Ii Wet. ..._;.:I..... : { 1 Becomes brown. 0.7I-GW k` TPH-HCID,RCRA 8 Metals, \ PCBs —15 Becomes gray;moist End of boring at 15 feet bgs. - 1111 - -20 25— N — 4r — P t:i — O I-30 6 BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Macrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: 2,25(In) REMARKS: I DRILL RIG: Geoprobe 6600 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA Hand augered to 4 feet bgs. I CONTRACTOR: Pacific Soil&Water START CARD/TAG ID: NA ai LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES:6/8/2012-61812012 i f • AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. 1 City of Tigard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • 1 Public Works Yard Portland,Oregon 2 ��� I 12800 SW Ash Avenue USA 97224 -61 M-125841 Tel (503)639-3400 - Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 r N O o I. }y B V • a o SOIL DESCRIPTION �„ 8 � TESTiNQ AND s a a Fi a H¢ F LABORATORY DATA 3 Li 5 0 Ng i -0 Asphalt and base rock,brick. ML—Dark gray,clayey SILT,organics(wood,roots).moist,organic odor. 0.6 PCBs —5_ —\ Subangular coarse gravel. '. SR( Dense,gray,siiiy1inn�`11N0. ..� 0.1 k _i 0.-.. a Brown,trace clay,wet. 1 PCBs12 "' SP-`Medium dense,gray,fine to medium SAND,trace clay and silt, 0.0 —i5 wet. End of boring at 15 feet bgs. 111 ..... '20- -25- 8- t.9 d 1 —3f} i W BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA g BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoproba GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA I CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED By: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/4/2013-1 2/412 01 3 R. a' AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham RoadLOG OF BORING 1110 3-81 M-125842 el?: Portland,Oregon (03)6 9-3400 ame I, 5. Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 c • s I SOIL DESCRIPTION o o TESTING AND sa yH� o g i LABORATORY DATA a ? arc �3 Q -0 Asphalt and base rock. AAI--Dark gray,clayey SILT,trace gravel,moist. 11 0.6 ' 12 2-3 \ VOCs,PCBs,RCRA 8 Metals -PI-0W~Loose,black,sandy Subangular 10 angular fine GRAVEL, -, - medium to coarse sated,dry ML Dark 6iovm,clayey SILT,traco gravel,organics(wood debris, -S- roots),moist,organic odor. 0.8 s -10- V `;- SW Medium dense,gray,silty bne to medium SAND,wet,organic '` 0.4 lz 1213 odor. VOCs,PCBs,RCRA B Metals f.1 12 GW *,• ' TPH-Dx,TPH-Gx,VOCs,PCBs, • �:�:� Becomes brown. 0 4 RCRA 8 Metals 20 _ 1 1219-20 End of boring at 20 feet bgs. -25- C3 ci 30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA n BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: gDRILL RIG:Track Mounted Geoproba GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA ' CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling di LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/V2013-12/4/2013 I; AMEC City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham Roadnfrestructure,Inc, % LOG OF BORING Portland,Oregon ame v 12 USA 97224 2 3-81M-125842 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503)620-7:-2 PAGE 1 OF 1 • g g w z • r i F SOIL DESCRIP110N a a CZ ' TESTING AND 3 > 2LABORATORY DATA a W a R. t¢7 Asphalt and base rock. SM r-Gray,sandy SILT,fine sand,dry. 0.3 ' L?23 PCBs -5. SM+ Gray,silly fine SAND,dry. 0.5 -f0 • ,+,• SW Brown,line to medrum SAND,wet. - \ 1311-12 • PCBs Becomes gray. 0.1 End of boring at 15 foot bgs. • -20-- -25- a u' ci e 30 sw BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA a, BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: ts DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling r LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12!412013-12/412013 AMEC City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham Roa&dnhastructure,Inc. cie) LOG OF BORING • Portland,Oregon ame 13 USASA97224 3-61M-125842 Tel (503)60 Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 • • W to • w• C r r -' TESTING AND SOIL DESCRIPTION p Z o �• � 'a i=� y> LABORATORY DATA E OC g Oilg O y�� w ,a ca >a a a_ a Asphalt and base rock, SM Gray,sandy SILT,fine sant dry. IPCB3 End of boring at 5 feet bgs. —10- -15- • —20- -25- - - C, — —30 *c BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/15/2014-12/16/2014 U,♦ ,. ! AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. M City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • s Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon USA 97224 came�r Is 3-51M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503)620.7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 i re • s roa ILA C w } SOIL DESCRIPTIONc� oTESTING AND x a ooz „ 9 LABORATORY DATA g g N Q Q K :11 W w > c1 0 u. ;t, Asphalt and base rock, SM Gray,sandy SILT,fine sand,dry, I 161-3 PCBs -5- End End of boring at 5 feet bgs, -10- -15- -20- -25- - 10-_1$.--20- -25- r• BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA • CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/15/2014-1211512014 AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • I Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon USA 97224 ame Is iq 3-61M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 , 17 g a Q a m z • F m St p SOIL DESCRIPTION rs a m a TESTING AND y A g z o -a 9 LABORATORY DATA —0 Asphalt IB Inches. ..P OP GRAVEL and COBBLES. °0t RI __ 1117 . J-3.0-3.5 ML Dark gray,clayey SILT,slight plasticity;moist. S' I J-5.0-6.0 0.4 Organics(rootlets). 0.5 J-8.0-9.0 , Organics(wood debris,approximately 40%of sample). Organic I TPH-HCID,RCRA 8 Metals odor. —to- -" Trace rounded fine gravel. 7.5 i Wet. � J-14.0-15.0 End of boring at 15 feet bgs. r; 1 • .... —20- -25— a _ 5 J- o c,—30 g BORING METHOD: Direct Push-Macrocore ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA a a BOREHOLE DIAMETER:Z25(fn) REMARKS: o Hand sugared to 3 feet bgs. i DRILL RIG Geoprohe 6600 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA a - Sample J-5.0-6.0 collected from original location,other i CONTRACTOR: Pacific Soil&Water START CARD/TAG ID: NA samples collected from stepout location located-2 feet south. a LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 8/8/2012-8/6/2012 ar- AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard 7376 SW Durham Road � � (�,� LOG OF BORING ill 1 Public Works Yard Portland,Oregon .g.:30 SW Ash Avenue USA 97224 M-125841 Tel (503)639-3400 S% Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 wG w y • u wa o ma m TESTING AND H SOIL DESCRIPTION iZ LABORATORY DATA 0 ML Grass at surface. Brown,clayey SILT,organics(grass,roots),moist. Ilk01 2-3 — 0,2 ' TPH-HCID,VOCs,PCBs,RCRA 8 Metals — _5— t — — Nti o,o SM Meafum dense,brown,silty fine SAND witFi Gay,moist. 1 01 8-9 10— ML Brown,clayey SILT,moist. SM Medium dense,gray,silty fine to medium SAND,organics (wood debris). 01 GW CLSoft,gray,silty CLAY,moist. TPH-Gx,VOCs,PCBs,RCRA 8 Metals r— 1., . 5M~-Medium dense,gray,silty fine SAND with clay,organics(wood \ d'1 r debris),moist CL Soft,gray,silty CLAY,moist. • �—__ SP Dense,gray,fine SAND,dry. _2 ,11 CL[SSbfrgray,silty GTLAY,moist — 1 End of boring at 20 feet bgs. — —25— n ?i a — i r.) a—30 . a BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA a `. BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: 0 DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA 01 groundwater samples collected on 4214113 and 1216113. i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/4/2013-1214/2013 2. AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • 2 Site Characterization Report- Portland,Oregon 01 USA 97224 to3-61 M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 V/ �� 8 Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 f I U O n r w • C S2 SOIL DESCRIPTION w 'c; c LIOw TESTING AND i a go o ,.1.5 LABORATORY DATA GI g MI. Grass at surface, Brown,clayey SILT,organics(grass,roots),moist. 0.2 05 2-3 I Priority Pollutants Metals, Hexavalent Chromium —5— — SM Medium dense,brown,silty fine SAND wltFi day,moist. 0,0 SM Medium dense,gray,silty fine to medium SAND,organics -' (wood debris). Medlum—dense,gray,silty Fine SAND with clay,organics(wood debris),moist 05 GW Priority Pollutants Metals, Hexavalent Chromium 1fi,•. G,1 End of boring at 15 feet bgs. • -20- -25- 5 2o--25- 5 -. P -30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA 2 CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling g LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12115/2014-12116/2014 • J AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. 26 City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon *� /� P, 3-61M-126842.01 Tel(5 Tel 639 -3400 VLr O� a� Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF I 8 m s 0 w • N SOIL DESCRIPTION ca z TESTING AND a S LABORATORY DATA rn Topsoil at cut Moo. Loose,brown,gravelly SAND with sill,organics(roots,bark �wmuic ),,dry. SM \ Loose,brown subangular fine to coarse GRAVEL(base rock) �' �+ith slit and fine to coarse sand dry, -:� CL—\grown SILT with line to metl�um sem,dmJ/ U 0.0 M P1 2.5-3 Soft,gray wrth brown mottling,silty CLAY,rnolsL PCBs End of boring at 3.5 feet bgs. 111/ _5_ —10— --15-- 20— —25- tpp- t4 d 30 9 BORING METHOD: Hand Auger ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA R BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Hand Auger GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/4/2013-12/4/2013 o o AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham Road �� LOG OF BORING • Portland,Oregon It;; USA 97224 aP1 g 3-61M-125842 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503)620.7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 • c o yy�yy Z S a W St SOIL DESCRIPTION csv E TESTING AND o w 2 c z > LABORATORY DATA „ e wg. Asphalt and base rock, : SM-"Light brown,sandy SILT with clay,fine sand,moist. • 0.0 P2 2-3 1111 I PCBs End of boring at 5 feet bgs. —10- -15— • —20- -25— Y d —30 ca BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA 2 BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/3/2013-12/3/2013 o AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. I' City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham RoadLOG OF BORING Portland• USA97224 Sn medr" P2 g3-61M-125842 Tel (503 639.3400 Fax(503)620 -7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 Ir F rc 2 • 0 & TESTING AND w S2 rJO SOIL DESCRIPTION FO w a ¢o ►- LABORATORY DATA 0 — Asphalt and base rock. a� - SM Brown,sandy SILT,fine sand-trace clay,moist. 0.0 ' P3 2-3 PCBs _ 5 Subangular gravel at 5 feet bgs. SR/( T1edTum dense,brown,slity gAPLI,most 8W!' rawn,I ne to medium SAW wet. ———— -10 — 0.0 � ' P312-13 —15—:.:.:. 0.0 8 P3 GW TPH-Ox,TPH-Gx,VOCs,PCBs, —` RCRA 8 Metals End of boring at 20 feet bgs. —25-- 4 25-4 R —30 4 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA o. BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12!3!2013-121312013 24 AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. F. City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • g Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon USA 97224 ame P3 3-61M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 5%, Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 • cs $ a E c z o 0 6 S ! SOIL DESCRIPTION ,W,c� n I 1" TLABORATORY DATA N O w grE 0 (1._ e Asehalt and base rock. II Gray,sandy SILT,fine sand,dry, i' ,� 0.6 G!123 111 ' TPH-HCID Soft,brown,silty CLAY,moist. A ni :/owns -grays. mesam, • . ,y -�� Ni`' IN k.' Brown,silty fine SAND,moist. \ 0.3 11 o.o SL - ...... Brown and gray,fine to medium SAND,trace silt,wet. I k — Q1 12-13 ' TPH-HCID .'.'.' Ls •: , • s g1 SOIL DESCRIPTION i c 1 0 1{ TESTING AND 4 p_ z s c LABORATORY DATA -0 p11.t. _— Concrele slab/6 inches). GRAVEL(base rock). L�Medit m stiff,olive-gray,CLAY,trace subangular fine gravel, 0.1 , 02 2-3moisD 5 — 4,,, ::., SM Medium dense,grayish-brown,silly line to medium SAND, mOiSL 0.0 SWMediumdense,grayish-brown,fine to medium SAND,trace silt, 0211-12 wet. 01 ' TPH-HCID End of boring at 15feetbgs. 1 410 20- -25- r- n O -- R.30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA g BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: `,t DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoproba GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA Boring location Inside shop building. Boring Into center of former Bank cavity. i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling No recovery from 2-5 feet bgs. Pushed liner by hand to recover 2-3.5 feel bgs. FLOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/3/2013-1213/2013 z� a AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. M City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham Road ill'' LOG OF BORING 41) 0. SA 97224regon arae 02 4 3-61 M-125842 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503 620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 , a I— • s V 1 SOIL DESCRIPTION 9i g W O p TESTING AND m P- o w LABORATORY DATA n o � g >V o of i —0 ASphalt and base rock. 4 11111V--_ GM—Dark gray,gravelly SILT with fine to coarse sand,subangular 0.0 R 1-3 fine gravel. TPH-HCID RN X( dM—Loose,dark gray,silty subangular fine GRAVEL,moist to wet. t -454L,) Zi Q 5_4C( 3C( 0.0 -3.'' ' Y ate — TPH-Dx,TPH-Gx,VOCs,PCBs, RCRA 8 Metals —lit 5 —10-00 �I 0.0 _ R 10-11 _�,�___ _ _� ____ _ , TPH-HCID,VOCs,PCBs,RCRA !�\ GW Sutiringulafiitte to coarse GRAVEL 8 Metals End of boring at 11.5 feet bgs due to refusal on concrete. Ai -15- • -20- -25— v _ i.- 03 u- - 4 a - EL. BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA 2 BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: Ls a DRILL RIG:Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA 18 i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling ti LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/212013-12/2/2013 ts` __. I 0AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard-Phase 111 ESA 7376 SW Durham Road , LOG OF BORING USA 97224regon ame R g 3-61 M-125842 Tel (503)639.3400 Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 , E a0 • ro a u0l I z SOIL DESCRIPTION -1c7 q TESTING AND a uJ a FE z v?,. o LABORATORY DATA 0 nuts Asphalt a -Olive-gray,gravelly SILT with gravel base tCtiC.dry. R1 1-3 LPH-Dx,PCBs,PAHs,RCRA ML tigTti brown,sandy SILT,trace clay,dry. Metals 00 —6 1 t 1 SM v7ler—ium dense,light brown,silty fine to medium SAND,wet k: 0.0 = 0.0 a R1 GW TPH-Dx,RCRA 8 Metals `7 0.0 End of boring at 15 feet bgs. III ®2, s —2 g • 5w Fq G 1 w_30 K BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA • BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: ol iRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe robe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA Hit shallow refusal twice at original location. Stepped out 30 p feet from sign shop. i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling S LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/17/2014-1211712014 AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • I Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon �a R1 . USA 97224 ame 3-61M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 ` Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 Jre • d J m S G Z Z i w SOIL DESCRIPTION �� 3 li w BTESTING AND ORATORYDwa F? c LABORATORY DATA _ Asphalt. ---1--- y__ -ML olive- ray.gravelly SILT.Try. 0. fine sandy SILT,dry. N R21-3 _ TPI-1L Dx,PCBs,PAHs,RCRA 8 0,0 Metals — 5— SM Crght frown,silty fine to medium SAND,moist _ 0.0 t _q� Becomes wet at 10 feet bgs. - 1 8 R2 GW 4 TPH-Dx,RCRA 8 Metals —15 _ 0.0 End of boring at 15 feet bgs. • H —20- —25- g -2x5- U, g F- -. �30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA g. BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: 6 DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA I CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling g+ LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 1211712014-1211712014 AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. tg City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • a Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon USA 97214 +� R2 g 3-61M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 Q Sw Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 _ W n U' a, t? F a Z • r O 0.a g my 3 W TESTING AND SOIL DESCRIPTION w _Jo o 2c( M x = tO P3 2 u4 c LABORATORY DATA lli —0—,— Asphalt. ML—Olive-gray,gravelly SILT(base rock),dry. R31-3 TPH-Dx,PCBs,PAHs,RCRA 8 0.0 Metals ML Soft,ffght brown,sandy SILT wish clay,moist - -5- -' \ 0.0 SNt—Medium dense,light brown,silty fine to medium SANT). -10-. -- 0 0 1 _ Wet at 12 feet bgs. D9 — \ _ 8 R3 GW ~ ti T TPH-Dx,RCRA 8 Metals —1sti . End of boring at 15 feet bgs. -• -2a -25- a a R — v 30- 4 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA a P BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: is DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA �ip CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling cif LOGGED SY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/1712014-12117/2014 t tY Tigard Cl of Public Works Yard AMSC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. LOG OF BORING • 7376 SW Durham Road Site Characterization Report USAa9n72 Oregon am24 R3 3-61 M-125842.09 Tel (503)839-3400 ec* rc Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 - , • °° S O Z SOIL.DESCRIPTION ui k, g w 4 w TESTING AND _2 Ea a v, a F a E v LABORATORY DATA i i k7 7 a. pgO 8 u. O PD >i O [7? LT ;:.3.i..: Asphalt• • - Darkgray,clayey GRAVEL,moist. R4 1-3 0.1 1 TPH-Dx,PCBs,PAHs,RCRA B Metals - Concrete(-3 inches thick)at 3 feet bgs. - -. B SP Medium dense,gray,silty fine SAND,wet Dry at 7 feet bgs. 0.0 1 -10- -k Wet at 10 feet bgs. 0.0 Becomes light brown at 12 feet bgs. E R4 GW TPH-Dx,RCRA 8 Metals Becomes reddish brown at 14 feet bgs. -15.-- - ' 0.0 End of boring at 15 feet bgs. -20- -25- " — c F- t a--30 e BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA a. S BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA Water has sewage odor. i CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling 5 LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/15/2014-12116/2014 • AMEC vi $ ` City of Tigard Public Works Yard 7376 SW EnDurhamronment Road Infrastructure,Inc. LOG OF BORING • E Site Characterization Report PSA 97224regon R4 PI 3-61M-12584241 Tel (503)639-3400 a �,.r a, Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 iii g m a s z • i SOIL DESCRIPTION Wia o a< TESTING AND a .c o z cc 53 o g E c LABORATORY A DATA cc iii 0 __ Asphalt and base rock, it Loose,gra,silty subangular line GRAVEL moist. rt k _�:,.� Connate, —riel$ SM Reddish-brown,silty fine SAND.---34'1,',fL–— i S 3-4 TPH-HCID _ ik 0.0 1 S 6-7 Trace clay,moist. Free water In sand. 1 -1t1-- 1 1 Becomes wet. 0.0 Q , _ SGW TPH-Dx,TPH-Gx,VOCs,PCBs, RCRA 8 Metals —15 " =. End of boring at 15 feet bgs. 4111 - 20— H 25— a 0 30 m BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA C: BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG:Track Mounted Geoprabe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA Encountered concrete at-1 foot bgs at original location. Step out-2 feet,refusal(concrete)at-1 foot bgs. Step out--4 feet, A CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling punched through concrete at 1 Foot bgs, Iti LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/2/2013-12/2/2013 ANIEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. City of Tigard-Phase III ESA 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING Portland,OregonUSA 972eme 0 i 3-61 M-125842 Tel (503)639-3400 S cvFax(503)620.7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 r • I i1 SOIL DESCRIPTION is w a TESTING AND y a g= C > 9 LABORATORY DATA x a o a i it i g t -0-14E—-14E — Meal!and base rock. . STA-- and brown,sandy SILT with subangular fine gravel, 5M"``ine to coarse sand,moist / Olive,sandy SILT,fine sand and trace subangular fine gravel, .. . .,,. dry. ik 0.3 T23 TPH-HCID ......,,,-,.:.:-:11.I `-5— '. SM Olive,sandy SILT with fine sand and clay,trace organics(wood debris),molsl, 0.1 T 7-B TPH-HCID 1 X •`,,SW Medium dense,gray,fine to coarse SAND,trace clay,wet. 0,1 —15- 1 'f -.....:., .:::.: _ -,;:�::. T GW T H-Ox,TPH-Gx,VOCs,PCBs, FICRA B Metals End of boring at 20 feet bgs. — _25— Q — a I 2-BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: ri DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling X LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/2/2013-1212/2013 Ci of Tigard-Phase III ESA AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. ` • 97376 SW Durham RoadLOG OF BORING 4 Portland,Oregon USA 97224 eine T 2 3-61M-125842 Tel (503)639-3400 QFax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 co • O u, 6 Q Z Z V. 4 g SOIL DESCRIPTION a � w TESTING AND —o Ei_ ►_— Z > }" LABORATORY DATA ' a RIZ 9 ez 9 chips at su -ce. Light brown,sandy SILT,dry. _ 00 8 yS'M`�tledium-dense,olive-gray,siltyt��dry. Becomes loose,light brown,wet at 9 feet bgs. \ _ -10- _ 0,0 Becomes dark reddish brown from 12 to 12.5 feet bgs. 0.0 TPH-Dx _1 env&6, U 1 GW End of boring at 15 feet bgs. • -- —20- -25- N E .-. iI •-- q / - R v ZING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA n 12? BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: 4 DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA N CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12!15!2014.12!16/2014 � 'N'N' 1 Site C aracte Public Works Yard AMSC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. • 7376 sw Durham Road LOG OF BORING Site CharacterizatEon Report Portland,Oregon USA 97224 (f') kg 3-61M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 S: Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 r • a ti !'ay x y SOIL DESCRIPTION z a a w TESTING AND x a cU3 a aQ z y Jo LABORATORY DATA :ark ips at surface, 1111 Brown mottled red,sandy SILT,motet • Medium dense,light brown,silty SAND,dry. 0.0 –5 _ 0.0 Y. -1. Becomes loose,wet at 10 feet bga 8 U2 GW TPH-Dx Becomes gray at 14 feet bga. –1 00 — End of boring at 15 feet bgs. 1111 –2 –2. w–34 A BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprob. GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 1211612014-1211612014 tn" fr CI of Tigard Public Works Yard AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. 9 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING • 2 Site Characterization Report PSA Portland, U2 341M-125842.01 Tel (503)639-3400 am * o♦ Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 a a n z z • E' i H SOIL DESCRIPTION iu v a TESTING AND I a F- z 1 r LABORATORY DATA —o " z 1 Hf 5 clz tt _ rk chips at surface, "'�M�t-ThYarTcSrow'n,sa ealtry Wahl art u�largmvei,=in IT SS —8— Becomes olive-gray at 5 feet bgs. 3.1 — 26 er—tlifT gray,silty CLAY,dry. --- —10- 0 Loose,gray,�e SAND,trace silt,wet,petroleum odor. 70 — , U3 9.5-10 oTPH-Dx PAHs Becomes brown,increased silt,decreased saturation at 12 feet bgs. U3 GW TPH-Dx,PAHs Becomes medium dense at 14 feet bgs. N — —15-- --v 0.4 End of boring at 15 feet bgs. • -20- -25- .2 - is - a E R 1 30 BORING METHOD: Direct Push ELEVATION REFERENCE: NA a. S BOREHOLE DIAMETER: REMARKS: DRILL RIG: Track Mounted Geoprobe GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: NA a CONTRACTOR: Cascade Drilling 5 LOGGED BY: G.Taylor DRILLING DATES: 12/15/2014-12115/2014 City of Tigard Public Works Yard AMEC Environment&Infrastructure,Inc. ` 7376 SW Durham Road LOG OF BORING 2Site Characterization Report Portland,Oregon - 4s U3 USA 97224 0 tq,3-61M-125842.09 Tel (503)639-3400 Fax(503)620-7892 PAGE 1 OF 1 Z a a • • • • APPENDIX D PRELIMINARY FOUNDATION PLAN A preliminary foundation plan developed by Catena Consulting Engineers is included in this appendix. • • G EO DEslGN= D-1 Capstone-11-02:041515 Z 0 u • • • • ACRONYMS AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AC asphalt concrete ACP Asphalt Concrete Pavement ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials BGS below ground surface CPT cone penetrometer test ESAL equivalent single-axle load g gravitational acceleration (32.2 feet/second2) H:V horizontal to vertical IBC International Building Code MCE maximum considered earthquake MSL mean sea level OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSSC Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction (2015) pcf pounds per cubic foot PG performance grade PGA peak ground acceleration psf pounds per square foot psi pounds per square inch SOSSC State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code • SPT UST standard penetration test underground storage tank WWTP waste water treatment plant II/ G EO DESIGN= Capstone-11-02:041515 E O U U C DA N a) C O O bA • • • Ash Avenue Apartments Mark Dead Live Snow March 1 Approx. Foundation Loads March 5, 2015 • A 1300 plf 1700 plf N/A Catena 9:,�I.f.°9 0 B 1750 plf 2000 plf N/A - I. O 11/ 900 plf N/A 450 plf o .�I.. 0 D 500 plf N/A 450 plf o 0 00 0 0 0 28,000 lbs 30,000 lbs 6,500 lbs 0 0 . 1. . . .o . e / o r Uwe0 l 75 36,000 lbs 39,000 lbs N/A 0 Ciai4e7Lf/172-fr c> 0 6 ,<,........_ my• ......e 0 „of 0 e o , ..„,s2,...... c' le le 0 0 0 _ lc) 0 0 t�O 414 l . 0 0 _ O 0 O r -- r - - r _ _ r __ f, r __ r __ r 1 1 I 1 1 � Y../`�' #` ` I 1 1 I 1 I 1 11-2 I 1 I _ . I- _..I: I _ - — —' -' O T P.THIS — — — — — 147 ' �y, l' fie r - r -.- r - tt r - r - r - ( r-- r r - - r r __ I I 1 I l I I 1 I I I it I I 1 1 1 1 t_I I 17 I 4, I I I r I I I 1 r1 I I I I I 1 I 1 I I,{ I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I 1� I �- I - -- - -- jTYP.THIS — —— -- -a llNYa --- - -- --- — � Notes: LINE AVIPAROit / 1 1 . Type A footings typical at 1 BR and 3 BR units, assuming one additional bearing wall within 1 BR units and two additional bearing walls within 3 BR units. • /• f 5- /-- 1/&1- • 2. Type B footings typical at Studio and 2BR units, assuming one additional bearing wall within 2 BR units. 2 3. Type D strip footings typical at perimeter and corridors, except Type C where brick veneer is assumed to 4110 0 r/o 1 � U occur. i Fanno&reek ' 1 0 4-k. te eek 7TPa"i i SWAsh Ave. Road Sand Pile �(\ 24-inch Concrete Outfall a Fenno Creek Trail Entrance Gate 0 r / r _ M-1'- r _ — 1'11 10-inch Concrete Outfall- i ,' I - -- �, r G — Ash Avenue Dog Park /' — } — (former 12770 SW Ash Ave.) / ...= A — Heating Oil UST Release + "Old Channel" :--,...---"/ / '+' / 7� I F :., 4'41 ice/ j I — / - 4' E L' __ — CO Former UST ./-' 24-inch Steel Outfall 8-inch Concrete Outfall — Parking E — B�_ CO Maintenance Shop I I _ i _ Tigard Auto,Body&°Paint D 8970 SW Burnham St — K C Swale I — ___J } I- H [11 —Magnesium Chloride Totes _0 / _ ✓✓✓ 'Operations Building) 1 LEGEND: Former Truck Wash -0- — " 1` ♦I _ 5;; December 2014 Sample Location .I, NW Preferred Credit Union "; — J - — 8950 SW Burnham St. December 2013 Sample Location — Former i� - ♦ September 2012 Sample Location y — Impoundment 3' n1 m cfl" a °" --- - 60 a, _ _ m a * D Catch Basin gi co Hazardous Mater J COcu ' Drainage Grate /1:: p 1Shed ial Storage — � Fence I 2 E _ Storm Sewer Line 11 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I I 1 I 1 I I I I 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I 1 lir "I1 I I I I 1 Building �j�/, I---I Feature 'l// Potential Impoundment Feature (1964) Older Equipment and 1 Sewage Treatment Facility (1973) Portable Toilets Burnham Business& Storage Park 0 50 100 n Site Boundary (Approximate) 8900 SW Burnham St. 1111111111111.11.1111.111 Feet Taxlot(Approximate) CLIENT 0NOTE:Details are from 26th Nov.2013 site walk,at features and dimensions approximate. PROJECT DATE Imagery from live web services provided by the Microsoft Virtual Earth online mapping system. .441 12800 SW ASH AVENUE JANUARY 2015 (c)2012 GeoEye,Metro,Portland,Oregon,U.S.Geological Survey CITY OF TIGARD TIGARD, OREGON SCALE . 1"=50' Amec Foster Wheeler amec TITLE PROJECT NO. Environment & Infrastructure, Inc. foster SITE FEATURES AND SAMPLING LOCATIONS 36,M-1252 I 7376 S.W. Durham Road FIGURE Portland,OR 97224 wheeler 2 K.1120001125001125841125842 1 NFA_DataGaps\DWG\RepoMFigure 2-Site Features and Sampling Locations.mx0-stephane.Pescombes-1116/2015-3:12:24 PM Ce w0 , Ce V / g13 Pug ) _. Phqit a x' � ,a I /11 6,-.',.',..e.,-^z, ^ALL, ___ _7',Alp, .0-.-- ^ --=w,,,,A--,,-,--,- ,/,---",W7 LL-L sak"g"IMMLL'agf , ''''-'-'7<'-"--'''''77 �j r t 440 7� 1,1 # CPT-1A Vt '41 ,,,,.'-, p,;yr--,,A,- , r ,, 41 i i lk.": , TM,-, I €P ,�il 1 B-20 W Z I. T B-50 /7291 o , lr 1 4± [12.0'] , r' E_ � __ B 0 0 11. -k LLJ ce r Li I S vk�` r✓gv �.. i4 a x,3-`2 p t"' tr° Y�h4 /zap, ' 1 � d 0 H I'es*-__ --j-----/.2 <r iv; 111,6' f;t111'44- / 1(.. ,,j10116 c [9 51 i i I it . '; 60% 1: SPX/eS , ....... f - 2 "/' I IIti .�' . ., '� _._ , . ! 111, i hieegi eV �`R -40 3 { il II rt I N I • , 1 13 \\.,,,,.: 0... , „...,. [ 4. } T1 , _ 0 itt,liv-R4f, } Tir L .," 4 u I , piaxe/N6, . A 4„,_jr ---1--4'.:...4.... . 40 4 7U .' 1o'V'�- P ,e /iv ' -c-„ g '' 111 S r -± 2 ,; :: / s - tkt 5 M54 Raw Fyier14426 .Leif o r I \ *lc\ \ \ \ I w w 3 \\� \ \ " \ I rsi r .�t-�..,. }� U CL U Y1 1 �' k1//if N ( 6 � O a^G� ro...uww�: - hT'v:. O y0 N , N 2 ' DNI o o M N- - ; � N ), U VI N ‘11O N b LEGEND: 4) t.II YLL rt rn o v Wdo " B-10 BORING o A m 11111 C.:a soag o CPT CONE PENETROMETERLi- cC S o E a [2.0'] FILL THICKNESS 0 50 100 SITE PLAN BASED ON DRAWING PROVIDED BY U • E PRIOR WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT �� CAPSTONE PARTNERS, LLC, FEBRUARY 19, 201 5 " FEATURES AS LAID OUT BY AMEC z (SCALE IN FEET) E. U C7 W / I i W U W • �"� EX STM DI- EX 12"CMP- rn CCU• 1 TOP GRATE 150.70 OUTFALL - - - _ - - - I - - - - - - - - - - II ROT.GRATE:149.97 - - - - IE: 149.81 \ - - - - - - ���.� �?I,�7, -- - _ --- - �--___•�.�c-- -_ J'F�' `- -�_-"-"--- r _ _ GAS 1"STEEL II U 41C z a. Q • SW ASH AVENUE - r lap' m C \ -� __ ASPH 7 PATH _ _ �-- _- - 4:1- ENQ OF ArE� :" " x - - - - "- - - -s"- - - -:"- - - - " a y in _ __ _ _ - L ---- - .--�. '''-- I 137.84 1♦.., --4 r- _>r '\.� --F 1- '� t'"--�_ -4"'- - -"•r�--_ - - EX STM MH s. . Q /r ��) / /J --.y---- s t. \ - - - .=„,„,T,---b- •'' STM NH RIM: 155.92 o z ' : / ' N i - 1 `-� -- - - STM CO WEIR:14570 co Z /76- I 1 1 - 4';10'$��410 -. - • '''''''";--2 .. .-.v- -=" - cw- ADA RAMP \ �'q`\V� .,x __._ - - -� -- - - ,5".-- - -/-''''"- - -- : _ _ -152 N443029 E 11.69' RIM: 153.11 � _ NUL. SUMP:141.69 S • h ',J//(1 �J7} •'� < a : Lu LL ' IE: 1 :.OS J,/ \ �y�/ BLOCK ®{ 1 I:153�' ASPHALT !t ,' STM VAULT $ ev ,, t-,, / . P,'- \ I /' j LOC TES I # STM CC Z�� �� \ r i WALLS TES GATE �® �,� a " '�' I1.1 ✓ _ EjIM:15353 �� /• I1 J r "I i s 544'30'29"W 43.68 . GATE _ �,�N. .III POND „ UNABLE TO , ," \ U Z o FLOODWAY ' \�' \ '�EDGE,bF WATE�� ,K / Ep�E. ATER f, PUE PER DOC., 545'29'39"E _ I GATE '10' /�8 .,\ . -'� . J IE OUT:149.68(12"SW) ''`\ �Ot,/29/2014/' 01 29 1 4r/ ! S�ORM NE N0.2009-101040•� 1.50'} `J �"Tom.\ GATE`�CCESS K 1' 743¢9 E 138 ®P 148.18 591Q / s - , ,I WAT �8 - iIp EX STMMH 1• FLOOD ZONE v ' % r , 217 - - IM.15./ GRAVEL \ IV �fND Cf 9', ` F�IUNT \•` ' 20 b.-0' R` .' /-143--/N-. �' �`S WETLAND BOUNDARY �` / - �. a' STOCK ( s' p 20218 'X. 1CHAINLINK I.` WNELLIi14 \ AE I 4/ AND FORESTRY (� -. \ ASI''HALT 40CATE5 lim \ I FENCE _I,..,, # ;. I 3 BY PACIFIC SURVEYED BYSIAKS ��s �� / �� �•.. �'PIIE I 1 7,.,- �,��CATCH BASIN DOCiONSTE�� �� 54316' > CC 00' CI 0 30'SANITARY SEWERTAT . / � s 4 I I:. \ ,c *1 11"E 9.44' a EASEMENT PER DEED './41! BOOK 868 PAGE 498 • \�_EX- "--INC.- 1 // t %1e' �' FLs•' ONE pU i s ///'...' w •./ _ } 1 ,7'1® z TAX LOT 2900I \��2028fi 0s i /� I � �• -i 11 020259 '� `j, I Li. (EXCEPTION F)I ,7 ,� �I 1 ,f // • •� ASPHALT I1 BASE FLOOD EL:147.0-� E:142.E ♦ -. -.---- J 11TAX MAP 25 1 02ADNK TAX MAP 25 1 02AD H � -- - /P! /' ���i: r �: • .. l 1 1� i " / � } 54376' "E 153.28' I �h f FENCE CHAIN LI CAIN UCEX LOT 2800 NK A ' 1 !6 Q / f ` a APPROXIMATE LOCATION 1 "i- 1 F i.. --- - 4 04 OF 36"METAL POND ' --------..7/===-= �- - = �-r (��' • o ) ai .544.0 "W 232.58' A w / I 1/ , _ I I I1 , / .._..: BUILDING 0- \6 I Q OUTLET(SUBMERGED)• �' /'----./a' ,✓ •Di _ W •OND J��ti�l / i 1,/, - "-" IE:137. ' _ C.. - : 4 TAX LOT 500 '-- -�-L-- - A '��• j/� y,//� ��.d / I I II. / .. ' N0.20 - r/ PUE P DOC. I TAX MAP 2S 1 02D8 _ �I sN ---.././". - - ��_J', ,I ••• FLOOD ZONE'X' I ® ® $ TAX LOT 2700 •i 09 101040 i .-T / =�--•� �;��I / I I7 o TAX MAP 2H 1 02AD II 1 O �� _ ---. .i�'• / / TAX MAP025�100 1 1 II,. EX 18'CONC - . . VIBE _ AREA: 3.16 A St I --#: .,/ • UNN =1c+-=--' lio _ ! ASPHALT / I I1 15 I U) OUTFALL �- - .r T`�--�-" ANS ® r / I I 1 ` I 0 s IE:139.00- /�' '- LE TO �J EX 10'CMP ` , --""/r FLOW THROUGH EX OUTFALL l _ / / ! I 1, �I I I 1 3 CO 0 OUTFALL T •• APPEARS TO BE 1, SHED_ -..-.. / 44 --I 1 I W D Q IE: 144.97 1 ,, / ' pip IE: 144.73 I I ,r > A, AT OPENING OF 1 ' .♦ FLOOD ZONE 'X' / DONEO �/ ?.. ` -- I 11\ 14 CHINK _._ ------ ---------- ------ ----._ ------- I I j ` �. • V f VERTICAL 10"CMP PIPE 1 , / PER LOCATES I 1 Z 1 r Q RIM: 146.79 /� POND ASPHALT �, � -.l I I OVERHANG S W 1700 I I V S IE 145.32 / l ` ' r 4410'00" I i > w 111):� N4316'11'W 308.8T/ \ ---- - • // _ -'i,No / 1 1 BUILDINGLI i 1 I F- �_ ,� ,. I/ASPHALTI wiRe0 54316'11"E 138.98' 1 I N / _ -J // rT I TOWERS I STM MH(FLAT TOP) -4 • ' a /J �/�/ PERLOCATESJ �"" - • - I- - i• - - ,/ I ■ ON TOP RIM: 156.61 I / i"' 7- - IE IN: 150.0(12"DI N) 1 33 I m I END OF �C\�, i IE IN: 150.1(12"DI-SW) "; fl7 Cl) / -STAFFS-- LOCATE b s '/ L - ��� yTAX LOT 2400 IE IN: 144.7(24'PVC-SE) I "'(/ ���� • /'\ �o - c� ;► TAX MAP 2S 1 02AD IE OUT: 144.7(24"PVC-NW)1 I // 1- 17F---153--- r-� c --� / STAIRS I I O m.� x I r / FF EL 153.02 / / / BUILDING 4• BUILDING �® � I I Q / /` I ASPHALT I� 7 " \ w 16'EASEMENT FOR ROAD / PLATFORM ! WALL :'.. PURPOSES PER DEED -' EL 155.23 - - `' Iii. • BOOK 151 PAGE 153 / - __,„._ .__,.-.. 1 _- -- --" - - - - "- ---1 - ;.el'. ._ _ _.:!EXCEPTION E/1 - "-- - -- - ''- - - ''" _ II Se- _ -_ r- - 1 / 1 Ij Z f -_ = '� p 1 1 O y,..,- . �' f ASPHALT �klAlw uNK 1 I _. I -.__:-i'`-� -,'. /'-�� CHAIN PNFttNe-- -_- _. -4 98 s4-W-438:38- - - - .__- : - - .-----e-------111/CE =-.-_. __ -. -__ --- --_. - yj -_ � /� ^�..-+�' - ----- Amor.. _- _.. _ _ -__: -.,... �.�"y, If V �-��-�. 16'EASEMENT FOR . • FL000 ZONE'X' IL N \- / \ EX STM CB PURPOSES PER_ROADD----"--154--- I I II Z I / RIM: 152.86 BOOK 151 PAGE 153 / OUT NE (EXCEPTION E) 1 I I / I1 co APPROXIMATE LOCATION TAX LOT 2200 BUILDING OF CATCH BASIN TAX MAP 2S 1 02AD I ^ 1 II W 1 II II I 1 DESIGNED BY DRAWN BY: LP CHECKED BY: NSW NOTES: FLOOD ZONE NOTES: SCALE: AS NOTED 1. UIIUTIES SHOWN ARE BASED ON UNDERGROUND UTILITY LOCATE 1, FLOOD ZONE'AE'IS SUBJECT TO INUNDATION BY THE I%ANNUAL ^ DATE:3/5/2015 LOCATEMARKINGS AS PROVIDED BOTHERS,PROVIDED 0394 PER UTI UY CHANCE FLOOD EVENT AND HAS BASE FLOOD ELEVATIONS /"I / 4 LOCATE TICKET NUMBER 14013293 AND 15039449. CA SURVEYOR DETERMINED- REGISTERED TONAL MAKES NO GUARANTEE THAT THE UNDERGROUND LOCATES PROFESSIONAL SURVEYOR CURVE TABLE REPRESENT THE ONLY UTILITIES IN THE AREA.CONTRACTORS ARE 2. FLOOD ZONE'X'ARE AREAS OF 0.2%ANNUAL CHANCE FLOOD AND •� RESPONSIBLE C NSR VERIFYING ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO AREAS OF THE 1%ANNUAL CHANCE FLOOD WITH AVERAGE DEPTHS CURVE RADIUS DELTA LENGTH CHORD BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. AREAS OF LESS THAN 1 FOOT. Cl 237.50' 1713'20' 71.39' S53YJ7'09W 71.12' OREGON - 2. 2,2D WORK WAS CONDUCTED JANUARY 27-29,2014 AND MARCH 3. THE REST OF THE SITE NOT FAWNG IN ONE OF THE 2 SPECIAL JANUARY 9.2007 f C2 21.50' 75'00'00' 28.14' N80'46'11"W 26.18' 2,2015. NICK WHITE FLOOD ZONES LISTED ABOVE IS IN FLOOD ZONE'X'-AREAS ` 2L5 / f. 5 mkt 3. VERTICAL DATUM:ELEVATIONS ARE BASED ON WASHINGTON DETERMINED TO BE OUTSIDE THE 0.2%ANNUAL CHANCE SCALE 1" = 30 FEET REN7067WS5 6/30/16 COUNTY BENCHMARK NO.488,A BRASS DISK IN THE NORTHWEST FLOODPLAIN. REVISIONS CORNER OF THE HIGHWAY 99W BRIDGE OVER FANNO CREEK WITH TREE NO. SPECIES DBHp0.1 A NGVD 29 ELEVATION OF 166.122 FEET. 4. THE FLOOD ZONE BOUNDARIES SHOWN ARE CONSIDERED 111. 20217 DECIDUOUS APPROXIMATE AND ARE BASED ON FEMA NFHL(NATIONAL 30 0 12 18 24 30 4. 1)15 MAP DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A PROPERTY BOUNDARY SURVEY. FLOODZONE HAZARD LAYER)GIS DATA. 20218 DECIDUOUS 7 i 20259 DECIDUOUS5. SURVEY IS ONLY VALID WITH SURVEYOR'S STAMP AND SIGNATURE. JOB NUMBER • 3892 20286 DECIDUOUS HALF DEAD 3 6. BUILDING FOOTPRINTS ARE MEASURED TO SIDING UNLESS NOTED 20443 DECIDUOUS 63 OTHERWISE. SHEET 0 7. CONTOUR INTERVAL 6 1 FOOT. 0